Department of Mechanical Engineering

Curriculum and Syllabi – R 2021-UG CHOICE

BASED CREDIT SYSTEM(CBCS)OUTCOME BASED
EDUCATION (OBE)

Vision of the Department

To produce competent Mechanical Engineers of excellent technical and

managerial skills with profound morality for global, national and confront
societal development.

Mission of the Department

1. To provide quality education in Mechanical Engineering with inter

disciplinary approach, encouraging innovation, research and
entrepreneurship through world class infrastructure and proficient
teachers.
2. To make the department self-reliant through multiple programs
with excellent curriculum, best practices and industry exposure.
3. To inculcate technical, professional, leadership skills, moral ethics
and lifelong learning.
 Francis Xavier Engineering College
(An Autonomous Institution)
Tirunelveli 627 003
Tamil Nadu India
Department of Mechanical Engineering

Curriculum and Syllabi – R 2021-UG

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM(CBCS)
OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION (OBE)

Vision of the Department

To produce competent Mechanical Engineers of excellent technical and

managerial skills with profound morality for global, national and confront
societal development.

Mission of the Department

1. To provide quality education in Mechanical Engineering with inter

disciplinary approach, encouraging innovation, research and
entrepreneurship through world class infrastructure and proficient
teachers.
2. To make the department self-reliant through multiple programs
with excellent curriculum, best practices and industry exposure.
3. To inculcate technical, professional, leadership skills, moral ethics
and lifelong learning.

1
 Table of Content
[Link] Content Page No
1 VISION AND MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT 1

2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2

3 PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs) 3

4 PROGRAMME OUTCOMES(POs) 4

5 PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs) 5

6 MAPPING WITH PO VS PEO, PSO 7

7 SUMMARY OF CREDIT DISTRIBUTION 8

8 I-VIII SEMESTER SYLLABI 19

9 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES 230

10 OPEN ELECTIVES 418

11 VALUE ADDED COURSES 470

12 ONLINE COURSES: SWAYAM NPTEL 475

12 MINOR/SPECIALIZATION COURSE ON ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 477

2
Programme Educational Outcomes (PEOs)
Bachelor of Mechanical Engineering curriculum is designed to impart Knowledge, Skill
and Attitude on the graduates to

PEO 1:Have a successful professional career in Mechanical Engineering and allied

industries, either by employment or through entrepreneurship.
PEO 2:Establish competency in Design, Thermal, Materials and Manufacturing system
with ethics and social responsibility.
PEO 3: Have a continual receptiveness for leadership and social challenges.

3
Programme Outcomes(POs)
Engineering Graduates will be able to:
1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/Development of Solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with
appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
4. Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data,
and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern Tool Usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional
engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the
knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and Team Work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.

4
11. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-Long Learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.

5
Programme Specific Outcomes (PSOs)
On successful completion of the Mechanical Engineering Degree programme, the
Graduates shall exhibit the following

PSO 1: Apply the knowledge gained in Mechanical Engineering for design, development
and manufacture of engineering systems.

PSO 2: Analyze, interpret and provide solutions to global needs of engineering industries,
the real life mechanical engineering problems and thermal systems with regard to
ethics, environment and society.

6
Mapping with PEOs with POs, PSOs
PO PEO1 PEO2 PEO3 Average Set Target
for POs
(80% of
average)
1 3 3 1 2.3 1.9
2 3 3 1 2.3 1.9
3 3 3 1 2.3 1.9
4 3 3 1 2.3 1.9
5 3 2 2 2.3 1.9
6 2 3 2 2.3 1.9
7 2 3 2 2.3 1.9
8 2 3 2 2.3 1.9
9 2 2 3 2.3 1.9
10 2 2 3 2.3 1.9
11 2 2 2 2.0 1.6
12 2 2 2 2.0 1.6
PSO1 3 3 2 2.7 2.1
PSO2 2 2 3 2.3 1.9

7
 FRANCIS XAVIER ENGINEERING COLLEGE
B.E. – MECHANICAL ENGINEERING REGULATIONS 2021
Choice Based Credit System and Outcome Based Education
SUMMARY OF CREDIT DISTRIBUTION

Credits Per Semester Total Credits

S. No Category
I II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits in %

1 HSSM 3 2 1 1 3 3 13 7.78

2 BS 12 4 4 20 11.98

3 ES 3 16 3 22 13.17

4 PC 16 23 17 8 64 38.32

5 PE 3 6 9 18 10.78

6 OE 3 3 6 12 7.19

7 EEC 1 1 1 3 6 6 18 10.78
TOTAL 18 22 25 25 24 23 24 6 167

Minimum Number of Credits to be Acquired for UG Regular : 167

Minimum Number of Credits to be Acquired for UG Lateral : 125

HSS - Humanities and Social Sciences including Management

BS - Basic Science
ES - Engineering Sciences
PC - Professional Core
PE - Professional Elective
OE – Open Elective/Programme Specific Elective for Expandable Scope
EEC - Employability Enhancement Course

8
 FRANCIS XAVIER ENGINEERING COLLEGE
B.E. – MECHANICAL ENGINEERING REGULATIONS 2021
Choice Based Credit System and Outcome Based Education
I-VIII Semester Curricula and Syllabi
SEMESTER I
[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C
Code Periods
Theory Courses
1 21MA1201 Matrices and Advanced
Calculus BS 4 3 1 0 4

2 21PH1302 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3

3 21CY1401 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
Theory Cum Practical Courses
1 21CS1514 C Programming ES 4 2 0 2 3
2 21HS1101 English for Professional
HSSM 4 2 0 2 3
Communication
Practical Courses
1 21PY1311 Physics and Chemistry Lab BS 4 0 0 4 2
Total 22 13 1 8 18

SEMESTER II
[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C
Code Periods
Theory Courses
1 21HS2101 English for Technical 2 2 0 0 2
HSSM
Communication
2 21MA2201 Partial Differential Equation and 4 3 1 0 4
BS
Application of Fourier Series
3 21ME2501 Engineering Mechanics ES 3 3 0 0 3
Theory cum Practical Courses
1 21ME1513 Computer Aided Engineering
ES 5 3 0 2 4
Graphics
2 21EE2501 Fundamentals of Electrical and
ES 4 2 0 2 3
Electronics Science
3 21CS2512 Python Programming
ES 5 1 2 2 4
Practical Course
1 21GE1512 Engineering Workshop ES 4 0 0 4 2
Total 27 14 3 10 22

9
 SEMESTER III
[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C
Code Periods
Theory Courses
1 21MA3201 Probability and Statistical
BS 4 3 1 0 4
Analysis
2 21ME3601 Engineering Thermodynamics PC 4 3 1 0 4
3 21ME3602 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery PC 3 2 1 0 3
4 21ME3501 Engineering Materials and
Metallurgy ES 3 3 0 0 3
5 21ME3603 Manufacturing Technology PC 3 3 0 0 3
6 21PT3902 Verbal Ability EEC 2 0 0 2 1
7 21HS1103 Tamil Heritage HSSM 2 2 0 0 1
தமிழர் மரபு
Practical Courses
1 21ME3611 Computer Aided Machine
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Drawing Laboratory
2 21ME3612 Manufacturing Technology
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
3 21ME3613 Fluid Mechanics and Machines
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
Total 33 16 3 14 25

SEMESTER IV
[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C
Code Periods
Theory Courses
1 21ME4601 CNC Machines and Automation PC 3 3 0 0 3
2 21ME4602 Strength of Materials PC 3 2 1 0 3
3 21ME4603 Thermal Engineering PC 3 2 1 0 3
4 21ME4604 Theory of Machines PC 4 3 1 0 4
5 21GE2M02 Environmental and
MC 2 2 0 0 0
sustainable Engineering
6 21PT3901 Aptitude – I EEC 2 0 0 2 1
7 21HS2103 Technology in Tamil Culture HSSM 2 2 0 0 1
தமிழரும் ததொழில்நுட்பமும்
Theory cum Practical Courses
1 21ME4605 Metrology and
PC 5 3 0 2 4
Instrumentations
Practical Courses
1 21ME4611 Thermal Engineering
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
2 21ME4612 Strength of materials
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
3 21ME4613 Kinematics And Dynamics 4 0 0 4 2
PC
Laboratory
Total 36 17 3 16 25
10
 SEMESTER V
[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C
Code Periods
Theory Courses
1 21ME5601 Heat and Mass Transfer PC 3 2 1 0 3
2 21ME5602 Design of Machine Elements and
PC 3 2 1 0 3
Joints
3 21ME5603 Automobile Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
4 PE1 Professional Elective – I PE 3 3 0 0 3
5 OE1 Open Elective – I OE 3 3 0 0 3
6 21PT3904 Reasoning EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Theory Cum Practical
7 21ME5604 Mechatronics and Internet of PC 5 3 0 2 4
Things
Practical Courses
1 21ME5611 Heat and Mass Transfer
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
2 21ME5612 CAD/CAM Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
3 Summer Internship / Industrial
EEC 0 0 0 0 1
Training***
Total 30 16 2 12 24
*** Optional
SEMESTER VI
[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact
Code Periods L T P C
Theory Courses
1 21ME6601 Design of Transmission Systems PC 3 2 1 0 3
2 21ME6602 Finite Element Analysis PC 3 2 1 0 3
3 21HS3101 Ethics And Values HSSM 3 3 0 0 3
4 PE2 Professional Elective – II PE 3 3 0 0 3
5 PE3 Professional Elective – III PE 3 3 0 0 3
6 OE2 Open Elective – II OE 3 3 0 0 3
7 21PT3903 Aptitude II EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Practical Courses
1 21ME6611 Finite Element Analysis
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
2 21ME6612 Design and Fabrication Project EEC 4 0 0 4 2
Total 28 16 2 10 23

11
 SEMESTER VII
S. No Course Course Name Category Contact
Code Periods L T P C
Theory Courses
1 21HS7101 Total Quality Management HSSM 3 3 0 0 3
2 PE4 Professional Elective – IV PE 3 3 0 0 3
3 PE5 Professional Elective – V PE 3 3 0 0 3
4 PE6 Professional Elective – VI PE 3 3 0 0 3
5 OE3 Open Elective – III OE 3 3 0 0 3
6 OE4 Open Elective – IV OE 3 3 0 0 3
Practical Courses
1 21ME7911 Technical Comprehension EEC 4 0 0 4 2
Total 22 18 0 4 20

SEMESTER VIII
[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C
Code Periods
Practical Courses
1 21ME8901 Project Work / EEC 12 0 0 20 10
Internship based Project
Total 12 0 0 20 10

Minimum Number of Credits to be Acquired:167

12
 List of Humanities and Social Sciences Including Management (HSSM)

[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C

Code Periods
Theory Courses
1 21HS1101 English for Professional HSSM 4 2 0 1 3
Communication
2 21HS1103 Tamil Heritage HSSM 2 2 0 0 1
தமிழர் மரபு
3 21HS2103 Technology in Tamil Culture HSSM 2 2 0 0 1
தமிழரும் ததொழில்நுட்பமும்
4 21HS2101 English for Technical HSSM 2 2 0 0 2
Communication
5 21HS3101 Ethics And Values HSSM 3 3 0 0 3
6 21HS7601 Total Quality Management HSSM 3 3 0 0 3

List of Basic Science Courses

[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C

Code Periods
Theory Courses
1 21MA1201 Matrices and Advanced
BS 4 3 1 0 4
Calculus
2 21PH1302 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3 21CY1401 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
4 21MA2201 Partial Differential Equation And
BS 4 3 1 0 4
Application of Fourier Series
5 21MA3201 Probability and Statistical
BS 4 3 1 0 4
Analysis
Practical Courses
1 21GE1311 Physics and Chemistry Lab BS 4 0 0 2 2

13
 List of Engineering Science Courses

[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C

Code Periods
Theory Courses
1 21ME2501 Engineering Mechanics ES 3 3 0 0 3
2 Engineering Materials and ES
21ME3501 Metallurgy 3 3 0 0 3
Theory cum Practical Courses
1 21EE2501 Fundamentals of Electrical and ES 5 3 0 2 4
Electronics Science
2 Computer Aided Engineering ES 5 3 0 2 4
21ME1513 Graphics
3 21CS1514 C Programming ES 4 2 0 2 3
4 21CS2512 Python programming ES 4 2 0 2 3
Practical Courses
1 21GE1512 Engineering Workshop ES 4 0 0 2 2

List of Employability Enhancement Course

[Link] Course Course Name Category Contact L T P C
Code Periods
Theory Courses
1 21PT3902 Verbal Ability EEC 2 0 0 2 1

2 21PT3901 Aptitude – I EEC 2 0 0 2 1

3 21PT3904 Reasoning EEC 2 0 0 2 1

4 21PT3903 Soft Skills Aptitude II EEC 2 0 0 2 1

Practical Courses
1 21ME6612 Design and Fabrication project EEC 4 0 0 4 2
2 21ME7911 Technical Comprehension EEC 4 0 0 4 2
3 21ME8602 Project Work / Internship based EEC
Project 12 0 0 20 10

14
 LIST OF PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES
[Link] Course Course Name Semester L T P C Stream/
Code Domain

Professional Elective I

1 Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics 5 3 0 0 3 Design

21ME5701
2 Mechanical Behaviour of Materials 5 3 0 0 3 Design
21ME5702
3 Advanced IC Engines 5 3 0 0 3 Thermal
21ME5703
4 Alternate Fuels 5 3 0 0 3 Thermal
21ME5704
5 Maintenance Engineering 5 3 0 0 3 I.A & M
21ME5705
6 Principles of Management 5 3 0 0 3 I.A & M
21ME5706
7 [Link]
21ME5707 Composite Materials 5 3 0 0 3 acturing

8 [Link]
21ME5708 Polymer Technology 5 3 0 0 3 acturing

9 Diversified
21ME5709 Professional Ethics in Engineering 5 3 0 0 3 Group`

10 Diversified
21ME5710 Introduction to Aircraft System 5 3 0 0 3 Group

Professional Elective II

1 6 3 0 0 3 Design
21ME6701 Mechanical Vibration and Control
2 6 3 0 0 3 Design
21ME6702 Concepts of Engineering Design
3 6 3 0 0 3 Thermal
21ME6703 Fundamentals of Combustion
4 6 3 0 0 3 Thermal
21ME6704 Fuel Cell Technology
5 Industrial Engineering and 6 3 0 0 3 I.A & M
21ME6705
Management
6 6 3 0 0 3 I.A & M
21ME6706 Lean Six Sigma
7 [Link]
21ME6707 Computer Integrated Manufacturing 6 3 0 0 3 acturing

8 [Link]
21ME6708 Flexible Manufacturing System 6 3 0 0 3 acturing

9 Diversified
21ME6709 Hybrid vehicle technology 6 3 0 0 3 Group`

10 Diversified
21ME6710 Electric Vehicle 6 3 0 0 3 Group`

Professional Elective III

1 6 3 0 0 3 Design
21ME6711 Product Design for Sustainability
2 6 3 0 0 3 Design
21ME6712 Industrial Tribology
3 6 3 0 0 3 Thermal
21ME6713 Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion
4 6 3 0 0 3 Thermal
21ME6714 Refrigeration and Airconditioning

15
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

5 6 3 0 0 3 I.A & M
21ME6715 Industry 4.0
6 6 3 0 0 3 I.A & M
21ME6716 Industrial Robotics
[Link]
7 21ME6717 Modern Machining Process 6 3 0 0 3 acturing

[Link]
8 21ME6718 Solid State Joining Process 6 3 0 0 3 acturing

Diversified
9 21ME6719 Entrepreneurship Development 6 3 0 0 3 Group

Diversified
10 21ME6720 Corrosion and Surface Engineering 6 3 0 0 3 Group

Professional Elective IV

1 21ME7701 Design for Manufacturing and Assembly 7 3 0 0 3 Design

2 21ME7702 Industrial Ergonomics in Design 7 3 0 0 3 Design

3 21ME7703 Computational Fluid Dynamics 7 3 0 0 3 Thermal

4 21ME7704 HVAC systems 7 3 0 0 3 Thermal

5 21ME7705 Process Planning and Cost Estimation 7 3 0 0 3 I.A & M

6 21ME7706 Industrial Internet of Things 7 3 0 0 3 I.A & M

21ME7707 Manufacturing and Inspection of Gears [Link]

7 7 3 0 0 3 acturing

21ME7708 Precision Manufacturing [Link]

8 7 3 0 0 3 acturing
21ME7709 Traditional and Non-Traditional Diversified
9 7 3 0 0 3 Group`
optimization tool
21ME7710 Diversified
10 Vehicle styling and design 7 3 0 0 3 Group`

Professional Elective V
1 21ME7711 Product Design and Development 7 3 0 0 3 Design

2 21ME7712 Product life Cycle Management 7 3 0 0 3 Design

3 21ME7713 Cryogenics Engineering 7 3 0 0 3 Thermal

4 21ME7714 Power Plant Engineering 7 3 0 0 3 Thermal

5 21ME7715 Production Planning and Control 7 3 0 0 3 I.A & M

6 21ME7716 Low Cost Automation 7 3 0 0 3 I.A & M

21ME7717 Sustainability through Green [Link]

7 7 3 0 0 3 acturing
Manufacturing System

21ME7718 Advanced Manufacturing Process for [Link]

8 7 3 0 0 3 acturing
micro system fabrication
Diversified
9 21ME7719 Electro and Electroless Plating 7 3 0 0 3 Group`

Diversified
10 21ME7720 Energy Conversion in Industries 7 3 0 0 3 Group`

16
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Professional Elective VI
7 3 0 0 3 Design
1 21ME7721 Design of Jigs and Fixtures
7 3 0 0 3 Design
2 21ME7722 Failure analysis and NDT Techniques
Energy Conservation and Waste Heat 7 3 0 0 3 Thermal
3 21ME7723
Recovery
7 3 0 0 3 Thermal
4 21ME7724 Simulation of IC Engines
7 3 0 0 3 I.A & M
5 21ME7725 Supply chain Management and Logistics
7 3 0 0 3 I.A & M
6 21ME7726 Operations Research
7 3 0 0 3 [Link]
7 21ME7727 Introduction to NANO Technology acturing

7 3 0 0 3 [Link]
8 21ME7728 Smart and New Materials acturing

7 3 0 0 3 Diversified
9 21ME7729 Drone Technologies Group`

7 3 0 0 3 Diversified
10 21ME7730 Industrial Safety Engineering Group`

17
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

LIST OF OPEN ELECTIVES

[Link] Course Course Name Semester L T P C
Code

OPEN ELECTIVE 1
1 Nuclear Engineering 5 3 0 0 3
21ME5801
2 Renewable Energy Sources 5 3 0 0 3
21ME5802
3 Additive Manufacturing 5 3 0 0 3
21ME5803
4 5 3 0 0 3
21ME5804 Fundamental of Research
OPEN ELECTIVE 2
1 Solar cells and Fundamentals 6 3 0 0 3
21ME6801
2 Energy Engineering and Management 6 3 0 0 3
21ME6802
3 Design of Experiments 6 3 0 0 3
21ME6803
4 Engineering Economics and Cost
21ME6804 6 3 0 0 3
Analysis
OPEN ELECTIVE 3
1 21ME7801 Industrial Economics and Foreign 7 3 0 0 3
Trade
2 21ME7802 Fundamentals of Ergonomics 7 3 0 0 3
3 21ME7803 Pollution Control and its Equipments 7 3 0 0 3
4 21ME7804 Energy storage devices 7 3 0 0 3
OPEN ELECTIVE 4
1 21ME7805 Digital Manufacturing 7 3 0 0 3
2 21ME7806 Marine Vehicles 7 3 0 0 3
3 21ME7807 Safety measures for Engineers 7 3 0 0 3
4 21ME7808 Introduction to Robotics 7 3 0 0 3

18
SEMESTER I

19
 L T P C
21MA1201 MATRICES AND ADVANCED CALCULUS
3 1 0 4
Preamble:
The course consists of topics in Matrices, Differential calculus, Integral calculus, Differential
Equations and Vector calculus with applications to various engineering problems. This course
will cover the following main topics: Cayley Hamilton Theorem, Linear differential equations of
second order with constant coefficients, Methods of Variation parameter, Taylor’s expansion of
two variables, Maxima and Minima for two variables, Area and Volume in a multiple integrals,
Green’s theorem and Gauss divergence theorem.
Prerequisites for the course:

Students should have basic knowledge about matrices, differentiation and integration

Objectives
1. To apply advanced matrix knowledge to Engineering problems
2. To familiarize with the applications of differential equations.
3. To familiarize with the functions of several variables
4. To have Knowledge in Multiple integrals
5. To improve their ability in Vector calculus.
UNIT I MATRICES 9+3
Matrices - Characteristic equation – Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a symmetric and non
symmetric matrix – Properties of Eigen values and Eigen vector – Cayley – Hamilton theorem
and its applications
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
● Tutorial Problems on Eigen values , Eigen Vectors and Cayley Hamilton Theorem and
Add MATLAB and for application Add Power method to find Eigen value & Eigen vector
UNIT II ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Differential Equations – Complementary Function – Particular Integral - Linear equations of
second order with constant coefficients of types exponential, trigonometry, polynomial and its
combination forms - Methods of Variation of parameter - Engineering Applications.
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
● Tutorial Problems on Linear differential equations of different types and Method of
Variation parameters.
UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3
Function of two variables – Partial derivatives – Taylor’s expansion for two variables – Maxima
and Minima for two variables – Jacobians of two and three variables – Euler’s theorem for
homogeneous function.
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
● Tutorial Problems on Taylor’s series, Jacobians, Maxima and Minima for two variables
UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3
Definite Integrals – Properties of definite integrals - Double integration in Cartesian coordinates
– Area as a double integral in Cartesian coordinates – Triple integration in Cartesian coordinates
– Volume as a Triple Integral
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
● Tutorial Problems on Area , Triple integration and Volume
UNIT V VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3
Vector dot product and Vector cross product - Gradient, divergence, curl – Solenoidal and
irrotational fields –Unit normal vector - Angle between two surfaces - Directional derivatives –
Green’s theorem, Gauss divergence theorem (without proof) – Engineering Applications.
20
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
● Tutorial Problems on Angle between two surfaces, Green’s theorem, Gauss divergence
theorem.
Total Periods 45 + 15 = 60 Periods
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
[Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
1. Descriptive Questions
2. Online Quizzes
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Find the eigen values, eigen vectors, inverse and the positive powers of a square matrix
(Apply)
CO2: Identify the suitable method to solve second and higher order differential equations
(Apply)
CO3: Find the maxima and minima for a given function with several variables, through by
finding stationary points
(Apply)
CO4: Compute area and volume using double and triple integration. (Apply)
CO5: Apply the concepts of Differentiation and Integration to Vectors. (Apply)
Text Books
1. B. S. Grewal, “ Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 43rd edition, 2017.
2. James Stewart, Calculus – Early Transcendals, 8th Edition, 2016.

Reference Books
1. A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics(Dr. A.P.J. Abdul Kalam Technical University,
Lucknow) (For . Gautam Bhudh technical Universities ,Lucknow) January 2020
2. K. Ganesan, Sundarammal Kesavan, K. S. Ganapathy Subramanian & V. Srinivasan,
“Calculus and Solid Geometry”, Revised Edition, 2017
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
mp4
3. Eigen values and eigen vectors - [Link]
Cayley Hamilton theorem -[Link]
4. ODE - [Link]
5. Functions of several variables -[Link]
6. Integration - [Link]
Multiple integrals -[Link]
Volume as Triple integral - [Link]
7. Vector calculus - [Link]
Gauss divergence theorem [Link]

21
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping:
C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3

1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 (CO 1) : (Apply)
1) Compute the eigen values and eigen vectors for the Symmetric matrix A =

2 ) Find A-1 and A4 using Cayley Hamilton Theorem for the matrix A= .

COURSE OUTCOME 2 (CO 2) : (Apply)

2 −4𝑥
1) Solve (𝐷 − 𝐷 + 1)𝑦 = sin 𝑠𝑖𝑛 2𝑥 + 𝑒
2 2
2) Solve (𝐷 + ) 𝑦 = tan 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝑎𝑥 by using method of variation of parameters.

COURSE OUTCOME 3(CO 3) : (Apply)

1. Find the extreme values of the function (𝑥, 𝑦)= x3 + y3 – 12x -3y +20.

22
23
 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C
21PH1302
(COMMON TO CIVIL & MECH) 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course aims in imparting the fundamental connection of physics and engineering with machines and
materials by incorporating the basic concepts & principles of physics to encompass the application in
engineering.
Prerequisites for the course
Students should have Basic theoretical concepts of Physics in XI and XII
Objectives
1. To enable the students to gain knowledge on properties of matter.
2. To inculcate knowledge on heat transfer.
3. To study the basics of acoustics and ultrasonics.
4. To understand the crystal parameters and to classify the type of the defect present in the crystal.
5. To explore the wide advancement in engineering materials by motivating the applications of quantum
mechanics.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity - Poisson’s ratio and relationship between moduli (qualitative) - Stress-strain diagram - Factors
affecting elasticity - Torsion pendulum -Determination of rigidity modulus- Moment of inertia of a body
(regular)- Bending of beams - Bending moment - Cantilever - Theory and experiment of Young’s modulus
determination - Uniform and non-uniform bending - I shaped girders.
UNIT II THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints – bimetallic strips –
thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal conductivity – Lee’s
disc method: theory and experiment – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers, refrigerators,
ovens and solar water heaters.
UNIT III ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9
Classification of Sound- decibel- Weber–Fechner law –Absorption Coefficient and its determination-Sound
absorbing materials –factors affecting acoustics of buildings and their remedies. Production of ultrasonics
by magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - Engineering applications of Ultrasonics -Non-destructive
testing- Pulse echo technique.

UNIT IV SOLID STATE PHYSICS 9

Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais lattices, coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP – Crystal imperfections:
point defects, line defects – Burger vectors. Applications: Powder X-ray diffraction
UNIT V ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Metallic glasses: Types, Glass forming ability of alloys, melt spinning process and applications.
Shape memory alloys (SMA): Phase, shape memory effect, pseudo elastic effect NiTi alloy, application,
Nanomaterials: Preparation (bottom up and top down approaches) -Pulsed Laser Method- Ball Milling
Method – properties and applications.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
1. Assignment
CAT 1 – 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes Descriptive
CAT 2 – 10 Marks 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Descriptive Questions

24
 Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Recognize the concept of elasticity, stress, strain and bending moments as well as Uniform and
non-uniform bending in beams. (Understand)
CO2 Apply the thermal applications to various home appliances. (Apply)
CO3 Understand the characteristics of Music and Noise, Noise pollution and its control using the
basic concepts of acoustics and know the principle and properties of ultrasonics using
different testing methods. (Understand)
CO 4 Demonstrate an understanding of several key areas of Crystal Physics. (Understand)
CO 5 Identify different types of material processing techniques for advanced materials.
(Understand)
Text Books
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. “Engineering Physics”. Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Rajendran V, “Engineering Physics”. Tata Mc-Graw Hill publishing company limited, New
Delhi, Revised Edition 2018
Reference Books
1. Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. ―Engineering [Link] Learning India2018.
2. Raghavan, V. “Materials Science and Engineering: A First course”. PHI Learning, 2015.
3. Sankar, B.N., Pillai.S.O., Engineering Physics I, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2015
4. D. Halliday, R. Resnick and J. Walker. Principles of Physics, Wiley (Indian Edition), 2015.
5. Guozhong Cao, Nanostructures and Nanomaterials, Imperial College Press, 2004.
6. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, S. Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics,
McGraw-Hill (Indian Edition), 2017.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. Unit I,II,IV -[Link]
4. Unit III- [Link]
5. UnitV-[Link]
Glasses_6815/
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2

1 3 2 1 1 1 1

2 3 2 1 1 1 1

3 3 2 1 1 1 1

4 3 2 1 1 1

5 3 2 1 1 1

25
 COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Recognize the concept of elasticity, stress, strain and bending moments as well as
Uniform and non-uniform bending in beams. (Understand)
1.A Scale is under depression at the free end of a cantilever due to load. Describe an experiment to
determine the young’s modulus of the cantilever using this expression.
2. Give the theory of torsion pendulum and describe a method to find the moment of inertia of an
irregular body.
3. How will you determine the young’s modulus of material of a bar by non-uniform Bending method?
Explain briefly the theory behind the determination of young’s modulus.

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply the thermal applications to various home appliances. (Apply)
1. Can heat exchange through a medium, explain their detailed overview depending on the medium. .
2. Imagine a quantity of heat flowing through a metal slab whose faces are kept at two different
temperatures. Determine the thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
3. The total area of a glass window pane is 0.8 m2. Calculate how much heat is conducted per hour
through the glass window pane if the thickness of glass is 3 mm. The temperature of the inside
surface is 25 °C and outside surface is 4 °C. The thermal conductivity of glass is 1.1 Wm-1K-1

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Understand the characteristics of Music and Noise, Noise pollution and its control
using the basic concepts of acoustics and know the principle and properties of ultrasonics using different
testing methods. (Understand)
1. With the help of a neat sketch the construction and production of ultrasonic waves using
piezoelectric oscillator.
2. Explain the process of non–destructive testing of materials using ultrasonic waves by pulse echo
overlap method.
3. Exemplify the increase in the acoustic intensity level when the sound intensity is doubled

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Demonstrate an understanding of several key areas of crystal physics (Understand)

1. Estimate the atomic packing factor for SC, BCC & FCC structures.
2. Classify the types of the defects present in the crystal.

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Identify different types of material processing techniques for advanced materials.
(Understand)

1. Explain the preparation, types, properties and application of metallic glasses.

2. Describe the properties and applications of shape memory alloys.
3. Discuss briefly about the working of pulsed laser method used for nanoparticle deposition

26
 L T P C
21CY1401 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
• Basic theoretical concepts of Chemistry in higher secondary level.
Preamble
To enable the students to acquire knowledge in the concepts of chemistry for engineering
applications and to familiarize the students with different application-oriented topics like
electrochemistry, corrosion prevention methods, significance of alloys, benefits of renewable
energy sources, engineering materials, desalination etc., which enable them to develop abilities and
skills that are relevant to the study and practice of engineering chemistry.
Objectives
1. To equip the students in conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems
and water treatment techniques.
2. To make the students familiar with the principles of electrochemistry and corrosion.
3. To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications to
single and two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance of alloys.
4. To have a thorough understanding on the principles and generation of energy in batteries,
nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind mills and fuel cells.
5. To make the students learn the basics of polymer chemistry and mechanism of lubrication.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9
Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water –
Internal treatment (phosphate and calgon conditioning) external treatment – Ion exchange
process- desalination of brackish water - Reverse Osmosis.
UNIT II ELECTROCHEMISTRY AND CORROSION 9
Electrodes- types, Cells- types, Construction (Daniel cell) - Electrode potential- Photo
electrochemical cell-working and applications – Nernst equation and its applications- Emf series &
its applications.
Corrosion- Causes- Types- Chemical, Electrochemical corrosion (galvanic, differential aeration),
Corrosion control – Material selection and design aspects – Electrochemical protection –
Sacrificial Anode cathodic Protection method.
UNIT III PHASE RULE AND ALLOYS 9
Phase rule: Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system
- reduced phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-silver
system – Pattinson’s process.
Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- significance of alloying, functions and effect
of alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel.
UNIT IV ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Nuclear fission - Nuclear fusion - Differences between nuclear fission and fusion - Nuclear chain
reactions - Nuclear energy - Light Water Nuclear Power Plant - Solar energy conversion - Solar cells
- Wind energy.
Batteries & Fuel cells: Types of batteries – Primary battery (dry cell) Secondary battery (lead acid
battery) Lithium ion battery – Electric Vehicles – working principles, Fuel cells – H2-O2 fuel cell and
microbial fuel cell; Supercapacitors: Storage principle, types and examples.
UNIT V ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Polymers: Classification of Polymers – Preparation, properties and uses of Teflon and Nylon 6,6-
Benefits and Applications. Composites: Introduction: Definition & Need for composites; Properties
and applications of Polymer matrix composites and hybrid composites.
Nanomaterials: Types of nanomaterials; properties and uses of nanoparticle, nanocluster, nano
rod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation of nanomaterials: sol-gel, chemical vapour deposition
and electrochemical deposition methods. Applications of nanomaterials in medicine, agriculture,
energy and electronics.
Total Periods 45
27
 Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive Type 1. Assignment [Link] Type
CAT 1 10 Marks 2. MCQs Questions
CAT 2 10 Marks
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO.1: Infer the quality of water parameters from quality parameter data and propose suitable
methodologies to treat water. (Remember).
CO2: Identify and apply the basic principles of electrochemistry and corrosionC103.3:
CO3: Identify suitable alloys for material analysis.
CO4: Identify different forms of energy resources and apply them in suitable energy sectors.C103.5:
CO5: Recognize and apply basic knowledge on polymers and nanomaterials to futuristic
materials fabrication needs
Text Books
1. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” DhanpatRai Publishing Company (P)
LTD, New Delhi, 2018
Reference Books
1. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi,
2014.
2. PrasantaRath, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2015.
3. B. S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B. B. Rath and James Murday, “Text book of nanoscience
and nanotechnology”, Universities Press-IIM Series in Metallurgy and Materials Science,
2018.
4. ShikhaAgarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, Second Edition, 2019.
5. O.V. Roussak and H.D. Gesser, Applied Chemistry-A Text Book for Engineers and
Technologists, Springer Science Business Media, New York, 2nd Edition, 2013.
6. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company LTD,
New Delhi, 2018.
Web Resources
1. NPTEL Course [Link]
2. Mod-06 Lec-36 Fundamentals of Electrochemical Techniques
[Link]
3. Heat treatment of steel [Link]
4. Renewable energy resources [Link]
5. Nanomaterials [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 1 1

28
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to infer the quality of water parameters from
quality parameter data and propose suitable methodologies to treat water. (Understand)
1. How is the exhausted resin regenerated in an ion exchanger?
2. Suggest your valuable ideas to protect the boiler from corrosion.

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to identify and apply the basic principles of
electrochemistry, corrosion and corrosion control. (Apply)
1. Compare the mechanisms involved in electrochemical cells and electrolytic cells.
2. How corrosion is prevented by sacrificial anode cathodic protection methods.

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to apply the knowledge of phase rule and alloys for
material analysis. (Apply)
1. Illustrate phase, component and degree of freedom with example
2. Will stainless steel rust? Justify.

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to recognise different forms of energy resources
and apply them in suitable energy sectors. . (Apply)

1. Is it safe to utilize wind energy for domestic purposes? How are commercial wind farms
developed and how can I get a wind farm on my property?
2. Critically analyze nuclear power technology in terms of environmental and health safety. Draw
a general layout of the Light water nuclear reactor and explain its components.

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to identify and apply basic concepts of polymer
science, composites and nanotechnology in designing the synthesis of materials for engineering
and technology applications. (Apply)
1. What do you feel the repercussions are for extended life through utilization of nanotechnology?
2. Give an account of the preparation properties and uses of Teflon and nylon 6,6.
d nylon 6,6.

29
 21CS1514 C Programming L T P C
(Common for MECH & CIVIL)
2 0 2 3

Preamble

This course is intended for the students to learn the basic concepts of C programming to enhance
the programming knowledge of students. C programming provides the basis for many new
programming languages. The lab experiments will provide practical exposure because C
programming is the basic language of choice for hardware interfaces, real time robotic control
and to develop and test prototypes in the field of engineering.

Prerequisites for the course

● NIL

Objectives
1. To develop a basic programs using conditional statements.
2. To develop the problem solving ability in using iterations and arrays
3. To solve the complex problems using strings, functions and pointers.
4. To develop programs for storing different data using structures and union
5. To learn the concept of files and to perform read and write operations

UNIT I BASICS OF C & CONDITIONAL STATEMENTS 6

Structure of a C program – Compiling and executing C programs - Character Sets in C- Keywords-

Identifiers- Tokens: Constants, Variables – Data types- Operators and Expressions – Managing
Input and Output Operations – Branching statements: if – if else – nested if - else if ladder –
switch case- break, continue, go-to statement.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES

• Demonstrate the use of data types and operators

SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS

• Quiz on the basics of C programming

• Write programs using types of branching statements

UNIT II LOOPS AND ARRAYS 6

Looping statements: Entry controlled loops – for loop - while loop– exit controlled loops – do
while loop-Nested loops - Arrays: Declaration- Initialization- One Dimensional Array- Two
DimensionalArray and Multidimensional Arrays.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES

• Demonstrate the types of looping statements

• Demonstrate the types of arrays

30
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS

• Quiz on the basics of loops and arrays

• Write programs using loops in one, two and multidimensional arrays

UNIT III STRINGS, FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 6

Strings: Declaration, Initialization - String Operations – Functions: Declaration, Definition,

Function Call – Call by Value, Call by Reference - Parameter passing methods, Recursion Pointers:
Declaration- Definition- Pointers and Functions – Dynamic Memory Allocation.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES

• Discussion on functions about Call by Value, Call by Reference and recursion examples
• Demonstrate the use of strings and dynamic memory allocation using pointers

SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS

• Quiz on the basics of strings, functions and pointers

• Write programs using functions by incorporating strings and pointers in functions

UNIT IV STRUCTURES AND UNION 6

Structure: Definition – need – general form - Nested structures – Pointer and Structures – Array
of structures– Self-referential Structures - Unions: Definition – need – general form –Programs
using structures and unions.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES

• Discussion on nested structures and self-referential structures using examples

• Demonstrate the difference between structures and unions

SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS

• Quiz on the basics of structures and unions

• Write programs using pointers in structures and unions

UNIT V FILE PROCESSING 6

Introduction to files – Types of files: Text, Binary – File Operations – Functions – Types of File
Processing: Sequential access, Random access – Sequential access files – Random access files.
SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES
• Discussion on the need for file processing and access
• Demonstrate the difference between sequential access files and random access files
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS
• Quiz on the basics of files
• Write programs using modes of file operations
Total Periods
30 Theory +30 Lab

31
Laboratory Requirements

● 60 Systems with windows / LINUX operating system with C Software or equivalent.

Suggestive Assessment

Continuous Assessment Test Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams

(30 Marks) (20 Marks) (50 Marks)
1. DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 1. LAB EXPERIMENTS 1. DESCRIPTIVE
2. PROGRAMMING 2. MODEL EXAMINATION QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS 2. PROGRAMMING
QUESTIONS

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: To develop the basic problem solving logics using conditional statements.
CO2: To demonstrate the use of iterations and to apply the basic concepts of arrays.
CO3: To make use of the strings, functions and pointers to solve the complex problems.
CO4: To implement the structure and union concepts with pointers.
CO5: To handle the files and to access the data from the files to implement real time projects.
Text Books
1. ReemaThareja, “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press, Second edition, 2016

Reference Books
1. Byron Gottfried “Programming With C” Fourth Edition, McGrawHill, 2018.
Web Resources
1. C Programming Fundamentals - [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]
5. [Link]
6. [Link]
7. [Link]

List of experiments

[Link] NAME OF EXPERIMENTS CO

Programs using simple statements
1 a) Write a program to calculate the slope of a line. CO1
b) Write a program to convert polar coordinates to Cartesian coordinates

32
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Programs using decision making statements
a) Design a calculator to perform the arithmetic operations.
b) A weather forecasting agency would like to intimate the people about the
current temperature with the properclimatic message. Develop a C program to
read temperature in centigrade and display a suitable message according to
2 temperature state below : CO1
Temp < 0 then Freezing weather
Temp 0-10 then Very Cold weather
Temp 10-20 then Cold weather
Temp 20-30 then Normal in Temp
Temp 30-40 then Its Hot
Temp >=40 then Its Very Hot
Programs using looping statements
a) A supermarket manager wishes to keep some toys and puzzle games to
enable the customers to manage theirkids during the purchase time. He kept
a machine called “Fortune Teller machine”, it replies the kid with some
3 fortune message if he enters the palindrome number. It replies with “try CO2
again later” if the kid failed to input a valid palindrome number. Write a C
program to help the manager to run the “Fortune Teller Machine” perfectly.
b) Write a C program to find the factorial of a number using all types of loops
Programs using one dimensional and two dimensional arrays
a) Given below is the list of marks obtained by a class of 20students in an
annual examination.
43 65 7 24 87 90 19 39 58 75 67 87 90 92 14 78 82 99 56 89
Write a program to count the number of students belonging to each of
4 following groups of marks: 0- 9,10-19,upto… ,100. CO2

b) Write a C program to input a set of integer numbers, count and sum the
positive numbers and the negative numbers then print the count and sum
of all positive numbers and negative numbers.
Programs using string operations
5 a) Write a C program to find if the given string is palindrome or not CO3
b) Write a C program to reverse the given string
Programs using user defined functions and recursive functions
a) From a given paragraph perform the following using built-infunctions:
1. Find the total number of words.
6 CO3
2. Capitalize the first word of each sentence.
3. Replace a given word with another word.
b) Sort the list of numbers using pass by reference.
Programs using functions and pointers
a) Write a program in C to store n elements in an array and print the elements
7 using pointer. CO3
b) Write a program in C to find the factorial of a given number using pointers
Programs using structures and pointers
8 a) Write a C program to calculate the salary of employees in an organization CO4
using the concept of structures with and without the usage of pointers

33
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Programs using structures and unions
9 a) Write a C program to display the memory allocation of multiple data types CO4
using structure and union
Programs using file concepts
a) Write a program to create a file and store 20 names in it. Write a program to
10 read the names in the file. CO5
b) Write a program to add five new names in the existing list by appending the
names in the existing file.

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3

1 3 3 3 3

2 3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3 3

4 3 3 3 3

5 3 3 3 3

BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS CAT 1 CAT 2 Lab Model END SEM

CATEGORY Components Exam EXAM

REMEMBER 15 15 20

UNDERSTAND 15 15 30

APPLY 60 60 100 100 50

ANALYZE

EVALUATE

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1:
1. Write a program to round off an integer ‘i’ to the next largest multiple of another integer ‘j’.
Example: 256 days when rounded off next largest multiple divisible by a week resulted into
259.
2. Suppose a, b and c are integer variables that have been assigned the values a=8, b=3, and c=-
5. Determine the value of each of the following arithmetic expressions in C program.
(i) a+b+c
(ii) 2*b+3*(a-c)
(iii) a/b
(iv) a%b
(v) a*(b/c)
34
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 2:
1. Write a C program to reverse a number using while, do while and for loop
2. Write a C program to get the two matrices as a run time input and perform 2addition
4
operation and display the resultant matrix as the output. Let the Matrix A = and
[ ]
3 1
3 2
Matrix B = [ ]
1 4

COURSE OUTCOME 3:
1. Write a C program to sort an array of numbers using function pointers.
2. Write a C program to find factorial of a number using call by value and call by reference
methods
COURSE OUTCOME 4:
1. Write a C program to store employee information and search a particular employee using
employee number.
2. Write a C program to get a student data with name, id and percentage and display it using
pointers.
COURSE OUTCOME 5:
1. Write a C program to read from the [Link] file and find the average of the numbers using
random access.
2. Write a C program to simulate and maintain the bank’s account information such as
authentication and authorization of inserted card, and performing the functions of cash
withdrawal, cash deposit, and account’s balance enquiry. Implement the scenario using
random access file.

35
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21HS1101 ENGLISH FOR PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION
2 0 2 3
Preamble
This course is offered to equip students with the necessary skills to listen, read, write, and speak
so as to comprehend and successfully convey any idea, technical or otherwise, as well as give
them the necessary polish to become persuasive communicators.
Prerequisites for the course
The prerequisite knowledge required to study this Course is the basic knowledge in English
Language.
Objectives
1. To develop listening skills, and enhance the ability of comprehending.
2. To communicate confidently in varied real life situations.
3. To widen the basic reading skills of the first year Engineering and Technology students.
4. To master vocabulary, sentence structure and to write articles.
5. To create emotional awareness.
Module I SHARING BASIC INFORMATION 12
Listening - Listening to basic technical concepts, short formal and informal conversations;
Speaking- Formal Self-Introduction – Etiquette – Phrases to be used highlighting the
characteristics, strengths and weaknesses - Conversation Practice; Reading - short
comprehension passages on fundamental concepts, principles, and ideas that helps to understand
the need of Technology in a rapidly changing global environment; Writing - restructuring
sentences from the jumbled words – creating coherence; Language development - Framing
Yes/No questions, Question tag, Vocabulary development - formation of words– verb – Noun –
Adjectives, Standard Abbreviations related to Engineering.

Suggested Activities Evaluation Method

i) Listening to Conversations/ technical i) Listening & Speaking: Submitted Conversation
concepts from suggested app/prescribed will be assessed for
modules - Submission of 5 Recorded a) Language style as that of the sample audio.
Conversations. b) Pronunciation
c) Intonation
ii) Introducing oneself to the audience in a
professional way - Video Recording to be ii) Introduction: Submitted Video Recording will
submitted. be assessed for
a) Communication Etiquette
b) Language Style
iii) Reading 3 Passages on Technology and c) Sentence Construction
answering questions through Google forms.

iv) Rearranging Jumbled words - Exercises

v) Teaching of Grammar Contents Activities iii to v will be assessed through Google

form tests/ written tests.
Module II SHARING TECHNICAL INFORMATION 12

36
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Listening - Listening to technical lectures by native speakers; Speaking - introducing a
device/gadget to the audience – giving importance to its specifications, descriptions, merits and
demerits; Reading - extensive reading – short narratives and news items from newspapers
related to technology; Writing - sentence structure – short passages / reviews on any gadget –
describing an electronic/ mechanical gadget, importance of punctuation, organizing paragraphs;
Language development - framing ‘Wh’ Questions, writing a complete sentence using the
fragments given; Vocabulary development- prefix and suffix.

Suggested Activities Evaluation Method

i) Listening to Technical Lectures - i) Listening skills will be tested through
Suggested Youtube channels a) MCQs - Google Forms - 3 Sets
a) Learn Engineering b) Quiz - Polling - 2 set
b) Jared Owen
c) Interesting Engineering
d) Practical Engineering
ii)Speaking: Submitted Video
ii) Speaking / Submitting video recording / Recording/Presentation during class hours will
classroom presentation about an be assessed for
electronic/electrical/ a mechanical gadget a) Language Style & Fluency
giving importance to its specifications, b) Creation of Google Slides / Canva Slides
descriptions, merits and demerits. c) Content delivery

Activities iii to v will be assessed through Google

iii) Reading articles from Newspaper/ form tests/ written tests.
Google News / Times Now / and other Tech
News Sites

iv) Writing reviews of a product

v) Teaching of Grammar Contents

Module III UNDERSTANDING TECHNOLOGY 12
Listening - listening to technical talks on emerging trends and filling in the blanks – cloze test;
Speaking - asking for opinions about technical gadgets – presentation of reviews on
electronic/electrical/mechanical/software products; Reading - Reading Comprehension –
technical passages – Articles from journals; Writing - rearranging jumbled sentences, writing
short essays; Language development - Direct Speech and Indirect Speech – Framing Indirect –
Questions - Prepositions – Articles; Vocabulary development – Select Single Word Substitutes
used in Engineering.

Suggested Activities
i) Listening to Technical talks on emerging Evaluation Method
trends - Suggested YouTube channels i) Listening skills will be tested through
a) Bernard Marr a) Cloze Test - 2 Sets
b) Concerning Reality
c) Ideas and Inspiration

ii) Speaking / Submitting video recording /

classroom presentation on giving reviews ii)Speaking: Submitted Video
about a product. Recording/Classroom presentation will be
37
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
assessed for
iii) Reading articles -Extracts from reputed a) Inquisitiveness
journals. b) Analytical skills
c) Presentation Skills
iv) Writing essays and rearranging Jumbled
Sentences. Activities iii to v will be assessed through Google
form tests/ written tests.
v) Teaching of Grammar Contents
Module IV STATING PROBLEMS AND EXPRESSING SOLUTIONS 12
Listening- listening to talks relating to technology and noting down the merits and demerits;
Speaking - stating a problem and expressing solutions giving more focus on pronunciation of
words and sentence structure; Reading - comprehending Articles from Magazines – Identify the
problem statement and note down solution statements; Writing - Identifying problems – Writing
problem statement, Analyzing the situation – Gathering information related to the problem
stated – Identifying solution criteria – Choosing the best solution – Implementing a solution –
writing solution content - Measuring solution success – Report preparation – White paper
writing – Release/launch notes; Language development- Tenses; Vocabulary development-
Synonyms, Antonyms, Phrasal Verbs.

Suggested Activities Evaluation Method

i) Listening to talks related to Technology - i) Listening skills will be tested through
Suggested YouTube channels a) Note making - 2 Sets
a) Auto Car India
b) Lesics
c) Student Energy
ii)Speaking: Submitted Video Recording /
ii) Speaking / Submitting video recording / Classroom Presentation will be assessed for
Classroom presentation on Technical issues a) Expression of Innovative Ideas and Solution
faced in a gadget and expressing suitable b) Sentence Structure
solutions.

Activities iii to v will be assessed through Google

iii) Reading articles -Extracts from reputed form tests/ written tests/ written exercises.
journals and identify problem statements
and solution statements.

iv) Writing - Identifying problems – Writing

problem statement, Analyzing the situation
– Gathering information related to the
problem stated – Identifying solution
criteria – Choosing the best solution –
Implementing a solution – writing solution
content - Measuring solution success –
Report preparation – White paper writing –
Release/launch notes

v) Teaching of Grammar Contents

38
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Module V EMOTIONAL AWARENESS AND MANAGEMENT 12
Listening - Listening Types - Appreciative listening – Critical Listening – Relationship Listening;
Speaking - presentation on the importance of Emotional Intelligence; Reading- Reading Articles
on High Level Cognition - Cognitive Control – Decision Making – Social Behaviour – Emotion –
Language and Consciousness; Writing - Articulate emotions using the right language - Balance
optimism and pessimism to effectively impact others; Language development - modal verbs;
Vocabulary Development - Fixed and Semi-Fixed Expressions.
Suggested Activities Evaluation Method
i) Watching videos on types of Listening i) Listening skills will be tested through
a) Google form test- 2 Sets

ii) Presentation on Emotional Intelligence ii) Speaking: Submitted Video Recording /

Classroom Presentation will be assessed for
a) Emotional awareness
b) Communication Skills

iii) Reading Articles on High Level Cognition

iv) Writing - Articulate emotions using the

right language - Balance optimism and Activities iii to v will be assessed through Google
pessimism to effectively impact others form tests/ written tests/ written exercises.

v) Teaching of Grammar Contents

[Link] List of Exercises CO
1. Conversation Recording using the suggested app CO 1
2. Self Introduction Video CO 1
3. Listening Test - Google Form CO 2
4. Presentation on the working principle of a gadget CO 2
5. Listening - Cloze Test CO 3
6. Reviewing a Product - Video Submission CO 3
7. Listening and Note Making CO 4
Talk on technical issues in a gadget and express suitable
8. CO 4
solutions.
9. Types of Listening - Google Form CO 5
10. Presentation on Emotional Intelligence CO 5
Total Periods 30 Theory +30 Lab

39
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Laboratory Requirements for a batch of 60 Students
Software: Globarena
1. Teacher console and 30 systems for students.
2. English Language Lab Software
3. Career Lab Software
Suggestive Assessment Methods:
1) Listening and answering questions - MCQ - Cloze Test - Note Making
2) Speaking - App/Software based testing
3) Reading - analyze the passage given - understand the concept and answer Questions - On-
line Based
4) Written Tests
Lab Components
Continuous Assessment Test End Semester Exams
Assessments
(20 Marks) (50 Marks)
(30 Marks)
Completion of
Written Examination Written Examination
Suggested Exercises
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Enumerate basic information using communication etiquette on par with
CO 1
international communication standards. (Apply)
Interpret fundamental technical concepts in English language giving importance to
CO 2
syntax. (Apply)
Evaluate advanced varied technical concepts in the current scenario and emerging
CO 3
trends to invent new concepts. (Apply)
Write solutions for problems identified using the exact vocabulary and structure
CO 4
without grammatical errors as expected by the corporate world. (Apply)
Manage and respond to self, others' emotions using skills of Self Awareness, Self
CO 5 Management, Self- Motivation, Empathy & Social Relations to be an Emotionally
Intelligent Human Being. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Butterfield, Jeff. Soft Skills for Every one. Cengage Learning: New Delhi,2017.
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
University Press: New Delhi, 2016.
Reference Books
1. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
2. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges.
Web Resources
1. Self Introduction: [Link]
2. Working Principle of a Gadget:
[Link]
3. Product Review: [Link]
4. Times of India: [Link]
5. Listening to Technical talks:
Auto Car India [Link]
Lesics :[Link] Student Energy
[Link]
6. Types of Listening [Link]

40
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PS
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 O3

1 2 2 1 3 2 2

2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2

3 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2

4 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
5 1 1 2 2 3 2

SUGGESTED COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS:

COURSE OUTCOME 1 (CO 1) : Enumerate basic information using communication etiquette on
par with international communication standards.
1) Listen to the talk on basic technical topics and answer the questions provided.
2) Introduce yourself in a professional way highlighting Characteristics, Strengths &
Weaknesses.
3) Read the given technical passage and answer the questions provided.
4) Frame Yes/No Questions for the statements given.
5) Frame Question tags for the statements given.
6) Rearrange the jumbled words into a meaningful sentence.
7) Complete the sentence with the Noun form/ Verb Form/ Adjective form (as Directed ) of
the word given.
8) Give the expansion of the Abbreviations given.

COURSE OUTCOME 2 (CO 2) : Interpret fundamental technical concepts in English language

giving importance to syntax.

1) Listen to the technical lecture and answer the questions provided.

2) Introduce a device or a gadget to the class giving importance to its specifications,
description, merits and demerits.
3) Read the given passage / short narrative / article from a journal or newspaper to the class.

41
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
4) Write your review on any one of the gadgets you are using.
5) Frame “Wh” Questions for the statements given.
6) Punctuate the following statement given.
7) Complete the sentence using the fragments given.
8) Write a short passage on the given topic.
9) Fill in the blanks with the suitable prefix or suffix as directed.
COURSE OUTCOME 3 (CO 3) :Evaluate advanced varied technical concepts in the current scenario
and emerging trends to invent new concepts.
1) Listen to the technical talk on the emerging trends and complete the statements given.
(Cloze Test)
2) Ask questions to get an opinion about technical gadgets / software / devices
3) Read the given article from a journal and provide your ideas for further developments.
4) Rearrange the following sentences in the proper chronological order.
5) Write a short essay on any one of the given technical topics highlighting the future scope
of the product.
6) Rewrite the following into Indirect Speech.
7) Frame indirect questions for the questions given.
8) Fill in the blanks with the suitable articles.
9) Give the one word substitutes for the given statement.
COURSE OUTCOME 4 (CO 4) : Write solutions for problems identified using the exact vocabulary
and structure without grammatical errors as expected by the corporate world.
1) Listen to the technical talks and write down the merits and demerits of the product
discussed.
2) Watch the video, evaluate the concept and express your solutions to the problem.
3) Read the given article and note down the problems stated.
4) Write down solutions for the problems faced while using a product.
5) Draft a white paper writing for the given situation..
6) Write launch notes for a product.
7) Convert the given statement to another form of the tenses as directed.
8) Pick out the suitable synonym for the underlined word in order to minimize plagiarism.
9) Fill in the blank with the suitable phrasal verb.
COURSE OUTCOME 5 (CO 5) : Manage and respond to self, others' emotions using skills of Self
Awareness, Self Management, Self Motivation, Empathy & Social Relations to be an Emotionally
Intelligent Human Being.
1) Watch the video on Types of listening and answer the questions.
2) Make a presentation on the importance of Emotional Intelligence.
3) Read the given article on High level cognition and answer the questions.
4) Read the article on social behaviour and redraft it in your own style.
5) Comprehend the passage and give your inputs for decision making.
6) Watch the video and articulate your emotions using appropriate words.
7) Write a note on optimism and pessimism.
8) Fill in the blank with the suitable modal verb.
9) Pick out the suitable fixed/ semi-fixed expression to complete the given statement.

42
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21PY1311 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
Preamble
The aim of this course is to make the students gain practical knowledge to co-relate with the
theoretical studies and develop their practical applications in engineering materials by usingthe
principles in the right way to implement in modern technology.
Prerequisites
Basic practical concepts of Physics and Chemistry in higher secondary level.
Objectives
● To analyze the instrumental techniques used in measuring data.
● To interrogate the competency and understanding of the basic concepts found in experimental
Physics.
● To learn about the electronic mechanisms and their usage in a practical manner.
● To learn the interpretation of experimental data using the equipment in the physics laboratory.
● To investigate the errors in experimental measurements and techniques.

Objectives (Chemistry)
● To make the students acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
● To develop an understanding about the range and uses of analytical methods in chemistry.
● To explain the concept of corrosion, its causes, and its environmental consequences.
● To acquaint students with knowledge of molecular weight determination and polymer
solubility.
To interpret chemical and physical phenomena through experimental investigations.
PHYSICS
S. No List of Experiments CO
1 Determination of specific resistance of a given coil of wire – Carey Foster’s 3
Bridge.
2 Determination of band gap of a Semiconductor (Forbidden energy band 1
gap kit).
3 Determination of planck's constant and work function using the principle 5
of photoelectric effect
4 Determination of Young’s modulus of the material-Non Uniform bending 1
method.
5 Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc 4
method.
6 Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – 1
Ultrasonic Interferometer.
7 Determination of wavelength of spectral lines using grating – 2
Spectrometer.
CHEMISTRY
1 Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA 1,5
method.
2 Corrosion experiments – weight loss method. 3,5
3 Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer. 2
4 Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base. 2
5 Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald 4
viscometer.
6 Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and determination of 1,5
alkalinity in water sample.
43
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
7 Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter. 2

List of Projects ( PHYSICS)

S. No. Related CO
List of Projects
Experiment
To study Infrared radiation emitted by different sources 3 5
1
using phototransistors.
To study the variations, in current flowing in a circuit
containing a LDR, because of a variation:
(a) In the power of the incandescent lamp, used to
2 ‘illuminate’ the LDR. (Keeping all the lamps at a fixed 2 1
distance).
(b) In the distance of an incandescent lamp, (of fixed
power), used to ‘illuminate’ the LDR.
Design a circuit for cool automatic timer controlled
Light which controls vehicle traffic passing through the
intersection of two or more roadways by giving a visual
3 2 1
indication to drivers when to proceed, when to slow ,
and when to stop using LED and 4017 counter IC along
with the 555 timer.
Design and implement a circuit which anyone can make
at home to save their home from thefts using the light 7
4 2
has high intensity, monochromatic, directional and
coherent in nature.
Construct a household circuit consisting of three bulbs
5 1 3
using a dual switching method.
Using ultrasonic sensor, design a ultrasonic distance 6
6 1
finder using 8051
Design a water level indicator by connecting a Buzzer,
7 resistor and transistor in series and connect this in 2 1
parallel to LED.
List of Projects (CHEMISTRY)
Water Analysis : Analysis of perennial Thamirabarani
River water samples collected from various locations
(before and after blending of industrial waste water).
i) Determination of various physical and chemical
1 parameters ( Hardness, pH,TDS, Alkalinity) of different
water samples.
ii) From the result, give a detailed report about the 1, 6,7 1,5
water sample whether it is fit/unfit for domestic and
industrial purposes.
Water Quality Monitoring : Analysis of ground water
samples collected from various districts ( Tirunelveli,
Madurai, Tuticorin, Kanyakumari, Tenkasi etc.,).
i) Determination of various physical and chemical
2. parameters (Hardness, pH, TDS, Alkalinity) of different
water samples.
ii) From the result, give a detailed report about the 1,6,7 1,5
water sample whether it is fit/unfit for domestic and
industrial purposes.
Household Plumbing Deterioration Monitoring : Study
3.
44
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
of Conductivity of domestic water (Home) by Arduino
method to track the deterioration of household 3,5
2
plumbing.
i) From the observations give a detailed report about
the existence of various ions in water.
ii) Give an explanatory report on tracking the
deterioration in household plumbing.
Air quality monitoring : Study of air pollution in Nellai
smart city in the early morning, noon and evening due
to CO/CO2 emissions by Arduino method. 4
4 i) From the observations give a detailed report about
the impact of air pollution on human health.
ii) Deduce an explanatory report on environmental 5
impact due to CO/CO2 emissions.
Food adulteration : Investigation of adulterants in
various food stuffs (milk, chilli powder, turmeric
powder, wheat flour, honey and ghee) by Chemical
methods. 1
5.
i) Give a report on the presence of adulterants in the
given food samples.
ii) From the observations give a brief report about the 5
impact of food adulteration on human health.

Lab Assessment
Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams
(50 Marks) (50 Marks)
Outcomes( Physics)
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Analyzation of new instruments and real time application in engineering materials.
(Analyse)
CO2 Applying the basic concepts of physics in the experiments by interrogating the
data.(Apply)
CO3 Applying basic knowledge to design circuits using basic components. (Apply)
CO4 Acquire the basic enlightenment of the experimental data for interpretation (Apply)
CO5 Solve problems individually using critical thinking collaboratively. (Analyse)

Outcomes(Chemistry)
CO1 Analyze the water quality related parameters quantitatively. (Analyse)
CO2 Explain the use of equipment for the measurement of conductance, electrode
potential, pH of solutions, and viscosity. (Apply)
CO3 Analyze the probable corrosion, corrosion rate, and corrosion mechanism of the
metallic material in the given environment (Analyze)
CO4 Analyze polymerization data and predict the conversion and molecular weight,
which will lead to critical thinking about how to improve the setup for better
polymerization.(Analyze)
CO5 Apply the knowledge of practical to enhance the quality of the environment .(Apply)

45
 Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Reference Books (Physics)
● Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, Francis Xavier Engineering College,
Tirunelveli.
● A Textbook of Engineering Physics Practical ,UNIVERSITY SCIENCE PRESS (An Imprint
of Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd.)2nd edition.
Reference Books (Chemistry)

[Link], R.C. Denney, [Link], [Link] and [Link], Vogel’s Textbook of

Quantitative Chemical Analysis (5th edition 2009).
Web Resources
1. Virtual Lab - [Link]
physics/List%20of%[Link]
2. Young's Modulus- [Link]
3. Virtual Lab - [Link]
4. Numerical Aperture -
[Link]

Web Resources (Chemistry)

1. Water Quality standards - [Link]
[Link] experiments – weight loss method
[Link]

PHYSICS MAPPING

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

46
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CHEMISTRY MAPPING
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
PO PO PO PSO1 PSO2
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12

1 3 1 2 2 2

2 3 1 2 1 2 1

3 3 2 1 1 1 1

4 2 1 2 2 2 1

5 2 1 2 1 2 2 1

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS - PHYSICS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: The students will be able to analyzation of new instruments and real
time application in engineering materials. (Analyse)
1. Determination of band gap of a Semiconductor (Forbidden energy band gap kit).
2. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic Interferometer.
COURSE OUTCOME 2: The students will be able to apply the basic concepts of physics in the
experiments by interrogating the data.(Apply)

1. Determination of wavelength of spectral lines using grating – Spectrometer.

COURSE OUTCOME 3: The students will be able to apply basic knowledge to design circuits
using basic components. (Apply)
1. Design a circuit for finding unknown resistance and specific resistance of a given coil of wire.

COURSE OUTCOME 4: The students will be able to acquire the basic enlightenment of the
experimental data for interpretation (Apply)
1. Determine the thermal conductivity of a given bad conductor (Glass) using Lee’s disc method.
(Given: M= 800 X10-3 Kg, S = 370 JKg -1K-1).
COURSE OUTCOME 5: The students will be able to solve problems individually using critical
thinking collaboratively. (Analyse)
1. Determination of planck's constant and work function using the principle of photoelectric effect
2. Find the Young’s modulus of the material of a beam using Non-Uniform bending method. (Given
: Thickness of the beam d = 6.35 mm)

47
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

SEMESTER II

48
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21HS2101 ENGLISH FOR TECHNICAL
COMMUNICATION 2 0 0 2
Preamble
This course is offered to develop strategies and skills to enhance professional students’ ability to
read and comprehend engineering and technology texts. Foster their ability to write convincing
job applications and effective reports. Develop their speaking skills to make technical
presentations, participate in group discussions. The outcome of the course is to help students
acquire the language skills of listening, speaking, reading and writing competency in English
language thereby making them meet the global expectations.
Prerequisites for the course
● The prerequisite knowledge required to study this Course is the basic knowledge in
English Language.
Objectives
1. To widen strategies and skills to augment ability to read and comprehend engineering and
technology texts.
2. To draft convincing job applications and effective reports.
3. To develop speaking skills to make technical presentations, participate in group
discussions.
4. To strengthen listening skills to comprehend technical lectures and talks in their areas of
specialization.
5. To cultivate writing skills both technical and general.
MODULE 1 READING AND STUDY SKILLS 6
Reading - Reading longer technical texts / technical blogs and taking down notes; Writing -
interpreting charts (all the types), graphs – comparing and contrasting statements/paragraphs –
analyzing technical details - writing technical blogs; Vocabulary Development - Select Technical
Vocabulary; Language Development - Active Voice and Passive Voice
Suggested Activities
i) Visit to the Library - Reading Evaluation Method
articles on emerging trends and i) Content & Structure
taking down notes in the prescribed
format - Submission through FAST
FORMS - Minimum 2

ii) Writing compare and contrast ii) Submission: Fast form Document
statements. (Eg. Windows 10 Vs Submitted document will be assessed for
Windows 1, RPA Developer Vs RPA a) Communication Etiquette
Analyst, Edge Computing Vs b) Language Style
Quantum Computing) related to the c) Sentence Construction
programme.
Activity iii will be assessed through Google form tests/
iii) Teaching of Grammar Contents written tests.

49
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

MODULE 2 INTRODUCTION TO PROFESSIONAL WRITING 6

Reading - Technical related topics; Writing - statement of purpose - press release – extended
definitions - writing instructions – checklists – recommendations – Minutes of the Meeting ;
Language Development - Subject Verb Agreement, Compound Words.
Evaluation Method
Suggested Activities i) Content & Structure
i) Visit to the Library - Reading
articles on emerging trends and
writing down purpose statements
and extended definitions. ii) Submission: Fast form Document
Submission through FAST FORMS - Submitted document will be assessed for
Minimum 2 a) Format
b) Language Style
ii) Writing a set of 8 Instructions, c) Sentence Construction
Recommendations and Checklists for
the suggested topics. (each 2 sets) Activity iii will be assessed through Google form tests/
written tests.
iii) Teaching of Grammar Contents

MODULE 3 INTERVIEW SKILLS 6

Listening - Listening to mock Interviews ; Speaking - answering Interview questions – GD
Strategies; Reading- newspaper article - read company profile - practice in speed reading ;
Writing - Job Application - Resume- Internship application - letter to the editor - email etiquette -
positive, negative and neutral responses - sending professional emails; Writing opinion
paragraph - Writing paragraphs with reasons; Vocabulary Development - select Technical
Vocabulary Language Development - If – Conditionals
Suggested Activities Evaluation Method
i) Listening to UPSC Toppers Mock i) Answering questions for Interview questions(Android
Interviews. app based)
Responses will be assessed for
a) Fluency
b) Communication etiquette
c) Language style

ii) Submission: Fast form Document

ii) Drafting Job application and Submitted document will be assessed for
Resume building. a) Language Style
b) Design

Activity iii will be assessed through Google form tests/

written tests.
iii) Teaching of Grammar Contents
MODULE 4 REPORT WRITING I 6
Writing - Fire accident Report, Industrial Visit Report, Project Report; Vocabulary Development-
finding suitable synonyms - paraphrasing ; Language Development - Clauses.

50
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggested Activities Evaluation Method

i) Drafting reviews and reports on i) Content & Structure
Industries -
a) Profile & Products
b) Trending technology adopted
c) Careers
d) Latest news
Min - 2 Industries

ii) Teaching of Grammar Contents Activity ii will be assessed through Google form tests/
written tests.
MODULE 5 REPORT WRITING II 6
Writing - Writing Feasibility Reports, Survey Reports, Business Report; Vocabulary Development
- verbal analogies ; Language Development - advanced use of Articles, Prepositional Phrases.
Suggested Activities Evaluation Method
i) Drafting feasibility report on- i) Content & Structure
a) Launching a new product /
Technology
Min - 2
Activity ii will be assessed through Google form tests/
ii) Teaching of Grammar Contents written tests.
Total Periods 30
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Formative Assessment
Continuous Assessment Test End Semester Exams
Test (10 Marks)
(30 Marks) (60 Marks)
(i) Google Form based -
(i) Google Form based - on-line Test on-line Test
incorporating Written Test
(i) (ii) Written Test Listening, Speaking and
Reading
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Understand advanced technical texts from varied technical genres to understand
CO1 engineering concepts and explore more. (Apply)
Review technical contents written on par with international standards and rewrite
CO2 contents using the right vocabulary without grammatical errors to make their
articles published in reputed journals. (Apply)
Articulate appropriately in interviews and Group Discussions effortlessly
CO3 following the strategies expected by the corporate world. (Apply)
Write reports utilizing the required format prescribed on par with international
CO4 standards using the exact vocabulary to make their reports worthy to be read.
(Apply)
Appraise the need for new products and write feasibility and survey reports
CO5 following the format prescribed in a way to create awareness. (Apply)

51
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Text Books
1. Mike Markrl. Technical Communication,Palgrave Macmillan: London, 2012.
2. Sumant,S and Joyce Pereira. Technical English II. Chennai: Vijay Nicole Imprints Private
Limited, 2014.
3. Kumar, Sanjay and Pushp Lata. Communication Skills: A Workbook. New Delhi: OUP, 2018.
Reference Books
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Communication Skills. New Delhi: OUP, 2018
2. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, 2007
Web Resources
1. Interpretation of Charts : [Link] :
[Link]
2. Instructions [Link]
3. Resume building [Link]
4. Report writing - [Link] ;
[Link]
writing
5. UPSC Interview: [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O 1 O 2 O 3
1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 1
2 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
3 3 2 1 2 3 2
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 2

52
SUGGESTED COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS:
COURSE OUTCOME 1 (CO 1) : Understand advanced technical texts from varied technical genres
to understand engineering concepts and explore more.
1) Read the given passage and take notes.
2) Analyse the given type of chart or graph and answer the questions given.
3) Analyse the given chart or graph and write paragraphs comparing and contrasting the data.
4) Analyse the given chart or graph and write paragraphs giving importance to technical
details.
5) Fill in the blank with appropriate technical vocabulary.
6) Convert the given active voice sentence into passive voice or impersonal passive voice.
COURSE OUTCOME 2 (CO 2) : Review technical contents written on par with international
standards and rewrite contents using the right vocabulary without grammatical errors to make
their articles published in reputed journals.
1) Write a purpose statement for the tool or gadget given.
2) Write an extended definition for the given word.
3) Write 8 instructions / recommendations on the given topic.
4) Write the Minutes of the meeting for the given meeting.
5) Fill in the blank with appropriate Subject Verb agreement.
6) Fill in the blank with suitable compound words.
COURSE OUTCOME 3 (CO 3) : Articulate appropriately in Interviews and Group Discussions
effortlessly following the strategies expected by the corporate world.
1) Listening to mock interviews and answering the questions.
2) Listen to the strategies of GD and answer the given questions.
3) Read and submit a recording of technical content following the strategies of speed reading.
4) Write Job application with a cover letter for the given job description.
5) Write paragraphs expressing opinion on the given topic.
6) Fill in the blank / complete the sentence with appropriate If-Conditionals.
COURSE OUTCOME 4 (CO 4) : Write reports utilizing the required format prescribed on par with
international standards using the exact vocabulary to make their reports worthy to be read.
1) Write a fire accident report for the provided incident.
2) Write an Industrial visit report.
3) Write a report on the Project work undertaken by the candidate giving importance to the
current status report and the time needed for the completion of the project.
4) Find the appropriate synonym for the given word.
5) Paraphrase the given passage.
6) Fill in the blank with appropriate clauses.
COURSE OUTCOME 5 (CO 5) : Appraise the need for new products and write feasibility and survey
reports following the format prescribed in a way to create awareness.
1) Write a Feasibility report for a business / project proposal given.
2) Write a survey report for the given scenario.
3) Pick out the appropriate Verbal Analogy.
4) Fill in the blank with appropriate articles.
5) Complete the sentence with appropriate Prepositional Phrases.
6) Choose the appropriate word to complete the sentence.

53
 L T P C
21MA2201 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION AND
APPLICATIONS OF FOURIER SERIES 3 1 0 4
Preamble:
The course consists of topics in Complex Integration, Partial Differential Equations and Laplace
Transforms with applications to various engineering problems. This course will cover the
following main topics: Construction of analytic function, Taylors and Laurent’s series, Poles and
Residues, Half range sine series, Harmonic analysis, Fourier Series Solutions of one dimensional
wave and heat flow equation and Applications of Laplace transforms for solving linear ordinary
differential equations up to second order with constant coefficients.
Prerequisites for the course
Basic knowledge of Partial differentiation and Integration.

Objectives
1. To introduce to the concept of Analytical function
2. To familiarize with Complex integration
3. To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering
field and its use in solving boundary value problems
4. To acquaint the student with PDE and Fourier series techniques in solving wave and heat
flow problems used in various situations.
5. To improve the knowledge of Laplace transform.
UNIT I ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9+3
Definition of Analytic Function – Cauchy Riemann equations – Properties of analytic functions –
Harmonic function – Harmonic Conjugate - Construction of analytic function by Milne Thomson’s
method and bilinear transformation.
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on Construction of analytic function by Milne Thomson’s method
and bilinear transformation.
UNIT II COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9+3
Complex numbers and its conjugate - Cauchy’s integral theorem (without proof) – Cauchy’s
integral formulae and its higher order derivatives (without proof) and its applications – Taylors
and Laurent’s series – Types of Singularities – Poles and Residues – Cauchy’s residue theorem
(without proof).
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on Taylors series, Laurent’s series and Cauchy’s residue theorem.
UNIT III FOURIER SERIES 9+3
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Change of Intervals - Odd and even functions – Half
range sine series – Half range cosine series - Root mean square value – Harmonic analysis for
Fourier series - Engineering Applications.

54
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on Fouries series of Odd and even functions, Half range sine and cosine
series, Harmonic analysis.

UNIT IV PDE AND APPLICATIONS OF FOURIER SERIES 9+3

Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier Series Solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – Fourier Series Solutions of one dimensional equation of heat
conduction - Engineering Applications.
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on Fourier Series Solutions of one-dimensional wave equation and heat
conduction equation.
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 9+3
Properties of Laplace Transform – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem (Without Proof) –
Partial fraction - Applications of Laplace transforms for solving linear ordinary differential
equations up to second order with constant coefficients only - Engineering Applications.
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on Laplace transform using partial fraction, Convolution theorem and
solving ODE.
Total Periods 45 + 15 = 60 Periods
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
1. Descriptive Questions 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 1 – 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes
CAT 2 – 10 Marks
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C108.1. : Apply Cauchy-Riemann equations to problems of fluid mechanics, thermodynamics and
electro-magnetic fields. ( Apply)
C108.2: Solve complex valued integral functions using residues. (Apply)
C108.3: Construct the Fourier series expansion of the periodic function. (Apply)
C108.4: Solve the problems of one dimensional wave and heat equation. (Apply)
C108.5: Apply Laplace Transform technique to solve the given ordinary differential equation.
(Apply)
Text Books
1. B. S. Grewal, “ Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 45rd edition, 2017.
2. Kreyszig.E, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons. Singapore, 15th
edition, 2017.
Reference Books
1. A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics(Dr. A.P.J. Abdul Kalam Technical University,
Lucknow) (For . Gautam Bhudh technical Universities ,Lucknow) January 2020
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics , H. K. DASS, S. CHAND and Company Limited, New
Delhi, 22nd revised edition, 2018.

55
 Web Resources
1. Analytic functions - [Link]
2. Complex Integration - [Link]
3. Fourier series - [Link]
4. Applications of fourier series - [Link]
5. Laplace Transform - [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping:

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2 2
4 3 2 2
5 3 2

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 (CO 1) : (Apply)

1. Construct an analytic function whose imaginary part is 𝑣 = 𝑒𝑥(𝑥 cos 𝑦 − 𝑦 sin 𝑦)

2. Find the bilinear transformation that maps the points Z =0, -1 ,𝑖 on to the points 𝑖 , 0, ∞.

COURSE OUTCOME 2 (CO 2) : (Apply)

2𝑧
1) Solve 𝑒
∫ (𝑧+1)4 𝑑𝑧 using Cauchy’s Integral formula where C is |𝑧| = 2.
2) Compute ∫ 2𝑧−1
𝑑𝑧 using Cauchy’s Residue theorem where C is |𝑧| = 2.
𝑧(𝑧+1)(𝑧−3)

56
COURSE OUTCOME 3 (CO 3) : (Apply)

1) Construct Fourier series for 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 in (−𝜋, 𝜋).

2) Construct Fourier series for 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥2 in (−𝑙, 𝑙).
COURSE OUTCOME 4 (CO 4) : (Apply)

1) Identify the PDE 𝑢𝑥𝑥 = 𝑎2𝑢𝑡𝑡

2) A tightly stretched string with fixed end points 𝑥 = 0, 𝑥 = 𝑙 is initially at rest in its equilibrium
position. If it is vibrating, giving each point a velocity 𝜆𝑥(𝑙 − 𝑥) . Find the displacement of the
string at any time ‘t’.

COURSE OUTCOME 5 (CO 5) : (Apply)

2𝑥 𝑑𝑥
1) Solve 𝑑 − 3 + 2𝑥 = 2, given 𝑥 = 0 and 𝑑𝑥 = 5 for 𝑡 = 0 using Laplace transform method.
𝑑𝑡2 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
2) Find the Laplace transform for cos𝑎𝑡−cos 𝑏𝑡.
𝑡

57
 L T P C
21ME2501 ENGINEERING MECHANICS
2 1 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Physics

Objectives
To develop the capacity to predict the effects of force and motion while carrying out the
creative design functions of engineering

UNIT I STATICS OF PARTICLES 7+2

Introduction – Units and Dimensions – Laws of Mechanics – Lami’s theorem, Parallelogram and
triangular Law of forces – Vectorial representation of forces – Coplanar Forces – rectangular
components – Equilibrium of a particle – Forces in space – Equilibrium of a particle in space –
Equivalent systems of forces – Principle of transmissibility

UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 7+2

Free body diagram – Types of supports – Action and reaction forces – stable equilibrium –Moments
and Couples – Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial representation of
moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment – Varignon’s theorem – Single equivalent
force – equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions
UNIT III PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 8+2
Centroids and centre of mass – Centroids of lines and areas – Rectangular, circular, triangular areas
by integration – T section, I section, – Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula –
Theorems of Pappus – Area moments of inertia of plane areas – Rectangular, circular, triangular
areas by integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula
– Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem – Principal moments of inertia of plane
areas – Principal axes of inertia-Mass moment of inertia
UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 8+2
Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear motion –
Newton’s laws of motion – Work Energy Equation – Impulse and Momentum – Impact of elastic bodies
UNIT V FRICTION 5+2
Friction force – Laws of sliding friction – equilibrium analysis of simple systems with sliding
friction – wedge friction – belt friction – ladder friction
Total Periods 35+10=45 hours

58
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT – I (10 Marks) Assignment, Multiple Choice Multiple Choice Questions
CAT – II (10 Marks) Questions
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C109.1:Enumerate the basic laws of mechanics and practice the vector manipulation, equilibrium
conditions on the systems of forces acting on particles.
C109.2:Compute reaction force and moment on the rigid bodies using both vector and scalar
methods
C109.3:Determine the center of gravity and moment of inertia of the standard and composite
section
C109.4:Apply equation of motion, principles of D’Alembertz work energy and impulse momentum
to the problems on dynamics of particles.
C109.5:Describe frictional laws to compute the frictional forces for bodies in contact.
Text Books

1. Beer, Johnston, Mazurek, Cornwells and Sanghi, “Vector Mechanics for Engineers: Statics,
Dynamics”, 10th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Noida, Uttar Pradesh, (2019)
2. N.H. Dubey, “Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics”, 1st Edition, McGraw-Hill
Education India Private Ltd., New Delhi, (2017)

Reference Books
1. J.L. Meriam and L.G. Kraige, “Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics”, 7th Edition, Wiley India Private
Limited, (2016)
2. Irving H. Shames, “Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics”, 4th Edition, Pearson India, (2011)
3. R.K Bansal,” Textbook of Engineering Mechanics”, 7th Edition, LP publications.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

59
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO
CO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1

109.1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2

109.2 2 2 2 2 1 3 2

109.3 1 1 1 2 1 3 2

109.4 1 1 1 2 1 3 2

109.5 1 2 2 1 1 3 2

BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS END SEM

CAT 1 CAT 2 FAT 1 FAT 2
CATEGORY EXAM

REMEMBER 20 15 5 10

UNDERSTAND 30 20 10 10 30

APPLY 30 30 10 10 30

ANALYZE 20 20 5 15

EVALUATE 15 15

CREATE

60
 COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Enumerate the basic laws of mechanics and practice the vector
manipulation, equilibrium conditions on the systems of forces acting on particles. (Remember,
Understand, Apply, Analyse)
1. Define coplanar and non-coplanar forces (Remember)
2. Determine the magnitude and direction of the resultant of two forces 100 N and 150 N acting at angle
of 45◦ (Understand)
3. If the two tensions in the pulley cable shown in Fig. are 400 N, determine the resultant R exerted on
the pulley by the two tensions. (Apply)

4. Two identical rollers each of weight 1000N are supported by an inclined plane and a vertical wall
asshown in fig below. Find the support reactions at points A, B & C. assume all surfaces to be smooth
(Analyse)

61
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Compute reaction force and moment on the rigid bodies using both vector
and scalar methods (Remember, Understand, Apply, Analyse)
1. List some types of beams based on supports (Remember)
2. State Varignon’s theorem (Understand)
3. An 800-N force is applied to a 3-m high pole at the point P, as shown in Fig. Calculate the magnitude
of moment of this force about the base point O by four different methods. (Apply)

4. Calculate the support reactions for a simply supported beam with hinged support at the end A and
roller support at the end B, subjected to inclined loading as shown in Fig. (Analyse)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Determine the center of gravity and moment of inertia of the standard and
composite section (Remember, Understand, Apply)
1. Write the formula for finding moment of inertia about X and Y axis (Remember)
2. Find the centroid of the plane lamina shown in Fig. (Understand)

62
 3. A flywheel (Fig.) consists of a rim of 2500-kg mass and four spokes each of 60-kg mass. The rim
has inner and outer radii of 1.1 m and 1.5 m, respectively. The shaft at the center of the wheel has
a diameter of 0.25 m and a mass of 1200 kg. Determine (a) the moment of inertia of flywheel about
its axis of rotation, and (b) its radius of gyration. (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Adapt equation of motion, principles of D’Alembertz, work energy and
impulsemomentum to the problems on dynamics of particles.
(Understand, Remember, Apply, Analyse, Evaluate)
1. State Newton’s second law of motion (Remember)
2. State law of conservation of momentum (Understand)
3. In Asian games, for 100 m event an athlete accelerates uniformly from the start to this maximum
velocity in a distance of 4 m and runs the remaining distance with that velocity. If the athlete
finishes the race in 10.4 seconds, determine (i) his initial acceleration (ii) his maximum velocity
(Apply)
4. Three spherical balls A, B and C of 3kg, 9kg and 18 kg masses are moving in the same direction
with velocities of 12 m/s, 4 m/s and 2 m/s, respectively, as shown in Fig. If the ball A Collides
with the ball B which in turn collides with the ball C, proves that the balls A and B come to rest
after the impacts. Assume that all the impacts are perfectly elastic. (Analyse)

63
 5. Direct central impact occurs between 300 N body moving to the right with the velocity of 6 m/s
and 150 N body moving to the left with the velocity of 10 m/s. Find the velocity of each body
after impact if the coefficient of restitution is 0.8 (Evaluate).

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Describe frictional laws to compute the frictional forces for bodies in
contact. (Understand, Remember, Apply, Analyse)
1. State the laws of dry (coulomb) friction (Remember)
2. Define angle of repose (Understand)
3. A 1500-N block overlaying a 10-degree wedge on a horizontal floor and leaning against a vertical
wall, is to be raised by applying a horizontal force P as shown in Fig. Determine the force P necessary
to just start the motion, if the coefficient of friction is 0.3 (Analyse)

4. A uniform ladder of 5-m length and 20-N weight is placed against a smooth vertical wall with its
lower end 4 m away from the wall. If the ladder is just to slip, determine the coefficient of friction
between the ladder and floor, and the frictional force acting on the ladder at the point of contact
with the floor. (Apply)

64
 CONCEPT MAP

COURSE DESIGNERS:
1. [Link] KUMAR saravanakumar@[Link]
2. M. AYYANAR RAJA ayyanarraja@[Link]
3. S. M. RAJ KUMAR rajkumarsm@ [Link]

HoD/Mech

65
 L T P C
21ME1513 COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING
GRAPHICS 1 2 2 4
Prerequisites for the course
NIL
Preamble
Engineering drawing is an important tool for all Engineers and for many others
professionals. It is the language of Engineers. Engineering Drawing communicates all
needed information from the engineer who designed a part to the workers who will
manufacture it.
Objectives
1. To understand the importance of the drawing in engineering applications
2. To improve their visualization skills so that they can apply this skill in
developing newproducts.
3. To expose them to existing standards related to technical drawings.
4. To develop graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas, and design of
engineering products
5. Train to practice engineering graphics through drafting software.

CONCEPTS AND CONVENTION

Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventionsand specifications – Size, layout of drawing sheets – Lettering and
Dimensioning
UNIT I PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANES 9

General Principles of orthographic projection – First Angle Projection, projection of points

in four quadrants – Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant – inclined to
both planes – Projection of planes (Change of position method only)
UNIT II PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 10
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, and cone when the axis is
inclined to onereference plane by change of position method.
UNIT III SECTIONS OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF 10
SURFACES
Sections of regular solids as per BIS conventions - Constructing sectional views of simple
objects and components - Development of lateral surfaces of regular solids-Projection of
truncated solids- Combinations of solids
UNIT IV ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS 8
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale – isometric projections of simple solids,
truncatedprisms, pyramids, cylinders, and cones.
UNIT V PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 8
Perspective projection of prisms, pyramids, and cylinders by visual ray method.

66
 [Link] List of Experiments CO

1. Introduction to drafting commands in AutoCAD. Creation of C112.1

simple geometry and editing practice.
2. Projection of simple Geometric objects and engineering C112.2
components using AutoCAD
3. Construction of simple objects and components sectional views C112.3
using AutoCAD
4 Construction of development of surfaces of simple solids C112.3

5. Isometric projection of simple components-flange, cylinder, C112.4

chimney, lamp shades, valve, Brackets using AutoCAD
6. Creating a Perspective Projection of solids using AutoCAD C112.5

7. Conversion of isometric projections into orthographic projection C112.4

Total Periods 15 Lecture +30

Tutorial+ 30 Lab
Hours
Laboratory Requirements

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
(For a batch of 30 Students)

Hardware:
1. Intel i3 core due processor with 4GB ram with 500GB hard disk – 30 Nos.
2. Laser Printer – 1 No.
Software:
Drafting package – AutoCAD – Adequate license (Open source)
Suggestive Assessment Methods
CAT 1 LAB COMPONENTS End Semester Exams
(20Marks) (30 Marks) (50 Marks)
CAT 1 10 MARKS Model Lab with project (10 Marks) 50
CAT 2 10 MARKS Lab Experiment (20 Marks)
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C112.1: Apply the principles of first angle projection in construction of points, lines and planes
C112.2: Apply the principles of change of position method in projection of simple solids.
C112.3:Develop projections of sectioned solids and their developmental surface.
C112.4:Develop isometric views from orthographic projections
C112.5: Construct the perspective projections of simple solids

67
 Text Books
1. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering drawing + AutoCAD”, New Age International
(P) Limited (2022)
2. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai
(2015)
3. Patil, Rajashekar, “Computer Aided Engineering Graphics”, New Age International Ltd,2018
Reference Books
1. Kumar M.S., “Engineering Graphics”, D.D. Publications, (2015)
2. Parthasarathy N.S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press,
New Delhi, (2015)
3. Shah M.B. and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson Education (2009)
4. [Link], “Engineering Graphics”, Charotor Publishing House, 53RD Edition 2019

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing sheets
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 and 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 and SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings
4. IS 11669 – 1986 and SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods

Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
112.1 3 1 1 2 3 2

112..2 3 1 1 1 1 3 2

112.3 3 1 1 1 1 3 2

112.4 2 2 1 1 1 3 1

112.5 2 2 1 1 1 3 2

68
BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS CATEGORY CAT 1 CAT 2 MODEL END SEM EXAM

REMEMBER

UNDERSTAND

APPLY 10 10 30 50

ANALYZE

EVALUATE

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Apply the principles of first angle projection in construction of points and lines.
(Apply)
1. Draw the projections of the following points on a common reference line. (Apply)
A,35 mm above HP and 25 mm in front of VP
B,40 mm below HP and 15mm behind VP
C,50 mm above HP and 25 mm behind VP
D,45 mm below HP and 25 mm behind VP
E, 30 mm behind VP and on HP

2. A line CD measuring 80 mm is inclined at an angle of 30° to HP and 45° to VP. The point C is 20 mm
above HP and 30 mm in front of VP. Draw the projections of the straight line.(Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply the principles of change of position method in projections of solid
problems and draw graphically
1. A pentagonal pyramid of base side 25mm and height 40mm, is resting on the ground on one of its
triangular faces. The base edge of that face is inclined 30o to VP. Draw the projections of the solid. (A)
2. A hexagonal prism has side 25mm and height 50mm has a corner of its base on the ground and
the long edge containing that corner inclined at 30o to HP and 45o to VP. Draw the projections of
the solid. (A)

69
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Develop projections of sectioned solids and their developmental surface.

1. A cylinder of base diameter 50mm and height 60mm rest on its base on HP. It is cut by a plane
perpendicular to VP and inclined at 450 to HP. The cutting plane meets the axis at a distance
15mm from its top base. Draw the sectional plan and true shape of the section. (A)
2. A regular hexagonal pyramid side of base 30 mm and height 60 mm is vertically on its base
on HP, such that two of its sides of the base are perpendicular to VP. It is cut by a plane inclined
at 30° to HP and perpendicular to VP. The cutting plane bisects the axis of the pyramid. Obtain
the development of the lateral surface of the truncated pyramid. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Develop isometric views from orthographic projections

1. A cone of diameter 50 mm and axis 70 mm rests on its base on HP. A section plane
perpendicular to VP and inclined at 30° to HP cuts the solid and passes through a point on axis
which is 40 mm above HP. Draw the isometric view of a truncated cone. (A)

2. A pentagonal pyramid of base edge 25 mm and height 65 mm rests vertically on its base on the HP
such that one of its base edge parallel to VP. It is cut by a plane, parallel to HP and perpendicular to
VP and passes through a point 25 mm from the apex. Draw the isometric view of the frustum of
pyramid. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Construct the perspective projections of simple solids

1. Draw the perspective view of a square prism of base side 40mm and height 50mm. one
vertical lateral face is parallel to PP and 30mm away from it. The station point is 80mm from PP, 80mm
above the base and 60mm to the right of the axis of the prism. (APPLY)

2.A hexagonal pyramid of base side 25mm and axis length 50mm is resting on GP on its base with a side
of base is parallel to and 20mm behind PP. The station point is 60mm above GP and 80mm in front of
PP and lies in a central plane which is 50mm to the left of the axis of the pyramid. Draw the perspective
view of a pyramid. (APPLY)

70
 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS L T P C
21EE2501 SCIENCE 3 0 2 4
Prerequisites for the course
Basic Science

Objectives
To impart knowledge on
1. DC and AC circuits using basic laws.
2. Construction, working principle, EMF equation of DC machines, single phase transformer,
alternator, synchronous motor and induction motor.
3. Electrical Drives and Characteristics
4. Construction, operation, characteristics and applications of semiconductor devices.
5. Concepts of logic gates and their applications.
UNIT I ELECTRIC CIRCUITS 9
Ohms law, Kirchhoff‟s Laws, Reduction of series and parallel circuits solving simple DC Circuits-
single phase AC circuit fundamentals-Power, Power factor-solving simple AC circuits- Introduction
to three phase AC circuits
UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9
DC MACHINE: Principle of Operation DC Motor-types-torque equation - speed-torque
characteristics-losses and efficiency- speed control of DC motors-Electric Braking
AC MACHINES: Single phase Transformers - Construction and working principle, 3 phase Induction
Motor-construction–Principle of operation- types-torque equation-speed -torque characteristics-
1 phase Induction Motor-Principle of operation-types – Industrial Applications.
UNIT III ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND CHARACTERISTICS 9
Basic Elements – Types of Electric Drives – Factors are influencing the choice of Electrical Drive –
Heating and Cooling curves – Loading Conditions and Classes of Duty – Speed – Torque –
Characteristics curves of various electrical drives. – Speed Control of DC and AC drives

UNIT IV ELECTRONIC DEVICES 9

Operation of PN junction diodes, VI characteristics, zener diode, BJT, types-CB, CE, CC
configurations, input and output characteristics, JFET - working principle and characteristics -
Comparison of BJT and FET. MOSFET-types, principle of operation and characteristics, Opto
Electronic Devices - Principles and Applications.
UNIT V DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 9
Number systems-representation of signed numbers: 1‟s complement and 2‟s complement, logic
gates, Combination logic circuits, Half adder, full adder, Flip flops, RS,JK,JK Master slave, D and T
type, counters and shift registers.
Total Periods 45 Theory +
30Practical

71
 Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Model Exam End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (30 Marks) (50 Marks)
CAT – 1 10 Marks Lab Experiments – 10 Marks Descriptive Types
CAT – II 10 Marks Model lab with project – 20
Marks
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C110.1: Analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.
C110.2: Explain about DC &AC machines and identify their applications.
C110.3: Explain the concepts of drives and characteristics of motor es.
C110.4: Analyze and compare the construction, theory and characteristics of the semiconductor
device
C110.5: Design basic combinational and sequential logic circuits
Text Books
1. Muthu Subramanian R, Salivahanan S, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”,
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Juha Pyrohonen, Valeria Hrabovcova, “ Electrical Machine Drives Control – An introduction”,
Wiley 2016

Reference Books
1. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University press,
2012.
2. V K Mehta, Rohit mehta “Principles of Electronics”, [Link]& Company Ltd, 2015.
3. Mahmood Nahvi & Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline Series, Mc
Graw Hill, 5th Edition,2009.

Web Resources: Nil

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO 10

PO 11

PO 12

PSO1

PSO2
PO1

PO2

PO3

PO4

PO5

PO6

PO7

PO8

PO9
CO

110.1 3 3 3 3 2 2

110.2 3 3 3 3 2 3

110.3 3 3 3 3 2 3 1

110.4 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 1

110.5 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3

72
BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS CAT 1 CAT 2 Lab Model Exam END SEM

CATEGORY Experiment EXAM

REMEMBER 20 20 20

UNDERSTAND 30 30 30

APPLY 20 20 10 10 20

ANALYZE 15 15 15

EVALUATE 15 15 15

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1:
1. The resistivity of the conductor depends on (u)
2. The resistance of a conductor of diameter d and length l is R Ω. If the diameter of the conductor is
halved and its length is doubled, the resistance will be (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 2:
1. If field current is decreased in shunt dc motor, the speed of the motor (U)
2. What is the shunt resistance component equivalent circuit obtained by no load test of an induction
motor representative of ? (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 3:
1. Explain different types of electric drives and the factors affecting the selection of drives (U)
2. Explain the thermal model of an electric motor for
(a). Heating the electric motor when starting form cold
(b). Cooling the electric motor when it is switched off from the mains. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 4:
1.A CE amplifier when bypassed with a capacitor at the emitter resistance has
2. A transistor has hie =1KΩ and hfe=60 with an bypassed emitter resistor Re=1kΩ. What will be the
input resistance and output resistance?

73
3. Describe the working of a PN junction diode with neat diagrams. Also explain its V-I Characteristics.
[Link] the working of the CB configuration of BJT

COURSE OUTCOME 5:
1. The following hexadecimal number (1E.43)16 is equivalent to (U)
2. In an SR latch built from NOR gates, which condition is not allowed (U)
3. Explain the working of JK flip flop with its logic Diagram.(U)
4. Design a full adder, construct the truth table, simply the output equations and draw the logic
diagram. (U)

[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 Verification of Ohm‟s and Kirchhoff‟s Laws C110.1
2 Measurement of Power and Power Factor in Single Phase RLC
Circuit C110.1

3 Mechanical Characteristics of DC Shunt and Compound Motor C110.2

4 Load Test on 3 Phase Induction Motor and Electric Braking C110.2
5 Different Configuration of Bipolar Junction transistor & Field Effect
Transistor C110.3

6 Study of characteristics of Zener diode. C110.3

7 Speed Control of DC Shunt Motor C110.4
8 Speed Control of Single phase slip ring induction Motor C110.4
9 Study of Logic Gates and Implementation of Binary Adder /
Subtractor C110.5

10 Implementation of Shift registers & Modulo – 16 Counter C110.5

74
CONCEPT MAP

COURSE DESIGNERS:
1. Kannan P Assistant Professor/ECE kannanece@[Link]

75
 L T P C
21CS2512 Python Programming
(Common for Mechanical and Civil) 2 0 2 3

Preamble

This course is an introduction to the Python programming language for students without prior
programming experience. Students are introduced to core programming concepts like data structures,
conditionals, loops, variables, and functions. This course includes an overview of thevarious tools
available for writing and running Python, and gets students coding quickly. It is easy for beginners to
learn, it is widely used in many scientific areas for data exploration.

Prerequisites for the course

• Problem Solving Techniques, Logical Thinking

Objectives

1. To know the features of Python.

2. To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
3. To define Python functions and use function calls.
4. To make students to apply Python data structures – strings, lists, tuples, dictionaries.
5. To work with files in Python.
6. To handle exceptions.
7. To analyse and explore data using python libraries.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PYTHON 5

Features of Python - Modes of Python - values and data types: Variables - expressions -statements –
Operators - Input and Output – comments.

UNIT II CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 5

Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained conditional
(if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Functions: function definition and use,
parameters and arguments, recursion.

UNIT III STRING, LIST, TUPLES 8

Strings: string slices, string functions and methods. Compound data - Lists: list operations - listslices
- list methods - list loop. Tuples: tuple assignment - tuple as return value

UNIT IV DICTIONARY, FILES AND EXCEPTION HANDLING 7

Dictionaries: operations and methods

76
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, Command line argument, Errors: Syntax
Errors, Runtime errors, Logical Errors – Exceptions – handling exceptions

UNIT V MODULES AND PACKAGES 5

Modules, packages, Numpy, Seaborn, Pandas

Total Periods 30 Theory +60

Lab

[Link] List of Experiments CO

Python Program using conditional statements

a) Write a program for checking the given number is even orodd.
b) Write a program for finding biggest number among 3 numbers
c) Implement python script to read person’s age from keyboard

1 and display whether he is eligible for voting or not. CO1

d) Implement python script to check the given year is leap
year or not.
Python Program using looping statements
a) Write a Python Program to generate first N natural
numbers.
b) Write a python program to read a integer and for all non-
negative integers i<n , print i2.
2 c) Write a Python Program to print factorial of a number. CO2
d) Write a Python Program to print sum of digits of anumber
e) Python Program to Print All Numbers in a Range
Divisible by a Given Number
f) Python Program to Find Numbers which are Divisible by
7 and Multiple of 5 in a Given Range

Python Programs using functions

3 a) Write a Python Program to Find Fibonacci Numbersusing CO2
Recursion
b) Write a Python Program to generate Electricity Bill.
4 Python Programs using string CO3

77
 a) Write a Python Program to calculate the number of
digits and letters in a string.
b) Write a Python Program to Count Number of
Lowercase Characters in a String
c) Write a Python Program to Check if the Substring is
Present in the Given String

Python Programs using list

a) Python Program to Print Largest Even and Largest
5 CO3
Odd Number in a List
b) Python Program to Remove Duplicates from a List.

Python Programs using tuples

6 a) Write a Python Program to Create a List of Tuples CO3
with the First Element as the Number and Second
Element as the Square of the Number
Python Programs using dictionaries
a) Write a Python Program to Find the Sum of All the
Items in a Dictionary CO4
b) Write a Python Program to Multiply All the Items in a
Dictionary
Python Programs using files
5 a) Write a Python Program to Count the Number of CO4
Lines, words, characters a in Text File
b) Python Program to Copy One File to Another File.
Implementing real-time/technical applications using
7 Exception handling. (divide by zero error, voter’s age CO4
validity)
Programs using Python library – NumPy, Pandas, Seaborn
a) Write a NumPy program to create an element-wise
comparison (greater, greater_equal, less and less_equal)
of two given arrays.
b) Write a NumPy program to multiply the values of two
8 given vectors. CO5
c) Write a Pandas program to get the powers of an array
values element-wise.
d) Write a Pandas program to create and display a
DataFrame from a specified dictionary data which has
the index labels.

78
 e) Write a Python program to find the correlation between
variables of iris data. Also create a hitmap using Seaborn
to present their relations.

Laboratory Requirements

• 60 Systems with windows / LINUX operating system with python IDLE or equivalent.
Continuous Assessment Lab Components Assessments End Semester Practical
Test Exams
(30 Marks)
(20 Marks) (50 Marks)

1. Descriptive questions 1. Lab experiments 10 Marks. 1. Descriptive questions

CAT 1 – 10 Marks 2. Model examination with project
CAT 2 - 10 Marks 20 Marks
Outcomes

Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

C111.1: Write Python programs for solving problems using conditional statements.

C111.2: Write Python programs for solving problems using looping statement and list and
decompose a Python program into functions.
C111.3: Represent data using Python strings, lists, and tuples, and solve computational problems
using them.
C111.4: Solve computational problems using data represented in dictionaries and files handle
exceptions while dealing with data.
C111.5: Write modules and packages and Use Numpy, Seaborn and Pandas libraries in real time to
solve scientific problems.
Text Books

1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist”, Second
Edition, Shroff/O‘Reilly Publishers, 2016.
Reference Books

1. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python”, Wiley India Edition,
2016.
Web Resources
1. Python for Data science - [Link] (Unit V
– Numpy, Pandas, Seaborn)

79
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PS PS

C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 O O
O
1 2
1 2 2 2 1 1

2 1 1 1 2 1

3 2 2 1 1 1

4 2 1 1 2 1

5 1 1 1 2 1

BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS CAT 1 CAT 2 Lab Model Lab END SEM
CATEGORY Experiments PRACTICA
LEXAM

Remember 10 10 10

Understand 10 10 10

Apply 80 80 100 100 80

Analyze

Evaluate

Create

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT

QUESTIONSCOURSE OUTCOME 1:

1. Write a Python Program to read the unit of electricity consumed in a house and calculate
the amount to be paid for the electricity consumed. The bill amount should be calculated
as per the given specification:
a. For 0 to 100 units the per unit is ₹ 0/-

80
 b. For 0 to 200 units, for the first 100 unit the per unit cost is zero and the next
100 units, the consumer shall pay ₹ 1.5 per unit.
c. For 0 to 500 units, the consumer shall pay ₹ 0 for the first 100 units, for the next
100 units the consumer shall pay ₹ 2 per unit, for the next 300 units the unit cost is
₹3.00/- (Apply)
2. Explain in detail about the various conditional statements that are supported by Python.
(Understand)
3. Differentiate variables and constants. (Analyse)

COURSE OUTCOME 2:
1. Write a Python Program to Read a Number n and Compute n+nn+nnn. (Apply)
2. Differentiate break and continue. (Analyse)
3. Write a Python Program to read the unit of electricity consumed in a house and calculate
the amount to be paid for the electricity consumed. The bill amount shouldbe calculated as
per the given specification:
a. For 0 to 100 units the per unit is ₹ 0/-
b. For 0 to 200 units, for the first 100 unit the per unit cost is zero and the next
100 units, the consumer shall pay ₹ 1.5 per unit.
c. For 0 to 500 units, the consumer shall pay ₹ 0 for the first 100 units, for the next
100 units the consumer shall pay ₹ 2 per unit, for the next 300 units the unit cost is
₹3.00/- (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 3:
1. What is printed by the following statements? (Appy)
s = "engineering"
r = ""

for item in s:

r = [Link]() + rprint(r)
2. Is string mutable. Justify your answer. (Understand)
3. List out some compound data type that are supported by python.(Remember)
COURSE OUTCOME 4:
1. What happens if the file is not found in the following Python code? (Apply)
a=False

while not a:
try:

81
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
f_n = input("Enter
file name")i_f =
open(f_n, 'r')

except:
print("Input file not found")

2. Write a Python Program that Reads a Text File and Counts the Number of
Times a Certain Letter Appears in the Text File. (Apply)
3. How will you handle exception when it is raised? Explain. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5:
1. Write a Pandas program to create and display a one-dimensional array-
like object containing an array of data using Pandas module. (Apply)
2. Explain in detail about modules and packages in Python. (Understand)

82
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21GE1512 Engineering Workshop
0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Basic Science
Objectives
To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 Study of joints in roofs C112.1

2 Hands-on-practice: T joint C112.1

3 Preparation of Butt joints, lap joints and T joints by shielded C112.2

metal arc welding
4 Forming and Bending - Model Making-Tray, Funnel, dust pan C112.2

5 Study of pipeline joints, its locations and functions; valves, C112.3

taps, couplings, unions, reducers, elbows in household
fittings
6 Hands-on-exercise: Basic pipe connections, mixed pipe C112.3
material connections, pipe connections with different
joining components
7 Study of basic construction materials, masonry and C112.3
concretes
8 Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, C112.4
lamp and energy meter
9 Fluorescent lamp wiring C112.4
10 Earthing Techniques C112.4

11 Stair case wiring C112.4

12 Go down Wiring C112.4

13 Study of Electronic components and equipment’s- Resistor C112.5
Color Coding and CRO
14 Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT C112.5
15 Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – C112.6
Using general purpose PCB

[Link]. List of Projects Related CO

Experiment
1. Making a Switch Board C112.1

83
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
2. Making a Tool Stand C112.1

3. Making a Table Drawer Carpentry C112.1

4. Fabrication of Footstep Pedastal C112.1

5. Making a Welding Fixtures C112.2

6. Making a Sheet Metal Bending Machine Welding C112.2

7. Fabrication of Metal Box C112.2

8. Fabrication of Welding Chute C112.2

9. Fabrication of Tool Box Sheet Metal C112.2

10. Fitting water pipeline to wash basin Plumbing C112.3

11. Construct of partition wall using Flemish bond Masonry & C112.3
Concrete
12. Grade of Concrete C112.3

13. House Wiring 1. Fluorescent Wiring

2. Staircase Wiring
3. Go down Wiring
4. Residential House
Wiring
C112.4
14. GSM based House Monitoring Control System Soldering Practice – C112.6
Component Devices
& Circuits
15. Android based electrical appliance control Soldering Practice – C112.6
Component Devices
& Circuits

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams
(60 Marks) (40 Marks)
LAB EXPERIMENTS 40 MARKS 40
MODEL LAB WITH PROJECT 20 MARKS
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C113.1 Fabricate carpentry components
C113.2 Use welding equipment’s to join the structures and sheet metal works
C113.3 Perform basic plumbing operations and concrete study

84
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
C113.4 Carry out basic home electrical works and appliances
C113.5 Measure the electrical and electronic Parameters and quantities

C113.6 Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices

Laboratory Requirements
CIVIL
1 Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes, Plastic pipes, 15 Sets
flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and other fittings
2 Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos
3 Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets
4 Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 Nos
5 Power Tools: 2 Nos.
Demolition Hammer 2 Nos.
Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos.
Wooden Cutter
MECHANICAL
1 Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2 Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3 Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, Wire brush, etc., 5 Sets
4 Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos.
5 Sheet metal working tools 15 Sets.
6 Standard working tools 15 sets
ELECTRICAL
1 Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2 Electrical Measuring Instruments 10 Sets
3 Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 Each
4 Megger (250V/500V) 1No.
5 Power Tools: (a) Range Finder (b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
ELECTRONICS
1 Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2 Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50Nos.
3 Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4 Multimeters 10Nos.
Reference Books
1. [Link], [Link]& S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering Practices
Laboratory”, Anuradha Publications, (2007)
2. [Link], [Link]&[Link], “Engineering Practices Lab Manual”, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, (2006)
3. H.S. Bawa, “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, (2007)
4. [Link] Prasad & P.M.M.S. Sarma, “Workshop Practice”, Sree Sai Publication, (2002).
Web Resources
[Link]

85
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 3 2 2 1
1 3
2 2 3 2 1
1 3
3 3 3 1 1
1 3
4 3 2 2 1
1 3
5 2 1 1
6 3 2 1 2

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to fabricate carpentry components (Apply)

1) Make a T-lap joint from the given wood pieces as shown in the drawing.

2) Make a dovetail joint from the given wooden work piece as per the drawing given below.

86
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to Use welding equipment’s to join the

structures and sheet metal works (Apply)

1. Make a Lap joint from the given pieces using arc welding as shown in the drawing.

1. Prepare a ‘T’ joint from the given M.S. plates using arc welding as shown in the diagram

87
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
2. Prepare a ‘Butt’ joint from the given M.S. plates using arc welding as shown in the
diagram

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to perform basic plumbing operations

1. Make a pipe fitting connections from the given GI / PVC pipes and fittings as shown in
the drawing.

2. Prepare the GI / PVC Pipe joint by using the given pipes and fittings as per the diagram
given below.

88
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
3. Study of basic construction materials, masonry and concretes

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to carry out basic home electrical works
and appliances.

1. Make an industrial illumination circuit wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and
energy meter.

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to measure the electrical and electronic
parameters and quantities

1. Conduct an experiment using a starter to show the lamp will continue to glow even when
starter is removed.
COURSE OUTCOME 6: Students will be able to elaborate on the components, gates,

soldering practices
1. To perform soldering and Desoldering of electronic components on PCB

Concept Mapping

Engineering Workshop

Mechanical Electrical & Electronics Civil

Welding House Wiring Basic Construction

Materials
Carpentry Fluorescent Lamp Wiring
Masonry
Sheet Metal Stair Case Wiring
Concretes
Plumbing Electronic Components &

Test Projects

COURSE DESIGNERS
1. [Link] Bhalji, Assistant Professor /Mech HoD/Mech

89
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

SEMESTER III

90
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21MA3201 Probability and Statistical Analysis
3 1 0 4
Preamble:
This course provides an introduction to numerical methods and engineering statistics for
engineering students. The focus of numerical methods is translating engineering problems into
algorithms and implementing them in a spreadsheet or programming language. Topics covered
include numerical interpolation, integration and differential equations. The statistics portion
teaches students basic probability theory, standard distribution, the central limit theorem,
hypothesis testing, confidence intervals and design of experiments.

Prerequisites for the course

Basic knowledge in probability theory.

Objectives
The Course will enable learners:
1. To improve their ability in solving partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and
boundary conditions.
2. To have knowledge in simple integrals.
3. To introduce the basic concepts of probability.
4. To familiarize with ANOVA
5. To apply the concept of testing of hypothesis to Engineering problems

UNIT I Interpolation and Numerical Integration 9+3

Lagrange’s interpolation formula for unequal intervals – Newton’s forward and backward difference
interpolation for Equal intervals – Numerical single integrations using Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3
rule and Simpson’s 3/8 rule
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on Newton’s forward and backward interpolation, Numerical integration.

UNIT II Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations 9+3

Solution of ODE by Single step methods: Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Fourth order
Runge-Kutta method for solving first order equations - Multi step methods : Milne’s method for
solving first order equations.
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on Taylor’s series, Euler’s method, Fourth order Runge-Kutta method and
Adam’s method
UNIT III Probability and Distributions 9+3
Definitions of probability, sampling theorems, conditional probability; mean, median, mode and
Standard deviation; Random variables, Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution.
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on Probability, Random variables and distributions.
UNIT IV Testing of Hypothesis 9+3
Sampling distributions and Standard Error - Small samples and large samples - Test of hypothesis -
Type I, Type II Errors - Large sample tests for mean –Small sample tests for mean – t and f test - Chi-
Square distribution -Test of independence of attributes.

91
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on Small sample tests for mean – t ,f test, Chi- Square distribution.
UNIT V Design of Experiments 9+3
Basic principles of experimentation - Analysis of variance – One-way classification – Completely
Randomized Design –Two-way classification - Randomized Block Design – Comparison of CRD and
RBD.
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
• Tutorial Problems on ANOVA, Completely Randomized Design
Total Periods 45 + 15 = 60 Periods
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
1. Descriptive Questions 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 1 – 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes
CAT 2 – 10 Marks
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO 1: Apply numerical techniques in interpolations and Integration (Apply)
CO 2: Apply the concepts of probability which can describe real life phenomenon. (Apply)
CO 3: Apply the concept of probability distributions which can describe real life Problems (Apply)
CO 4: Compare testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems. (Analyze)
CO 5: Analyze the design of experiments in the field of agriculture (Analyze)
Text Books
1. .[Link] & R.K Jain , “Numerical Methods” New Age International Publishers , New
Edition 2015. (CO1, CO2)
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015. (CO3, CO4, CO5)

Reference Books
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, New Edition, 2017.
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 2016.
4. Grewal. B.S. and Grewal. J.S., “Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science ", 10th Edition,
Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
5. Advanced Engineering Mathematics E. Kreyszig John Wiley & Sons 10th Edition, 2016.
6. Engineering Mathematics Srimanta Pal et al Oxford University Press 3 rd Edition, 2016

Web Resources:
1. Numerical Integration
-[Link]
[Link]
2. Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations
-[Link]
[Link]
3. Probability and distributions - [Link]
4. Testing of hypothesis - [Link]
5. Design of experiments - [Link]

92
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping:
PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3

1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 3 2 2

2 3 2

3 3 2

4 3 2 2

5 3 2 2

ASSESSMENT PATTERN :

BLOOM’S ASSESSMENT TESTS END SEMESTER

CATEGORY EXAMINATION
CAT – 1 CAT -2 FAT - 1 FAT - 2
REMEMBER 10 10 5 5 10
UNDERSTAND 30 10 10 10 10
APPLY 60 40 10 10 50
ANALYZE 0 40 0 0 30
EVALUATE 0 0 0 0 0
CREATE 0 0 0 0 0

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 (CO 1) : (Apply)
1) (i) Find the y(3) in the following table using Lagrange’s interpolation
formula
X 0 1 2 4
Y 1 3 9 81

ii) By dividing the range into 10 equal parts evaluate 𝜋∫𝑠𝑖 𝑛𝑥 𝑑𝑥

0
dy
2) Find y(0.1) using Runge-Kutta (R.K) method given that = y 2 + xy ; y(0)=1
dx
COURSE OUTCOME 2 (CO 2) : (Apply)

93
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

1) A random variable ‘X’ has the following probability function

X 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
p(x) a 3a 5a 7a 9a 11a 13a 15a 17a
(i) Determine the value of ‘a’
(ii) Find 𝑃(𝑋 < 3), 𝑃(𝑋 ≥ 3), 𝑃(0 < 𝑋 < 5)
(iii) Find the distribution function of X.
2) If X is a continuous random variable with probability density function
𝑘𝑥2, −1 < 𝑥 < 1
𝑓( 𝑥) = {
0, 𝑒𝑙𝑠𝑒 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒
then find (i)The value of 𝑘
(ii)The mean and variance of X
1
(iii) 𝑃( ≤ 𝑥 < 4)
3
COURSE OUTCOME 3 (CO 3) : (Apply)

1) Derive Mean and Variance of a Binomial distribution

2) The weekly wages of 1000 workmen are normally distributed around a mean of
Rs. 70 with Standard Deviation of Rs. 5. Estimate the number of workers whose
weekly wages will be (i) Between Rs. 69 and 72 (ii) less that Rs. 69 (iii) more than
Rs 72.

COURSE OUTCOME 4 (CO 4) : (Analyze)

1. A random sample of 10 boys had the following I.Q.’s 70, 120, 110, 101, 88, 83, 95,
98, 107, 100. Do these data support the assumption of a population mean I.Q of
100 ? Find a reasonable range in which most of the mean I.Q values of samples of
10 boys lie.

2. To verify whether a course in accounting improved performance, a similar test

was given to participant both before and after the course. The marks are
Before : 44 40 61 52 32 44 70 41 67 72 53 72
After : 53 38 69 57 46 39 73 48 73 74 60 78
What the course useful?
3. Two batches each of 12 animals are taken for test of inoculation. One batch was
inoculated and the other batch was not inoculated. The numbers of dead and
surving animals are given in the following table in the both cases. Can the
inoculation be regarded as effective against the disease?
Dead Survived
Inoculated 15 85
Not inoculated 25 75
COURSE OUTCOME 5 (CO 5): (Analyze)

1. An experiment was designed to study the performance of 4 different detergents

for cleaning fuel injectors. The following “cleanness “readings were obtained with
specially designed equipment for 12 tanks of gas distributed over 3 different
models of engines:

94
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Engine 1 Engine 2 Engine 3 Total

Detergent A 45 43 51 139
Detergent B 47 46 52 145
Detergent C 48 50 55 153
Detergent D 42 37 49 128
Total 182 176 207 565
Perform the ANOVA and test at 0.01 level of significance whether there are
differences in the detergents or in the engines.

2. A variable trial was conducted on wheat with 4 varieties in a Latin Square Design .
The plan of the experiment and the per plot yield are given below.:

C 25 B 23 A 20 D 20
A 19 D 19 C 21 B 18
B 19 A 14 D 17 C 20
D 17 C 20 B 21 A 15
Analyze data and interpret the result.

95
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME3601 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C

3 1 0 4
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Physics and Engineering Chemistry

Objectives
• Impart knowledge on the basics and application of zeroth and first law of thermodynamics.
• Impart knowledge on the second law of thermodynamics in analysing the performance of thermal
devices.
• Impart knowledge on availability and applications of second law of thermodynamics
• Teach the various properties of steam through steam tables and Mollier chart.
• Impart knowledge on the macroscopic properties of ideal and real gases.

UNIT I BASICS, ZEROTH AND FIRST LAW 9+3

Basics: Thermodynamic system - types, surrounding, universe – state, path, process - Quasi-static,
reversible and irreversible processes - Path and point functions - Intensive and extensive
properties - total and specific quantities - Thermodynamic Equilibrium - Heat and work transfer -
sign convention, P-V diagram. Zeroth law – Concept of temperature and Temperature Scales. First
law – application to closed and open systems – steady and unsteady flow processes.
UNIT II SECOND LAW AND ENTROPY 9+3
Heat source and sink - Statements of second law and its corollaries - Carnot cycle, performance -
Heat Engine - Reversed Carnot cycle - Refrigerator - Heat pump. Clausius inequality - Concept of
entropy - T-s diagram - Entropy change for pure substance - principle of increase in entropy -
Applications of II Law. Availability and Irreversibility for open and closed system.
UNIT III PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCES 9+3
Formation of steam - P-v, T-s, h-s diagrams. Determination of properties of steam using Steam
Table and Mollier Chart – Ideal and actual Rankine cycles, Cycle Efficiency Improvement Methods.

UNIT IV IDEAL AND REAL GASES, THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS 9+3

Properties of Ideal gas, real gas - comparison. Equations of state for ideal and real gases. vander
Waal's relation - Reduced properties - Compressibility factor - Principle of Corresponding states -
Generalized Compressibility Chart. Maxwell relations - Tds Equations - heat capacities relations -
Energy equation, Joule-Thomson experiment - Clausius-Clapeyron equation.
UNIT V PSYCHROMETRY 9+3
Dalton’s Law - Psychrometric properties - Psychrometric chart – air-vapour mixture property
calculations using chart and expressions - Psychrometric processes –sensible heating and cooling
– humidification and dehumidification - evaporative cooling - adiabatic mixing. Simple applications

Total Periods 45+15 =60 Hours

96
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C202.1: Understand the zeroth and first law of thermodynamics, temperature scales and calculate
the property changes in closed and open engineering systems.
C202.2: Apply the second law of thermodynamics in analysing the performance of thermal devices
through energy and entropy calculations.
C202.3: Evaluate various properties of steam and performance parameters of Rankine cycle.
C202.4: Understand the properties of gases and its thermodynamic relations.
C202.5: Analyse the properties of air-vapour mixtures and understand the various psychrometric
processes.

Text Books

1. Nag.P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 6th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill (2017), New Delhi
2. Natarajan, E., “Engineering Thermodynamics: Fundamentals and Applications”, 2nd Edition (2014),
Anuragam Publications, Chennai

Reference Books
1. Cengel, Y and M. Boles, Thermodynamics - An Engineering Approach, Tata McGraw Hill,8th Edition, 2015.
2. Chattopadhyay, P, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 2nd Edition Oxford University Press, 2016.
3. Rathakrishnan, E., “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd, 2006.
4. Claus Borgnakke and Richard E. Sonntag, “Fundamentals of Thermodynamics”, 7th Edition, Wiley
Eastern, 2009.
5. Venkatesh. A, “Basic Engineering Thermodynamics”, Universities Press (India) Limited, 2007.
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C202.1 3 2 1 3

C202.2 3 2 1 1 3

C202.3 2 2 1 1 1 3

C202.4 3 2 1 1 3

C202.5 2 2 1 1 1 3

97
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS END SEM

CAT 1 CAT 2 FAT 1 FAT 2
CATEGORY EXAM

REMEMBER 10 10 5 5 10

UNDERSTAND 10 10 5 5 10

APPLY 30 30 30

ANALYZE 30 30 10 10 30

EVALUATE 20 20 5 5 20

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 Understand the zeroth and first law of thermodynamics, temperature
scales and calculate the property changes in closed and open engineering systems (Understand,
Apply, Analyze, Evaluate)

1. A piston and cylinder machine contains a fluid system which passes through a complete
cycle of four processes. During the cycle, the sum of all heat transfers is -170kJ. The
system completes 100 cycles per minute. Complete the following table showing the method
for each item, and compute the net rate of work input in kW. (An)
Process Q (kJ/min) W (kJ/min) ΔE (kJ/min)
a-b 0 2,170 ------
b-c 21,000 0 ------
c-d -2,100 ------ -36,600
d-a ------- ------ ------

2. Air flows steadily at the rate of 0.5 kg/s through an air compressor entering at 7m/s
velocity, 100 kPa pressure and 0.95 m3/kg, volume and leaving at 5m/s, 700kPa and 0.19
m3/kg. The internal energy of the air leaving is 90 kJ/kg greater than that of the air entering.
The cooling water in the compressor jackets absorbs heat from the air at the rate of 58 kW.
(a). Compute the rate of shaft work input to the air in kW.
(b).Find the ratio of the inlet pipe diameter to the outlet pipe diameter.(E)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply the second law of thermodynamics in analyzing the performance
of thermal devices through energy and entropy calculations (Apply, Analyze, Evaluate)

1. A reversible heat engine operating between reservoirs at 900K and 300K drives a reversible
refrigerator operating between reservoirs at 300K and 250K. The heat engine receives
1800kJ heat from 900K reservoir. The net output from the combined engine refrigerator is
360kJ. Find the heat transferred to the refrigerator and the net heat rejected to the reservoir
at 300K. (An)

98
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

2. Two kg of air at 500 kPa, 80oC expands adiabatically in a closed system until its volume is
doubled and its temperature becomes equal to that of the surroundings which is at 100 kPa,
5oC. For this process, Determine:
(i) The maximum work
(ii) The change in availability

(iii) The irreversibility.(E)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Calculate various properties of steam and performance parameters

of Rankine cycle.(Remember, Apply, Analyze)
1. Explain the phase transformation that takes place when ice (solid) is heated continuously till
superheated steam is obtained. Name the different states involved. Sketch the transformation on a
‘temperature’ Vs ‘heat added’ diagram. (R)

2. In a Rankine cycle, the steam at inlet to turbine is saturated at a pressure of 35bar and the exhaust
pressure is 0.2 bar. The flow rate of steam 9.5 kg/s. Determine (i)the pump work (ii)the turbine
work (iii)Rankine efficiency (iv)Condenser heat flow (v)Work ratio (vi)Specific steam
consumption. (An)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Understand the properties of gases and its thermodynamic

relations(Remember, Understand)

1. Derive Joule Thomson cooefficient and prove that joule Thomson coefficient for ideal gas is
zero. (R)
2. Deduce the expression for variousthermodynacicTds relations of ideal and real gases. (U).

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Calculate the properties of air-vapour mixtures and understand the
various psychrometric processes (Apply, Analyze, Evaluate)

1. Air at 20oC,40% RH is mixed adiabatically with air at 40oC, 40% RH in the ratio of 1kg of
the former with 2kg of the latter (on dry basis). Find the final condition of air.(An)

2. An air – water vapour mixture at 20oC and 50% relative humidity at a presence of 1.013 bar
is heated at constant pressure to a temperature of 35oC. calculate a)The initial and final
specific humidity b).Final relative humidity c).Dew point temperature d).Heat transferred
per kg of dry air.(E)

99
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

CONCEPT MAP
ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS

BASICS, ZEROTH
IDEAL AND REAL
AND FIRST LAW SECOND LAW PSYCHROMET
PROPERTIES GASES,
&ENTROPY RY
OF PURE THERMODYNAMICS
SUBSTANCES RELATIONS

System
Statements Formation of
Surrounding Ideal gas, real gas, Dalton’s Law
Carnot cycle steam
Equations of state
state, path, Properties Psychrometric
Reversed
process vander Waal's properties
Carnot cycle Steam Table relation &chart
Heat and
Refrigerator Mollier Chart
work transfer Compressibility Psychrometric
Heat pump.
factor processes
steady and Rankine cycles
Clausius
unsteady Maxwell relations, Simple
inequality Cycle
flow process Tds& Energy applications
Improvement
Concept of Equations
Zeroth and Methods air-vapour
entropy
First law Joule- mixture
Thomsonexperimen property
t& Clausius- calculations
Clapeyron equation.

100
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME3602 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY
2 1 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
• Engineering physics
Objectives
• Introduce the properties of the fluid, behaviour of fluids under static conditions,
• Impart basic knowledge of the dynamics of fluids and boundary layer concepts.
• Convey the methods of dimensional analysis and model studies
• Expose to the basic principles of hydraulic machine (turbines) and to design Pelton wheel.
• Familiarize with the working principle of pump along with construction of performance
curves.
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 8+2
Properties of fluids- Pressure Measurements-Buoyancy and floatation-Flow characteristics-
Eulerian and Lagrangian Principle of fluid flow– concept of control volume and system –
Reynold’s transportation theorem- continuity equation, energy equation and momentum
equation-Applications.
UNIT II FLOW THROUGH PIPES 7+2
Reynold’s experiment -Laminar flow through circular conduits and circular annuli – Darcy,
Weisbach equation – Friction factor and Moody diagram –Minor losses - Hydraulic and energy
gradient –Pipes in series and parallel – loss of energy in pipes – Equivalent pipes. Boundary layer
concepts – types of boundary layer thickness
UNIT III DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS AND MODEL STUDIES 5+2
Fundamental dimensions – Dimensional homogeneity – Rayleigh’s method and Buckingham Pi
theorem – Dimensionless parameters – Similitude and model studies.
UNIT IV HYDRAULIC TURBINES 8+2
Impact of jets - Velocity triangles - Theory of roto-dynamic machines - Classification of turbines –
Pelton wheel, Francis turbine (inward and outward) and Kaplan turbine- Working principles -
Work done by water on the runner - Efficiencies – Draft tube - Specific speed - Performance
curves for turbines – Governing of turbines.

UNIT V HYDRAULIC PUMPS 7+2

Classification of pumps- Centrifugal pumps– working principle - Heads and efficiencies– Velocity
triangles- Work done by the impeller - performance curves - Reciprocating pump working
principle – indicator diagram and it’s variations – work saved by fitting air vessels – cavitations in
pump.
Total Periods 35+10 = 45 Hours

101
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test(20 End Semester Exams
Marks) (60Marks)
(20 Marks)

CAT 1 - 10 Marks [Link] type questions, and [Link] type

questions.
CAT 2 -10 Marks [Link] choice questions,
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C203.1: Calculate the fluid properties using continuity, energy and momentum equation.
C203.2: Estimate the major loss in flow through pipes using Darcy Weisbach equation.
C203.3: Discover the relationship among the parameters involved in the given fluid
phenomenon and to predict the performances of prototype by model studies.

C203.4: Construct the performance curves for both impulse and reaction turbines.
C203.5: Construct the characteristic curves for centrifugal and reciprocating pumps using
empiricalrelations.
Text Books
1. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, Standard Book House, New Delhi,
(2017).
2. Victor [Link], Wylie E. Benjamin and Bedford W. Keith W, “Fluid Mechanics”,Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing CompanyLtd, New Delhi, 9th Edition, 2017.

Reference Books
1. Bansal, R.K., “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics Machines”, Laxmi publications (P) Ltd, New
Delhi, 5th Edition, 2013.
2. White, F.M., “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2013.
3. Ramamirtham, S., "Fluid Mechanics, Hydraulics and Fluid Machines", Dhanpat Rai and
Sons, New Delhi, 2012.
Web Resources
1. [Link]

102
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO10

PO11

PO12

PSO1

PSO2
PO1

PO2

PO3

PO4

PO5

PO6

PO7

PO8

PO9
CO

C203.1 3
3 2 2 - 1

C203.2 2 3 1 3

C203.3 2 3 1 1 3

C203.4 2 3 1 3

C203.5 2 3 1 3

BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS CAT 1 CAT 2 FAT 1 FAT 2 END SEM

CATEGORY EXAM

REMEMBER 20 20 5 5 20

UNDERSTAND 30 30 10 10 30

APPLY 50 50 10 10 50

ANALYZE

EVALUATE

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

C203.1: List the various fluid properties and apply control volume concept
to fluid mechanics problems – (Apply )

1. Define specific gravity and mention the specific gravity of Mercury. [R]

2. The temperature of lubricant circulated in the engine gets raised during

working stroke. What happens to its viscosity? [U]

3. Water flows through a pipe AB 1.2 m diameter at 3 m/s and then passes
through a pipe BC 1.5 m diameter. At C the pipe branches. Branch CD is 0.8 m in
diameter and carries one – third of the flow in AB. The flow velocity in the branch
CE is 2.5 m/s. Find the volume rate of flow at AB, the velocity in BC, the velocity in
CD and the diameter of CE. [Ap]

103
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
C203.2:Estimate the major loss in flow through pipes using Darcy Weisbach
equation. (Apply)

1. Enumerate the various losses that occur in the fluid flowing through the pipe.
[R]

2. Mention the governing equation for minor losses that occur in a pipe having an
obstacle formed due to scaling in boiler tubes. [U]

3. Three pipes of 400 mm, 200 mm and 300 mm diameters have lengths of 400 m,
200 m, and 300 m respectively. They are connected in series to make a compound
pipe. The ends of this compound pipe are connected with two tanks whose
difference of water levels is 16 m. if co-efficient of friction for these pipes is same
and equal to 0.005, determine the discharge through the compound pipe
neglecting first the minor losses and then including them. [Ap]

C203.3:Discover the relationship among the parameters involved in the

given fluid phenomenon and to predict the performances of prototype by
model studies. (Apply)

1. Name a few fluid properties and state its dimensions. [R]

2. Explain the term dimensional homogeneity. [U]

3. The resisting force R of a supersonic plane during flight can be considered as

dependent upon the length of the aircraft l, velocity V, air viscosity µ, air density 
and bulk modulus of air K. Express the functional relationship between these
variables and the resisting force. [Ap]

C203.4: Describe the working principle and construct performance curves

for both impulse and reaction turbines–( Apply)

1. With a neat sketch represent the velocity triangle for a hydraulic turbine. [R]

2. Explain the difference between the impulse and reaction turbines. [U]

3. Determine the power given by the jet of water to the runner of a Pelton wheel
which is having tangential velocity as 20 m/s. the net head on the turbine is 50 m
and discharge through the jet water is 0.03 m3/s. the side clearance angle is 15
and take Cv as 0.975. [Ap]

C203.5: Construct the characteristic curves for centrifugal and reciprocating

pumps using empirical relations-( Apply)

1. Define manometric efficiency. [R]

104
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
2. What happens to overall efficiency when mechanical efficiency is doubled and
manometric efficiency is halved? [U]

3. The internal and external diameters of the impeller of a centrifugal pump are
200 mm and 400 mm respectively. The pump is running at 1200 rpm. The vane
angles of the impeller at inlet and outlet are 20 and 30 respectively. The water
enters the impeller radially and velocity of flow is constant. Determine the work
done by the impeller per unit weight of water. [Ap]

CONCEPT MAP

105
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME3501 ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND METALLURGY
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Physics
Objectives
• Explain the principles of constitution of alloys, phase diagrams, and Iron carbide Equilibrium
Diagram.
• Classify various types of Heat treatment process and its applications.
• Discuss the properties and applications of Ferrous and Nonferrous metals.
• Summarize the properties of Non-metallic materials and applications.
• Select the suitable materials for various Engineering applications.
UNIT I ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS 9
Constitution of alloys – Solid solutions, substitutional and interstitial – phase diagrams,
Isomorphous, eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic, and peritectoid reactions, Stress strain diagram for mild
steel, Cast iron ,plastic, glass and aluminium, Iron – carbon equilibrium diagram. Classification of
steel and cast Iron microstructure, properties and application
UNIT II HEAT TREATMENT 9
Definition – Full annealing, stress relief, recrystallisation and spheroidising – normalising, hardening
and tempering of steel. Isothermal transformation diagrams – cooling curves superimposed on I.T.
diagram CCR – Hardenability, Jominy end quench test – Austempering, martempering – case
hardening, carburizing, Nitriding, cyaniding, carbonitriding – Flame and Induction hardening –
Vacuum and Plasma hardening. Surface treatment process – shot blasting – sand blasting
UNIT III FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METALS 9
Effect of alloying additions on steel-α and β stabilisers– stainless and tool steels – HSLA, Maraging
steels – Cast Iron – Grey, white, malleable, spheroidal – alloy cast irons, Copper and copper alloys –
Brass, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and Al-Cu – precipitation strengthening treatment –
Bearing alloys, Mg–alloys, Ni–based super alloys and Titanium alloys

UNIT IV NON-METALLIC MATERIALS 9

Polymers – types of polymer, commodity and engineering polymers – Properties and applications of
various thermosetting and thermoplastic polymers (PP, PS, PVC, PMMA, PET, PC, PA, ABS, PI, PAI
Polymers – Urea and Phenol formaldehydes) – Engineering Ceramics – Properties and applications
of Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4, PSZ and SIALON –Composites-Classifications – Metal Matrix and FRP –
Applications of Composites
UNIT V MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND DEFORMATION 9
MECHANISMS
Mechanisms of plastic deformation, slip and twinning – Types of fracture – Testing of materials
under tension, compression and shear loads – Hardness tests (Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell),
hardness tests, Impact test lzod and Charpy, fatigue and creep failure mechanisms.
Total Periods 45

106
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 Marks 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 - 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C204.1Explain alloys and phase diagram, Iron-Iron carbon diagram and steel classification for
material development
C204.2Explain isothermal transformation, continuous cooling diagrams and different heat
treatment processes for material development
C204.3Clarify the effect of alloying elements on ferrous and non-ferrous metals.
C204.4Summarize the properties and applications of non metallic materials.
C204.5Explain/demonstrate the testing of mechanical properties.
Text Books
1. Williams D Callister, “Material Science and Engineering” Wiley India Pvt Ltd, Revised Indian
Edition (2014)
2. Avner, S.H., “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2017.

Reference Books
1. Kenneth [Link] and Michael K. Budinski, “Engineering Materials”, Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited, (2010)
2. Raghavan.V, “Materials Science and Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., (2015)
3. [Link], “Engineering Materials and Metallurgy”, 1st Edition, Dorling Kindersley, (2012)
4. George E. Dieter, Jr, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, Create Space Independent Publishing Platform,
(2014).
Web Resources
[Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO10

PO11

PO12

PSO1

PSO2
PO1

PO2

PO3

PO4

PO5

PO6

PO7

PO8

PO9
CO

C204.1
3 3 2 3
C204.2 3 2 1 2 2 3
C204.3 3 2 1 2 2 3
C204.4 3 2 2 3
C204.5
3 2 1 1 1 2 3

107
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS END SEM

CAT 1 CAT 2 FAT 1 FAT 2
CATEGORY EXAM

REMEMBER 30 20 10 10 20

UNDERSTAND 50 30 10 10 30

APPLY 20 50 5 5 50

ANALYZE

EVALUATE

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Explain alloys and phase diagram, Iron-Iron carbon
diagram and steel classification for material development (Remember and
Understand)
1. Construct the Iron-Carbon equilibrium phase diagram and discuss the different phase that
takes place in it. (U)
2. Classify the types of steel and explain its micro structure properties and application (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Explain isothermal transformation, continuous cooling
diagrams and different heat treatment processes for material development
(Remember, Understand and Apply)
1. Construct the TTT diagram and explain the following heat treatments applied to an
eutectoid steel: Austempering, Martempering and Hardening (U)
2. Explain Case hardening Classified as nitriding, cyaniding and carbonitriding (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Clarify the effect of alloying elements on ferrous and non-
ferrous metals(Remember and Understand)
1. Describe the stainless steels with respect to composition, properties and Applications. (U)

(ii)Write short notes on HSLA Steel. (U)

2. Discuss different types of copper alloys and their properties and applications. (R)

(ii)Write short notes on bearing alloys. (U)

108
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Summarize the properties and applications of non metallic
materials.(Remember, Understand and Apply)
1. Describe the properties and applications of the following polymers i) PVC ii) PS iii) PET iv)
PA. (R)

2. Explain the following Engineering Ceramics: a) AL2O3 b) SiC c) Si3N4 (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Explain/demonstrate the testing of mechanical properties.

(Remember, Understand and Apply)
1. Explain Brinell hardness testing and its applications(U)

2. Write down the procedure for preparing Charpy and Izod specimens for impact testing and
also explain how testing is performed? (A)

109
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME3603 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering physics
Objectives
• To introduce the concepts of basic manufacturing processes and fabrication techniques, such
as metal casting, metal joining, metal forming and powder metallurgy
• To Understand the concept and basic mechanics of metal cutting, working of standard
machine tools
UNIT I CASTING AND METAL JOINING 10

Production and Manufacturing –. Different types of castings, design of patterns, moulds and cores;
solidification and cooling; Defects in castings. Fusion welding processes: Manual metal arc welding
Tungsten arc welding Thermit welding, Friction Stir Welding, Weld defects, Principles of brazing,
soldering and adhesive bonding.

UNIT II FORMING PROCESS 9

Plastic deformation and yield criteria; fundamentals of hot and cold working processes; load
estimation for bulk (forging, rolling, extrusion, drawing) and sheet (shearing, deep drawing,
bending) metal forming processes; Powder metallurgy-production of metal powders-stages in
powder metallurgy
UNIT III METAL CUTTING 8
Mechanics of machining, orthogonal metal cutting, merchant’s circle, forces in machining, Types of chip,
single point and multi-point cutting tools – tool geometry and materials, tool wear, tool life, cutting fluids and
Machinability – economics of machining
UNIT IV MACHINE TOOLS AND OPERATIONS 9
Centre lathe, NC/CNC machines, reciprocating machine tools: Shaper, Slotter; Milling: Types
ofmilling machines, up milling, down milling, milling cutters, operations; Drilling: Column and
radial drilling machines, machining time calculations; Reaming, tapping and boring;
UNIT V ABRASIVE PROCESSES AND GEAR CUTTING 9
Abrasive processes: Grinding wheel designation and selection; Types of grinding processes:
Cylindrical grinding, surface grinding, centreless grinding; Honing, lapping; Gear cutting: Forming,
generation, shaping and hobbing; Cost comparison.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 3. Problem-Solving Activities

110
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C205.1 Identify the different metal casting processes, defects and different metal joining processes
C205.2 Define the various hot working , cold working methods of metals and sheet metal making
processes
C205.3 Depict the basic concepts of metal cutting and perform cutting force and tool life
calculations.
C205.4Demonstrate the operational features of the centre lathe CNC Machines and the working
principle of shaper, milling and drilling machine tools
C205.5 Identify various finishing processes and explain the working principle of gear cutting
machine tools
Text Books
1. Hajra Chouldhary S.K and Hajra Choudhury A.K., “Elements of workshop Technology”,
Volume I, Media promoters and Publishers Private Limited, Mumbai, (2014)
2. Hajra Choudhury S.K and Hajra Choudhury A.K., “Elements of Workshop Technology”,
Volume II, Media Promoters, (2014)
3. Rao P.N “Manufacturing Technology – Metal Cutting and Machine Tools”, 3rd Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, (2013)
Reference Books
1. Sharma, P.C., “A Text book of production Technology”, [Link] and Co. Ltd., (2014)
2. Rajput R.K., “A Textbook of Manufacturing Technology”, Laxmi puplication, NewDelhi,
(2014)
3. “Production Technology”HMT McGraw-Hill Education (India) Pvt Limited, 01-May-2001
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C205.1 2 2 1 1 3 3

C205.2 2 2 2 3 2

C205.3 2 2 1 3

C205.4 2 2 2 3

C205.5 2 2 2 3 2

111
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS END SEM

CAT 1 CAT 2 FAT 1 FAT 2
CATEGORY EXAM

REMEMBER 20 20 5 5 20

UNDERSTAND 60 60 10 10 60

APPLY 20 20 10 10 20

ANALYZE

EVALUATE

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 : Identify the different metal casting processes, defects and
different metal joining processes (Remember, Understand)

1. What is the principle of thermit welding? Explain the same with a neat
diagram.(R)
2. Explain in detail the working principle of centrifugal casting. (U)
3. What are the Defects in Welding and Casting? (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2 : Define the various hot working , cold working methods of metals
and sheet metal making processes (Remember, Understand)

4. Explain the classifications of forging process based on the process used? (U)
5. Explain in detail with neat sketch. (i) Bending; (ii) Deep Drawing. (R)

COURSE OUTCOME 3 : Depict the basic concepts of metal cutting and perform cutting
force and tool life calculations. (Remember, Understand, Apply)

6. What are the assumption made in drawing Merchant’s circle. (R)

7. Discuss the purpose of cutting fluids. (R)

COURSE OUTCOME 4 : Demonstrate the operational features of the centre lathe CNC
Machines and the working principle of shaper, milling and
drilling machine tools (Remember, Understand, Apply)

112
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
8. Explain the different machining operations performed on lathe with sketches.
(U)
9. Describe of crank and slatted link mechanism used in shaper with nearsketches.
(U)

COURSE OUTCOME 5 : Identify various finishing processes and explain the working
principle of gear cutting machine tools (Remember, Understand)

10. Explain the gear hobbing processes with sketches. (U)

11. Discuss the factors influencing the selection of grinaing wheel. (U)
12. Explain the centreless grinding operation with sketches. (U)

CONCEPT MAP

113
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21PT3902 VERBAL ABILITY
0 0 2 1
Preamble:

This course is developed to enhance the Verbal competency of the students as Verbal Ability is
commonly a part of the various competitive exams conducted. This course equips the students in
all the aspects of grammar and helps to enhance comprehensive abilities and Analytical skills.

Prerequisites for the course

● Foundational English
Objectives

1. To help the student understand the importance of having his language skills kept
ready for effective use.
2. To provide a host of varied opportunities for the student to hone his acquired language
skills basic components, namely, Grammar, Vocabulary, Spelling and Comprehension.
Module I 6
Articles, Tenses, Voices, Preposition, Conjunctions, Subject-verb agreement, Adverbials.
Module II 6
Parts of speech, Simple, Complex & Compound Sentences, Direct & Indirect Speech, Kinds of
Sentences, Degrees of Comparison, Clauses.

Module III 6
Reading Comprehension, Analogies, Synonyms & Antonyms, Idioms and Phrases.
Module IV 6
Para-jumbles, Phrasal verbs, Modifiers, Punctuations, Misspelled words.
Module V 6
Verbal syllogism, figures of speech, Word completion, Sentence Completion, One word Substitutes
Total Periods 30

Suggested Assessment Activities:

● MCQ test through Google forms or other online test platforms.

Eg. JavaPoint - Verbal Ability [Link]

114
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test -1 Continuous Assessment Test -2 Model Exam

(30 Marks) (30 Marks) (40 Marks)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS MULTIPLE CHOICE

QUESTIONS
Outcomes

Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

CO1: Identify the grammatical errors in a sentence.

CO2: Frame sentences using the correct syntax.

CO3: Understand the concepts stated in a sentence or paragraph and analyze using verbal
reasoning.

CO4: Construct sentences logically and make the texts semantically meaningful as a whole.

CO5: Interpret and analyze texts on a deeper level.

Text Books

1. Wren, P.C., Martin, H, Prasada Rao, N.D.V. (1973–2010). High School English Grammar &
Composition. New Delhi: Sultan Chand Publishers
2. Kumar, Sanjay, Pushp Latha. (2018) English Language and Communication Skills for
Engineers, India: Oxford University Press.
Reference Books

1. Guptha S C, (2012) Practical English Grammar & Composition, 1 st Edition, India: Arihant
Publishers
2. Steven Brown, (2011) Dorolyn Smith, Active Listening 3, 3 rd Edition, UK: Cambridge
University Press.
Web Resources:

1. Indiabix : [Link]
2. All India Exams : [Link]
3. faceprep: [Link]

115
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO Vs PO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

1 3 1
2 3 1
3 3 1
4 2 1
5 2 1

COURSE CONTENT AND SCHEDULE

[Link] TOPIC NO OF HOURS

REQUIRED
Module I
1 Articles 1
2 Tenses 1
3 Voices 1
4 Preposition 1
5 Conjunctions 1
6 Subject-verb agreement, Adverbials 1
Module II
7 Parts of Speech 1
8 Simple, Complex & Compound Sentences 1
9 Direct & Indirect Speech 1
10 Kinds of Sentences 1
11 Degrees of Comparison 1
12 Clauses 1
Module III
13 Reading Comprehension 1
14 Analogies 1
15 Synonyms 1
16 Antonyms 1
17 Idioms And Phrases 2
Module IV
18 Para Jumbles 1
19 Phrasal Verbs 2
20 Modifiers 1

116
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
21 Punctuations 1
22 Misspelled words 1
Module V
23 Verbal Syllogism 2
24 Figures of Speech 1
25 Word Completion 1
26 Sentence Completion 1
27 One word Substitutes 1

117
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21HS1103 TAMIL HERITAGE
2 0 0 1
Preamble:
This course is offered to equip students to create awareness of the contribution of Tamil people
to Indian culture by highlighting the characteristics of Tamil language and literature and
exhibiting Tamil culture through traditional arts such as performing arts and fine arts.
Prerequisites for the course:
The prerequisite knowledge required to study this course is basic knowledge in English and
Tamil Heritage.
UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 6
Language Families in India-Dravidian Languages –Tamil as Classical Language –Classical
Literature in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature –Distributive Justice in Sangam
Literature Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Land Bakthi Literature Azhwars and
Nayanmars-Forms of minor Poetry development of Modern literature in Tamil-Contribution of
Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.
UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – 6
SCULPTURE
Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car
making- Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village Deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari,
Making of musical instruments - Mridangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of
Temples in Social and Economic Life of Tamils.
UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 6
Therukoothu, Karakattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry,
Silambattam, Valari, Tiger dance-Sports and Games of Tamils.
UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 6
Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Agam and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam
Literature -Aram Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient Cities
and Ports of Sangam Age-Export and Import during Sangam Age-Overseas Conquest of Cholas.
UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL 6
MOVEMENT AND INDIAN CULTURE
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle-The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the
other parts of India – Self-Respect Movement – Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems of
Medicine–Inscriptions & Manuscripts–Print History of Tamil Books.
Total Periods 30
Course Outcomes:
CO1 To widen the knowledge on the characteristics of Tamil language and literature.

CO2 To explore the traditional Tamil fine arts and its techniques of Tamil Heritage.

CO3 To evaluate the various types of performing arts and their cultural context.

CO4 To get an insight on the lifestyle and living techniques of Tamil ancestors.

CO5 To recognise and perceive the role played by Tamils in the unity and development of
India.

118
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

CO PO Mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1
CO PO 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2

CO 1 1 2 3 1 3

CO 2 1 3 2 3 2

CO 3 1 3 2 1 2

CO 4 3 2 2 3 2

CO 5 2 3 3 2 3

TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL–(in
print)
2. Social Life of the Tamils- The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.
3. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], [Link]) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies).
4. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.)
5. Keeladi-‘Sangam City Civilization on the banks of river Vaigai’(Jointly Published by:Department
of Archaeology &TamilNadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
6. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to TamilNadu ([Link]) (Published by:
The Author)
7. Porunai Civilization(Jointly Published by:Department of Archaeology &TamilNadu Text Book and
Educational Services Corporation,Tamil Nadu)
8. Journey of Civilization Industo Vaigai([Link])(Published by:RMRL)–Reference Book.

119
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21HS1103 தமிழர் மரபு
2 0 0 1
முன்னுரர(Preamble)
இப்பொடத்திட்டம் தபொறியியல் பயிலும் முதலொம் ஆண்டு மொணவர்களின் முதலொம்
பருவத்திற்கு உரியது. தமிழ் தமொழி மற்றும் இலக்கியத்தின் தன்மமகமள எடுத்துமரத்து
மரபுக் கமலகளொன நிகழ்த்து கமலகள் மற்றும் நுண்கமலகள் வழியொகத் தமிழ்ப்
பண்பொட்மட புலப்படுத்தி இந்திய பண்பொட்டிற்கு தமிழர்கள் ஆற்றிய பங்கிமன
மொணவர்கள் அறியச் தெய்தல்.
பாடநெறிக்கான முன்ெிபெ் தனனகள் (Prerequisites for the course)
தமிழ் ம ொழியில் எழுத படிக்க மதரிந்திருத்தல் அவசியம்.
அலகு I மமொழி மற்றும் இலக்கியம் 6
இந்திய ம ொழிக் குடு ் பங் கள் - திரொவிட ம ொழிகள் - தமிழ் ஒரு மெ ் ம ொழி - தமிழ்
மெவ் விலக்கியங் கள் - ெங் க இலக்கியத்தின் ெ ய ெொர்பற் ற தன் ம - ெங் க இலக்கியத்தில்
பகிர்தல் அற ் - திருக்குறளில் ம லொண்ம க் கருத்துக்கள் - தமிழ் கொப்பியங் கள் தமிழகத்தில்
ெ ண மபௌத்த ெ யங் களின் தொக்க ் - சிற் றிலக்கியங் கள் - தமிழில் நவீன இலக்கியத்தின்
வளர்ெ்சி- தமிழ் இலக்கிய வளர்ெ்சியில் பொரதியொர் ற் று ் பொரதிதொென் ஆகிமயொரின்
பங் களிப்பு.
அலகு II மரபு- பொரை ஓவியங்கள் முதல் நவன ீ ஓவியங்கள் 6
வரர- சிற்பக்கரல
நடுகல் முதல் நவீன சிற் பங் கள் வமர - ஐ ் மபொன் சிமலகள் - பழங் குடியினர் ற் று ் அவர்கள்
தயொரிக்கு ் மகவிமனப் மபொருட்கள் , மபொ ் ம கள் - மதர் மெய் யு ் கமல- சுடு ண்
சிற் பங் கள் - நொட்டுப் புறத் மதய் வங் கள் - கு ரி முமனயில் திருவள் ளுவர் சிமல - இமெக்
கருவிகள் - மிருதங் க ் , பமற, வீமண, யொழ் , நொதஸ்வர ் - தமிழர்களின் ெமூக மபொருளொதொர
வொழ் வில் மகொவில் களின் பங் கு..
அலகு III ொட்டுப் புறக் கனலகள் மற் றும் வீர வினளயாட்டுகள் 6
மதருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்ட ் , வில் லுப்பொட்டு, கணியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்ட ் , மதொல் பொமவக்
கூத்து, சில ் பொட்ட ் , வளரி, புலியொட்ட ் , தமிழர்களின் விமளயொட்டுகள்
அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் தினைக் ககாட்பாடுகள் 6
தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங் களு ் , விலங் குகளு ் - மதொல் கொப்பிய ் ற் று ் ெங் க இலக்கியத்தில்
அக ் ற் று ் புறக் மகொட்பொடுகள் - தமிழர்கள் மபொற் றிய அறக்மகொட்பொடு - ெங் க கொலத்தில்
தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவு ் , கல் வியு ் - ெங் க கொல நகரங் களு ் துமறமுகங் களு ் - ெங் க
கொலத்தில் ஏற் று தி ற் று ் இறக்கு தி - கடல் கடந்த நொடுகளில் மெொழர்களின் மவற் றி.
அலகு V இந்திய ததசிய இயக்கம் மற்றும் இந்திய 6
பண்பொட்டிற்குத் தமிழர்களின் பங்களிப்பு
இந்திய விடுதமலப்மபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங் கு - இந்தியொவின் பிறப்பகுதிகளில் தமிழ் ப்
பண்பொட்டின் தொக்க ் - சுய ரியொமத இயக்க ் - இந்திய ருத்துவத்தில் சித்த ருத்துவத்தின்
பங் கு - கல் மவட்டுகள் , மகமயழுத்துப்படிகள் - தமிழ் புத்தகங் களின் அெ்சு வரலொறு
Total Periods 30

120
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
எதிர்பொர்க்கும் படிப்பின் முடிவுகள்

CO1 மொணவர்கள் தமிழ் தமொழி மற்றும் இலக்கியத்தின் தன்மமகள் குறித்து அறிந்து

தகொள்வொர்.

CO2 தமிழ் மரபு ெொர்ந்த நுண்கமலகமளயும் அதன் நுட்பங்கமளயும் புரிந்து தகொள்வர்.

CO3 நிகழ்த்து கமலகளின் வமககமளயும் அதன் பண்பொட்டுச் சூழமலயும் அறிந்து

தகொள்வர்.

CO4 பழந்தமிழரின் வொழ்க்மகச் சூழல்கமள அறிந்து தகொள்வர்.

CO5 இந்திய ஒருமமப்பொட்டிற்கும் வளர்ச்ெிக்கும் தமிழர்கள் ஆற்றிய பங்கு குறித்து

அறிவர்.

CO PO Mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
CO PO 1 PO12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

CO 1 1 2 3 1 3

CO 2 1 3 2 3 2

CO 3 1 3 2 1 2

CO 4 3 2 2 3 2

CO 5 2 3 3 2 3

TEXT-CUM REFERENCE BOOKS

1. தமிழக வரலொறு - க்களு ் பண்பொடு ் - மக. மக பிள் மள ( மவளியீடு: தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல்
ற் று ் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழக ் ).
2. கணினித்தமிழ் - முமனவர் இல. சுந்தர ் ( விகடன் பிரசுர ் ).
3. கீழடி - மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் க கொல நகர நொகரிக ் ( மதொல் லியல் துமற மவளியீடு).
4. மபொருமந - ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிக ் ( மதொல் லியல் துமற மவளியீடு)

121
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21ME3611 Computer Aided Machine Drawing Laboratory
0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Computer Aided Engineering Graphics
Objectives

• Apply Indian Standards in drawing practices of machine components.

• Show the limits, fits and tolerances in the production drawings of machine components.
• Prepare assembly drawings using standard CAD packages.
Assembly Drawings
DRAWING STANDARDS (2) C207.1
Code of practice for Engineering Drawing, BIS specifications – Welding symbols, riveted joints,
keys, fasteners
ASSEMBLY CONCEPTS: Assembly requirements, bill of materials; Methods of assembly-bolts, nuts,
studs, screws and pins; Methods of axial and radial retention of parts of an assembly; Assembly of
parts with emphasis on assembly sequence and appropriate fits. (4) C207.2
FITS AND TOLERANCES: Limits, fits and tolerances; Need, types, representation of tolerances on
drawing, calculation of minimum and maximum clearances and allowances; Geometric tolerance:
uses, types of form and position tolerances, symbols, method of indicating geometric tolerances on
part drawings; Surface finish symbols - methods of indicating the surface roughness; Blue print
reading exercises; Preparation of production drawing. (5) C207.3

[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 Shaft couplings C207.4

2 Plummer block C207.4

3 Sleeve and cotter joint C207.4

4 Screw jack C207.4

5 Universal Joint C207.4

6 Machine Vice C207.4

[Link]. List of Projects CO

1. Basic 2D models (Chess coins, Bowl, etc- level 1) C207.5

2. Isometric models (Table, Chair, etc – level 2) C207.5

3. CAD Model and Real Model based on the outcome of the level 1 C207.5

122
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
and 2 projects. – (level 3)
Total periods:45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams
(60 Marks) (40 Marks)

Lab experiment - 40 Marks Practical Exam

Model lab with project 20 Marks

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C207.1 Apply the drawing standards in the part drawing
C207.2 Apply the part assembly guidelines in creating the 3D Models.
C207.3 Analyze fits and tolerance and interpret the production drawings.
C207.4 Design and develop assembly drawing for simple machine components.
C207.5 Design and develop the complete assembly of product.

Laboratory Requirements
Hardware:
1. Intel i5 core due processor with 4GB ram with 500GB hard disk – 30 Nos.
2. Laser Printer – 1 No.
Software:
Drafting package – AutoCAD – Adequate license (Open source)
Reference Books

1. MACHINE DRAWING [IN FIRST-ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD] By N. D. Bhatt, V. M. Panchal 50th Edition:
2016.
2. K.L. Narayana, P. Kannaiam and K. Venkata Reddy,” Machine Drawing”, published
by New Age International Publishers,2019.
3. N. Siddeshwar, P. Kanniah, V.V.S. Sastri,” Machine Drawing”, published by McGrawHill, 2017
Web Resources
1. [Link]

123
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO10

PO11

PO12

PSO1

PSO2
PO1

PO2

PO3

PO4

PO5

PO6

PO7

PO8

PO9
CO

207.1 2 3 3 2
207.2 2 3 3 2
207.3 2 3 3 2
207.4 1 1 2 3 1 3 2
207.5 1 1 2 3 1 3 2

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS(LIST OF PROJECTS)

Level 1

1. Draw any one component as shown below with necessary comments (Assume
suitable dimensions).

124
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

125
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
2. Draw the isometric view of any one component given below (Assume suitable
dimensions).

3. Assemble the parts and draw views – any one (Assume suitable dimensions).

126
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

127
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

Level 2 (any one Project)

1. Design and drafting of Gear train
In this project-based course, Student will learn to develop a Gear train design
assembly using AutoCAD software. By developing this project, the will learn to design: Gear
Shafts, Spur Gears, Bearing Housing, Bearings and Assembly of a gear train.

2. Design and Drafting of Bi-Cycle as per the dimensions given

This project course introduces you to the concept of designing Mechanisms that can
be applied in [Link] are the base of every design, from simple toys to vehicles
to spaceships.

128
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Level 3
Students are asked to do own projects (both CAD Model and Real Working Model) based on
the outcome of the level 1 and 2 projects.
Example Projects:
1. Design and draw the mechanism for car towing.

2. Design and draw the model for material handling of lime stone or food materials

129
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME3612 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Practices Laboratory
Objectives
• To practice the moulding process and welding operations.
• To practice different types of sheet metal operations.
• To perform various machining operations like facing, turning, knurling, thread cutting,
shaping, grinding, and milling.
• To obtain the knowledge of different gear manufacturing processes.
[Link] List of Experiments COs
`1 Prepare a Mould by using Solid/Split/Loose-piece Patterns 1
2 Fabrication of Tray/Funnel in sheet metal 2
3 Prepare a Tee joint by Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) 3
Step Turning, Knurling and Taper Turning Operations on circular
4 parts using Centre Lathe. 4
External Thread Cutting Operation on circular parts in Centre
5 Lathe. 4
6 Shaping - Hexagonal head on circular parts using shaper machine 4
7 Grinding Components using Surface Grinding Machine 4
8 Grinding Components using Cylindrical Grinding Machine 4
9 Spur gear cutting using milling machine 4
10 Measurement of cutting forces in Milling / Turning Process 4
11 Generating gears using hobbing / Shaping machine 5
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods

Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams

(60 Marks) (40 Marks)
Practical
Lab experiment - 40 Marks
Model lab with project 20 Marks
Course Outcomes

Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

C208.1. Make a mould using different types of patterns.
C208.2. Create objects using sheet metal.
C208.3. Perform the Welding Process for the given materials.
C208.4. Perform different machining processes in lathe, shaper, grinders and milling machines and
Measure their Cutting forces.
C208.5. Perform different gear generating process based on requirements.

130
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Laboratory Requirements
[Link] Table 12”X12”
[Link] Box
[Link] Patterns for Casting
[Link] Foundry Tools
5. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
6. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
7. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, Wire brush, etc., 5 Sets
8. Anvil 1 No.
9. Sheet metal tools
10. Standard working tools 15 sets
11. Centre lathe 7 Nos.
12. Shaping machine 1 No
13. Horizontal Milling Machine 2 No
14. Vertical Milling Machine 1 No
15. Surface Grinding Machine 1 No
16. Cylindrical Grinding Machine 1 No
17. Lathe Tool Dynamometer 1 No
18. Milling Tool Dynamometer 1No
19. Gear Hobbing Machine 1 No
[Link] Makers Microscope 1 No
21. Gear Shaping machine 1 No

Reference Books
1. Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K., Nirjhar Roy, “Elements of Workshop Technology -
Vol. I”, 14th Edition, MediaPromoters& Publishers Private Limited, Mumbai, 2008.
2. Hajra Choudhury S.K., Nirjhar Roy, “Elements of Workshop Technology-Volume-2”, 15th Edition,
Media Promoters &PublishersPvt Ltd, Mumbai, 2010.
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C208.1 2 2 1 3 2

C208.2 2 2 1 3

C208.3 2 2 1 3 2

C208.4 1 1 1 1 1 3 3

C208.5 2 2 1 3

131
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
21ME3613 Fluid Mechanics and Machines Laboratory L T P C
0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Objectives
• Compute the rate of flow through pipes using various flow measuring devices such as
Venturi meter, orifice meter and rotameter.
• Discuss the performance characteristics of turbines and pumps.
• Demonstrate the basic principles of fluid mechanics and working of hydraulic
machines

[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter C209.1
2 Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi
meter. C209.1
3. Calculation of the rate of flow using Rotameter.
C209.1
4 Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes. C209.1
5 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of
centrifugal Pump C209.2
6 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of
C209.3
reciprocating pump.
7 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of
C209.2
Gear pump.
8 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of
C209.4
Pelton wheel.
9 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of
C209.5
Francis turbine.
10 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic
curves of Kaplan turbine C209.5
Total Periods : 45

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams
(60 Marks) (40 Marks)
Practical Exam
Lab experiment - 40 Marks
Model lab with project 20 Marks
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
C209.1. Perform test on Orifice, Venturi and Rota meter to determine the coefficient of discharge
C209.2. Draw the characteristics of curve of Centrifugal and Gear pump
C209.3. Analysis the performance of Reciprocating pump
C209.4. Perform the test on impulse turbine (Pelton) and draw its characteristics curve
C209.5. Draw the characteristics curve for reaction turbine like Francis and Kaplan turbine

132
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

Laboratory RequirementsFor a Batch of 30 Students

[Link]. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.

1 Orifice meter setup 1 No
2 Venturi meter setup 1 No
3 Rotameter setup 1 No.
4 Pipe Flow analysis setup 1 No.
5 Centrifugal pump 1 No
6 Reciprocating pump setup 1 No.
7 Gear pump setup 1 No.
8 Pelton wheel setup 1 No
9 Francis turbine setup 1 No
10 Kaplan turbine setup 1 No

Reference Books
1. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Book House,
New Delhi 2019.
2. Bansal, R.K., "Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines", Laxmi Publications (P)
Ltd., 2019.

Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C209.1 1 1 3 3 1 1 3 1

C209.2 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 1

C209.3 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 1

C209.4 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 1

C209.5 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 1

133
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

SEMESTER IV

134
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME4601 CNC MACHINES AND AUTOMATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
• Manufacturing Technology

Objectives
• Demonstrate the construction and tooling of CNC machine.
• Prepare simple part programme for different operations.
• Illustrate the interfacing of sensors and actuators with PC.
• Make use of the Internet of things.

UNIT I CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS AND TOOLING 8

Design features, specification Chart of CNC machines, use of slideways, balls, rollers and coatings,
motor and lead screw, swarf removal, safety and guarding devices, various cutting tools for CNC
machines, overview of tool holder, different pallet systems and automatic tool changer system,
management of a tool room.
UNIT II PART PROGRAMMING 10
Part programming and basic concepts of part programming, NC words, part programming formats,
simple programming for rational components, part programming using canned cycles, subroutines
and do loops, tool off sets, cutter radius compensation and wear compensation.
UNIT III AUTOMATION AND NC SYSTEM 9
Role of computer in automation, emerging trends in automation, automatic assembly, manufacture
of magnetic tape, manufacture of printed circuit boards, manufacture of integrated Circuits,
Overview of FMS, Group technology, CAD/CAM and CIM.

UNIT IV REAL TIME INTERFACING 9

Data acquisition systems, virtual instrumentation, interfacing of sensors/actuators with PC,
condition monitoring, adaptive control, HMI and SCADA systems.

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL IOT 9

IoT architecture, M2M Architecture; Cloud: Types, edge analytics, fog computing; Augmented
reality and virtual reality, big data analytics, predictive analytics.
Total Periods 45

135
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60Marks)

CAT 1 - 10 Marks 1. Descriptive type questions, 1. Descriptive type

questions.
CAT 2 -10 Marks 2. Multiple choice questions.
DESCRIPTIVE TYPE
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C210.1: Construct a tool room for appropriate function taking into account the safety and guarding
devices.
C210.2: Prepare a part programming using canned cycles, subroutines and do loops.
C210.3: Analyze the difference between FMS, Group technology, CAD/CAM and CIM
C210.4: Complete the interfacing of sensors/actuators with PC, condition monitoring, adaptive
control, HMI and SCADA systems
C210.5: Select the suitable IoT for automation
Text Books
1. CNC Machines – Programming and Applications by M Adithan and BS Pabla; New Age
International (P) Ltd., Delhi.
2. Mikell P Groover , "Automation, Production Systems and Computer-Integrated
Manufacturing", Pearson Education, 2016.

Reference Books
1. Alasdair Gilchrist , "Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things", 1 st Edition, Apress, 2017.
2. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John , "Virtual instrumentation using Lab VIEW", Tata McGraw-Hill
Publications Co. Ltd, 2017.
3. CNC Machine by Bharaj; Satya Publications, New Delhi.

Web Resources
1. [Link]

136
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12 PSO PS O
1 2
C210.1 3 3
C210.2 2 3 3
C210.3 2 3 3
C210.4 2 3 3
C210.5 2 3 3

BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS CAT 1 CAT 2 FAT 1 FAT 2 END SEM

CATEGORY EXAM

REMEMBER 20 20 5 5 20

UNDERSTAND 30 30 15 10 30

APPLY 50 30 5 5 30

ANALYZE 20 5 20

EVALUATE

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

C210.1: Construct a tool room for appropriate function taking into account
the safety and guarding devices – Apply

1. Explain the usage of slideways, rollers and coating. [R]

2. Enumerate the different cutting tools for CNC machines. [U]

3. Sketch the specification chart of CNC machine. [Ap]

C210.2: Prepare a part programming using canned cycles, subroutines and

do loops. (Apply)

1. Explain the basic concepts of part programming. [R]

2. Summarize the simple programming for rational components. [U]

3. Construct the part programming using canned cycles, subroutines and do loops
for automatic tool changer. [Ap]

C210.3: Analyze the difference between FMS, Group technology, CAD/CAM

and CIM. (Analyze)

137
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
1. Mention the various FMS components. [R]

2. Enumerate the types of FMS in an automated industry. [U]

3. Compare and contrast FMS, Group technology and CAD/CAM. [Ap]

C210.4: Complete the interfacing of sensors/actuators with PC, condition

monitoring, adaptive control, HMI and SCADA systems - Apply

1. Mention the components of data acquisition system. [R]

2. Paraphrase the interfacing procedure for sensors or actuators with PC. [U]

3. Sketch the adaptive control of automation system in a production system. [Ap]

C210.5: Select the suitable IoT for automation - Analyze

1. Describe the types of cloud in an Industrial IoT. [U]

2. Sketch the components of M2M architecture.[Ap]

3. Compare and contrast the AR and VR . [An]

138
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME4602 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
2 1 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Mechanics
Objectives
• Explain the concepts of stress, strain and deformation of solids
• Examine the stresses and deformation induced in thin cylindrical and spherical shells.
• Calculate the stresses and deformation in circular shaft and helical spring due to
torsion.
• Compute the effect of component dimensions and shape on stresses and deformations.
UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 7+2
Stability- Strength- Stiffness- Tensile- Compressive and Shear stresses - Strain – Poisson’s ratio
– Lateral Strain - Simple and Compound bars – Relation between Elastic Constants – Thermal
Stresses. Strain Energy: Uniaxial Loads - Gradually Applied Load - Suddenly Applied Load and
Impact Load.

UNIT II ANALYSIS OF STRESSES IN TWO DIMENSIONS 7+2

State of stresses at a point – Normal and tangential stresses on inclined planes - Mohr’s circle
for plane stress and plane strain – Principal planes and stresses - Plane of maximum shear
stress - –Hoop and longitudinal stresses in thin cylinders and shells – under internal pressure
– deformation of thin cylinders and shells.

UNIT III TORSION IN SHAFTS AND SPRINGS 7+2

Analysis of torsion of circular bars – Bars of Solid and hollow circular section – Stepped shaft
– Twist and torsion stiffness. Springs- Classification – Leaf springs, closed coil helical springs -
Application of various springs – Maximum shear stress in spring – Deflection of helical coil
springs under axial loads.
UNIT IV BEAMS - LOADS AND STRESSES 7+2
Beams – types of supports – simple and fixed, types of load – concentrated, uniformly
distributed and uniformly varying load, combination of above loading. Bending moment, shear
force diagram for simply supported, cantilever and over hanging beams – Point of contra
flexure. Bending and shear stresses - concept of shear centre.
UNIT V DEFLECTION OF BEAMS AND COLUMNS 7+2
Elastic Curve of Neutral Axis of the Beam Under Normal Loads – Evaluation of Beam Deflection
and Slope - Double Integration Method and Macaulay’s Method. Columns: End Condition –
Equivalent Length of Column – Euler’s Equation – Slenderness Ratio – Rankine’s Formula for
Columns.
Total Periods 35+10= 45
Hours
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Formative Assessment End Semester Exams
Test Test (60 Marks)
(20 Marks) (20 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE TYPE

139
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

[Link]-Solving
Activities
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C211.1 Categorize the stresses and strains for various engineering components with different loading
conditions.
C211.2 Determine the effect of the two-dimensional stresses under various loading combinations
on structural parts and thin cylinders.
C211.3 Analyse pure torsion on solid and hollow circular shafts and Design of Leaf and closed coil
helical springs.
C211.4 Construct the shear force and bending moment diagrams for simply supported, cantilever
and over hanging beams.
C211.5 Evaluate slope and deflection of beams and buckling of columns using analytical methods

Text Books
1. Rajput R.K. “Strength of Materials”. 7th Edition, [Link] & Co., New Delhi, 2018.
2. Bansal R.K., “A Text book of strength of material”, Laxmi publication, New Delhi, (2014)

Reference Books
1. Popov E.P., “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, (2010)
2. Beer F.P. and Johnston R., “Mechanics of Materials”, McGraw-Hill Book Co, (2012)
3. Timoshenko S.P. “Elements of Strength of Materials”. 10th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2010.
4. Don H. Morris, William F. Riley and Leroy D. Sturges, “Mechanics of Materials”, John Wiley
and Sons Inc., (2008)
5. Hibbeler, R.C., “Mechanics of Materials”, Pearson Education, Low Price Edition, (2013)
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C211.1 2 2 2 1 3 2
C211.2 2 2 2 1 3 2
C211.3 2 2 2 1 1 3 2
C211.4 2 2 2 2 1 3 2
C211.5 2 2 2 2 1 3 2

140
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS END SEM

CAT 1 CAT 2 FAT 1 FAT 2
CATEGORY EXAM

REMEMBER 10 10 10

UNDERSTAND 20 20 5 5 20

APPLY 50 50 15 15 50

ANALYZE 20 20 5 5 20

EVALUATE

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 : Analyze the stresses in simple, compound bars, and thermal
stresses (Analyze)

1. Define a composite bar. How will you find the stresses and load carried by each
member of a composite bar? (A)
2. Find an expression for the total elongation of a bar due to its own weight, when
the bar is fixed at its upper end and hanging freely at the lower end.(An)
COURSE OUTCOME 2 : Determine the effect of the two-dimensional stresses under
various loading combinations on structural parts and thin
cylinders. (Apply)

1. Show that in thin cylinder shells subjected to internal fluid pressure, the
circumferential stress is twice the longitudinal stress. (A)
2. While resigning cylindrical vessel, which stress should be used for calculating the
thickness of the cylindrical vessel? (A)
3. Find the maximum shear stress in a plane using morhs circle and principal plane
method. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 3 : Illustrate the deflection of shafts due to torsion and deformation
of different types of springs (Apply)

1. Find an expression for the strain energy stored by the close-coiled helical spring
when subjected to axial load W. (A)

141
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

2. A solid shaft of 20 cm diameter is used to transmit torque. Find the maximum

torque transmitted by the shaft if the maximum shear stress induced in the shaft
is 50 N/mm2. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 4 : Determine shear force, bending moment and stress distribution
of various types of beams with different support (APPLY)

1. How many points of contraflexure you will have for simply supported beam
overhanging at one end only? (A)
2. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for a simply supported beam
of Length L which is subjected to a clockwise couple µ at the centre of the beam.
(A)

COURSE OUTCOME 5 : Evaluate the deflection of beams and columns using various
approaches (APPLY)

1. Determine: (i) slope at the left support (ii) deflection under the load and (iii)
maximum deflection of a SSB of length 5 m, which is carrying a point load 5 kN at
a distance of 3 m from the left end. Take E = 2 x 105 N/mm2 and I = 1 x 108 mm4.
(A)
2. Calculate the safe load on a hollow cast iron (one end rigidly fixed and other
hinged) of 15 cm external diameter, 10 cm internal diameter and 10 m in length.
Use Euler's formula with a factor of safety of 5 and E = 95 kN/mm2. (A)

CONCEPT MAP

142
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME4603 THERMAL ENGINEERING
2 1 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Chemistry, Engineering Thermodynamics

Objectives
After undergoing this course, the students will be able to:
• Apply the thermodynamic concepts on engines, nozzles, turbines, compressors, Refrigeration and air
conditioning systems
• Perform simple analysis on work absorbing and work producing devices to calculate the performance
UNIT I GAS POWER CYCLES 7+2
Otto, Diesel, Dual, Brayton cycles, Calculation of mean effective pressure, and air standard efficiency –
Comparison of cycles
UNIT II INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE COMBUSTION AND 9
PERFORMANCE
IC engine – Classification, working, components and their functions. Ideal and actual: Valve and port timing
diagrams, p-v diagrams – two stroke & four stroke, and SI & CI engines. Desirable properties and qualities of
fuels, Air-fuel ratio. Performance parameters and calculations. Morse and Heat Balance tests. Multipoint Fuel
Injection system and Common Rail Direct lnjection systems. Ignition systems – Magneto, Battery and
Electronic. Lubrication and Cooling systems. Concepts of Supercharging and Turbocharging – Emission Norms

UNIT III STEAM NOZZLE AND TURBINE 6+3

Types and shapes of nozzles Flow of steam through nozzles, Critical pressure ratio, Variation of mass flow rate
with pressure ratio. Effect of friction. Meta stable flow. Turbines: Types, Impulse and reaction principles,
Velocity diagrams, Work done and efficiency – optimal operating conditions. Multi-staging, compounding and
governing

UNIT IV AIR COMPRESSOR 6+3

Classification and comparison, working principle, work of compression – with and without clearance,
Volumetric efficiency, Isothermal efficiency and Isentropic efficiency. Multistage air compressor with
Intercooling. Working principle and comparison of rotary compressors with reciprocating air compressors

UNIT V REFRIGERATION AND AIR – CONDITIONING 7+2

Vapour compression refrigeration cycle, Effect of Superheat and Sub-cooling, Performance calculations,
working principle of air cycle, vapour absorption system, and thermoelectric refrigeration. Air conditioning
systems, concept of RSHF, GSHF and ESHF, Cooling load calculations.

Total Periods 35+10 =45 Hours

Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 Marks 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE TYPE 3. Problem-Solving Activities

143
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C212.1 State and compare the processes and performances of different gas power cycles.
C212.2 Explain the functioning and features of IC engines, components and auxiliaries and to calculate
the performance parameters of IC Engines
C212.3 Calculate the velocity and design parameters in steam nozzles and to carry out performance
analysis on steam turbines
C212.4 Understand the types and working of compressors and to solve problems in single stage and
multi stage air.
C212.5 Solve problems in refrigeration and air conditioning system
C212.6 Execute the thermodynamics principles to different thermal devices and to arrive at the
design parameters.
Text Books
1. Khurmi R.S, Gupta J.K. “A Text Book on Thermal Engineering”, [Link] 15th Edition, (2018)
2. Rajput R.K., “Thermal Engineering”, S. Chand Publishers, (2017)

Reference Books
1. Nag.P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, (2013)
2. Ganesan V., “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New York,
(2012)
3. Ballaney P.L. “Thermal Engineering”, Khanna publishers, 24th Edition, (2012)
4. Mahesh [Link], “Thermal Engineering”, 1st edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publications,
(2010)
5. Sarkar B.K. “Thermal Engineering”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers, (2007)
6. Rudramoorthy R, “Thermal Engineering”, Tata Mc Graw Hill , New Delhi, (2003)
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C212.1 3 2 1 1 3

C212.2 3 2 1 1 3

C212.3 2 1 1 1 1 3

C212.4 2 2 1 1 3

C212.5 2 2 1 1 1 3

C212.6 2 1 1 1 3

144
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

BLOOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

FORMATIVE CONTINUOUS END SEMESTER
ASSESSMENT TEST ASSESSMENT TEST EXAMINATION
BLOOM’S CATEGORY
FAT1 FAT2 CAT – 1 CAT -2

Remember 5 5 30 20 20

Understand 15 10 50 40 30

Apply 5 10 20 40 40

Analyze 10

Evaluate

Create

Total 25 25 100 100 100

ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS – SAMPLE

COURSE OUTCOME 1: State and compare the processes and performances of different gas power
cycles. ( Remember, Understand, Apply)
1. Define Compression ratio

2. State the effect of increase in cut off ratio on the efficiency of Diesel Engine.

3. Determination of efficiency, work done, mean effective pressure of gas power cycle.(Numerical
Problem)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Explain the functioning and features of IC engines, components and
auxiliaries and to calculate the performance parameters of IC Engines ( Remember, Understand,
Apply)
[Link] the primary difference in two stroke and four stroke engine.

[Link] is meant by value overlapping

[Link] problems to determine the performance parameters from the test data of an internal
combustion engine.
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Calculate the velocity and design parameters in steam nozzles and to carry
out performance analysis on steam turbines ( Remember, Understand, Apply)

1. Define Critical Pressure ratio.

2. What is the effect of friction on the quality of steam?
3. Determination of area ratio or mass flow rate from the given steam condition.

145
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Understand the types and working of compressors and to solve problems
in single stage and multi stage air. ( Remember, Understand, Apply)
1. Define isothermal efficiency of a reciprocating compressor.

2. Why clearance volume doesn’t have any effect on the volumetric efficiency of an air
compressor?
3. Calculation of the energy required to compress air for a given pressure ratio, stages and air
outlet condition.
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Solve problems in refrigeration and air conditioning system ( Remember,
Understand, Apply)
1. Define Ton of Refrigeration
2. What is the effect of super heat on the COP of a refrigerator
3. Numerical Calculation on determining the COP of refrigeration system for various cases.

146
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME4604 THEORY OF MACHINES
3 1 0 4
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Mechanics

Objectives

• To impart students’ knowledge about forces acting on machine parts.

• To enable students to understand the fundamental concepts of machines.
• To facilitate students to understand the functions of cams, gears and fly wheels.
• To make students to get an insight into balancing of rotations and reciprocating masses and
the concepts of vibration.
UNIT I ANALYSIS OF BASIC MECHANISMS 9+3

Introduction - Terminologies, Degree of Freedom - Study of planar mechanisms and their inversions.
Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of plane mechanisms.
UNIT II KINEMATICS OF CAMS, GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 10+3
Cams with different Follower Motion, Gear terminologies - Law of gearing - Interference and
undercutting - Epicyclic gear train.

UNIT III FORCE ANALYSIS AND BALANCING 10+3

D’Alembert’s Principle, Dynamic Analysis of planar Mechanism. Turning Moment Diagrams - Fly
Wheels . Static and Dynamic Balancing of Rotating Masses, Balancing of Reciprocating Masses.

UNIT IV VIBRATIONS 10+3

Free vibration of single degree of freedom systems, effect of damping, Equations of motion,
resonance, critical speeds of shafts. Forced vibration, Harmonic Forcing, Transmissibility, vibration
isolation.

UNIT V MECHANISMS FOR CONTROL & GYROSCOPE 6+3

Governors- types and its characteristics, Gyroscopic Effects on the Movement of Air Planes and Ships
– Gyroscope Stabilization.
Total Periods 45+15
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE TYPE 3. Problem-Solving Activities

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C213.1 Apply different mechanisms for designing machines and Compute velocity, acceleration of
various planar mechanisms.

147
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

C213.2 Apply the principles for analysing cams, gears and gear trains.
C213.3 Analyse dynamic forces acting on mechanism and Balance rotating and reciprocating masses
C213.4 Analyse free, forced and damped vibrations of mechanical systems.
C213.5 Analyse and characterize the effects of governor and gyroscopic effects on aeroplanes, ships.
Text Books
1. S. S. Rattan, “Theory of Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2015
2. Uicker, J.J., Pennock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, Oxford
University Press, 2017.
Reference Books
1. Joseph Edward Shigley and John Jospeh Uicker JR, Theory of Machines and Mechanisms SI
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2014
2. R L Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, McGraw-Hill Education, 2017.
3. R L Norton, Design of Machinery: An Introduction to the Synthesis and Analysis of
Mechanisms and Machines, McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2011.
4. Khurmi R.S., “Theory of Machines”, 14th Edition, S Chand Publications, (2005)

Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C213.1 2 2 2 1 3
C213.2 2 2 2 1 3
C213.3 1 2 2 1 1 3 2
C213.4 2 2 2 2 1 3 2
C213.5 1 2 3 3

BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS END SEM

CAT 1 CAT 2 FAT 1 FAT 2
CATEGORY EXAM

REMEMBER 10 10 20

UNDERSTAND 20 10 5 5 20

APPLY 60 50 10 5 40

148
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

ANALYZE 10 30 10 15 20

EVALUATE

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 ; Apply different mechanisms for designing machines and Compute
velocity, acceleration of various planer mechanisms. (Apply)

1. Determine the degree of freedom for following linkages. (A)

2. For the four-bar linkage shown below examine the acceleration of A and B and the
angular acceleration of links 3 and 4, Crank 2 has a constant angular velocity, ω2 = 200
rad/s counter clockwise direction. The linkage A02 = 150 mm; BA = 450 mm, B04 =
300 mm, 0402 = 200 mm. (An)

COURSE OUTCOME 2 : Apply the principles for analysing cams, gears and gear trains.
(Apply)

1. A cam operates on offset roller follower. The least radius of the cam is 50 mm, roller
diameter is 30 mm, and offset is 20 mm, the cam rotates at 360 rpm. The angle of
ascent is 48°, angle of dwell is 42° and angle of descent is 60°. The motion is to be SHM
during ascent and uniform acceleration and deceleration during decent. Construct the
cam profile. (A)

149
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

2. State and prove law of gearing and thus derive expression for velocity of sliding. (A)

3. An epicyclic gear train is shown in the below figure. How many revolutions do the arm
makes? (a). When A makes one revolution in CW and D makes 1/2 revolution in the
opposite sense, (b). When A makes one revolution in CW and D remains stationary,
(c). The number of teeth in gears A and D are 40 and 90 respectively. (An)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Analyse dynamic forces acting on mechanism and Balance

rotating and reciprocating masses (Analyse)
1. List the uses of turning moment diagrams? (R)
2. A multi-cylinder engine is to run at a speed of 600 r.p.m. On drawing the turning
moment diagram to a scale of 1mm=250 N-m and 1mm=3O, the areas above and
below the mean torque line in mm2 are: +160, -172, +168, -191, +197, -162. The speed
is to be kept within ± 1% of the mean speed of the engine. Calculate the necessary
moment of inertia of the flywheel. Determine the suitable dimensions of a rectangular
flywheel rim if the breadth is twice its thickness. The density of the cast iron is 7250
kg/m3 and its hoop stress is 6 MPa. Assume that the rim contributes 92% of the
flywheel effect. (A)
3. Four masses A, B, C and D revolve at equal radii and are equally spaced along a shaft.
The mass B is 7 kg and the radii of C and D make angles of 90° and 240° respectively
with the radius of B. Examine the magnitude of the masses A, C and D and the angular
position of A so that the system may be completely balanced. (An)

COURSE OUTCOME 4 : Analyse free, forced and damped vibrations of mechanical

systems. (Analyse)

1. A machine of weighs 18 kg and is supported on springs and dashpots. The total

stiffness of the springs is 12 N/mm and damping is 0.2 N/mm/s the system is initially
at rest and a velocity of 120 mm/s is imparted to the mass. Determine (1) the
displacement and velocity of mass as a function of time (2) the displacement and
velocity after 0.4s. (b) Describe the types of vibrations with simple sketch. (A)
2. A shaft of 100 mm diameter and 1 m long is fixed at one end and other end carries a
flywheel of mass 1 tonne. Taking young’s modulus for the shaft material as 200
GN/m2. Examine the natural frequency of longitudinal and transverse vibrations.
(An)
3. A vertical shaft 25 mm diameter and 0.75 m long, is mounted in long bearings and
carries a pulley of mass 10 kg midway between the bearings. The centre of the pulley
is 0.5 mm from the axis of the shaft. Solve (a) the Whirling Speed (b) the bending
stress in the shaft, when it is rotating at 1700 rpm. (A)

150
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Analyse and characterize the effects of governor and gyroscopic
effects on aeroplanes, ships. (Analyse)
1. A ship is propelled by a turbine rotor which has a mass of 5 tonnes and a speed of
2100 rpm. The rotor has a radius of gyration of 0.5 m and rotates in a clockwise
direction when viewed from the stern. Examine the gyroscopic effect in the following
conditions: (i) the ship sails at a speed of 30 km/hr and steers to the left in curve
having 60 m radius; (ii) the ship pitches 6° above and 6° below the horizontal position.
The bow is descending with its maximum velocity. the motion due to pitching is
simple harmonic and a periodic time is 20 seconds.(iii) the ship rolls and at a certain
instant it has an angular velocity of 0.03 rad/sec clockwise when viewed from stern.
(An)
2. In a spring controlled governor, the curve of the controlling force is a straight line.
When balls are 400 mm apart, the controlling force is 1200 N and when 200 mm apart,
the controlling force is 450 [Link] what speed will the governor run when the balls are
250 mm apart? What initial tension on the spring would be required for isochronism
and what would then be the speed? Take masses of each ball to be 10 kg. (A)
3. Define Stability of a governor. (R)

CONCEPT MAP

151
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21GE2M02 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SUSTAINABLE ENGINEERING
2 0 0 0
Preamble
To inculcate knowledge on the environment and all sorts of biotic and abiotic components related
to its ecosystem, climate changes and challenges faced due to global warming and the importance of
renewable sources of energy. Inspire students to find ways in contributing personally and
professionally thereby rectifying environmental and social problems.
Prerequisites for the course
●Basic theoretical concepts of biological science in higher secondary level.
● Basic theoretical concepts of Engineering Chemistry.

Objectives

• To make the students conversant with the interdisciplinary and holistic nature of the
environment.
• To make the students understand the impacts of environmental degradation and to minimise
vulnerability to future disasters.
• To enrich the students with the significance of natural resources and environment on the
quality of life.
• To have an increased awareness among students to create a quest on issues in areas of
sustainability.
• To have a thorough understanding of the concepts of sustainable habitat.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 7

Environment: Definition, Scope and Importance of environment studies. Ecosystem: Structure and
function of an ecosystem - Producers - Consumers – Decomposers- Types – Characteristic features:
Forest ecosystem - Desert ecosystem - Pond ecosystem-Ocean ecosystem.
Biodiversity - Value of biodiversity - Hot-spots of biodiversity- Threats to biodiversity - Endangered
and Endemic species - Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.
Field study of common plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill
slopes, etc.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION & DISASTER MANAGEMENT 6
Pollution: Definition - Causes - Effects - Control measures of air pollution - Water pollution: (Sewage
water treatment by activated sludge and trickling filter process) - Marine pollution - Noise pollution.
Disaster management: Causes - Effects - Control measures of Floods - Earthquake - Cyclone.
Field study of local polluted sites – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 6
Forest resources: Use - Overexploitation - Deforestation - case studies. Water resources: Use -
Overutilization of surface and groundwater - Water conservation: Rainwater harvesting- Conflicts
over water. Mineral resources: Use - Exploitation -Environmental effects of extracting and using

152
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

mineral resources - Case studies. Food resources: Effects of Modern Agriculture - Fertilizer-Pesticide
problems (Eutrophication, Blue baby syndrome, Biomagnification) - Water logging - Salinity - case
studies. Energy resources: Renewable (Solar, Wind) - Non renewable energy sources.
UNIT IV SUSTAINABILITY 6
Introduction, Need and concept of sustainability, Social- Environmental and Economic Sustainability
Concepts, Sustainable Development, Challenges for Sustainable Development. Environmental
legislations in India - Water Act, Air Act.
UNIT V SUSTAINABLE HABITAT 5

Basic concepts of sustainable habitat, Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) - Procedures of EIA in
India, Green Engineering, Social and technological change, Industrial Processes: Pollution
Prevention, Industrial Ecology.
Total Periods 30
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Formative Assessment End Semester Exams
Test Test
(100 Marks)
WRITTEN TEST NA NA
CAT 1 50 MARKS AND
CAT 2 50 MARKS
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1 Extract the knowledge on the interdisciplinary and holistic nature of the environment.
(Understand)

2 Discover the problems related to environmental degradation. (Apply)

3 Sketch the significance of natural resources on the quality of life. (Apply)
4 Solve the issues in areas of sustainability. (Apply)
5 Articulate knowledge on the concepts of sustainable habitat (Apply)
Text Books
1. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Gilbert [Link], ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
Reference Books
1. Nibin Chang, Systems Analysis for Sustainable Engineering: Theory and Applications, McGraw-
Hill Professional.
2. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD,
Delhi, 2014.

153
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Web Resources
. NPTEL Lecture: [Link]
. NPTEL Lecture: [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 1 2
10 11 12
1 2 1 2 3 2
2 3 2 2 3 2
3 3 1 1 2 3 2
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 2
5 3 2 1 1 2 3 2
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1 Students will be able to demonstrate the knowledge on the
interdisciplinary and holistic nature of the environment. (Remember)
1. Describe the Multidisciplinary nature of Tirunelveli District.
2. Demonstrate the regulation of Ecosystem
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to identify the problems related to
environmental degradation. (Understand)
1. Demonstrate the control measures of Air and water Pollution
2. Account the problem and suitable remedial measures for floods in the rainy season.
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to understand the significance of natural
resources on the quality of life. (Understand)
1. Highlight the control and effects of deforestation.
2. Label the role of individual in conservation of natural resources
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to identify the issues in areas of
sustainability. (Remember)
1. Outline the term “sustainable development”
2. Compare the major limitations of the Air act, 1972 and Water act, 1980.
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to acquire knowledge on the concepts of
sustainable habitat. (Remember)
1. Narrate the concept and procedure for Environment Impact Assessment.
Elucidate the prevention of pollution from various industries.

154
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21PT3901 APTITUDE - I L T P C
0 0 2 1
Prerequisites for the course
• Basic Maths
Objectives

•Expose the undergraduate students to solve aptitude problems using different

methods and practices.
• Expose the undergraduate students to understand and make decisions with
mathematical, statistical, and quantitative information.
UNIT I MODULE I 6
Number system, Number series, HCF and LCM of Numbers, Factors and Decimals.
UNIT II MODULE II 6
Square roots and cube roots, Indices and surds, Simplification and approximation, Problems on
ages and numbers.
UNIT III MODULE III 6
Percentage, Profit, loss and discount, Average, Ratio and Proportion.
UNIT IV MODULE IV 6
Partnership and share, Alligation and mixtures, Chain rule, Mensuration.

UNIT V MODULE V 6
Pipes and cisterns, simple interest, Compound interest, Growth and depreciation.

Total Periods 30
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test -1 Continuous Assessment Test -2 Model Exam
(30 Marks) (30 Marks) (40 Marks)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS MULTIPLE CHOICE
QUESTIONS
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Solve various concepts of number systems and their techniques in solving the HCF, LCM,
Factors and Decimals.
CO2: Analyse the profit, loss and discount of real time situations and solve the average, ratio and
proportion problems.
CO3: Solve the Problems on ages, Square roots, cube roots, Indices, surds, Simplification and
approximation.
CO4: Solve the problems on Partnership, share, Alligation, mixtures, Chain rule, Mensuration.
CO5: Solve the problems on Pipes and cisterns, simple interest, Compound interest, Growth and
depreciation.

155
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Text Books
1. Dr. R S Aggarwal, A Modern Approach to Verbal and Non Verbal Reasoning, Revised Edition, S
Chand Publications.
2. Abhijit Guha, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Fourth Edition, Mc Graw Hill
Publications.
Reference Books
1. U. Mohan Rao, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Scitech Publications Pvt Ltd,
India.
2. Dinesh Khattar, The Pearson Guide to Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Third
Edition, Pearson Education Pvt Ltd, India, 2016.
3. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Logical Reasoning for CAT & other Management Exams, Fifth
Edition, Mc Graw Hill Publications.
4. Jaikishan and Premkishan, How to Crack Test of Reasoning in all Competitive Examinations,
Revised Edition, Arihant Publications.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 1 2
2 2 1 2
3 3 1 2
4 3 1 2
5 2 1 3
COURSE CONTENT AND SCHEDULE
[Link] TOPIC NO OF HOURS REQUIRED

UNIT I – MODULE I

1 Number system 2

2 Number series 1

3 HCF of Numbers 1

4 LCM of Numbers 1

5 Factors and Decimals 1

UNIT II – MODULE II

1 Square roots 1

2 Cube roots 1

3 Indices and Surds 2

4 Simplification and Approximation 2

156
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
5 Problems on ages and numbers 1

UNIT-III MODULE III

1 Percentage 1

2 Profit, loss and discount 2

3 Average 1

4 Ratio and Proportion 2

UNIT-IV MODULE IV

1 Partnership and share 2

2 Alligation and mixtures 2

3 Chain rule 1

4 Mensuration 1

UNIT-V MODULE V

1 Pipes and cisterns 1

2 Simple interest 2

3 Compound interest 1

4 Growth and depreciation 2

157
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21HS2103 TECHNOLOGY IN TAMIL CULTURE
2 0 0 1
Preamble:
This course is offered to develop technical thinking based on Tamil tradition and to acquaint
students with the fundamentals of various technologies through Tamil culture and history.
Prerequisite: The prerequisite knowledge required to study this course is basic knowledge in
English and Tamil Heritage.
UNIT I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 6
Weaving Industry during Sangam Age–Ceramic technology–Black and Red Ware Potteries (BRW)
– Graffition Potteries
UNIT II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 6
Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam
Age – Building materials and Hero Stones of Sangam Age– Details of Stage Constructions in
Silapathikaram - Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram - Great Temples of Cholas and other
worship places - Temples of Nayaka Period - Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple)-
Thirumalai Nayakar Mahal -Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo –Saracenic architecture at Madras during
British Period.
UNIT III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 6
Art of Ship Building - Metallurgical studies- Jewells making - Iron industry - Iron smelting, steel -
Copper and gold- Coins as source of history - Minting of Coins – Beads making-industries Stone
beads -Glass beads -Terracotta beads -Shell beads/ bone beats - Archeological evidences -
Gemstone types described in Silapathikaram
UNIT IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 6
Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry -
Wells designed for cattle use - Agriculture and Agro Processing - Knowledge of Sea – Fisheries –
Pearl-Conceiving-Ancient Knowledge of Ocean-Knowledge Specific Society.
UNIT V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 6
Development of Scientific Tamil – Tamil computing–Digitalization of Tamil Books–Development
of Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries –
Sekai Project.
Total Periods 30

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1 To learn the techniques adopted in Industries of ancient Tamil culture.

CO2 To assess the technical competence of ancient Tamil.

CO3 To achieve the ability to think about various production technologies in Tamil Culture.
To explore the recovery and development of agricultural and water management technical skills of
CO4
Tamil culture.
CO5 To enumerate the technical development that Tamil has achieved in the field of science and computer.

158
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO PO Mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
CO PO 1 PO12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

CO 1 1 2 3 1 3

CO 2 1 3 2 3 2

CO 3 1 3 2 1 2

CO 4 3 2 2 3 2

CO 5 2 3 3 2 3

TEXT-CUM-REFERENCEBOOKS

1. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL–(in print)
2. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.
3. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu) (Published
by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
4. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
5. Keeladi-‘Sangam City Civilization on the bank of river Vaigai’(Jointly Published by: Department
of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
6. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link]) (Published
By: TheAuthor)
7. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu) Journey of Civilization Industo Vaigai
([Link]) (Published by:RMRL)–Reference Book

159
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21HS2103 தமிழரும் மதொழில்நுட்பமும்
2 0 0 1
முன்னுரர(Preamble)
இந்தப் பொடத்திட்டம் தபொறியியல் பயிலும் முதலொம் ஆண்டு மொணவர்களின் இரண்டொம்
பருவத்திற்குரியது. தமிழ் மரபு ெொர்ந்த ததொழில்நுட்ப ெிந்தமனமய வளர்த்து பல்வவறு
ததொழில்நுட்பங்களின் அடிப்பமட கூறுகமளத் தமிழரின் பண்பொடு மற்றும் வரலொற்றின்
மூலம் மொணவர்கமள அறியச் தெய்தல்.
பாடநெறிக்கான முன்ெிபெ் தனனகள் (Prerequisites for the course)
தமிழ் ம ொழியில் எழுத படிக்க மதரிந்திருத்தல் அவசியம்.
அலகு I மநசவு மற்றும் பொரனத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் 6
ெங் க கொலத்தில் மநெவுத்மதொழில் - பொமனத் மதொழில் நுட்ப ் - கருப்பு சிவப்பு பொண்டங் கள் -
பொண்டங் களில் கீறல் குறியீடுகள்
அலகு II வடிவரமப்பு மற்றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் 6
ெங் க கொலத்தில் வடிவம ப்பு ற் று ் கட்டு ொனங் கள் & ெங் க கொலத்தில் வீட்டுப்
மபொருட்களில் வடிவம ப்பு - ெங் க கொலத்தில் கட்டு ொன மபொருட்களு ் நடுகல் லு ் -
சிலப்பதிகொரத்தில் ம மட அம ப்பு பற் றிய விவரங் கள் - ொ ல் லபுரெ் சிற் பங் களு ் ,
மகொவில் களு ் - மெொழர் கொலத்து மபருங் மகொயில் கள் ற் று ் பிற வழிபொட்டுத்தலங் கள் -
நொயக்கர் கொலக் மகொயில் கள் - ொதிரி கட்டம ப்புகள் பற் றி அறிதல் , துமர மீனொட்சி
அ ் ன் ஆலய ் ற் று ் திரு மல நொயக்கர் ஹொல் - மெட்டிநொட்டு வீடுகள் - பிரிட்டிஷ்
கொலத்தில் மென் மனயில் இந்மதொ - ெொமரொமெனிக் கட்டிடக்கமல
அலகு III உற்பத்தித் மதொழில் நுட்பம் 6
கப்பல் கட்டு ் கமல - உமலொகவியல் - நமகத் ததொழில்நுட்பம் - இரு ் பு மதொழிற் ெொமல -
இரு ் மப உருக்குதல் , எஃகு - வரலொற் று ெொன் றுகளொக மெ ் பு ற் று ் தங் க நொணயங் கள் -
நொணயங் கள் அெ்ெடித்தல் - ணி உருவொக்கு ் மதொழிற் ெொமலகள் - கல் ணிகள் கண்ணொடி
ணிகள் - சுடு ண் ணிகள் - ெங் கு ணிகள் - எலு ் பு துண்டுகள் - மதொல் லியல் ெொன் றுகள் -
சிலப்பதிகொரத்தில் ணிகளின் வமககள்
அலகு IV கேளாை்னம மற் றும் ெீ ர் பாசன நதாழில் நுட்பம் 6
அமண , ஏரி, குளங் கள் , தகு - மெொழர்கொலக் குமிழித் தூ ் பின் முக்கியத்துவ ் - கொல் நமட
பரொ ரிப்பு - கொல் நமடகளுக்கொக வடிவம க்கப்பட்ட கிணறுகள் - மவளொண்ம ற் று ்
மவளொண்ம ெ் ெொர்ந்த மெயல் பொடுகள் - கடல் ெொர் அறிவு - மீன் வள ் - முத்து ற் று ் முத்து
குளித்தல் - மபருங் கடல் குறித்த பண்மடய அறிவு - அறிவுெொர் ெமூக ்
அலகு V அைிவியல் தமிழ் மற்றும் கணினித் தமிழ் 6
அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ெ்சி - கணினித் தமிழ் வளர்ெ்சி - தமிழ் நூல் கமள மின் பதிப்பு
மெய் தல் - தமிழ் ம ன் மபொருட்கள் உருவொக்க ் - தமிழ் இமணய கல் விக்கழக ் - தமிழ் மின்
நூலக ் - இமணயத்தில் தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் - மெொற் குமவத் திட்ட ் .
Total Periods 30

160
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
எதிர்பொர்க்கும் படிப்பின் முடிவுகள்:

மொணவர்கள் பண்மடத் தமிழரின் ததொழில்நுட்பங்கமள அறிந்து தகொள்வர்.

CO1
பண்மடத் தமிழரின் ததொழில்நுட்பத் திறமன மதிப்பிடுதல்.
CO2
தொய் தமொழியில் பல்வவறு உற்பத்தி ததொழில்நுட்பங்கமளக் குறித்து ெிந்திக்கும்
CO3
திறமன அமடவொர்.
தமிழரின் வவளொண்மம மற்றும் நீர் வமலொண்மம ததொழில்நுட்ப திறன்கமள மீ ட்டு
CO4
உருவொக்கம் தெய்தல் குறித்து அறிதல்.
அறிவியல் மற்றும் கணினி துமறயில் தமிழ்ப் தபற்றுள்ள ததொழில் நுட்ப
CO5
வளர்ச்ெிமய அறிதல்.

CO PO Mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
CO PO 1 PO12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

CO 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3

CO 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 2 2

CO 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2

CO 4 2 2 1 2 2 2

CO 5 2 1 2 1 3 1

TEXT-CUM-REFERENCEBOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு - க்களு ் பண்பொடு ் - மக. மக பிள் மள ( மவளியீடு: தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல்
ற் று ் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழக ் ).
2. கணினித்தமிழ் - முமனவர் இல. சுந்தர ் ( விகடன் பிரசுர ் ).
3. கீழடி - மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் க கொல நகர நொகரிக ் ( மதொல் லியல் துமற மவளியீடு).
4. மபொருமந - ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிக ் ( மதொல் லியல் துமற மவளியீடு)

161
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME4605 METROLOGY AND L T P C

INSTRUMENTATION
3 0 2 4
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology I and II
Objectives
1. Acquire knowledge on various Metrological equipments available to measure the
dimension of the components.
2. Acquire knowledge on the correct procedure to be adopted to measure the dimension of the
components.
3. Understand different measurement equipments and their use in industry for quality
inspection.
UNIT I BASICS OF MEASUREMENT SYSTEM 9
Definition of metrology, accuracy, precision and sensitivity, Abbe’s principle; Three stages of
generalized measurement system, mechanical loading, factors considered in selection of
instruments, commonly used terms, uncertainity, traceability, error analysis and classification,
sources of error. – Reliability and Calibration – Readability and Reliability.

UNIT II LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENT 9

Linear Measuring Instruments – Types – Classification – concepts of interchangeability and

selective assembly – Angular measuring instruments – Types – Bevel protractor clinometers angle
gauges, sine bar – Angle alignment telescope – Autocollimator – Applications.

UNIT III COMPARATORS AND GEOMETRICAL 9

MEASUREMENT
Comparators - mechanical, electrical, optical and pneumatic; Roundness measurement, limit gauge,
design of plug gauge, Taylor’s principle, three basic types of limit gauges; Pitch and Gear
Measurement, Components of surface texture: Roughness, lay, waviness, Ra and Rz, surface
roughness meter – Basics of GD & T
UNIT IV ADVANCES IN METROLOGY 9
Basic concept of lasers– laser Interferometers – types – DC and AC Lasers interferometer –
Applications – Straightness – Alignment. Basic concept of CMM – Types of CMM – Constructional
features – Probes – Applications – Basic concepts of Machine Vision System – Elements –
Applications.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL MEASUREMENTS 9

Position sensors: Potentiometer, LVDT; Proximity sensors- types; Vibration sensors - seismic
instrument; Torque sensors; Strain gauges; Temperature sensors: Resistance temperature
detector, thermistor, thermocouples, and thermopiles, optical pyrometer; Pressure Measurement:
Elastic transducers, pressure cell, bulk modulus pressure gauge Flow measurement: Turbine
type meter, hotwire anemometer, magnetic flow meter.

162
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 Measurement of linear dimensions using Comparators, angle C216.2
measurement using bevel protractor and sine bar
2 Calibration and use of measuring instruments – Vernier caliper, C216.2
micrometer, Vernier height gauge – using gauge blocks
3 Measurement of gear parameters – disc micrometers, gear tooth C216.3
vernier caliper
4 Non-contact (Optical) measurement using Toolmaker’s C216.3
microscope / Profile projector
5 Measurement of force and torque C216.5
6 Machine tool metrology -Testing of straightness of a machine C216.2
tool guide way using Autocollimator
Total Periods 45 Theory +15
Lab
Laboratory Requirements

(For a batch of 30 Students)

1. Micrometer
2. Vernier Caliper
3. Vernier Height Gauge
4. Vernier depth Gauge
5. Slip Gauge Set
6. Gear Tooth Vernier
7. Sine Bar
8. Profile Projector / Tool Makers Microscope
9. Mechanical / Electrical / Pneumatic Comparator
10. Force Measuring Setup

11. Torque Measuring Setup

Suggestive Assessment Methods

163
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Continuous Assessment Test Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams

(20Marks)
(20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive Questions Model practical with Descriptive Questions
project (10 Marks) and
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS
LabExperiment (20
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS Marks)

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C216.1: Describe the concepts of measurements to apply in various metrological instruments.
C216.2: Outline the principles of linear and angular measurement tools used for industrial
applications
C216.3: Explain the principles of comparators and geometrical measurement tools used for
industrial applications.
C216.4 :Discuss advance measuring techniques of mechanical properties in industrial applications
C216.5: Discuss various measuring instruments for measuring the industrial components.

Text Books
1. Gupta I C , "A text book of Engineering Metrology", Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi,
2018.
2. Beckwith T G, Roy D, Marangoni, John H Lienhard , "Mechanical Measurements", Prentice
Hall, 2007.

Reference Books
1. Alan S Morris, Reza Langari , "Measurement and Instrumentation: Theory and
Application",Academic Press, 2015.
2. Venkateshan S P , "Mechanical Measurements", John Wiley & Sons, 2015.
3. Holman J P , "Experimental Methods for Engineers", Tata McGraw Hill Publications Co
Limited, 2011.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

164
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C216.1 3 1 1 2 1 3 2

C216.2 3 1 1 2 1 3 2

C216.3 3 1 1 2 1 3 2

C216.4 3 1 1 2 2 1 3 2

C216.5 3 1 1 2 2 1 3 2

BLOOMS LEVEL ASSESSMENT PATTERN

BLOOMS CAT 1 CAT 2 FAT 1 FAT 2 END SEM

CATEGORY EXAM

REMEMBER 40 30 5 5 30

UNDERSTAND 40 50 10 10 50

APPLY 20 20 10 10 20

ANALYZE

EVALUATE

CREATE

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Course Outcome 1 Describe the concepts of measurements to apply in

various metrological instruments. – (Remember, Understand)
1. What are the factors affecting the measuring system?(R)

2. What is the difference between allowance and tolerance?(U)

3. Explain the classification of various measuring methods. (U)

165
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Course Outcome 2 : Outline the principles of linear and angular

measurement tools used for industrial applications – (Remember,
Understand )
1. Give a brief note on slip gauges and what are the safety precaution to be
followed in the use of slip gauge blocks and also explain the type of limit gauge
with neat sketches (U)
2. Explain the working principle of SINE BAR. (U)
3. Explain the classification of linear measuring instruments. (U)

Course Outcome 3 : Explain the principles of comparators and geometrical

measurement tools used for industrial applications. (Remember,
Understand)
1. Define straightness of a line in two planes (U)

2. List out the reasons for the occurrence of progressive errors in screw
threads.(U)
3. Explain the various methods by which roundness is measured. (U)

Course Outcome 4 Discuss advance measuring techniques of mechanical

properties in industrial applications (Remember, Understand)
1. Explain the working principle of DC Laser interferometer with neat
diagram.(U)
2. With a neat sketch explain the dimensional measurements using laser
gauge.(U)
3. Discuss the need, types and constructional features of coordinate measuring
machine.(U)

Course Outcome 5 :Discuss various measuring instruments for measuring

the industrial components. (Remember, Understand )
1. Explain the method of measuring force using strain gauge load cell. (U)
2. With neat sketch explain how metallic strips are used for temperature
measurements. (U)
3. Explain with neat diagram the purpose and operating principle of a venturi meter.
(U)

166
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CONCEPT MAP

METROLOGY AND INSTRUMENTATION

BASICS OF LINEAR AND COMPARATORS AND ADVANCES IN INDUSTRIAL

MEASUREMENT ANGULAR GEOMETRICAL METROLOGY MEASUREME
MEASUREMENT
SYSTEM MEASUREMENT MANUFACTURING
NTS

Definition Linear Measuring Instruments Comparators DC Laser Position

interferometer sensors
Accuracy Roundness measurement
Vernier Caliper & Screw
AC Laser Proximity
precision Limit gauges
GaugeInterchangeability interferometer sensors
sensitivity Design of plug gauge
Angular measuringinstruments Straightness & Vibration
Abbe’s principle Alignment sensors
Bevel protractor & Components of
surfacetexture Types of CMM
Generalized Torque
clinometersAngle gauges &
measuremen Surface sensors
Probes
tsystem Sine bar roughnessmeter
Temperature
Machine Vision System
Uncertainity Pitch and sensors

TraceabilityErrors
Gear
Pressure
Measurement
Measurement
Sensor

167
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME4611 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Thermal Engineering
Objectives

• Get practical exposure to fuel properties, measurement methods, performance testing

methods of internal combustion engines and reciprocating air compressor
[Link] List of Experiments CO
1 Valve Timing and Port Timing diagrams C217.1
2 Performance Test on 4 – stroke Diesel Engine C217.2
3 Heat Balance Test on 4 – stroke Diesel Engine C217.2
4 Morse Test on Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine C217.2
5 Retardation Test on a Diesel Engine C217.2
6 Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point of various fuels / C217.3
lubricants
7 Study on a Steam Generator C217.4
8 Study on steam Turbine C217.4
9 Performance test on a reciprocating air compressor C217.5
10 Determination of COP of a refrigeration system C217.6
11 Experiments on Psychrometric processes C217.6
Total Periods :45

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams

(50 Marks) (50 Marks)
Model Lab 30 Marks Practical
Experimental Marks 20 Marks
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C217.1: Draw the valve timing and port diagram using four stroke and two stroke engine model
C217.2: Evaluate the performance of IC engine with various type of loading
C217.3 : Determine the thermal properties of fuels and lubricants
C217.4 : Conduct test to evaluate the performance of steam generator and turbine
C217.5 : Conduct test to evaluate the performance of reciprocating air compressor
C217.6 : Determine the performance of refrigeration system and also explain the various
psychrometric properties.

168
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Laboratory Requirements
• I.C Engine – 2 stroke and 4 stroke model
• 4-stroke Diesel Engine with mechanical loading
• 4-stroke Diesel Engine with hydraulic loading
• 4-stroke Diesel Engine with electrical loading
• Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine
• Apparatus for Flash and Fire Point
• Steam Boiler with turbine setup
• Single/two stage reciprocating air compressor
• Refrigeration test rig
• Air-conditioning test rig

Reference Books
1. Nag.P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, (2013)
2. Ganesan V., “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New York,
(2012)
3. Ballaney P.L. “Thermal Engineering”, Khanna publishers, 24th Edition, (2012)
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C217.1 2 2 3 3 2

C217.2 2 2 2 1 2 3

C217.3 2 3 2 3

C217.4 2 2 2 2 3

C217.5 2 3 2 3

C217.6 2 2 2 2 3

169
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME4612 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Strength of materials
Objectives

• Determine experimental data include universal testing machines and torsion equipment.
• Determine experimental data for spring testing machine, compression testing machine, impact tester,
hardness tester.
• Determine deflection of a beam.

[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 Izod Impact Test C218.1
2 Charpy Impact Test C218.1
3. Direct Shear Test on Mild Steel Rod C218.2
4 Direct Shear Test on Aluminium Rod C218.2
5 Brinell Hardness Test C218.3
6 Rockwell Hardness Test C218.3
7 Tensile Test on Mild Steel C218.4
8 Tensile Test on Cast Iron C218.4
9 Compression Test on Mild Steel C218.4
10 Compression Test on Cast Iron C218.4
11 Torsion Test on Mild Steel C218.5
12 Deflection test on beams C218.5
13 Compression test on helical springs C218.5
14 Microscopic Examination of
(i) Hardened samples and C218.5
(ii) Hardened and tempered samples.
Total Periods : 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams
(60 Marks) (40 Marks)
EXPERIMENTATION –40 Marks Practical Exam
Model Exam with project – 20 Marks
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C218.1. Compute impact strength for given specimen
C218.2. Compute shear strength for given specimen
C218.3. Examine the hardness for various metal specimen
C218.4. Conduct performance study for Mechanical Properties and Performance of Materials such as
tensile , compression strength
C218. 5. Examine the Mechanical Properties for beams, springs and tempered.

170
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Laboratory Requirements
1. Universal Tensile Testing machine with double shear attachment - 40 Ton Capacity -1 No
2. Torsion Testing Machine (60 NM Capacity) – 1 Nos
3. Impact Testing Machine (300 J Capacity) – 1 Nos
4. Brinell Hardness Testing Machine – 1 Nos
5. Rockwell Hardness Testing Machine – 1 Nos
6. Spring Testing Machine for tensile and compressive loads (2500 N) – 1 Nos
7. Metallurgical Microscopes – 3 Nos
8. Muffle Furnace (800 °C) – 1 Nos
9. Deflection of beams – 1 Nos

Reference Books

1. Ramamrutham S., “Strength of Materials”, Dhanpatrai Publishing company, (2012)

2. Bansal R.K., “A Text book of strength of material”, Laxmi publication, New Delhi,
(2014)McGraw-Hill, (2014)

Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C218.1 2 2 1 2 1 3

C218.2 2 2 1 2 1 3

C218.3 2 2 1 2 1 3

C218.4 2 2 1 1 1 3

C218.5 2 2 1 1 1 3

171
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME4613 KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Theory of machines
Objectives

• Interpret the practical knowledge of mechanism behind the various dynamics systems
including balancing of masses, governors, cams, gyroscopes, gear trains and speed reducers.
• Interpret the knowledge on the spring mass vibration systems and compound pendulum.

[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 a) Study of gear parameters.
b) Experimental study of velocity ratios of simple, compound, C219.1
Epicyclic and differential gear trains
2 a) Kinematics of Four Bar, Slider Crank, Crank Rocker, Double
crank, Double rocker, Oscillating cylinder Mechanisms. C219.1
b) Kinematics of single and double universal joints.
3. Determination of Mass moment of inertia of Fly wheel and Axle
system. C219.2
4 Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia using bifilar suspension
C219.2
and compound pendulum.
5 Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia of axisymmetric bodies
C219.2
using Turn Table apparatus.
6 Motorized gyroscope – Study of gyroscopic effect and couple C219.3
7 Governor - Determination of range sensitivity, effort etc., for Watts,
C219.3
Porter, Proell, and Hartnell Governors.
8 Cams – Cam profile drawing, Motion curves and study of jump
phenomenon C219.3
9 Single degree of freedom Spring Mass System – Determination of
natural Frequency and verification of Laws of spring – Damping C219.4
coefficient determination
10 Transverse vibration of Free-Free beam – with and without
C219.4
concentrated masses.
11 Determination of transmissibility ratio using vibrating table. C219.4

12 Whirling of shafts – Determination of critical speeds of shafts with C219.5

concentrated loads.

13 Determination of torsional natural frequency of single and Double C219.5

Rotor systems.- Undamped and Damped Natural frequencies.
14 Balancing of rotating masses and Balancing of reciprocating masses. C219.5
Total Periods : 45

172
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams
(60 Marks) (40 Marks)
EXPERIMENTATION –40 Marks Practical Exam
Model Exam with project – 20 Marks
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
C219.1. Explain gear parameters, kinematics of mechanisms in various Mechanisms.
C219.2. Determine mass moment of inertia for axisymmetric bodies and mechanical elements.
C219.3. Conduct performance study for stability control mechanisms like governor and motorised
gyroscope and to study cam jump phenomenon
C219.4. Compute frequency for free vibration, damping coefficient and transmissibility ratio.
C219.5. Compute torsional frequency, critical speeds of shafts, balancing mass of rotating and
reciprocating masses.
Laboratory Requirements
Cam follower setup
Motorised gyroscope.
Governor apparatus - Hartnell governors.
Whirling of shaft apparatus
Dynamic balancing machine.
Torsional Vibration of single rotor and two rotor system setup.
Spring mass vibration system.
Turn table apparatus.
Compound pendulum setup
Transverse vibration setup of a) cantilever
Gear Models
Kinematic Models to study various mechanisms.

Reference Books

1. [Link], “Dynamics of Machinery”, McMillan Publishers India Ltd., Tech-Max Educational

resources, (2011)
2. Rattan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, (2014)

Web Resources
1. : [Link]
2. : [Link]

173
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

C219.1 2 3
2 2 2 1

C219.2 2 3
2 2 2 1

C219.3 2 3
2 2 2 1

C219.4 2 3
2 2 2 1

C219.5 2 3
2 2 2 1

174
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

SEMESTER V

175
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER L T P C

21ME5601
(Use of standard HMT data book & Steam tables permitted) 2 1 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Physics and Engineering Thermodynamics
Objectives
1. To understand the mechanisms of heat transfer under steady and transient conditions.
2. To understand the concepts of heat transfer through extended surfaces.
3. To learn the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers and to understand the basic
concepts of mass transfer.
UNIT I CONDUCTION 9
General Differential equation of Heat Conduction – Cartesian and Polar Coordinates – One
Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction in simple geometries – plane wall, cylindrical and
spherical shells – Conduction with Internal Heat Generation – Extended Surfaces – Unsteady Heat
Conduction – Lumped Heat Capacity Analysis – Semi Infinite and Infinite bodies – Chart Solutions.
UNIT II CONVECTION 9
Combined Natural and Forced Convection - Hydrodynamic and Thermal Boundary Layer. Free
and Forced Convection during external flow over Plates, Cylinders and spheres and Internal flow
through tubes
UNIT III PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT 9
EXCHANGERS
Introductory concepts of Boiling & Condensation – Regimes of boiling. Heat Exchangers – Types &
Practical applications – Use of LMTD – Effectiveness – NTU method – Overall Heat Transfer
Coefficient – Fouling Factor.
UNIT IV RADIATION 9
Terminology and laws – Black Body & Grey Body – Radiation from real surfaces – view factor –
Electrical Analogy – Radiation through shields & gases.
UNIT V MASS TRANSFER 9
Introduction to mass transfer – Mass transfer by molecular diffusion – Fick’s Law of Diffusion –
Mass Transfer in Convection – Mass transfer coefficient, numerical problems – Analogy of Heat
and Mass Transfer.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 -10 Marks [Link]/ Tutorial [Link] Type
CAT 2 -10 Marks [Link] Quizzes Questions
Descriptive Questions [Link] –Solving Activities

176
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Apply heat conduction equations to different surface configurations under steady state and
transient conditions to solve problems (Apply)
CO2: Apply free and forced convective heat transfer correlations to internal and external flows
through/over various surface configurations and solve problems (Apply)
CO3: Illustrate the phenomena of boiling and condensation, apply LMTD and NTU methods of
thermal analysis to different types of heat exchanger configurations and solve problems
(Apply)
CO4: Interpret the basic laws for radiation and apply these principles to radiative heat transfer
between different types of surfaces to solve problems (Apply)
CO5: Apply diffusive and convective mass transfer equations and correlations to solve mass
transfer problems (Apply)
Text Books
1. Holman, J.P., “Heat and Mass Transfer”, Tata McGraw Hill, (2010)
2. YunusA. Cengel, “Heat Transfer A Practical Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition
(2015)
Reference Books
1. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer”,
John Wiley & Sons, 7th Edition, (2014)
2. Kothandaraman, C.P., “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer”, New Age International,
New Delhi, (2012)
3. Nag, P.K., “Heat Transfer”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, (2011)
4. Ozisik, M.N., “Heat Transfer”, McGraw Hill Book Co., (2020)
5. [Link], “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat & Mass transfer”, New Age International
Publishers, (2009)
6. S.P. Venkateshan, “Heat Transfer”, Ane Books, New Delhi, 2014

Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. .[Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO1 PO12 PSO 1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 1 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 1 2 3
CO4 3 3 1 2
CO5 3 3 2

177
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Apply heat conduction equations to different surface
configurations under steady state and transient conditions to solve problems (Apply)
1. Define Fourier’s Law of conduction (R)
2. State few practical examples for transient heat conduction(U)
3. A long rod is exposed to air at 298°C. It is heated at one end. At steady state
conditions, the temperatures at two points along the rod separated by 120 mm are
found to be 130°C and 110°C respectively. The diameter of the rod is 25 mm OD and
its thermal conductivity is 116 W/m°C. Calculate the heat transfer coefficient at the
surface of the rod and also the heat transfer rate. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply free and forced convective heat transfer correlations to internal
and external flows through/over various surface configurations and solve problems. (Apply)

1. Define Newton’s Law of cooling (R)

2. Differentiate viscous sub layer and buffer layer (U)
3. Air at 27°C and 1 atmospheric pressure flow over a flat plate at a speed of 2 m/s.
Calculate boundary layer thickness at distance 40 cm from leading edge of the plate
(A)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Explain the phenomena of boiling and condensation, apply LMTD and
NTU methods of thermal analysis to different types of heat exchanger configurations and solve
problems. (Apply)

1. Define LMTD (R)

2. Distinguish pool boiling from forced convection boiling (U)
3. Sketch and plot the LMTD distribution graph for condensers & evaporators (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Explain basic laws for radiation and apply these principles to
radiative heat transfer between different types of surfaces to solve problems. (Apply)
1. Define Planck's distribution law (R)
2. What are the required radiation properties of materials used as radiation Shield (U)
3. Calculate the maximum emissive power for an industrial furnace in the form of
black body and emitting radiation at 2500°C (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply diffusive and convective mass transfer equations and
correlations to solve mass transfer problems (Apply)

1. Define Molar concentration (R)

2. Indicate the heat and mass transfer analogy (U)
3. Air at 1 atm and 25oC containing small quantities of iodine, flows with a velocity of
6.2 m/s inside a 35 mm diameter tube. Calculate the mass transfer coefficient for
iodine. The thermo physical properties of air are: V=15.5 x 10-6 m2/s ; D=0.82 x 10-
5 m2/s (A)

178
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Design of Machine Elements and Joints L T P C

21ME5602
(Use of Databook is permitted) 2 1 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Mechanics, Strength of Materials
Objectives
• To familiarize the various steps involved in the Design Process
• To understand the principles involved in evaluating the shape and dimensions of a
component to satisfy functional and strength requirements.
• To learn to use standard practices and standard data
• To learn to use catalogues and standard machine components
UNIT I MACHINE DESIGN CONCEPTS 10
Introduction to Machine Design – General Considerations in Machineelements Design – Machine
Design Process/Procedure–Selection of Materialsbased on mechanical properties – Fits and
tolerances, Standardization – Preferred Numbers- Determination of Loads, Types of Stresses and
Deflection in simple machine parts- crane hook & C frame – Factor of safety, Design for Static Load –
Theories of Failure- Design for Fluctuating loads – Fatigue failure theories – Goodman equation –
Soderberg equation.
UNIT II SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS 8
Design of Shafts – combined twisting moment and bending moment -combined twisting moment,
bending moment and axial loads. Design of Keys and splines. Design of Couplings– Rigid and Flexible
Couplings.
UNIT III DESIGN OF JOINTS 9
Design of Welded joints – Lap and Butt joints – Welded joints subjected totransverse and eccentric
loads. Riveted Joints – Design of different types of riveted joints –Pressure vessels – Structural Joints
– Riveted joints subjected to eccentric loads. Design ofThreaded Joints – Bolted Joints in simple
Tension and Shear – Eccentrically Loaded Bolted Joints. Design of Cotter Joints and Knuckle Joints
UNIT IV ENERGY STORING ELEMENTS 9
Design of Helical Coil Springs – Tension and Compression springssubjected to axial loads and
eccentric loads- Design of parallel and concentric springs subjected toaxial loads - Design of Leaf
Springs - Design of Flywheels for IC engines and Punching presses.
UNIT V IC ENGINE COMPONENTS & BEARINGS 9
Design of Piston, Connecting Rod & Crank shafts – Sideand Centre Crank. Design of Sliding Contact
and Rolling Contact Bearings, Hydrodynamic journal bearings, Sommerfeld Number, Raimondi and
Boyd graphs- Selection of Rolling Contact bearings.
Total Periods 45

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT – I (10 Marks) Assignment, Multiple Choice Descriptive type questions
CAT – II (10 Marks) Questions
Descriptive Questions

179
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Apply the concepts of Design of simple machine elements subjected to static and fatigue
Loading. (Apply)
CO2: Apply the concepts of Design of shafts, keys and couplings under different loading conditions
for mechanical applications. .(Apply)
CO3: Apply the concepts of Design of welded joints, riveted joints and threaded joints subjected to
different loading conditions. .(Apply)
CO4:Apply the concepts of Design of helical coil springs, leaf springs and flywheels for mechanical
applications. .(Apply)
CO5: Apply the concepts of Design of piston, connecting rod and crank shaft for an
automobileengine and sliding contact bearings and anti-friction bearings. .(Apply)
Text Books
1.V.B. Bhandari, “Design of Machine Elements”, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill Education India
Pvt. Ltd., 2017.
2. R.S. Khurmi, J.K. Gupta, "Machine Design”, Eurasia Publishing House (Pvt.) Ltd, Ram Nagar,
New Delhi-110 055, 2005
Reference Books
1. Alfred Hall, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill
BookCo.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010
2. Ansel C. Ugural, “Mechanical Design of Machine Components”, Second Edition, CRC
Press, 2015.
3. Sundararajamoorthy T. V. Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications,
Chennai, 2015.
4. Alfred Hall, Alfred Holowenko, Herman Laughlin and S Somani, “Schaum's Outline -Machine
Design”, McGraw Hill Education India Pvt. Ltd., 2017.
5. Robert C. Juvinall and Kurt M. Marshek, “Machine Component Design”, Wiley India
Edition,2016..
6. PSG College, “Design Data: Data Book of Engineers”, Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2019
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 2 1 3 1 1 3
2 2 1 3 1 1 1 3
3 2 1 3 1 1 1 3
4 2 1 3 1 1 1 3
5 2 1 3 1 1 3

180
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Apply the concepts of Design of simple machine elements

subjected to static and fatigue Loading. (Apply)
1. An overhang crank with pin and shaft is shown in figure. A tangential load of 15
kN acts on the crank pin. Determine the maximum principal stress and the maximum
shear stress at the centre of the crankshaft bearing.(A)

2. Determine the diameter of a circular rod made of ductile material with a fatigue
strength (complete stress reversal), σ-1 = 265 MPa and a tensile yield strength of 350
MPa. The member is subjected to a varying axial load from Wmin = – 300 × 103 N to
Wmax = 700 × 103 N and has a stress concentration factor = 1.8. Use factor of safety as
2.0.(A)

3. The load on a bolt consists of an axial pull of 10 kN together with a transverse

Shear force of 5 kN. Find the diameter of bolt required according to,
• Maximum principal stress theory. (A)
• Maximum shear stress theory.
• Maximum principal strain theory.
• Maximum strain energy theory.
• Maximum distortion energy theory.

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply the concepts of Design of shafts, keys and couplings under
different loading conditions for mechanical applications (Apply)
1. A hollow shaft of 0.5 m outside diameter and 0.3 m inside diameter is used to
drive a propeller of a marine vessel. The shaft is mounted on bearings 6 metre apart and
it transmits 5600 kW at 150 r.p.m. The maximum axial propeller thrust is 500 kN and
the shaft weighs 70 kN. Determine: The maximum shear stress developed in the shaft,
and the angular twist between the bearings. (A)
2. Design a bushed-pin type flexible coupling for connecting a motor shaft to a
pump shaft for the following service conditions: Power to be transmitted = 40 kW; speed
of the motor shaft = 1000 r.p.m.; diameter of the motor shaft = 50 mm; diameter of the
pump shaft = 45 mm. The bearing pressure in the rubber bush and allowable stress in
the pins are to be limited to 0.45 N/mm2 and 25 MPa respectively.(A)
3. Design a shaft and flange for a Diesel engine in which protected type of flange
coupling is to be adopted for power transmission. The following data is available for
design: Power of engine = 75 kW; speed of engine = 200 r.p.m.; maximum permissible
stress in shaft = 40 MPa; maximum permissible twist in shaft = 1° in length of shaft equal
to 30 times the diameter of shaft; maximum torque = 1.25 × mean torque; pitch circle
diameter of bolts = 3 × diameter of shaft; maximum permissible stress in bolts = 20 MPa.

181
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Find out: 1. Diameter of shaft, 2. number of bolts, and 3. diameter of bolts. (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Apply the concepts of Design of welded joints, riveted joints
and threaded joints subjected to different loading conditions (Apply)
1. A rectangular steel plate is welded as a cantilever to a vertical column and
supports a single concentrated load P, as shown in Figure. Determine the weld size if shear
stress in the same is not to exceed 140 MPa. (A)

2. A steam engine cylinder of size 300 mm × 400 mm operates at 1.5 N/mm2 pressure. The
cylinder head is connected by means of 8 bolts having yield point stress of 350 MPa and
endurance limit of 240 MPa. The bolts are tightened with an initial preload of 1.8 times the
steam lead. The joint is made leak-proof by using soft copper gasket which renders the effect
of external load to be half. Determine the size of bolts, if factor of safety is 2 and stress
concentration factor is 3. (A)
3. A pressure vessel has an internal diameter of 1 m and is to be subjected to an internal
pressure of 2.75 N/mm2 above the atmospheric pressure. Considering it as a thin cylinder
and assuming efficiency of its riveted joint to be 79%, calculate the plate thickness if the
tensile stress in the material is not to exceed 88 MPa. Design a longitudinal double riveted
double strap butt joint with equal straps for this vessel. The pitch of the rivets in the outer
row is to be double the pitch in the inner row and zig-zag riveting is proposed. The
maximum allowable shear stress in the rivets is 64 MPa. You may assume that the rivets in
double shear are 1.8 times stronger than in single shear and the joint does not fail by
crushing. Make a sketch of the joint showing all calculated values. Calculate the efficiency of
the joint. (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Apply the concepts of Design of helical coil springs, leaf
springs and flywheels for mechanical applications (Apply)
1. Design a close coiled helical compression spring for a service load ranging from 2250 N to
2750 N. The axial deflection of the spring for the load range is 6 mm. Assume a spring index of
5. The permissible shear stress intensity is 420 MPa and modulus of rigidity, G = 84
kN/[Link] the effect of stress concentration. (A)
2. A truck spring has 12 numbers of leaves, two of which are full length leaves. The spring
supports are 1.05 m apart and the central band is 85 mm wide. The central load is to be 5.4
kN with a permissible stress of 280 MPa. Determine the thickness and width of the steel
spring leaves. The ratio of the total depth to the width of the spring is 3. Also determine the
deflection of the spring. (A)
3. A multi-cylinder engine is to run at a speed of 500 r.p.m. On drawing the crank effort
diagram to scale 1 mm = 2500 N-m and 1 mm = 3º, the areas above and below the mean

182
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

torque line is in mm2 as below: + 160, – 172, + 168, – 191, + 197, – [Link] speed is to be
kept within ± 1% of the mean speed of the engine. Design a suitable rim type C.I. flywheel for
the above engine. Assume rim width as twice the thickness and the overhang of the flywheel
from the centre of the nearest bearing as 1.2 metres. The permissible stresses for the rim in
tension are 6 MPa and those for shaft and key in shear are 42 MPa. The allowable stress for
the arm is 14 MPa. (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply the concepts of Design of piston, connecting rod and
crank shaft for an automobile engine and sliding contact bearings and anti-friction
bearings. (Apply)
1. Determine the dimensions of an I-section connecting rod for a petrol engine from
the following data: Diameter of the piston = 110 mm; Mass of the reciprocating parts = 2
kg; Length of the connecting rod from centre to centre = 325 mm; Stroke length = 150
mm; R.P.M. = 1500 with possible over speed of 2500; Compression ratio = 4: 1; Maximum
explosion pressure = 2.5 N/mm2. (A)
2. Design a side crankshaft for a 500 mm × 600 mm gas engine. The weight of the
flywheel is 80 kN and the explosion pressure is 2.5 N/mm2. The gas pressure at
maximum torque is 0.9 N/mm2 when the crank angle is 30º. The connecting rod is 4.5
times the crank radius. (A)
3. Design a cast iron piston for a single acting four stroke engine for the following
data: Cylinder bore = 100 mm; Stroke = 125 mm; Maximum gas pressure = 5 N/mm2;
Indicated mean effective pressure = 0.75 N/mm2; Mechanical efficiency = 80% ; Fuel
consumption = 0.15 kg per brake power per hour ; Higher calorific value of fuel = 42 ×
103 kJ/kg ; Speed = 2000 r.p.m. Any other data required for the design may be assumed.
(A)
4. Design a suitable journal bearing for a centrifugal pump from the following
available data: Load on the bearing = 13.5 kN; Diameter of the journal = 80 mm; Speed =
1440 r.p.m.; Bearing characteristic number at the working temperature (75°C) = 30 ;
Permissible bearing pressure intensity = 0.7 N/mm2 to 1.4 N/mm2; Average
atmospheric temperature = 30°C. Calculate the cooling requirements, if any. (A)
5. A ball bearing subjected to a radial load of 4000 N is expected to have a
satisfactory life of 12 000 hours at 720 r.p.m. with a reliability of 95%. Calculate the
dynamic load carrying capacity of the bearing, so that it can be selected from
manufacturer's catalogue based on 90% reliability. If there are four such bearings each
with a reliability of 95% in a system, what is the reliability of the complete system? (A)

183
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME5603 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Thermal Engineering
Objectives
• To understand the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile
• To have the practice for assembling and dismantling of engine parts and transmission
system
UNIT I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9
Types of automobiles vehicle construction and different layouts, chassis, frame and body, Vehicle
aerodynamics (various resistances and moments involved), IC engines –components – functions
and materials, variable valve timing (VVT).

UNIT II ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9

Electronically controlled gasoline injection system for SI engines, Electronically controlled diesel
injection system (Unit injector system, Rotary distributor type and common rail direct injection
system), Electronic ignition system (Transistorized coil ignition system, capacitive discharge
ignition system), Turbo chargers (WGT, VGT), Engine emission control by three way catalytic
converter system, Emission norms (Euro and BS).
UNIT III TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Clutch– types and construction, gear boxes– manual and automatic, gear shift mechanisms, Over
drive, transfer box, fluid flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints,
Differential and rear axle, Hotchkiss Drive and Torque Tube Drive.
UNIT IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 9
Steering geometry and types of steering gear box– Power Steering, Types of Front Axle, Types of
Suspension Systems, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Braking Systems, Antilock Braking System (ABS),
electronic brake force distribution (EBD) and Traction Control.
UNIT V ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Use of Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Bio-diesel, Bio-ethanol, Gasohol and Hydrogen in
Automobiles– Engine modifications required –Performance, Combustion and Emission
Characteristics of SI and CI engines with these alternate fuels – Electric and Hybrid Vehicles, Fuel
Cell
Note: Practical Training in dismantling and assembling of Engine parts and Transmission
Systems should be given to the students.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT – I 10 Marks Slip Test, Assignment, Case Descriptive Questions
CAT – II 10 Marks study etc
Descriptive Questions
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

184
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

CO1: Recognize the various parts of the automobile and their functions and materials (Remember)
CO2: Describe the engine auxiliary systems and engine emission control (Understand)
CO3: Distinguish the working of different types of transmission systems (Apply)
CO4: Enumerate the Steering, Brakes and Suspension Systems (Apply)
CO5: Predict possible alternate sources of energy for IC Engines (Understand)
Text Books
1. 1. Jain K.K. and Asthana R.B, “Automobile Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New
Delhi, (2002)
2. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering”, Vol 1 & 2, Seventh Edition, Standard Publishers, New
Delhi, 13thEdition (2014)

Reference Books
1. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, (2012)
2. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology,” SAE International Publications USA, (1998)
3. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics,” Second Edition, East-West Press, (1999)
4. Martin W, Stockel and Martin T Stockle , “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” The Good
heart - Will Cox Company Inc, USA , (1978)
5. Newton , Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Butterworth Publishers, (1989).

Web Resources
1. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
2 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
3 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
4 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
5 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
COURSE LEVEL QUESTIONS

1. COURSE OUTCOME 1: Recognize the various parts of the automobile and their functions
and materials (Remember)
1. List major types of automobiles according to the fuel used. (R)
2. Point out the stresses to which the frame members are subjected to? (R)

2. COURSE OUTCOME 2: Describe the engine auxiliary systems and engine emission control
(Understand)

1. Explain with a sketch the working of a Unit injector system (Understand)

[Link] the construction and operation of a Simple Carburetor.(Understand)

3. COURSE OUTCOME 3: Distinguish the working of different types of transmission systems

(Apply)

1. Illustrate how does the front axle differ from a rear axle. Explain with sketches.
(Apply)

185
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

2. Compare hydraulic, mechanical, electrical and vaccum method of operating

clutches (Understand)

4. COURSE OUTCOME 4: Enumerate the Steering, Brakes and Suspension Systems (Apply)
1. Explain the principle of operation of a power steering system with a neat
sketch. (Understand)
2. Examine the operation of antilock braking systems. (Apply)

5. COURSE OUTCOME 5: Predict possible alternate sources of energy for IC Engines

(Understand)

1. Explain the reasons for using alternate fuels in IC Engines.

(Understand)
2. Explain the two methods by which hydrogen can be used in IC engine.
(Understand)

186
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21PT3904 REASONING
0 0 2 1
Prerequisites for the course
● Foundational English
● Verbal Ability
Objectives
To strengthen the interpersonal skills and branding it to social network by the effective use of social
media and social interactions
UNIT I Interpersonal Skill 6
Interpersonal Communication, Peer Communication, Image Building and Personal Branding,
Delegation and compliance, Responsibility, Creation of accountability
UNIT II Social Media 6
Effective use of social media, Types of social media, Moderating personal information, Social media for
Job/Profession, Networking on social media, Maximizing network with social media
UNIT III Social Interaction 6
Event management, Event management methods, Effective techniques for better event management,
Influencing skill, Building relationships, Persistence and resilience
UNIT IV Non Verbal Communication 6
Proximecs, Types of Proximecs, Rapport building, Negotiation Skill, Effective negotiation strategies.
Conflict resolution, Styles of conflict resolution
UNIT V Reasoning Ability 6
Analytical Reasoning Data Arrangement (Linear and circular & Cross Variable Relationship),
Ordering/ranking/grouping, Selection Decision table
Total Periods 3
0
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test-1 Continuous Assessment Test-2 Model Exam
(30 Marks) (30 Marks) (40 Marks)
1. DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 1. DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 1. DESCRIPTIVE
2. MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS 2. MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS 2. MULTIPLE CHOICE
QUESTIONS

187
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Improve their interpersonal skills through proper communication.
CO2: Acquire wide knowledge on social Media and its interaction
CO3:Understanding the various strategies for building relationships among peers
CO4:Improve negotiation skills in academic and social contexts
CO5: Interpret the analytic data in decision table.
Text Books
1. ETHNUS, Apti mithra, 2013, First Edition, McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd.
2. Mark G. Frank, David Matsumoto, Hyi Sung Hwang, Nonverbal Communication: Science and
Applications, 2012, 1 st Edition, Sage Publications, New York.
Reference Books
1. Kerry Patterson, Joseph Grenny, Ron McMillan, Al Switzler, Crucial Conversations: Tools for
Talking When Stakes are High, 2001,1st edition McGraw Hill Contemporary, Bangalore.
2. Dale Carnegie, How to Win Friends and Influence People, Latest Edition,2016. Gallery Books,
New York
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 1 2 2
2 2 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 1 2 1 2 2
4 1 2 2 3 3 2
5 2 2 2 2 2 1

COURSE CONTENT AND LECTURE SCHEDULE

[Link] TOPIC NO OF
HOURS
REQUIRED

UNIT I Interpersonal Skill

1 Interpersonal Communication 1

2 Peer Communication 1

3 Image Building and Personal Branding 1

4 Delegation and compliance 1

5 Responsibility 1

6 Creation of accountability 1

UNIT II Social Media

1 Effective use of social media 1

188
2 Types of social media 1

3 Moderating personal information 1

4 Social media for Job/Profession 1

5 Networking on social media 1

6 Maximizing network with social media 1

UNIT III Social Interaction

1 Event management 1

2 Event management methods 1

3 Effective techniques for better event management 1

4 Influencing skill 1

5 Building relationships 1

6 Persistence and resilience 1

UNIT-IV Non Verbal Communication

1 Proximecs, Types of proximecs 1

2 Rapport building 1

3 Negotiation Skill 1

4 Effective negotiation strategies 1

5 Conflict resolution 1

6 Styles of conflict resolution 1

UNIT-V Reasoning Ability

1 Analytical Reasoning Data Arrangement (Linear and circular & 2

Cross Variable Relationship),

2 Ordering/ranking/grouping, 2

3 Selection Decision table 2

189
 L T P C
21ME5604 MECHATRONICS AND INTERNET OF THINGS
3 0 2 4
Prerequisites for the course
Metrology and Instrumentations, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Science
Objectives
To impart knowledge about the elements and techniques involved in Mechatronics
systems which are very much essential to understand the emerging field of automation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MECHATRONICS SYSTEM 9

Automation - Concepts of Mechatronics approach – Elements of an Automated System -

Mechanical Actuation System-Hydraulic & Pneumatic Actuation System, Electrical Actuation
System- Control system – Sensor - measurement of Displacement - Velocity - Force - Temperature
- Pressure – Flow.
UNIT II MICRO PROCESSOR AND INTERFACING CIRCUITS 9
Architecture of 8085 – Addressing Modes – Instruction Set – Simple Programming-Architecture of
8051 – I/O Pins Ports and Circuits- Programming in Embedded C: Data types, Control loops- time
delay, I/O, Logic operations -Applications LED, ADC/DAC and stepper motor - Introduction to
Arduino controller.
UNIT III PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER & SCADA 9
Introduction – Basic structure – Input and output processing – Programming – Mnemonics –
Timers, counters, and internal relays – Data handling – Selection of PLC. Introduction to SCADA -
Applications.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 9
Introduction, Physical Design of IoT, Logical Design of IoT, Functional blocks of IoT, IoT Design
Methodology - IoT applications and case studies- Home Automation, Agriculture, Industry
UNIT V MECHATRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Mechatronics design concepts – Case studies of Mechatronics systems – Pick and place Robot –
Engine Management system – Automatic car park barrier- Automated Assembly System-
automated inspection-Automated health monitoring system
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Lab components (30 End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) Marks) (50 Marks)
CAT – I 10 Marks Model Lab – 10 Marks Descriptive Questions
CAT – II 10 Marks Experiment Marks – 10 Marks
Descriptive Questions
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the interdisciplinary applications of Electronics, Electrical, Mechanical, Computer
and fluid systems. (Apply)
CO2: Explore the architecture of Microprocessor, Microcontroller and Programmable Peripheral
Interface and various interfacing techniques. (Apply)
CO3: Utilize the application of programmable logic controllers and SCADA to the industries.
(Apply)
CO4: Apply the basic concepts of IoT. (Apply)
CO5: Apply engineering design of automation to assembly, inspection and monitoring process.
(Apply)

190
Text Books
1. Bolton, “Mechatronics – Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering”,
Pearson Education Limited, 2015.
2. Ramesh Gaonkar “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085” Penram International Publishing, 2017
3. Sudip Misra, Anandarup Mukherjee, Arijit Roy Introduction to IoT 9th Edition, Cambridge
University Press, 2016
Reference Books
1. Bradley D.A, Dawson D, Buru N.C and Loader A.J, “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall, 1993.
2. Clarence W, de Silva, "Mechatronics" CRC Press, First Indian Re-print, 2013
3. K. P. Ramachandran, G. [Link], and [Link]-Sundram, “Mechatronics: Integrated
Mechanical Electronic Systems”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2008.
4. Dr Kamlesh Lakhwani ,Kumar Gianey, Joseph Kofi Wireko , Kamal Kant Hiran “Internet of
Things (IoT): Principles, Paradigms and Applications of IoT, BPB Publications, 2015
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Mechatronics and IoT)
2. [Link] (Mechatronics and IoT)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 3
2 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 3
3 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 3
4 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 3
5 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 3

[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 Measurement of displacement, temperature, and speed CO1
2 Design and demonstration of simple automation system
CO1
using hydraulic/Pneumatics system
3 Assembly language programming of 8085 – Addition – CO2
Subtraction – Multiplication – Division – Sorting (any two
operations)
4 I/O port programming in 8051 using embedded C. CO2

5 PLC programming to control a valve CO3

6 To interface LED/Buzzer with Arduino/Raspberry Pi and CO4

write a Program to turn ON LED for 1 sec after every 2
seconds
7 Design of home/industrial automation system using Node CO5
MCU or ESP32

191
 Total Practical Periods 30

Sl. No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.

1 Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit with manual and
1 No.
electrical controls/ PLC Control each
2 Basic Hydraulic Trainer Kit 1 No
3 Hydraulics and Pneumatics Systems Simulation
10 No
Software
4 8051 - Microcontroller
5 Nos
6 Ardino UNO 10 Nos
7 ESP 32 10 Nos
8 Data Cables for Ardino
20 Nos
UNO + ESP 32
9 DHT Sensors 5 No
10 PIR Sensors 5 No
11 IR Sensors 5 Pair

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 Interpret the interdisciplinary applications of Electronics,
Electrical, Mechanical, Computer and fluid systems (Apply)

1. Explain the working principles of stepper motor. (U)

2. Is Washing machine working under a closed loop System? Justify your answer (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Explore the architecture of Microprocessor, Microcontroller

and programming for simple applications. (Apply)

1. Explain the instruction set of 8085 Microprocessor (Understand)

2. Explain how 8051 microcontrollers can be used to display a four-digit number in
seven segment LEDs with minimum power (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Utilize the application of programmable logic controllers and

SCADA to the industries. (Apply)

1. Create a ladder diagram for the following application:

A pneumatic system with double solenoid valve controls two double acting cylinders
A and B. The sequence of cylinder operations are as follows: Cylinder A extends
followed by cylinder B extending, then cylinder B retracts and finally the cycle is

192
 completed by the cylinder A retracting. Explain the logic of the PLC circuit used
(Apply)

[Link] the ladder diagram and PLC program for the following logic gate.
a) AND b) OR c) NAND d) NOT e) XOR (f) XNOR (Remember)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Explain the basic concepts of IoT (Apply)

1. With Suitable example, explain in detail about IoT levels and deployment templates.
(Apply)
2. Discuss the steps involved in IoT design methodology (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply engineering design of automation to assembly, inspection and

monitoring process. (Apply)
1. Develop an automation system for a pick and place robot (Apply)

2. Mention the applications of IoT in health care domain (Understand)

193
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME5611 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Physics , Engineering Thermodynamics
Objectives
1. To study the heat transfer phenomena to estimate the relevant coefficient.
2. To study and analyse the performance of refrigeration systems.
[Link] List of Experiments CO
Thermal conductivity measurement using guarded plate
1 CO1
apparatus.
Thermal conductivity measurement of pipe insulation using
2 CO1
lagged pipe apparatus.
Determination of heat transfer coefficient under natural
3 CO2
convection from a vertical cylinder.
Determination of heat transfer coefficient under forced
4 CO2
convection from a tube.
5 Determination of Thermal conductivity of composite wall. CO1
6 Determination of Thermal conductivity of insulating powder. CO1
Heat transfer from pin-fin apparatus (natural & forced
7 CO2
convection modes)
8 Determination of Stefan – Boltzmann constant. CO3
9 Determination of emissivity of a grey surface. CO3
10 Effectiveness of Parallel / counter flow heat exchanger. CO4
11 Performance test in a Fluidized Bed cooling tower CO5
Study of the regimes of pool boiling and determination of
12 CO4
critical heat flux
Study on Heat conduction in Cartesian & Cylindrical
13 CO1
coordinates system
14 Study of electrical analogy for Thermal Radiation Systems CO3
Experiment on convective heat transfer through flat plate
15 CO2
solar collector
Total Periods :45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment End Semester Exams (40 Marks)
(60 Marks)
Lab experiment 40 Marks Practical Exam
Model lab with project -20
Marks
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Analyse and interpret heat transfer parameters by conducting experiments on conduction
experimental setups.
2. Analyse and interpret heat transfer parameters by conducting experiments on natural and forced
convection apparatus.
3. Analyse and interpret heat transfer parameters by conducting experiments on radiation apparatus.
4. Analyse and interpret heat transfer parameters by conducting experiments on heat exchanger test
setups and Study of boiling & condensation.
194
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

5. Analyse and interpret heat transfer parameters by conducting experiments on a Fluidized Bed
Cooling Tower & Study of Mass Transfer
Laboratory Requirements
(Requirements for a batch of 30students)
Heat and Mass Transfer Laboratory
Quantity
S.N Description of Equipment Required
o. (R)
1. Guarded plate apparatus 1

2. Lagged pipe apparatus 1

3. Natural convection-vertical cylinder apparatus 1

4. Forced convection inside tube apparatus 1

5. Composite wall apparatus 1

6. Thermal conductivity of insulating powder apparatus 1

7. Pin-fin apparatus 1
8. Stefan-Boltzmann apparatus 1
9. Emissivity measurement apparatus 1
10. Parallel/counter flow heat exchanger apparatus 1
11 Fluidized Bed Cooling Tower 1
12 Flat Plate Solar Collector 1

Reference Books
1. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer”, John Wiley
& Sons, 7th Edition, (2014)
2. Kothandaraman, C.P., “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer”, New
Age International, New Delhi, (2012)
3. Nag, P.K., “Heat Transfer”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, (2002)
Web Resources
1. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 1 1 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 3

195
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME5612 CAD / CAM LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Graphics, Computer Aided Machine Drawing
Objectives
1. To gain practical experience in handling 3D modelling and assembling using modelling
software systems.
2. To study the features of CNC Machine Tool.
3. To expose students to modern control systems (Fanuc, Siemens etc.,)
4. To know the application of various CNC machines like CNC lathe, CNC Vertical Machining
center, CNC EDM and CNC wire-cut and studying of Rapid prototyping and tooling.

[Link] Experiments CO
3D GEOMETRIC MODELLING (27)
1 Introduction of 3D Modelling Software CO 1
2 Design of 3D Assembly Model of I.C. Engine Connecting rods. CO 2
3 Design of 3D Assembly Model of Footstep bearing. CO 2
4 Design of 3D Assembly Model of Screw Jack. CO 2
5 Design of 3D Assembly Model of Machine Vice. CO 2
6 Design of 3D Assembly Model of Universal Joint CO 2
7 Design of 3D Assembly Model of Flange Coupling CO 2
8 Design of 3D Assembly Model of Plummer Block CO 2
9 Design of 3D Assembly Model of Lathe Tailstock CO 2
MANUAL PART PROGRAMMING (15)
1 Part Programming – CNC Machining Center (8)
a) Linear Cutting
b) Circular Cutting CO3
c) Cutter Radius Compensation.
d) Canned Cycle Operations.
2 Part Programming CNC Turning Center (7)
a) Straight, Taper and Radius Turning
b) Thread Cutting CO4
c) Rough and Finish Turning Cycle
d) Drilling and Tapping Cycle

3 a) Study of CNC EDM and CNC wire-cut

CO5
b) Study of Rapid prototyping and tooling
Related
[Link]. List of Projects CO
Experiment
CAD
1. LEVEL 1 CAD
CO2
Industrial based 3D modelling components EXERCISES

196
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

2. LEVEL 2 CAD
CO2
Production based assembly modelling EXERCISES
CAM
1. LEVEL 1 CAM
CO3
Industrial based CNC programming for CNC lathe EXERCISES
2. LEVEL 2 CAM
CO4
Industrial based CNC programming for CNC Milling machine EXERCISES
Projects from both CAD and CAM is mandatory.
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment(60 Marks) End Semester Exams (40 Marks)

Lab experiment 40 Marks Practical Exam

Model lab with project -20 Marks
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Interpret the fundamentals of the Computer Aided Design which will equip them to pursue
higher studies
CO2: Illustrate any solid part modelling by using modelling software package
CO3: Write the part programming of CNC milling
CO4: Write the part programming of CNC lathe
CO5: Interpret the fundamentals of EDM, wire-cut and Rapid prototyping and tooling
Text Books
1. Ibrahim Zeid, "Mastering CAD/CAM", Tata McGraw- Hill Inc., New Delhi, 2008
2. Radhakrishnan P and Subramanyan S, ―CAD/CAM/CIM‖, New Age International (P) Ltd.,
2008
Reference Books
1. PN RAO, “CAD/CAM: Principles and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004
2. [Link], [Link],”Computer Graphics and Multimedia Insights, Mathematical Models
and Programming Paradigms” PHI publications 2016
3. Zhuming Bi, Xiaoquin Wang, “Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing”, Wiley, 2020

Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

HARDWARE
1. Computer Server 1
2. Computer nodes or systems (High end CPU with at least 1 GB main memory) 30
networked to the server
3. A3 size plotter 1
4. Laser Printer 1
5. CNC Lathe 1
6. CNC milling machine 1
SOFTWARE
7. Any High end integrated modeling and manufacturing CAD/ CAM software 15 licenses

197
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

8. CAM Software for machining centre and turning centre 15 licenses

(CNC Programming and tool path simulation for FANUC / Sinumeric and
Heidenhain controller)
9. Licensed operating system Adequate
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 2 2 2 1 1 1 3
2 2 2 3 2 1 1 3
3 2 2 2 1 1 1 3
4 1 1 2 2 1 1 3
5 2 2 2 1 3

198
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

SEMESTER VI

199
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Design of Transmission Systems L T P C

21ME6601
(Use of PSG Design Data Book permitted) 2 1 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Strength of Materials, Design of machine Elements.

Objectives
• To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of Mechanical power Transmission
components.
• To understand the standard procedure available for Design of Transmission of Mechanical elements
• To learn to use standard data and catalogues

UNIT I INTRODUCTION, BELTS & CHAIN DRIVES 9

Need of Power transmission - Requirements of Transmission system - Types and Classifications of
Transmission systems – Specification of a Transmission Element - Design of Flat belts and pulleys –
Selection of V belts and pulleys –Design of Transmission chains and Sprockets.
UNIT II PARALLEL AXIS GEARS 9
Speed ratios and number of teeth-Force analysis – Tooth stresses – Dynamic effects – Fatigue strength –
Factor of safety – Gear materials – Design of straight tooth spur &amp; helical gears based on strength and
wear considerations – Pressure angle in the normal and transverse plane – Equivalent number of teeth–
forces for helical gears.
UNIT III INCLINED AXIS GEARS 9
Straight bevel gear: Tooth terminology, tooth forces and stresses, equivalent number of teeth. Estimating
the dimensions of pair of straight bevel gears. Worm Gear: Merits and demerits – terminology. Thermal
capacity, materials – forces and stresses, efficiency, estimating the size of the worm gear pair. Cross
helical: Terminology –helix angles – Estimating the size of the pair of cross helical gears.
UNIT IV GEARBOXES 9
Geometric progression – Standard step ratio – Ray diagram, kinematics layout – Design of sliding mesh
gear box – Design of multi speed gear box for machine tool applications – Constant mesh gear box –
Speed reducer unit – Variable speed gear box, Fluid Couplings, Torque Converters for automotive
applications.
UNIT V CLUTCHES AND BRAKES 9
Design of plate clutches –axial clutches – cone clutches – internal expanding rim clutches –
Electromagnetic clutches. Band and Block brakes – external shoe brakes – Internal expanding shoe brake.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 & CAT 2 each 10 marks Assignment, MCQ Descriptive Type
Descriptive type questions
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret basic concepts, selection and design of power transmission systems such as flat belt,
V belt drives & Pulleys and chain drives. (Apply)
CO2: Calculate power transmission between parallel shaft and design spur & helical gears. (Apply)
CO3: Interpret transmission between intersecting shafts and design the bevel, worm and cross
helical gears. (Apply)
CO4: Prepare kinematic layout and structural arrangement of the gear boxes. (Apply)

200
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

CO5: Design the clutches and brakes. (Apply)

Text Books
1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2016.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett “Mechanical
Engineering Design”, 9th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.
Reference Books
1. Alfred Hall, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill
BookCo.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010
2. AnselUgural, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Approach", 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Book Co, 2003.
3. Sundararajamoorthy T. V. Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications, Chennai,
2015.
4. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing Co, (2003)
5. Prabhu. T.J., “Design of Transmission Elements”, Mani Offset, Chennai, (2000)
6. R.S. Khurmi, J.K. Gupta, "Machine Design”, Eurasia Publishing House (Pvt.) Ltd, Ram Nagar,
New Delhi-110 055, 2005.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]/machine design
3. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 2 1 3 1 3
2 2 1 3 1 3
3 2 1 3 1 3
4 2 1 3 1 3
5 2 1 3 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Interpret basic concepts, selection and design of power
transmission systems such as flat belt, V belt drives &
Pulleys and chain drives. (Apply)
1. Design a flat belt drive for a fan running at 360rpm which is driven by a 10 KW at1440
rpm motor. The belt drive is open type and the distance between the pulley Centres is
2000 mm. The diameter of a driven pulley is 1 m. (A)
2. Design a V-belt drive to transmit 10kW at 400 rpm. The speed ratio is 3. Centre
distance between the pulleys is 600 mm and the drive is crusher. (A)
3. A truck equipped with 9.5 KW engine uses a roller chain of the final drive to the rear
axle. The driving sprocket runs at 900 rpm and driven sprocket at 400 rpm with a
center distance of approximately 600 mm. select a suitable the roller chain. (A)

201
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Calculate power transmission between parallel shaft and design
spur & helical gears. (Apply)
1. Design a pair of straight spur gear drive for a stone crusher, the gears are made of C40
steel. The pinion is to transmit 30 KW at 1200 rpm. The gear ratio is 3. The gear is to
work 8 hours/day 6days in a week for 3 years. (A)
2. A helical gear with 30-degree helix angle has to transmit 35kW at 1500 rpm with a
speed reduction ratio 2.5. If the pinion has 24 teeth determine the necessary module,
pitch diameter and face width for 20-degree full depth teeth. Assume 15Ni 2Cr 1 Mo15
material for both pinion and wheel. (A)
3. For intermittent duty of an elevator, two cylindrical gears made of alloys steel 40 Ni 2
Cr 1 Mo 28 and have to transmit12.5 kw at a pinion speed of 1200 rpm. Design a gear
pair for the following specifications: Gear ratio: 3.5, pressure angle 20°, involute full
depth, helix angle 15°. Gears are expected to work 6 hrs a day for 10 years. Minimum
number of teeth on pinion can be taken as 20 and IS quality 8. (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Interpret transmission between intersecting shafts and design
the bevel, worm and cross helical gears. (Apply)
1. Design a Bevel gear drive to transmit 4 KW. Speed ratio = 4. driving shaft speed 225
rpm. The drive is non-reversible. Assume a life of 25000 hours. (A)

2. Design a bevel gear to transmit 3.5 KW with driving shaft speed is 200 rpm. Speed
ratio requires is 4. The drive is non- reversible. Pinion is made of steel and wheel made
of CI. Assume a life of 25,000 Hrs. (A)

3. Design the worm gear drive and determine the power loss by heat generation of
Hardened steel worm rotates at 1440 rpm and transmits 12 KW to a phosphor bronze
gear with gear ratio of 16. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Prepare kinematic layout and structural arrangement of

the gear boxes. (Apply)
1. Design a 9-speed gear box for the following data. Minimum speed: 180rpm,
Maximum speed: 1800rpm. Using standard step ratio, draw the speed diagram,
kinematic layout. Also find the number of teeth on each gear. (A)
2. Design 12 speed gear box for a minimum speed of 160 rpm and a maximum speed of
2000 rpm. The input speed of motor is 1600 rpm. Draw the speed diagram, kinematic
diagram and indicate the number of teeth on each gear. (A)
3. In a milling machine, 18 different speeds in the range of 35 rpm and 650 rpm are
required. Design a three-stage gear box with a standard step ratio. Sketch the layout of
the gear box, indicating the number of teeth n each gear. The gear box receives 3.6 kW
from an electric motor running at 1,440 rpm. Sketch also the speed diagram. (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Design the clutches and brakes. (Apply)
1. A plate clutch with maximum diameter 60mm has maximum lining pressure of
0.35 MPa. The power to be transmitted at 400 rpm is 135 KW and μ =0.3. Find inside
diameter and spring force required to engage the clutch. Springs with spring index 6
and material spring steel with safe shear stress 600 MPa are used. Find the diameters

202
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

if 6 spring are used. (A)

2. A multi disc wet clutch is to be designed for a machine tool driven by an electric motor
of 12.5 KW running at 1440 rpm. Space restrictions limit the outside disc diameter to
100mm. Determine the appropriate value of inside diameter, total number of discs and
clamping force. (A)
3. Design a differential band for a winch lifting a load of 20 KN through a steel wire rope
wound around a barrel of 600 mm dm. The brake drum, keyed to barrel shaft is 800
mm diameter and the angle of lap of the band over the drum is about 240 degrees.
Operating arms of the brake are 50 mm and 250 mm. The length of operating level is
1.6m. (A)

203
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6602 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS
2 1 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Matrices and Advanced Calculus, Strength of Materials, Fluid Mechanics and Machinery, Heat and
Mass Transfer.
Objectives
• To introduce the concepts of solving of engineering problems and to appreciate the use of
Finite Element Analysis.

UNIT I STATIC ANALYSIS USING ONE DIMENSIONAL SPAR 12

ELEMENTS
Mathematical modelling of Field Problems in Engineering, Approximate methods of analysis
(Descriptive Only), Basic concepts of FEM, General procedure of FEM,discretization of domain, basic
types of elements; Formulation of element stiffness matrices and load vectors: 1D linearspar and
quadratic spar elements, plane truss element, treatment of boundary conditions and temperature
effects;Solution of problems.
UNIT II STATIC ANALYSIS USING ONE DIMENSIONAL BEAM 8
ELEMENTS
Beam element : Hermite shape functions, formulation of element stiffness matrix and load vectors;
Beams on elastic foundation; Problems using one dimensional beamelement.

UNIT III STATIC ANALYSIS USING TWO DIMENSIONAL 9

ELEMENTS
Isoparametric formulation, 2D triangular and quadrilateral elements, element stiffness matrices and
load vectors, plane stress and plane strain, Temperature effects; problems using two dimensional
elements; Introduction to higher order elements.
UNIT IV DYNAMIC ANALYSIS 8
Equations of motion for dynamic problems using one dimensional spar, truss and beam
elements, formulation of consistent and lumped mass matrices, Natural frequencies of
longitudinal vibration and mode shapes, Transverse Natural frequencies of beam.

UNIT V HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANALYSIS 8

Basic equations of heat transfer, finite element formulation and solution of one-dimensional heat
transfer problems involving steady state heat conduction and convection. Basic equations of
fluid flow, finite element formulation of one-dimensional flow through porous media and
Inviscid fluid flow through pipes, Network flow analysis

Total Periods 45

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT – I - 10 Marks Assignment, MCQ, Case Studies Descriptive type
CAT 2 – 10 Marks questions
Descriptive type questions

204
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Apply one dimensional spar elements to solve field problems. (Apply)
CO2: Exercise the one-dimensional beam elements to field problems. (Apply)
CO3: Apply the two-dimensional elements to solve the field problems. (Apply)
CO4: Explore the applications of one-dimensional elements to solve dynamics problems. (Apply)
CO5: Analyze the applications of one-dimensional element for heat transfer and fluid flow problems
(Analyze)
Text Books
1. Seshu P., “Text Book of Finite Element Analysis”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. NewDelhi, (2013)
2. Reddy J.N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, McGraw-Hill Edition, (2018)
Reference Books
1. Bhavikatti S.S., “Finite Element Analysis”, New Age International Publishers, (2015)
2. [Link], Ashok [Link], “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”,
Cambridge University Press (2021)
3. Daryl L. Logan, “A First Course in the Finite Element Method.” Cengage Learning (2016)
4. S.S Rao,” The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Elsevier Science, (2011)
5. Robert D. Cook, Malkus, Plesha, Witt, “Concepts And Applications Of Finite Element Analysis”,4th
Edition 2007
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 3 2 1 1 2 1
2 3 3 1 1 2 1
3 3 3 1 1 2 1
4 3 3 1 1 2 1
5 3 3 2 1 2 1

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Apply one dimensional spar elements to solve field problems.
(Apply)

1. Explain the steps involved in finite element analysis. (U)

2. Consider a bar as shown in Fig. An axial load of 200KN is applied at point p. Take
A1=2400mm2, E1=70x109N/mm2, A2=600mm2, E2=200X109N/mm2. Calculate the
following, (i) nodal displacement at point p, (ii) stress in each element (iii) reaction
force (A)

205
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Exercise the one dimensional beam elements to field problems
(Apply)

[Link] the beam shown in fig using FEM (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Apply the two dimensional elements to solve the field problems
(Apply)
1. Determine the stiffness matrix for the CST element shown in Fig. The co-ordinates are
given in mm. Assume plane strain conditions. E=210GPa,ν=0.25 and t=10mm.(A)

2. For the isoparametric quadrilateral element as shown in fig., the Cartesian co-
ordinates of point P are (6,4). The loads 10KN and 12KN are acting in x and y direction
on that point P. Evaluate the nodal forces. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Explore the applications of one dimensional elements to solve

dynamics problems (Apply)

1. Determine the natural frequencies of transverse vibration for a beam fixed at both
ends. The beam may be modelled by two elements, each of length L and cross-sectional
area A. The use of symmetry boundary condition is optional. (A)

2. Set up the system of equations governing the free transverse vibrations of a simply
supported beam modeled by two finite elements. Determine the natural frequency of
the system.(A)

206
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Analyze the heat transfer and fluid flow problems using one
dimensional elements (Analyze)

1. Analyse the one-dimensional flow through porous media over the section shown in
the figure by using finite element method. (An)

2. Find the flow rates in each of the elements (pipes) in the network as shown in Figure
6.35. The diameters of the pipe are 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 12, 12, 12 mm, respectively.
The lengths are 1,000, 1,000, 1,000, 1,000, 1,000, 1,000, 1,500, 1,500, 1,500 mm,
respectively. The flow rates at each node out of the network are [+125, –25, –25, –25, –
25, –25] cubic cm/min. The liquid flowing is water. If the pressure head at node 1 is 2 m
expressed in terms of the height of liquid that is flowing, find the pressure heads, (H), at
each of the remaining nodes and the flow rates in the pipe. The friction factor may be
taken as 0.02.(A)

207
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21HS3101 ETHICS AND VALUES
3 0 0 3
Preamble:
The course is designed with the purpose of helping students in developing a holistic perspective about
life. It opens the space for the student to explore his/her role (value) in all aspects of living – as an
individual, as a member of a family, as a part of the society and as a unit in nature.
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
1. To help students distinguish between values and skills.
2. To help students identify what they ‘really want to be’ in their life and profession.
3. To help students understand the meaning of happiness and prosperity for a human being.
4. To facilitate the students to understand harmony at all the levels of human living, and live
accordingly.
5. To facilitate the students in applying the understanding of harmony in existence in their profession
and lead an ethical life
MODULE I Course Introduction - Need, Basic Guidelines, Content 9
and Process for
Value Education
1. Understanding the need, basic guidelines, content and process for Value Education
2. Self-Exploration–what is it? - its content and process; ‘Natural Acceptance’ and Experiential
Validation- as the mechanism for self-exploration
3. Continuous Happiness and Prosperity- A look at basic Human Aspirations
4. Right understanding, Relationship and Physical Facilities- the basic requirements for fulfillment
of aspirations of every human being with their correct priority
5. Understanding Happiness and Prosperity correctly- A critical appraisal of the current scenario
6. Method to fulfill the above human aspirations: understanding and living in harmony at various
levels
Suggested Activities:
Include practice sessions to discuss natural acceptance in human being as the innate acceptance
for living with responsibility (living in relationship, harmony and co-existence) rather than as
arbitrariness in choice based on liking-disliking

MODULE II Understanding Harmony in the Human Being - 9

Harmony in Myself
1. Understanding human being as a co-existence of the sentient ‘I’ and the material ‘Body’
2. Understanding the needs of Self (‘I’) and ‘Body’-Sukh and Suvidha (happiness and physical facility)
3. Understanding the Body as an instrument of ‘I’ (I being the doer, seer and enjoyer)
4. Understanding the characteristics and activities of ‘I’ and harmony in ‘I’
5. Understanding the harmony of I with the Body: Sanyam(control) and Swasthya (Health);
correct appraisal of Physical needs, meaning of Prosperity in detail
6. Programs to ensure Sanyam and Swasthya
Suggested Activities:
Include practice sessions to discuss the role others have played in making material goods
available to me. Identifying from one’s own life. Differentiate between prosperity and
accumulation. Discuss programs for ensuring health vs dealing with disease.
MODULE III Understanding Harmony in the Family and Society- 9
Harmony in Human-Human Relationship

208
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

1. Understanding harmony in the Family- the basic unit of human interaction

2. Understanding values in human-human relationship; meaning of Nyaya (justice) and
program for its fulfillment to ensure Ubhay-tripti (mutual happiness)
3. Trust (Vishwas) and Respect (Samman) as the foundational values of relationship
4. Understanding the meaning of Vishwas; Difference between intention and competence
5. Understanding the meaning of Samman (respect), Difference between respect and
differentiation; the other salient values in relationship
6. Understanding the harmony in the society (society being an extension of family):
Samadhan, Samridhi, Abhay, Sah-astitva (Resolution, Prosperity, fearlessness, co-existence)
as comprehensive Human Goals
Suggested Activities:
Include practice sessions to reflect on relationships in family, hostel and institute as extended
family, real life examples, teacher-student relationship, goal of education etc. Gratitude as a
universal value in relationships. Discuss scenarios. Elicit examples from students’ lives. Pay a
visit to the old age home / orphanage / physically & mentally challenged asylum and support
them in catering their needs to ensure mutual happiness
MODULE IV Understanding Harmony in the Nature and Existence – 9
Whole existence as Coexistence
1. Understanding the harmony in the Nature
2. Interconnectedness and mutual fulfillment among the four orders of nature- recyclability
and self-regulation in nature
3. Understanding Existence as Coexistence (Sah-astitva) of mutually interacting units in
allpervasive space
4. Holistic perception of harmony at all levels of existence
Suggested Activities:
Include practice sessions to discuss human beings as cause of imbalance in nature (film “Home”
can be used), pollution, depletion of resources and role of technology etc. Submit a video
documentary highlighting the ways of humans creating an imbalance in nature and ways to
prevent it.
MODULE V Implications of the above Holistic Understanding of 9
Harmony on Professional Ethics
1. Natural acceptance of human values
2. Definitiveness of Ethical Human Conduct
3. Basis for Humanistic Education, Humanistic Constitution and Humanistic Universal Order
4. Competence in Professional Ethics:
a) Ability to utilize the professional competence for augmenting universal human order,
b) Ability to identify the scope and characteristics of people-friendly and eco-friendly
production systems, technologies and management models
5. Case studies of typical holistic technologies, management models and production systems
6. Strategy for transition from the present state to Universal Human Order
Suggested Activities:
Include a presentation session on identifying human inventions that are non ecofriendly and
brainstorming to come up with ecofriendly production systems or ecofriendly alternatives.
Total Periods 45

Suggestive Assessment Method FAT (20 Marks) ESE (60 Marks)

CAT (30 Marks)

209
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Written Assessment Activity / Presentation in the classroom / Written Examination

MCQ / written exam on or off campus activities
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 - Understand the significance of value inputs in a classroom and start applying them in
their life and profession
CO2 - Distinguish between values and skills, happiness and accumulation of physical
facilities, the Self and the Body, Intention and Competence of an individual, etc.
CO3 - Understand the value of harmonious relationship based on trust and respect in their life
and profession
CO4 - Understand the role of a human being in ensuring harmony in society and nature.
CO5 - Distinguish between ethical and unethical practices, and start working out the strategy
to actualize a harmonious environment wherever they work.
Text Books
1. R R Gaur, R Sangal, G P Bagaria, 2009, A Foundation Course in Human Values and Professional
Ethics.
Reference Books
1. Ivan Illich, 1974, Energy & Equity, The Trinity Press, Worcester, and Harper Collins, USA
2. E.F. Schumacher, 1973, Small is Beautiful: a study of economics as if people mattered, Blond &
Briggs, Britain.
3. Sussan George, 1976, How the Other Half Dies, Penguin Press. Reprinted 1986, 1991
4. Donella H. Meadows, Dennis L. Meadows, Jorgen Randers, William W. Behrens III, 1972, Limits to
Growth – Club of Rome’s report, Universe Books.
5. A Nagraj, 1998, JeevanVidyaEkParichay, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3 2

5 3 2

SUGGESTED COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS:

COURSE OUTCOME 1 (CO 1) : Need, Basic Guidelines, Content and Process for
Value Education
1) Explain the process of value education.
2) Illustrate the content of value education.
3) What should be the content of value education to make it complete? How do values
relate to our day to day living?
4) Explain the content of self – exploration?
5) “Mutual fulfilment in human relationships is something we want, we aspire for.”
Explain
6) What is value education? Why is there a need for value education?
7) How does value education help in fulfilling one's aspirations?

210
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

8) What are the basic guidelines for value education?

9) Write a short note on the need for value education in today’s scenario.
10)Values and skill complement each other. Elaborate.
COURSE OUTCOME 2 (CO 2) : Understanding Harmony in the Human Being -
Harmony in Myself
1) Distinguish between Sukh and Suvidha in detail taking needs of yourself as an
example
2) How can we ensure harmony in self (‘I’)?
3) The needs of the self are qualitative. Illustrate.
4) ‘The need for physical facilities is temporary’ – explain the meaning of this statement
with any two examples.
5) Do you think that human beings are a sum-total of sentiments and physical aspects,
the ‘self’ and the ‘body’? Explain your answer using examples.
6) ‘Human being is the co-existence of the Self and the Body’ – elaborate on this
statement.
7) Explain how activities in 'I' are continuous.
8) “I am the seer, doer and enjoyer. The body is my instrument” – Explain.
9) Explain the relation between the self and the body. What is the responsibility of the
self towards the body?
10)Define Sanyam and Swasthya. How are they helpful in keeping harmony between
self and body?
COURSE OUTCOME 3 (CO 3) :Understanding Harmony in the Family and Society-
Harmony in Human-Human Relationship
1) Define trust. or How is ‘trust’ the foundation value of relationships?
2) Define ‘affection’. or How does affection lead to harmony in the family?
3) How can you say that love is the complete value?
4) What is the meaning of justice in human relationships? How does it follow from
family to world family?
5) ‘Discrimination leads to acrimony in relationships’. Explain. What problems are
created when we discriminate?
6) What values are necessary in human relationships? Explain each briefly.
7) What is the basis of ‘respect’ for a human being? Do you see that other human beings
are also similar to you? Explain.
8) Explain the comprehensive human goal. How does fearlessness follow from right
understanding and prosperity?
9) Critically examine the state of society today in terms of fulfillment of comprehensive
human goals.
10)What is the comprehensive human goal? Explain how this is conducive to
sustainable happiness and prosperity for all.
COURSE OUTCOME 4 (CO 4) : Understanding Harmony in the Nature and Existence
– Whole existence as Coexistence
1) What is sanskaar? Explain its effects or the conformance of the human order.
2) Explain the harmony in nature

211
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

3) Define harmony in nature and how you will create it. Explain with examples.
4) What are the four orders of nature? Briefly explain them.
5) Present the difference and similarity between a human being and an animal. Give
examples to support your answer.
6) “Other than human order, the three orders are mutually fulfilling to each other”.
Explain with examples.
7) ‘Existence is coexistence’. Give your opinion.
8) How is the activity in human order different from that of animal and plant order?
9) Explain the concept of holistic perception of harmony in existence.
10)Explain how there is recyclability and self regulation in nature.
COURSE OUTCOME 5 (CO 5) : Implications of the above Holistic Understanding of
Harmony on Professional Ethics.
1) How does right understanding provide the basis for ethical human conduct? Give two
examples.
2) What is ethical human conduct? Explain in terms of values, policies and character
with appropriate examples.
3) What do you understand about the definitiveness of ethical human conduct? Why is
this definiteness desirable?
4) Describe briefly the criteria for evaluation of holistic technology. Support your
answer with an example.
5) Give a critical review of the current management models in the profession.
6) Elaborate on the meaning of swatwa (innateness), swatantrata (self organization)
and swarajya (self expression). How are they related?
7) What do you mean by professional ethics?
8) What do you understand by competence in professional ethics? Give two examples of
its implications in industry.
9) What are the implications of value based living at all four levels of living? Explain.
10)What is utility value and artistic value? How are both important in human life?
Explain with example

212
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21PT3903 SOFT SKILLS- APTITUDE II
0 0 2 1
Prerequisites for the course
• Basic Maths
Objectives
• Expose the undergraduate students to solve aptitude problems using different methods and
practices.
• Expose the undergraduate students to critique and evaluate quantitative arguments that
utilize mathematical, statistical, and quantitative information.
UNIT I MODULE I 6
Time, Speed and distance, Time and work, Problems on Trains
UNIT II MODULE II 6
Clocks, Blood Relations, Number Puzzles, Logical Puzzles.
UNIT III MODULE III 6
Concepts on Syllogisms, Problems involving Coding and Decoding methods Elementary algebra,
Progression.
UNIT IV MODULE IV 6
Permutation and combination, Probability, Geometry, Calendar
UNIT V MODULE V 6
Boats and Streams, Races. Data interpretation, Data sufficiency.

Total Periods 30
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test -1 Continuous Assessment Test -2 Model Exam
(30 Marks) (30 Marks) (40 Marks)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS MULTIPLE CHOICE
QUESTIONS

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Solve various concepts of Time, Speed and distance, Time and work and Problems on Trains
CO2: Analyse the problems on Clocks, Blood Relations, Number Puzzles, Logical Puzzles.
CO3: Analyse the Concepts on Syllogisms, Problems involving Coding and Decoding methods
Elementary algebra and Progression
CO4: Solve the problems on Permutation and combination, Probability, Geometry and Calendar
CO5: Solve the problems on Boats and Streams, Races. Data interpretation and Data sufficiency.
Text Books
1. Dr. R S Aggarwal, A Modern Approach to Verbal and Non Verbal Reasoning, Revised Edition, S
Chand Publications.
2. Abhijit Guha, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Fourth Edition, Mc Graw Hill
Publications.
Reference Books
1. U. Mohan Rao, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Scitech Publications Pvt Ltd,
India.
2. Dinesh Khattar, The Pearson Guide to Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Third
213
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Edition, Pearson Education Pvt Ltd, India, 2016.
3. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Logical Reasoning for CAT & other Management Exams, Fifth
Edition, Mc Graw Hill Publications.
4. Jaikishan and Premkishan, How to Crack Test of Reasoning in all Competitive Examinations,
Revised Edition, Arihant Publications.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 1 2
2 2 1 2
3 3 1 2
4 3 1 2
5 2 1 3

COURSE CONTENT AND SCHEDULE

[Link] TOPIC NO OF HOURS REQUIRED

UNIT I – MODULE I

1 Time, Speed and distance 2

2 Time and work 2

3 Problems on Trains 2

UNIT II – MODULE II

1 Clocks 2

2 Blood Relations 1

3 Number Puzzles 2

4 Logical Puzzles 1

UNIT-III MODULE III

1 Concepts on Syllogisms 2

2 Problems involving Coding methods 1

3 Problems involving Decoding methods 1

4 Elementary algebra 1

5 Progression 1

UNIT-IV MODULE IV

1 Permutation and combination 2

2 Probability 1

214
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
3 Geometry 1

4 Calendar 2

UNIT-V MODULE V

1 Boats and Streams 1

2 Races 1

3 Data interpretation 2

4 Data sufficiency 2

215
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6611 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Basic knowledge in Design the component in CAD software.
Basic knowledge in Strength of materials, Engineering Mechanics, Thermodynamics.
Objectives
1. To give exposure to software tools needed to analyze engineering problems.
2. Analyzing the force, stress, deflection in mechanical components.
3. Analyzing thermal stress and heat transfer in mechanical components.
4. Analyzing the vibration behaviour for mechanical components.
5. Analyzing the modal, harmonic, and transient concepts in mechanical components.
6. Analyzing the fluid flow parameters for pipes, nozzle, etc.
S. NO LIST OF EXPERIMENTS CO
STATIC STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
1. Force and Stress analysis of Trusses CO1
2. Stress and deflection analysis in beams with different CO1
support conditions.
3. Stress analysis of flat plates with a circular hole. CO1
4. Stress analysis of axi – symmetric components I section, CO1
Pressure vessel.
5. Stress analysis of a bicycle frame CO1
6. Buckling analysis of columns CO1
MODAL ANALYSIS
7. Modal analysis of Beams CO2
8. Modal analysis of a Centrifugal pump base frame CO2
THERMALANALYSIS
9. Thermal stress analysis of cylindrical shells. CO3
10. Thermal stress analysis of a Plate. CO3
11. Conductive Heat Transfer Analysis of a plate CO3
12. Convective Heat Transfer Analysis of a plate CO3
VIBRATION ANALYSIS
13. Vibration analysis of spring-mass systems. CO4
14. Harmonic analysis of simple systems. CO4
15. Transient analysis of simple systems. CO4
FLUID FLOW ANALYSIS
16. Fluid flow analysis of pipes CO5

216
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

17. Fluid flow analysis of nozzle CO5

18. Fluid flow analysis of diffuser CO5
19. Couple-field analysis CO5
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Methods End Semester Exams
(60 Marks) (40 Marks)
Lab Experiments 40 PRACTICAL EXAM
MODEL LAB WITH PROJECT 20
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Analyze the force, stress, deflection in mechanical components. (Analyze)
CO2: Modal analysis is performed on mechanical components. (Analyze)
CO3: Analyze thermal stress and heat transfer in mechanical components. (Analyze)
CO4: Analyze the vibration of mechanical components. (Analyze)
CO5: Analyze the fluid flow for mechanical components. (Analyze)
Laboratory Requirements for a batch of 30 students
Finite Element Analysis Software, Computers with necessary accessories.
Recommended FEA software: FEMAP - 30 license
Computers Requirements:
1. Intel i5 core due processor with 4GB ram with 500GB hard disk – 30 Nos.
2. Laser Printer – 1 No
Text Books
1. Nitin [Link], Practical Finite Element Analysis 2008, Finite To Infinite
Web Resources
1. [Link]
finite-element-modeling
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1
3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1
4 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1
5 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1

217
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Analyze the force, stress, deflection in mechanical components.
(Analyze)
1. Determine the nodal deflections, reaction forces, and stress for the truss system shown in
figure 1 (E = 200 GPa, A = 3250 mm2). (An)

Figure 1
2. Determine the nodal deflections, reaction forces, and stress for the cantilever beam
shown in Figure 2 and find the maximum deflection. Assume rectangular c/s area of 0.2
m * 0.3 m, Young’s modulus of 210 GPa, Poisson’s ratio 0.27.(An)

Figure 2

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Modal analysis is performed on mechanical components.

(Analyze)
1. To determine the amplitude and frequency of a given 2D components as shown in Figure
3.(An)

Figure 3
2. To determine the amplitude and frequency of a
given beam components as shown in (Figure 4) using Finite Element Analysis based
ANSYS/FEMAP software. Take Young's modulus 2.068e11, Poisson's Ratio: 0.3. (An)

218
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Figure 4
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Analyze thermal stress and heat transfer in mechanical
components. (Analyze)
1. To determine the Thermal deformations at various points of a 2D component due to the
Temperature load applied over it is shown below in figure 5..(An)

Figure 5

2. To determine the thermal deformations at various points of a shell component due to

the temperature load applied it. It is shown below in Figure 6. (An)

Figure 6
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Analyze the vibration of mechanical components. (Analyze)
1. Consider the bar shown in the Figure 7 below. Conduct a harmonic response test by
applying a cyclic load (harmonic) at the end of the bar. The frequency of the load will be
varied from 1 - 100 Hz. Modulus of elasticity = 200 GPa, Poisson’s ratio = 0.3, Density =
7800 Kg/m3. .(An)

Figure 7

219
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Analyze the fluid flow for mechanical components. (Analyze)
1. The problem to be considered is shown schematically in Figure 8. A cold fluid at 293.15
K flows into the pipe through a large inlet, and mixes with a warmer fluid at 313.15 K that
enters through a smaller inlet located at the elbow. The pipe dimensions, the fluid
properties and boundary conditions are given in SI units. Note: Since the geometry of the
mixing elbow is symmetric, only half of the elbow needs to be modeled. (An)

Figure 8

220
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6612 Design and Fabrication Project L T P C

0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
All courses
Objectives
1. To develop skills to formulate a technical project.
2. To use new tools, algorithms and techniques required to carry out the projects.
3. To develop prototype/model/simulation relevant to the study.
GUIDELINE FOR REVIEW AND EVALUATION
The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic approved by the head of the department under
the guidance of a faculty member. The Design and Fabrication Project should be a theoretical
study/analysis / prototype design / modeling and simulation or a combination of these. A
comprehensive project report should be prepared after completing the work to the satisfaction of
the supervisor. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews. The
review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A project report is required
at the end of the semester. The developed work is evaluated based on oral presentation and the
project report jointly by external and internal examiners constituted by the Head of the
Department.
Total Periods 45
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Identify an innovate or creative idea / concept / solution to a problem (Apply)
CO2: Perform detailed literature survey related to concept / idea (Understand)
CO3: Implement basic prototype to demonstrate the concept. (Analyse)
CO4: Analyze and evaluate the functionality of the developed mechanism (Analyse)
CO5: Demonstrate the project work in the form of oral presentation, report and
technical/patent/paper publications. (Apply)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO 4 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO 5 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3

221
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

SEMESTER VII

222
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21HS7101 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course is crucial for engineering students. It promotes excellence, continuous improvement,
and collaboration, which strive to integrate technical skills with quality principles, customer
satisfaction, and organizational effectiveness. TQM prepares the students for industry challenges.
Prerequisites for the course
Knowledge of quality concepts, communication abilities, and a commitment to continuous learning.
Objectives
• To understand the need for quality and its evolution over time.

• To understand the quality principles and its performance.

• To equip with a thorough understanding of quality management tools and techniques.

• To enable them to effectively implement these tools and techniques to optimize quality
management practices.
• To understand the standards, and benefits of ISO registration, and provide an overview of
ISO related standards.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and
Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer
complaints, Customer retention.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee
involvement - Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward,
Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen.
UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts, Methodology,
applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason to bench mark,
Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 8

Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function
- TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.

UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 10

Introduction— How are standards developed? - Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of
Standards - ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation— Documentation—Internal Audits—
Registration. Environmental Management System: ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO
14001 - Benefits of EMS. ISO 45001 and related standards — Occupational health and safety,
ISO/IEC 27000 family — Information security management - ISO 31000 - Risk management - ISO
26000 - Social responsibility - ISO 20121 - Sustainable events
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(30 Marks) (10 Marks) (60 Marks)

223
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
WRITTEN TEST [Link] WRITTEN TEST
2. ONLINE QUIZZES
[Link]-SOLVING ACTIVITIES

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1 Familiarized with the basic concept and framework of Total Quality management.
2 Understand the contribution of Quality Gurus in TQM Journey
3 Provide a comprehensive understanding of the traditional tools and equipping with the
knowledge and skills to drive quality improvement initiatives effectively.
4 Explain the various types of Techniques and foster their ability to drive organizational
improvement and enhance quality management practices.
5 Apply various Quality Systems and Auditing on implementation of TQM.
Text Books
1. Dale [Link], Carol [Link],Glen H. Besterfield,Mary [Link],Hemant Urdhwareshe
and Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.
2. Poornima M., Pearson publication, rd Edition, Total Quality Management 2017
Reference Books
1. Subburaj Ramasamy, Total Quality Management, Mc Graw Hill Publications
2. Sunil Luthra, Dixit Garg, Ashish Agarwal, Sachin K. Mangla, Total Quality Management
(TQM): Principles, Methods, and Applications, Publisher: CRC Press, 2020; ISBN
1000194493,
3. D.R. Kiran, Total Quality Management: Key Concepts and Case Studies, Publisher
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2016, ISBN 0128110368,
4. W. Edwards Deming, The Essential Deming: Leadership Principles from the Father of
Quality, Editors Joyce Orsini, Diana Deming Cahill, Publisher: McGraw Hill Professional,
2012, ISBN: 0071790217, 9780071790215
Web Resources
1. NPTEL :: Management - NOC:Total Quality Management - I
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
Notes- Lonely-Edition
4. [Link]
notes/
5. [Link]
6. [Link]

224
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO1 3 2 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 3
CO5 1 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to familiarized with the basic concept and
framework of Total Quality management.
1. Describe Deming’s philosophy for quality management.
2. Elaborate on TQM framework and importance of each element.

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to Understand the contribution of Quality Gurus in
TQM Journey
1. Briefly explain about recognition and reward system along with its effects.
2. Enumerate the Japanese 5S as applicable to services and manufacturing company.

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to provide a comprehensive understanding of the

traditional tools and equipping with the knowledge and skills to drive quality improvement
initiatives effectively.
1. Evaluate the purpose and methodology of construction of an Ishikawa diagram with an example.
2. Analyze the three main types of benchmarking. In what circumstances would each type be more
appropriate?

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to explain the various types of Techniques and
foster their ability to drive organizational improvement and enhance quality
management practices.
1. Draw the house of quality for a product of your choice and describe the QFD methodology.
2. List and explain the various measures of performance in evaluating the success of an
organization.

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to apply various Quality Systems and Auditing on
implementation of TQM.
1. Discuss the various elements of ISO 9000-2000 quality system.
2. Estimate the role of audit checklist for quality management system.

225
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME7911 Technical Comprehension
0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
All Courses
Objectives
To encourage the students to comprehend the knowledge acquired from the first Semester
to Sixth Semester of B.E. Degree Course through periodic exercise

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Students will be assessed 100% internally through weekly test with objective type
questions on all the subject related topics

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Recollect the knowledge acquired during the earlier semesters (Remember)
CO2: Apply fundamental principle of mechanical engineering concepts to solve real life problems.
(Apply)
CO3: Present technical topics and discuss about them. (Understand)
CO4: Interpret experimental data with relevance (Apply)
CO5: Simplify the decision-making skills (Understand)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 3
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 3
CO3 2 2 3 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 3

226
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

SEMESTER VIII

227
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21ME8901 Project Work/Internship based Project
0 0 20 10
Prerequisites for the course
All Courses
Objectives
1. To use new tools, algorithms and techniques required to fabricate real time project.
2. To give guidance on the various procedures for theoretical and experimental
validation of the product and analyse the cost effectiveness.
3. To provide guidelines to prepare technical report of the project.
Method of Evaluation
The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic approved by the head of the department under
the guidance of a faculty member. The Project Work Phase – 2 should be Fabricated product/
testing setup of an experimentation unit/ apparatus/ small equipment. The product should be
Theoretically/Experimentally verifiable based on principles used in the concept. It should have
valid database/algorithm, output reports, research findings and future scope. The progress of the
project is evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be
constituted by the Head of the Department. A project report is required at the end of the
semester. The project work is evaluated based on oral presentation and the project report jointly
by external and internal examiners constituted by the Head of the Department.
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Design and develop the real time working model after conducting experimentation (Create)
CO2: Utilize the new tools, algorithms, techniques that contribute to obtain the solution of the
project. (Apply)
CO4: Test and validate through conformance of the developed product (Analyze)
CO4: Demonstrate the results and analyze the cost effectiveness of the product (Analyze)
CO5: Demonstrate the project work in the form of oral presentation, report and
technical/patent/paper publications. (Apply)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO 4 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO 5 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3

228
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE I

229
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME5701 APPLIED HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Objectives
• To provide the knowledge on the application of fluid power in process, construction
and manufacturing Industries.
• To develop a measurable degree of competence in the design, construction and
operation of fluid power circuits
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OFFLUID POWER SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to Fluid power –Advantages and Applications– Fluid Properties – Pascal’s Law and
its Application – Losses in Pipes – Valves and Fittings– Pumping Theory – Pump Classification –
Gear – Vane and Piston Pumps – Pump Performance – Characteristics and Selection – Sizing of
Pumps.
UNIT II HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND COMPONENTS 9
Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Single acting, Double acting special cylinders like tanden,
Rodless, Telescopic, Cushioning mechanism–Direction control, Flow control and Pressure control
valves-Types, Construction and Operation-Applications –Reservoirs, Accumulators, Intensifiers,
Pressure Switches-Classification and functions- Applications–Fluid Power ANSI Symbol.
UNIT III DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS 9
Industrial hydraulic circuits- Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double-pump, Pressure Intensifier,
Air- over oil,Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-safe, Speed control, Hydrostatic
transmission, Electro hydraulic servo system, Mechanical Hydraulic servo systems
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 9
Pneumatic Components: Properties of air – Compressors – Filter, Regulator, Lubricator – Air
control valves, Quick exhaust valves, pneumatic actuators. Design of Pneumatic circuit – Cascade
Circuit Design Method (Two / Three Cylinder Circuits) – Electro Pneumatic System – Elements –
Ladder diagram–Introduction to Fluid Logic Devices and pneumatic logic circuits–Applications
UNIT V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND APPLICATIONS 9
Installation, Selection, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting and Remedies in Hydraulic and Pneumatic
systems–Design of hydraulic circuits for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Surface grinding, Press and
Forklift applications. Design of Pneumatic circuits for Pick and Place applications and tool
handling in CNC Machine tools- Low-costAutomation – Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes

230
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

CO1 Describe the basics of fluid power system and its applications in industry (Understand)
CO2 Identify appropriate actuators and control valves for fluid power applications (Understand)
CO3 Illustrate a hydraulic circuit for real time applications (Apply)
CO4 Demonstrate the concepts of pneumatic system and its logic circuits (Apply)
CO5 Examine the troubleshooting of fluid power circuits for engineering applications (Apply)
Text Books
1. Anthony Esposito, "Fluid Power with Applications", 7th Edition, Pearson Higher
Education, New York, 2015.
2. Majumdar S. R, "Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance", 2nd Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2015.
Reference Books
1. Majumdar, S.R , "Oil Hydraulic Systems: Principles and Maintenance", 28thEdition,McGraw-
Hill, 2017.
2. James [Link], Hydraulics and Pneumatics, 2ndEdition, The Goodheart-Willcox
Company,Inc., 2013.
3. Srinivasan. R, "Hydraulic and Pneumatic Control", IInd Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill
Education,2012.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 2 2 3
2 2 2 2 2 3
3 2 2 2 2 3
4 2 2 2 2 3
5 2 2 2 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Describe the basics of fluid power system and its applications in
industry (Understand)

1. Differentiate between hydraulics and pneumatics. (R)

2. Explain the construction and working principle of radial piston pump with neat
sketch. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Identify appropriate actuators and control valves for fluid power
applications (Understand)

231
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

1. List the significance of directional control valves. (R)

2. Describe single acting cylinder and cylinder cushioning with a neat sketch (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Illustrate a hydraulic circuit for real time applications (Apply)

1. Differentiate between electro hydraulic servo valve and mechanical servo valves
(R)
2. Discuss the hydrostatic transmission with suitable sketches and applications. (U)
3. Examine a hydraulic circuit for synchronizing two cylinder with flow control
valves (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Demonstrate the concepts of pneumatic system and its logic
circuits (Apply)

1. List the basic components of pneumatic system. (R)

2. Explain the graphical symbol and Explain the construction and working principle
of FRL Unit (U)
3. Examine a pneumatic circuit for the following sequence using cascade method
A+B+B-A- where the + cylinder extraction and - cylinder retraction (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Examine the troubleshooting of fluid power circuits for

engineering applications (Apply)

1. List the problems caused by the contaminants in the hydraulic system. (R)
2. Describe hydraulic and pneumatic power packs with suitable sketches and
illustrations (U)
3. Examine a pneumatic circuit to actuate a shaping machine ram. Incorporate the
following features in the circuit. (a) rapid tool approach (b) slow cutting (c) rapid
tool retraction / return (A)

232
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME5702 MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF MATERIALS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Physics, Engineering Materials and Metallurgy
Objectives
• To know the mechanical behavior of both metallic and non-metallic materials under
different loading and temperature conditions.
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS OF MATERIAL BEHAVIOR 9
Elasticity in metals and polymers– Strengthening mechanisms, work hardening, solid solutioning,
grain boundary strengthening. Effect of temperature, strain and strain rate on plastic behaviour –
Super plasticity – Griffith’s theory– Ductile, brittle transition in steel – High temperature fracture,
creep – Larson Miller parameter – Deformation and fracture mechanism maps.
UNIT II BEHAVIOUR UNDER DYNAMIC LOADS 9
Stress intensity factor and fracture toughness – Fatigue, low and high cycle fatigue test, crack
initiation and propagation mechanisms and Paris law. - Safe life, Stress life, strain-life and fail -
safe design approaches -Effect of surface and metallurgical parameters on fatigue.
UNIT III SELECTION OF MATERIALS 9
Motivation for selection, cost basis and service requirements – Selection for mechanical
properties, strength, toughness, fatigue and creep – Selection for surface durability corrosion and
wear resistance – Relationship between materials selection and processing – Case studies in
materials selection with relevance to aero, auto, marine, machinery and nuclear applications.
UNIT IV MODERN METALLIC MATERIALS 9
Dual phase steels, High strength low alloy (HSLA) steel, Transformation induced plasticity (TRIP)
Steel, Maraging steel, Nitrogen steel – Intermetallics, Ni and Ti aluminides – smart materials,
shape memory alloys – Metallic glass and nano crystalline materials.
UNIT V CREEP BEHAVIOUR AND TESTING 9
Creep curve, stages in creep curve and explanation, structural changes during creep, creep
mechanisms, metallurgical factors affecting creep, high temperature alloys, stress rupture testing,
creep testing machines, parametetric methods of extrapolation. Deformation Mechanism Maps
according to Frost/Ashby.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 3. Problem-Solving Activities

233
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Define the mechanisms involved in elastic and plastic behavior of materials. (Understand)
CO2 Explain the components under different loading by considering the fracture. (Understand)
CO3 Discuss the materials usage for the design of engineering structures. (Understand)
CO4 Examine the usage of modern materials in real time applications. (Apply)
CO5 Predict the different testing techniques in alloys. (Apply)

Text Books
1. George [Link], Mechanical Metallurgy, (12th edition), McGraw Hill, 2012
2. Thomas H. Courtney, Mechanical Behavior of Materials, (7th edition), McGraw Hill, 2015
3. Charles, J.A., Crane, F.A.A. and Fumess, J.A.G., Selection and use of engineering materials,
(34th edition), Butterworth-Heiremann, 2013.
Reference Books
1. Ashby M.F., materials selection in Mechanical Design 2nd Edition, Butter worth 1999
2. Flinn, R.A., and Trojan, P.K., Engineering Materials and their Applications, (8th Edition)
Jaico, 2013.
3. Metals Hand book, Vol.10, Failure Analysis and Prevention, (10th Edition), Jaico, 1999
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 2 3
2 2 2 2 3
3 2 2 2 3
4 2 2 2 3
5 2 2 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Define the mechanisms involved in elastic and plastic behavior
of materials. (Understand)

1. What is Larsen-Miller parameter? (R)

2. Explain the Griffith’s theory of brittle fracture with relevant diagram. (U)

234
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Explain the components under different loading by considering

the fracture. (Understand)

1. State Paris law. (R)

2. Write short notes on Fracture toughness. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Discuss the materials usage for the design of engineering
structures. (Understand)

1. Mention the properties to be considered while selecting materials for auto

components (R)
2. Explain the method of selection of materials on the basis of service requirements.
(U)
3. With a case study explain the selection of materials for aero applications. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Examine the usage of modern materials in real time applications.
(Apply)

1. Name any two materials which exhibit shape memory effect. (R)
2. Write short notes on TRIP steel. (U)
3. Explain the strengthening mechanism used in Maraging steel (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Predict the different testing techniques in alloys. (Apply)

1. Draw the different levels of creep. (R)

2. Explain structural metallurgical aspects of creep failure mechanism. (U)

235
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME5703 ADVANCED I.C. ENGINES L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Thermal Engineering

Objectives
• To understand the underlying principles of operation of different IC Enginesand
components.
• To provide knowledge on pollutant formation, control, alternate fuel etc.
UNIT I SPARK IGNITION ENGINES 9
Mixture requirements – Fuel injection systems –Monopoint, Multipoint & Direct injection –
Stagesof combustion – Normal and Abnormal combustion – Knock – Factors affecting knock –
Combustion chambers.
UNIT II COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES 9
Diesel Fuel Injection Systems – Stages of combustion – Knocking – Factors affecting knock –Direct
and Indirect injection systems – Combustion chambers – Fuel Spray behavior – Spray structure
and spray penetration – Air motion – Introduction to Turbocharging.
UNIT III POLLUTANT FORMATION AND CONTROL 9
Pollutant – Sources – Formation of Carbon Monoxide, Unburnt hydrocarbon, Oxides of Nitrogen,
Smoke and Particulate matter – Methods of controlling Emissions –Catalytic converters, Selective
Catalytic Reduction and Particulate Traps – Methods of measurement –Emission norms and
Driving cycles.
UNIT IV ALTERNATE FUELS 9
Alcohol, Hydrogen, Compressed Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas and Bio Diesel –Properties,
Suitability, Merits and Demerits – Engine Modifications.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9
Air assisted Combustion, Homogeneous charge compression ignition engines –Variable Geometry
turbochargers – Common Rail Direct Injection Systems – Hybrid Electric Vehicles –NOx
Adsorbers – Onboard Diagnostics.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS Assignment, Multiple Choice Descriptive questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS DESCRIPTIVE Questions
QUESTIONS

236
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Discuss the basic fundamentals of SI engines (Understand)
CO2: Describe the basic fundamentals of CI engines (Understand)
CO3: Describe the various forms of pollutants and various emission control methods in IC
Engines (Understand)
CO4: Interpret the various forms of alternative fuel (Apply)
CO5: Predict the recent technologies implemented in Automobiles (Apply)
Text Books
1. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering Vol.2”, Standard Publishers, New Delhi, (2014)
2. Ganesan V., “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill, (2012)

Reference Books
1. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publications, USA,
(2005)
2. John B. Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, Tata McGraw-Hill,
(1988)
3. Gupta H.N., “Fundamentals of Internal Combustion Engines”, Prentice Hall of India,
(2006)
4. Ultrich Adler, “Automotive Electric/Electronic Systems”, Published by Robert Bosh
GmbH, (1995)
5. Mathur. R.B. and R.P. Sharma, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons (2007)
Web Resources
[Link]
.pdf

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 1 2 1 2 2 2 3
2 1 1 1 2 2 2 3
3 1 2 2 2 2 3
4 1 2 2 2 2 3
5 1 1 2 2 1 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 Discuss the basic fundamentals of SI engines (Understand)

1. Explain the stages of combustion in SI engines elaborating the flame front propagation. .
(U)
2. Explain briefly the various factors that influence the flame speed in S.I engines. (U)

237
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

3. Describe the requirements of an S.I engine combustion chamber and explain the various types
of combustion chambers. (R)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Describe the basic fundamentals of CI engines (Understand)

1. Explain with the aid of a schematic diagram, explain the combustion process in a C.I engine.
. (U)
2. Explain the factors affecting the delay period in C.I engines and summarize them. . (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Describe the various forms of pollutants and various emission
control methods in IC Engines (Understand)

1. Explain the functioning of a three way catalytic converter, with a sketch. Mention the limitations
of a catalytic converter. . (U)
2. What is a driving cycle? Discuss its significance with regard to emissions. . (U)
3. What are the methods to reduce particulate matter emissions? (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Interpret the various forms of alternative fuel (Apply)

1. Compare the properties of gasoline, methanol and ethanol as engine fuels and explain how they
influence combustion and emission characteristics of engine. (A)
2. Write on the following: (A)
(i) Production of biodiesel from non-edible oil (ii) Production of Ethanol from Sugarcane

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Predict the recent technologies implemented in Automobiles

(Apply)
1. Describe the features of homogenous charge compression ignition engine and common rail
direct injection engine with neat sketches. (U)
2. Examine the necessity of pressure pick, charge amplifier in an IC engine. (A)

238
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME5704 ALTERNATIVE FUELS L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Thermal Engineering

Objectives
• To learn about the types of alternative fuels and energy sources for IC engines
• To understand different sources of alternative fuels, production and storage methods.
• To teach the alternative fuels used in internal combustion engines and their performance and
emission characteristics.
• To provide the knowledge of zero emission vehicles using newest technologies.

UNIT I ALCOHOL AS FUELS 9

Introduction to alternative fuels – Need for alternative fuels – Availability of different alternative
fuels for SI and CI engines. Alcohols as fuels. Production methods of alcohols. Properties of
alcohols as fuels. Methods of using alcohols in CI and SI [Link]-fuel, Blending, dual fuel
operation, surface ignition and oxygenated [Link] additives for SI and CI engines,
Performance emission and combustion characteristics in CI and SI engines.
UNIT II BIODIESEL AS FUEL 9
Various vegetable oils and their important properties. Different methods of using vegetable oils
engines – Blending, Pyrolysis process, preheating Transesterification and emulsification of
Vegetable oils –Biodiesel– Performance, Emission and Combustion Characteristics in diesel
engines.

UNIT III HYDROGEN AS ENGINE FUEL 9

Production methods of hydrogen. Combustive properties of hydrogen. Problems associated with
hydrogen as fuel and solutions. Different methods of using hydrogen in SI and CI engines.
Performance, emission and combustion analysis in engines. Hydrogen storage - safety aspects of
[Link] development of hydrogen technologies.

UNIT IV BIOGAS, NATURAL GAS AND LPG AS FUELS 9

Production methods of Biogas – Natural gas and LPG – processing and usage. Properties studies.
CO2 and H2S scrubbing in Biogas, Modification required to use in SI and CI Engines- Performance
and emission characteristics of Biogas, NG and LPG in SI and CI engines.
UNIT V ELECTRIC, HYBRID AND FUEL CELL 9
VEHICLES
Layout of Electric vehicle and Hybrid vehicles – Advantages and drawbacks of electric and hybrid
vehicles. System components, Electronic control system – Different configurations of Hybrid
vehicles. Power split device. High energy and power density batteries –Hyperloop technology –
Basics of Fuel cell vehicles.
Total Periods 45

239
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS Assignment, Multiple Choice Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS DESCRIPTIVE Questions
QUESTIONS

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the various alternative fuels available (Apply)
CO2: Examine the different methods of vegetable oils (Apply)
CO3: Describe the production methods of hydrogen fuel in IC Engines (Understand)
CO4: Discuss the production methods of biogas, natural gas etc. (Understand)
CO5: Examine the recent types of vehicles in Automobiles (Apply)
Text Books
1. Thipse S. S., Alternative Fuels: Concepts, Technologies and Developments, Jaico Publishing
House, 2010.
2. Devaradjane. Dr. G., Kumaresan. Dr. M., “Automobile Engineering”, AMK Publishers, (2013)
3. Gerhard Knothe, Jürgen Krahl, Jon Gerpen, The Biodiesel Handbook, 2nd Edition,Academic
Press and AOCS Press (2010)

Reference Books
1. Sunggyu Lee, James G. Speight, Sudarshan K. Loyalka, Handbook of Alternative Fuel
Technologies, 2nd edition, CRC Press, 2014.
2. James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, 2nd edition, John Wiley &
Sons, Ltd, 2012.
3. Ganesan V, Internal Combustion Engines, McGraw-Hill Education India Pvt. Ltd, 2012.
4. Michael F. Hordeski, Alternative Fuels: The Future of Hydrogen, The Fairmont Press, Inc, 2013.

Web Resources
1. [Link]
mUwAL
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 1 2 2 2 2 3
2 1 2 2 2 1 2 3
3 1 2 1 2 2 2 3
4 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 3
5 1 1 1 2 2 2 3

240
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 Interpret the various alternative fuels available (Apply)
1. Evaluate the Performance emission and combustion characteristics in CI and SI
engines.(A)
2. With a schematic layout explain the production methods of methanol. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Examine the different methods of vegetable oils (Apply)

1. Draw and explain the pyrolysis process for producing plastic oil (U)
2. Illustrate the transesterification process for biodiesel production for non-edible
oil.(A)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Describe the production methods of hydrogen fuel in IC Engines
(Understand)

1. How the hydrogen energy is useful to run the engine? (U)

2. What are the merits and demerits of using hydrogen as a fuel? (R)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Discuss the production methods of biogas, natural gas etc.
(Understand)

1. Name three methods generally employed for extracting energy from Biomass and
explain any two in detail(R)
2. Explain the concept of H2S scrubbing in bio gas:(U)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Examine the recent types of vehicle in Automobiles (Apply)

1. Predict the modifications required for LPG usage in a gasoline car. Also explain
how the LPG system works?(A)
[Link] briefly the working principle of fuel cells(R)

241
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME5705 MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology, CNC Machines and automation, Metrology and Instrumentation.

Objectives
1. To enable the student to understand the principles, functions and practices adapted in
industry for the successful management of maintenance activities.
2. To explain the different maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance condition
monitoring and repair of machine elements.
3. To illustrate some of the simple instruments used for condition monitoring in industry.

UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE 9

PLANNING
Basic Principles of maintenance planning – Objectives and principles of planned maintenance
activity – Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliability and machine
availability – MTBF, MTTR and MWT – Factors of availability –Maintenance organization –
Maintenance economics.
UNIT II MAINTENANCE POLICIES – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 9
Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance,
maintenance schedules, repairs cycle - Principles and methods of lubrication – TPM.
UNIT III CONDITION MONITORING 9
Condition Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without CM – On-load testing and offload
testing – Methods and instruments for CM – Temperature sensitive tapes – Pistol thermometers –
wear-debris analysis
UNIT IV REPAIR METHODS FOR BASIC MACHINE ELEMENTS 9
Repair methods for beds, slideways, spindles, gears, lead screws and bearings – Failure analysis –
Failures and their development – Logical fault location methods – Sequential fault location

UNIT V REPAIR METHODS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING 9

EQUIPMENT
Repair methods for Material handling equipment - Equipment records –Job order systems -Use of
computers in maintenance.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT – I 10 Marks MCQ Descriptive type
CAT – II 10 Marks Assignment
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS Slip Test

242
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Summarize the industrial maintenance concepts. (Understand)
CO2: Compare the maintenance engineering approaches employed in all fields of industries.
(Understand)
CO3: Identify the different maintenance categories Preventive maintenance condition monitoring
and repair of machine elements.(Understand)
CO4: Interpret the various instruments used for condition monitoring in industry. (Apply)
CO5: Construct the safety norms and concepts of industries. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Srivastava S.K., “Industrial Maintenance Management”, S. Chand and Co., (2022)
2. Venkataraman .K “Maintancence Engineering and Management”, PHI Learning, Pvt. Ltd.,
(2007)
Reference Books
1. Bhattacharya S.N., “Installation, Servicing and Maintenance”, S. Chand and Co., (2013)
2. White E.N., “Maintenance Planning”, I Documentation, Gower Press, (2022)
3. Garg M.R., “Industrial Maintenance”, S. Chand & Co., (2022)
4. Higgins L.R., “Maintenance Engineering Hand book”, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill, (2008)
5. Armstrong, “Condition Monitoring”, BSIRSA, (1988)
6. Davies, “Handbook of Condition Monitoring”, Chapman & Hall, (1996)
7. “Advances in Plant Engineering and Management”, Seminar Proceedings -IIPE, (1996)
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 3

2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 3

3 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 3

4 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 3

5 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 3

243
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Summarize the industrial maintenance concepts. (Understand)
1. What are the objectives of maintenance organization and what different types of
organizationsare in use in Indian industries?(U)
2. What is equipment availability and what are the three basic approaches to define
and quantityavailability.(U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Compare the maintenance engineering approaches employed in
all fields of industries. (Understand)
1. What are all the steps involved in preventive maintenance why preventive
maintenance is better than reactive maintenance.(U)
2. Distinguish between fixed time maintenance and connect based maintenance.
Give the merits and demerits.(U)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Identify the different maintenance categories Preventive
maintenance condition monitoring and repair of machine elements.(Understand)
1. What is leakage monitoring?Explain some of the leakage mediums used for
condition monitoring.(U)
2. What is wear debris analysis what are the three wear debris analysis
techniques commonly used and compare their performance and uses?(U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Interpret the various instruments used for condition monitoring
in industry. (Apply)
1. Discover the procedure for the repair cycle of gears and lead screw.(A)
2. Construct failure analysis for an industry? Explain their development.(A)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Construct the safety norms and concepts of industries. (Apply)
1. Explain various hydraulic and pneumatic equipment used in material handling
purpose. How to maintain it.(U)
2. Prepare the maintenance procedure for various small equipment for material
handling purpose like chain block chain, rope, trolley, and R.G.B.(A)

244
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME5706 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course:
Nil
Objectives
1. To enable the students to study the evolution of Management.
2. To study the functions and principles of management and to learn the application of the principles
in an organization
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND 9
ORGANIZATIONS
Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - Types of managers – Managerial
roles and skills – Evolution of Management: Scientific, Human Relations, System, Contingency and
Information Technology approaches – Types of Business organization: Sole proprietorship, Partnership,
Company, Public and Private sector Enterprises - Organization culture and Environment – Current trends and
issues in Management
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives – setting objectives –
policies – Planning premises – Strategic Planning – Planning Tools and Techniques – Decision making:
steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANIZING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal Organization – Organization chart – Organization structure:
Types – Line and Staff Authority – Departmentalization – Delegation of authority – Centralization and
Decentralization – Job Design – Human Resource Management – HR Planning, Recruitment, selection,
Training and Development, Performance Management, Career planning and Management.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – Motivation: theories &Techniques – Job satisfaction –
Job enrichment – Leadership: Types & Theories – Communication: Process, Types &Barriers – Effective
communication – Communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – Budgets, Budgetary and Non-Budgetary control techniques – Use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control and
performance – direct and preventive control – Reporting.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT – I 10 Marks MCQ Descriptive type
CAT – II 10 Marks Assignment
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS Slip Test

245
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Describe the terms management, and organization, also identify the type of business organization and
its culture. (Understand)
CO2: Apply the set objectives for strategic management using planning tools and techniques to make
decision. (Apply)
CO3: Sketch the organization chart and structure, demonstrate whether the organization is centralized or
decentralized and illustrate human resource management principles. (Apply)
CO4: Discuss the motivational theories to direct the employees for better communication and job
satisfaction. (Understand)
CO5: Predict the budgetry and non - budgetry techniques, application of computers, direct and preventive
controlling techniques and reporting.(Apply)
Text Books
1. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 15th Edition,
(2021)
2. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R. Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education,
(2018)

Reference Books
1. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo& Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of Management”, 10th
Edition, Pearson Education, (2022)
2. Robert Kreitner& Mamata Mohapatra, “Management”, Biztantra, (2011)
3. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, (2015)
4. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, (2022)
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 2 3 2 2 1 3

2 2 3 2 2 1 3

3 2 1 3 2 2 1 3

4 2 1 3 2 2 1 3

5 2 1 3 2 2 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Describe the terms management, and organization, also identify
the type of business organization and its culture. (Understand)
1. Explain in detail about the different types of business organization. (U)
2. Enlighten the relevance of environmental factors that affects global business. (U)

246
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply the set objectives for strategic management using
planning tools and techniques to make decision (Apply)
1. Demonstrate the 7 habits of highly effective people. Explain them in brief. (A)
2. Explain in brief the 14-point principles of Deming on the concept of good
leadership. (R)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Sketch the organization chart and structure, demonstrate

whether the organization is centralized or decentralized and illustrate human
resource management principles (Apply)
1. Explain the detail about Line and staff organization with an example. Discuss its
merits and demerits? (U)
2. Illustrate the differences between Formal and Informal Organization. (A)
3. Sketch the organogram of your own institution taking it as a reference of study.
(A)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Discuss the motivational theories to direct the employees for
better communication and job satisfaction (Understand)
1. Evaluate the various styles of Leadership. (U)
2. Explain the different components of communication. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Predict the budgetary and non - budgetary techniques,

application of computers, direct and preventive controlling techniques, and reporting
(Apply)
1. How would you show your understanding about usage of use of computers and
IT in Management control? (U)
2. Construct the steps involved in controlling and requirements for effective
control. (A)

247
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME5707 COMPOSITE MATERIALS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Physics, Engineering Mechanics, Engineering Materials and Metallurgy
Strength of Materials
Objectives
• To provide students with a basic understanding of the composition and uses of composite
• materials, their structural and mechanical properties.
• To develop the student’s skills in understanding the different manufacturing methods
• available for composite materials.
• To illuminate the knowledge and analysis skills in applying mechanics to the composite
materials.
UNIT I BASICS OF FIBERS, MATRICES AND COMPOSITES 9
Basics of Fibers: Definition – Need – General Characteristics and [Link]: Glass-
Carbon- Ceramic-Aramid-Polymer and Natural [Link]: Polymer- Ceramic and Metal
Matrices – Characteristics of Fibers and Matrices- Fiber Surface Treatments- Fillers andAdditives.

UNIT II COMPOSITE MANUFACTURING 9

Hand Layup – Spray up - Bag Molding – Compression Molding – Pultrusion – Filament Winding –
Resin Film Infusion - Elastic ReservoirMolding - Tube Rolling - Processing of Metal Matrix
Composites (MMC) – Diffusion Bonding – Stir Casting– Squeeze Casting and Powder Metallurgy
Technique.
UNIT III NANOCOMPOSITES 9
Nanocomposites: Nano particle dispersion in polymer matrix, Polymer- nanoclaycomposites and
polymer-carbon nanotubes composites; Functionally graded and Hierarchical Composites:
Classification i.e. Natural and Man-made, Uniaxial andbi-axial property gradient, Application in
various industrial sectors.
UNIT IV MICRO AND MACRO MECHANICS OF LAMINATE 9
Micromechanical Analysis of a LaminaVolume and Mass Fractions, Density, and Void Content-
Prediction of engineering propertiesusing micromechanics-Material properties of the fiber and
matrix.
Macro mechanical analysis of a lamina -linear elastic stress-strain characteristics of
FiberReinforced material: Stress and deformations in Fiber-Reinforced materials-Maxwell-Bett
reciprocal theorem- Stress-strain relations- Effects of free thermal strains and moisture strains.
UNIT V CLASSICAL LAMINATION THEORY & THEORIES OF 9
FAILURES
Classical Laminate Theory:Force and Moment Resultants -Laminate stiffness matrix: ABD Matrix-
Classification of laminates and theireffect on the ABD Matrix-Elastic couplings.
Theories of Failures of Laminates: Maximum stress and strain criterion- Tsai-Hill, Tsai-
Wucriterion - Interlaminar stresses - Impact resistance.
Total Periods 45

248
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS DESCRIPTIVE 2. Online Quizzes
QUESTIONS 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Define and classify the fundamentals of fibers, matrices, additives, and composites.
(Understand)
CO2 Describe the various manufacturing processes involved in the fabrication of composite material.
(Understand)
CO3 Describe the various techniques for suitable composite material with required enhanced
Properties. (Understand)
CO4 Analyze composite laminates using the fundamentals of Classical Lamination Theory. (Analyze)
CO5Apply failure criteria on composite structures subjected to various types of loading. (Apply)
Textbooks
1. [Link], Composite materials processing, 1st edition, CRC press, 2013.
2. Mallick P.K., "Fiber Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design", 3rd
Edition, CRC Press Taylor andFrancis, New York, 2007.
Reference Books
1. Bhagwan D. Agarwal, Lawrence J. Broutman& Chandrashekhar K., "Analysis and
Performance of Fiber Composites", 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2017.
2. Ever J. Barbero, Introduction to Composite Materials Design, 2nd edition, CRC Press, 2010.
3. K.K. Chawla, Composite Materials, 3rd edition, Springer-Verlag, New York, 2012.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 2 1 2 1

249
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 (Understand)
1. Combination of properties can be achieved in composites. Justify this statement &
Explain. (Understand)
2. Compare matrix and dispersed phases in a composite material. What should be the
important mechanical characteristics of matrix and dispersed phases for FRCs?
(Understand)
3. State whether the following statements are true or false and give
reasons:(Understand)
• Aramid fibers are commonly used as reinforcements for metal and ceramic
matrices.
• Carbon fiber has poor compressive properties.
4. Bulk material is stronger than fibrous material.(Understand)
• Glass fiber is an anisotropic material.
• Glass fiber is an amorphous material.
• Whiskers are not widely used for making composites.

COURSE OUTCOME 2 (Understand)

1. Explain the criteria for selecting a process to manufacture FRP products.
(Understand)
2. Compare hand lay-up and RTM processes. (Understand)
3. Explain the fabrication process for MMC. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3 (Understand)

1. Explain the nanoclay composites and its applications. (Understand)
2. Describe the functionally graded composites and their applications. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 4(Analyse)

1. Analyse the weight fraction and volume fraction of fibers in the glass/epoxy
composites. The following data is obtained from the burnout test.
weight of the empty crucible = 46.5401 gm
weight of crucible and composite piece = 49.1201 gm
weight of crucible and glass fiber = 48.3420 gm.
The density of glass fiber is 2600 kg/m3and 1300 kg/m3(Analyse)

2. Calculate the ratio of fiber stress to matrix stress and matrix stress to composite
stress for Vf = 15%, 30 %, 45 % and 70 %. Take Ef =250 G Pa and Em = 15 G Pa
Analyse

3. Calculate the strains in the xy directions for the composite subjected to the loading as
shown in the figure. The composite is made of boron-epoxy. Take the data given for
0o unidirectional E-glass-epoxy as: E11 = 200 GPa; E22 = 20 GPa; G12 = 6.5 GPa; ν
12 = 0.2.(Apply)

250
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 5 .(Apply)

1. Determine A, B, and D matrices for the 2-ply laminate as shown in the figure.
Assume both the laminae have identical stiffness matrix Q as follows:(Apply)

2. The material properties are, E1= 147 GPa, E2= 15 GPa, G12= 12 GPa and ν 12 = 0.3 .
For the lamina with orientation [45°], Calculate the lamina stresses due to the load
of NXX = 100 kN/m. Verify for failure through the different failure criteria, if the
strength values are(Apply)

σ LU = 1200 MPa
σ TU = 60 MPa
τ LTU= 90 Mpa

251
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME5708 POLYMER TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology
Objectives
• To impart knowledge on mixing devices, extrusion moulding.
• To know the importance of Injection moulding and special moulding techniques.
• To understand the basic concepts in mould design
UNIT I MIXING DEVICES 9
Additives and Mixing process, different types of mixing devices – twin drum tumblers, ribbon
blenders, Z-blade Mixer, high speed mixer, ball mill, two roll mill, Banbury mixer, internal mixing and
screw mixing – twin screw compounding machines-differences between mixing conditions for rubbers
and plastics
UNIT II CALENDERING AND EXTRUSION 9
Processing methods based on extruder (granule production, profile production, film blowing, blow
moulding, extrusion stretch blow molding) – extrusion coating process (sheet coating and wire
covering) – rubber extrusion-hot feed and cold feed extrusion of rubber – calendaring of rubber
compounds and PVC pastes – equipment and processes
UNIT III INJECTION MOULDING 9
Injection moulding machines and its components – moulds, multi cavity moulds, mould clamping
devices, mould clamping force, injection blow moulding, reaction injection moulding
UNIT IV OTHER MOULDING TECHNIQUES 9
Thermoforming – vacuum forming, Pressure forming and matched mould forming – Rotation moulding
– Compression moulding – Transfer moulding
UNIT V BASIC CONCEPTS IN MOULD DESIGN 9
Types of moulds – Feed system – ejector system – ejection techniques – mould cooling – CAD / CAM
applications
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
2 Test Each 10 Marks Multiple Choice Questions 1 test of 60 Marks
Descriptive Questions (MCQ) Descriptive Questions

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Enumerate the various basic processing methods employed for Plastics. (Understand)
CO2. Enumerate the principles of calendaring and extrusion processes. (Understand)
CO3. Apply the principles of injection moulding in manufacturing of components (Apply)
CO4. Apply the other moulding techniques in production of components(Apply)
CO5. Apply the basic concepts in design of mould system and evaluate the applications of CAD /
CAM (Apply)

252
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Text Books
1. D.H. Morton-Jones, Polymer Processing, Springer verlaggmbh (2014)
2. Myer Kutz, “Applied Plastics Engineering Handbook: Processing and Materials”, Elsevier,
UK, (2016)
Reference Books
1. Sinha R., “Outlines of Polymer Technology: Manufacture of Polymers”, PHI, New Delhi,
(2004)
2. Crawford R.J. Plastics Engineering, Butterworth - Heinemann, 3rd Edition, (2005)
3. Fried helm Hansen, Plastics Extrusion Technology, 2nd Edition, Hanser Publishers, (1997)
4. Peter Powell, A. Jan IngenHouz, Engineering with Polymers, Stanley Thomas Publishers Ltd.,
2nd Edition. (1998)
5. Richard [Link], Polymer Process Engineering, Chapman and Hall, (1995)
6. Tim A. Osswald Georg Menges “Material Science of Polymers for Engineers”, Hanser
Publications, (2012)
7. Michael L. Berins, “Plastic Engineering Handbook of the Society of the Plastics Industry”,
Kluwer Academic Publishers, Netherland, (1991)
Charles A. Harper, “Handbook of Plastic Processes”, John Wiley, NJ, (2006)
Web Resources
[Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 1 1 3
2 3 2 1 2 3
3 3 2 1 1 3 2
4 3 1 1 2 3
5 1 2 2 1 2 3 1

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Enumerate the various basic processing methods employed for Plastics
(Understand)
1. Review the following mixing devices with their all salient features.
a). High speed mixer b). Ball mill c). Two roll mill d). Banbury Mixer (Remember)
2. Build a mixing device which have the key components of vertical vessel with a screw
and state its functions and applications with neat portrayal (Understand)
3. Correlate the various mixing conditions for vulcanized rubbers and plastics
(Understand)

253
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Enumerate the principles of calendaring and extrusion processes

(Understand)
1. Apply the suitable polymer production technology to produce ‘plastic pellets’
(Understand)
2. Select the suitable production method of ‘Shampoo Bottle’ and label the component
and process (Understand)
3. Check whether the high-tension wires from heavy voltage towers insulated in our
country. If, not rank the issues caused by it. And label a best solution with detailed
processes. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Apply the principles of injection moulding in manufacturing of
components (Apply)
1. Choose the best mould which can be used in the production of ‘bottle caps’ in large
quantity and discuss the process. (Apply)
2. Apply the suitable polymer production technology to produce ‘plastic storage
containers’ (Apply)
3. Select the often-utilized molding method of strong, lightweight parts that are easily
painted and elaborate the process. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Apply the other moulding techniques in production of components
(Apply)

1. Apply the rules, facts and techniques for the production of ‘Interior Door Panels.’
(Apply)
2. Select the suitable production method of ‘equipment panels’ and label the
component and process (Apply)
3. Apply the rules, facts and techniques for the production Microwave & Deep
Freeze Containers (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply the basic concepts in design of mould system and evaluate the
applications of CAD / CAM (Apply)
1. With suitable sketch, explain the ejector system in mould design. (Remember)
2. Check whether CAD/CAM software can be used in mould design of polymer
manufacturing, If yes, explain the basic concepts in mould design (Understand)
3. Design the mold which is used when the part of the runner system is on a
different plane to the injection location and explain (Apply)

254
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME5709 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS FOR ENGINEERS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values to instil
Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others

UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 9

Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for others –
Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation – Commitment –
Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and meditation for
professional excellence and stress management.

UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9

Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles – Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories.
UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics – A Balanced
Outlook on Law.
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk – Respect for
Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime –
Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination.

UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 9

Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors – Moral
Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Apply the value of ethics with sustained lifelong learning to strengthen autonomous
professional decision.
CO2 Apply the moral issues, ethical dilemmas, and corporate professionalism through identification of
suitable professional body.
CO3 Analyze the environment and lives of world community as a responsible engineer.
CO4 Evaluate the duties and responsibilities of employee/corporate.

255
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

CO5 Analyze ethical problems supported by established experiments around the world and provide
solution as a professional expert
Textbooks
1. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, (2004)
2. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
(2003).
Reference Books
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
(2003)
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts
and Cases”, Cengage Learning, (2009)
3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers”,
Oxford University Press, Oxford, (2001)
4. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, (2003)
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal Integrity
and Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, (2013)
6. World Community Service Centre, “Value Education”, Vethathiri publications, Erode, (2011)
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO2 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 3 2 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2

256
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME5710 INTRODUCTION TO AIRCRAFT SYSTEM
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Fluid Mechanics and
Machinery,Thermal
Engineering
Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Objectives
• To understand the different component systems and functions.
• To Understand the basic properties and principles behind the flight
• To make the student understand the concept of theory of airfoils and wing sections.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AIRCRAFTS 9
Evolution and history of flight; Basic components of an aircraft: Structural members, aircraft axis
system, aircraft motions, control surfaces and high lift devices; Types of aircrafts: Conventional
design configurations based on power plant location, wing location, intake location, tail unit
arrangements,
landing gear arrangements.
UNIT II BASIC PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT 9
Significance of speed of sound, air speed and ground speed, properties of atmosphere, Bernoulli‟s
equation, forces on the airplane, airflow over wing section, pressure distribution over a wing
section, generation of lift and drag, pitching moments, types of drag, lift curve, drag curve,
lift/drag ratio curve,
factors affecting lift and drag.
UNIT III AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS 9
Environmental control systems(ECS), pneumatic systems, hydraulic systems, fuel systems,
landing gear systems, engine control systems, ice and rain protection systems, cabin
pressurization and air conditioning systems, steering and brakes systems, auxiliary power unit;
Electrical and electronic systems: Avionics, flight controls, autopilot and flight management
systems, navigation systems,
communication, information systems, radar system
UNIT IV AEROFOIL STABILITY AND CONTROL 9
Aerofoil nomenclature, types of aerofoil, center of pressure and its effects; Wing section:
Aerodynamic center, aspect ratio, effects of speed, air density on lift and drag; Degree of stability:
Lateral, longitudinal and directional stability and controls of aircraft; Effects of flaps and slats and
lift coefficients, control tables, stalling, landing, gliding turning, speed of sound, mach
number, shock
waves..
UNIT V AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE AND MANEUVRES 9
Power curves, maximum and minimum speeds of horizontal flight, effects of changes of engine
power,
effects of altitude on power curves, forces acting on an aeroplane during a turn, loads during
a turn,correct and incorrect angles of bank.
Total Periods 45

257
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) Test (60 Marks)
(20 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Demonstrate the types & classifications of aircraft components and control
systems (Understand)
CO2. Interpret the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere (Understand)
CO3. Describe the principle and working of different aircraft systems. (Understand)
CO4. Determine dynamic longitudinal stability, lateral and directional dynamic stability. (Apply)
CO5. Calculate the forces and moments that are acting on an aircraft, variation of thrust, power,
SFC with velocity and altitude. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. Nelson, R.C. “Flight Stability and Automatic Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 2004.
Reference Books
1. Perkins, C.D., and Hage, R.E., “Airplane Performance stability and Control”, John Wiley
&Son:, Inc, NY, 1988.
2. Anderson, J.D., "Fundamentals of Aerodynamics", McGraw Hill Book Co., 2010
3. Kermode, A.C. Flight without Formulae, Pearson Education; Eleven edition, 2011
Web Resources
[Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 1

258
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Demonstrate the types & classifications of
aircraftcomponents and control systems (Understand)
1. Explain primary and secondary flight control
[Link] mention the different types of tail arrangements of an aircraft. . (U)

2. Draw three view of an aircraft and show all the major parts? Explain the major
componentsand parts.. . (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Interpret the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of
Atmosphere (Understand)

1. Explain the characteristics of an airfoil, when subjected to different angle of attacks. . (U)

2. Discuss the pressure distribution on an aerofoil? Sketch the pressure distribution

on anaerofoil at various angle of attack.. . (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Describe the principle and working of different aircraft
systems. (Understand)
1. Explain the working of the typical hydraulic system used for the passenger aircraft. (U)
2. Describe aircraft engine ignition system and starting system operation with neat
sketches.(U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Determine dynamic longitudinal stability, lateral and
directional dynamic stability (Apply)
1. Discuss the dynamic stability aspects of an aircraft considering its linearized
longitudinalequations of motion being analyzed under three degrees of freedom system.
(A)

2. The characteristic equation of an airplane is λ2 -0.5λ+9.5=0. Determine

whether themotion is dynamically stable or unstable. . (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Calculate the forces and moments that are acting on an
aircraft, variation of thrust, power, SFC with velocity and altitude. (Apply)
1. Explain about the role of leading edge extension to improve the performance of
aircraft at high angle of attack. . (U)

2. A flat plate is kept at 15o angle of attack to a supersonic flow at Mach number 2.4.
Solve the flow field around the plate and determine the inclination of slipstream
direction usingshock expansion theory. (A)

259
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE II

260
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6701 MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS AND CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Theory of Machines

Objectives
• To understand the Fundamentals of Vibration and its practical applications
• To understand the working principle and operations of various vibration measuring instruments
• To understand the various Vibration control strategies
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF VIBRATION 9
Introduction – Sources of Vibration – Mathematical Models – Displacement, velocity and acceleration –
Review of single degree freedom systems – Vibration isolation -Vibrometers and accelerometers –
Response to arbitrary and non-harmonic Excitations – Transient vibration – Impulse loads – Critical
speed of shaft.
UNIT II TWO DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEM 9
Introduction – Free undamped and damped vibration – Forced vibration with Harmonic excitation
system – Coordinate couplings and principal coordinates - Torsional vibration with two and three rotor
systems.
UNIT III MULTI-DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEM AND 9
CONTINUOUS SYSTEM
Multi degree freedom system – Influence coefficients and stiffness coefficients – Flexibility matrix and
Stiffness matrix – Eigen values and Eigen vectors – Matrix iteration method –Approximate methods:
Dunkerley, Rayleigh’s, and Holzer method – Geared systems – Eigen values & Eigen vectors for large
system of equations using Sub space, Lanczos method – Continuous system: Vibration of string, shafts
and beams.
UNIT IV VIBRATION CONTROL 9
Specification of Vibration Limits –Vibration severity standards – Vibration as condition Monitoring tool
– Vibration Isolation methods – Dynamic Vibration Absorber, Torsional and Pendulum Type Absorber
– Damped Vibration absorbers – Static and Dynamic Balancing – Balancing machines – Field balancing
– Vibration Control by Design Modification – Active Vibration Control
UNIT V EXPERIMENTAL METHODS IN VIBRATION 9
ANALYSIS
Vibration Analysis overview – Experimental Methods in Vibration Analysis – Vibration Measuring
Instruments – Selection of Sensors – Accelerometer Mountings – Vibration Exciters – Mechanical,
Hydraulic, Electromagnetic and Electrodynamics – Frequency Measuring Instruments, FFT analyzers –
System Identification from Frequency Response – Testing for resonance and mode shapes.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
3. Problem-Solving Activities

261
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Demonstrate mathematical models of dynamical systems with single degree of freedom to
determine their response to harmonic, transient and impulse loads. .(Apply)
CO2. Demonstrate mathematical models of dynamical systems with multiple degrees of freedom
to calculate natural frequencies and mode shapes. .(Apply)
CO3. Determine the natural frequencies and mode shapes of continuous systems such as strings
in transverse vibrations, bars in longitudinal vibrations, and circular shafts in torsional
vibrations using analytical and numerical methods. (Apply)
CO4. Illustrate the severity of vibration and choose a suitable vibration isolation system, perform
static and dynamic balancing and design suitable vibration absorber systems.(Apply)
CO5. Describe the vibration limits and able to select various vibration measuring instruments
(Understand)
Text Books
1. Rao S S, “Mechanical Vibrations”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, (2011)
2. Grover G K, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Nem Chand and Brothers, Roorkee, (2009)
Reference Books
1. Thomson W, “Theory of Vibration with Applications”, CRC Press, (2018)
2. Ashok Kumar Mallik, “Principles of Vibration control”, Affiliated East-West Press (P) Ltd.,
New Delhi Press, (2014)
3. Lewis H Bell, “Industrial Noise Control Fundamentals and Applications”, Marcel Dekkev
Incl., New York, (2007)
Web Resources
[Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 2 2 3 1 3
2 2 2 3 1 3
3 2 2 3 1 3
4 2 3 1 1 1 2 1
5 2 1 2 1 1 2 1

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Demonstrate mathematical models of dynamical systems
with single degree of freedom to determine their response to harmonic, transient
and impulse loads. (Apply)

1. Discuss general theory of seismic instruments and obtain the condition for using
it as a vibrometer. (U)

262
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

2. A shaft 1.5 m long supported in flexible bearings at the ends carries two wheels
each of 50 kg mass. One wheel is situated at the centre of the shaft and the other
at a distance of 375 mm from the centre towards left. The shaft is hollow of
external diameter 75 mm and internal diameter 40 mm. The density of the shaft
material is 7700 kg/m3 and its modulus of elasticity is 200 GN/m2. Find the
lowest whirling speed of the shaft, taking into account the mass of the shaft. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 2 Demonstrate mathematical models of dynamical systems

with multiple degrees of freedom to calculate natural frequencies and mode
shapes. (Apply)

1. A machine mounted on springs and fitted with a dashpot has a mass of 75 kg. There
are three springs, each of stiffness 10 N/mm. The amplitude of vibrations reduces from
38.4 to 6.4 mm in two complete oscillations. Assuming that the damping force varies as
the velocity, determine: 1. the damping coefficient, 2. the ratio of frequencies of damped
and undamped vibrations and 3. the periodic time of damped vibrations. (A)
2. A mass of 10 kg is suspended from one end of helical spring; the other end is being
fixed. The stiffness of the spring is 10 N/mm. The viscous damping causes the amplitude
to decrease to one-tenth of the initial value in four complete oscillations. If a periodic
force of 150 Cos 50t (N) is applied at the mass in the vertical direction, find the
amplitude of the forced vibrations. What is its value of resonance? (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Determine the natural frequencies and mode shapes of

continuous systems such as strings in transverse vibrations, bars in longitudinal
vibrations, and circular shafts in torsional vibrations using analytical and
numerical methods. (Apply)

1. Figure shown a system subjected to vibration. Find an expression for the natural
Frequency, locate the mode and draw mode shapes. (A)

2. State and proof Maxwell reciprocal theorem. Explain Dunkerley’s method. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Illustrate the severity of vibration and choose a suitable

vibration isolation system, perform static and dynamic balancing and design
suitable vibration absorber systems (Apply)

263
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

1. A motor is mounted on a platform that is observed to vibrate excessively at an

operating speed of 6000 rpm producing a 250-N force. Design a vibration absorber
(undamped) to add to the platform. Note that in this case the absorber mass will
only be allowed to move 2 mm because of geometric and size constraints. (A
2. A machine sorts bolts according to their size by moving a screen back and forth
using a primary system of 2500 kg with a natural frequency of 400 cycle/min.
Design a vibration absorber so that the machine-absorber system has natural
frequencies below 160 cycles/min and above 320 rpm. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Describe the vibration limits and able to select and analyse
by various vibration measuring instruments (Understand)

1. Explain the experimental modal analysis and the necessary basic equipments.
(U)
2. Explain machine condition monitoring techniques. (U)

264
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6702 CONCEPT OF ENGINEERING DESIGN
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Materials & Metallurgy, Strength of Materials and Design of Machine Elements &
Joints
Objectives
1. To Study the various design requirements and get acquainted with the processes involved
in product development.
2. To apply the design processes and scientific approaches to develop a successful product.
3. To provide the design solution through the social needs.
UNIT I DESIGN TERMINOLOGY 9
Definition-various methods and forms of design-importance of product design-static and
dynamic products-various design projects-morphology of design-requirements of a good design-
concurrent engineering-computer aided engineering-codes and standards-product and process
cycles-bench marking.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN PROCESSES 9
Basic modules in design process-scientific method and design method-Need identification,
importance of problem definition-structured problem, real life problem- information gathering -
customer requirements- Quality Function Deployment (QFD)- product design specifications-
generation of alternative solutions- Analysis and selection-Detail design and drawings-Prototype,
modeling, simulation, testing and evaluation
UNIT III CREATIVITY IN DESIGN 9
Creativity and problem solving-vertical and lateral thinking-invention-psychological view, mental
blocks-Creativity methods-brainstorming, synectics, force fitting methods, mind map, concept
map-Theory of innovative problem solving (TRIZ) - conceptual decomposition creating design
concepts.
UNIT IV SOCIETAL ASPECTS IN PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Human factors in design, ergonomics, user friendly design-Aesthetics and visual aspects
environmental aspects-marketing aspects-team aspects-legal aspects-presentation aspects

UNIT V MATERIAL AND PROCESSES IN DESIGN 9

Material selection for performance characteristics of materials-selection for new
designsubstitution for existing design-economics of materials-selection methods-recycling and
material selection-types of manufacturing process, process systems- Design for Manufacturability
(DFM) - Design for Assembly (DFA).
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(30 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
2 Test EACH 10marks MCQ/Descriptive Questions Descriptive Questions
Descriptive Questions

265
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Examine the various design requirements and get acquainted with the processes involved in
product development. (Apply)
CO2: Apply the design processes to develop a successful product. (Apply)
CO3: Apply scientific approaches to provide design solutions. (Apply)
CO4: Design solution through relate the social needs and provide a solution. (Apply)
CO5: Apply the principles of material selection, costing and manufacturing in design. (Apply)

Text Books
1. Dieter. G. N., Linda C. Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. Horenstein, M. N., Design Concepts for Engineers, Prentice Hall, 2010.
Reference Books
1. Dhillon, B. S., Advanced Design Concepts for Engineers, Technomic Publishing Co., 1998.
2. Edward B. Magrab, Satyandra K. Gupta, F. Patrick McCluskey and Peter A. Sandborn,
“Integrated Product and Process Design and Development”, CRC Press, 2009.
3. James Garratt, “Design and Technology”, Cambridge University Press, 1996.
4. Joseph E. Shigley, Charles [Link], and Richard G. Budynas, “Mechanical Engineering
Design”, McGraw Hill Professional, 2003.
5. Sumesh Krishnan and MukulSukla, Concepts in Engineering Design, Notion Press, 2016.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12 PSO1 PSO2

1 2 3 2 2 1
2 3 2 2 2 1
3 3 2 2 2 1
4 3 2 2 2 1
5 2 2 3 2 1

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to predict the various design
requirements and get acquainted with the processes involved in product
development (Apply)
1. List the various methods and forms of design (R)
2. Discuss about the requirements of a good design (U)

266
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

3. Describe the steps in benchmarking process (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to predict the suitable method forthe
design processes to develop a successful product. (Apply)
1. Explain QFD with a suitable example (A)
2. Discuss the importance of problem definition (U)
3. State the importance of Prototype modeling, simulation, testing and evaluation
(R)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to predict the scientific approaches to
provide design solutions. (Apply)
1. Explain the creativity methods (R)
2. Discuss about theory of innovative problem solving (U)
3. How the innovative problem-solving technique is used in design creativity(A)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to predict the design solution through
relate the human needs and provide a solution. (Apply)
1. Describe the design for environment (R)
2. Why the human factors is considered in design (U)
3. Derive a design process for aesthetics and visual aspects (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to predict the principles of material
selection, costing and manufacturing in design. (Apply)
1. Explain material selection methods in detail (U)
2. List the benefits of design of experiments (R)
3. Discuss Design for Manufacturability (DFM) and Design for Assembly (DFA)
with a suitable example (A)

267
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6703 FUNDAMENTALS OF COMBUSTION
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Chemistry, Engineering Thermodynamics
Objectives
1. To understand the fundamentals of combustion and to educate the different modes of
combustion, flames and fuel burning characteristics

UNIT I THERMODYNAMICS OF COMBUSTION 9

Combustion Thermodynamics – stoichiometry – Thermo-chemical equations – Heat of formation
– Activation energy – multi-step reactions – Heat of reaction – first order, second order and third
order reactions – Calculation of adiabatic flame temperature – Second law analysis for reacting
flow – Fundamental laws of transport phenomena, Conservations Equations, Transport in
Turbulent Flow
UNIT II PREMIXED COMBUSTION 9
Premixed Flame: One dimensional combustion wave, Laminar premixed flame, Burning velocity
measurement methods, Effects of chemical and physical variables on Burning velocity, Flame
extinction, Ignition, Flame stabilizations, Turbulent Premixed flame
UNIT III NON-PREMIXED COMBUSTION 9
Gaseous Jet diffusion flame, Liquid fuel combustion, Atomization, Spray Combustion, Solid fuel
combustion
UNIT IV COMBUSTION IN GAS TURBINE ENGINES 9
Combustion in gas turbine combustion chambers – Recirculation – combustion efficiency, Factors
affecting combustion efficiency – Fuels used for gas turbine combustion chambers – combustion
stability – Flame holder types
UNIT V EMISSION CONTROL TECHNOLOGIES 9
Chemical Emission from combustion, Quantification of emission, Emission control methods –
Clean combustion technologies – Simulation on premixed, non-premixed combustion with
emission levels
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 -10 Marks 1. ASSIGNMENT 1. DESCRIPTIVE
CAT 2 -10 Marks 2. ONLINE QUIZZES QUESTIONS
3. PROBLEM-SOLVING
ACTIVITIES

268
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Apply the principles of physics, chemistry and thermodynamics to combustion (Apply)

CO2. Acquire the knowledge on laminar and turbulent premixed combustion and its
characteristics (Understand)
Interpret combustion and its characteristics of gaseous, liquid and solid fuel
CO3.
(Understand)

CO4. Assimilate knowledge about combustion processes and strategies adapted in gas
turbines.
(Apply)
CO5. Identify novel combustion technologies that mitigate combustion driven
emission.
(Remember)
Text Books
1. S.R. Turns “An Introduction to Combustion Concepts and Applications”, McGraw Hill,
(2012).
2. Irvin Glassman “Combustion”, Academic Press, (2015)

Reference Books
1. [Link] “Combustion Theory”, ABP, CRC press, (2018)
2. [Link] “Understanding Combustion”, Macmillan India, (2007)
3. C. K. Law “Combustion Physics”, Cambridge University Press, (2010)
4. Mathur M.L. and Sharma R.P., “Gas Turbine, Jet and Rocket Propulsion”,
Standard
5. Publishers & Distributors, Delhi, 2nd edition (2014)
6. Sutton G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley, (1993)
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO 1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 1 2 3 2 3
CO2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3
CO4 1 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 3

269
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Apply the principles of physics, chemistry and thermodynamics
to combustion (Apply)
1. A closed, fixed, adiabatic volume contains a stoichiometric mixture of 2 kmole of
H2 and 1 kmole of O2 at 100 kPa and 298 K. Find the adiabatic flame temperature
assuming the irreversible reaction (A)
2H2 + O2 → 2H2O
2. Consider a variant on the previous example in which the mixture is diluted with
an inert, taken here to be N2. A closed, fixed, adiabatic volume contains a
stoichiometric mixture of 2 kmole of H2, 1 kmole of O2, and 8 kmole of N2 at 100
kPa and 298 K. Find the adiabatic flame temperature and the final pressure,
assuming the irreversible reaction (A)
2H2 + O2 + 8N2 → 2H2O + 8N2.
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Acquire the knowledge on laminar and turbulent premixed
combustion and its characteristics (Understand)
1. Identify the effects of chemical and physical variables on burning velocity during
premixed flame? (U)
2. Comparison between the Laminar and Turbulent premixed flame? (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Interpret combustion and its characteristics of gaseous, liquid

and solid fuel (Understand)
1. Characteristics for the liquid fuel to obtain the non-premixed combustion? (U)
2. Explain briefly about the solid fuel combustion? (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Assimilate knowledge about combustion processes and
strategies adapted in gas turbines (Apply)
1. The mass flow rate of air through an aircraft engine is 10 kg/s. The compressor
outlet temperature is 400 K and the turbine inlet temperature is 1800 K. The
heating value of the fuel is 42 MJ/kg and the specific heat at constant pressure is
1 kJ/kg-K. The mass flow rate of the fuel in kg/s is approximately. For a given
inlet condition, if the turbine inlet temperature is fixed, what value of
compressor efficiency given below leads to the lowest amount of fuel added in
the combustor of a gas turbine engine? (A)
2. Identify the type of fuels used for gas turbine combustion chambers with it
physical and chemical properties? (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Identify novel combustion technologies that mitigate combustion
driven emission (Remember)
1. Describe the types of technique used to reduce exhaust emission (R)
2. Recognize the chemical balance during the combustion of the liquid fuel? (R)

270
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6704 Fuel Cell Technology
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Physics, Engineering Chemistry
Objectives
1. To present a problem oriented in depth knowledge of fuel cell technology.
2. To address the underlying concepts, methods and application of fuel cell technology.
3. To enable students to describe the performance characteristics of fuel cell power plant and
its components.
4. To outline the performance, design characteristics and operating issues for various fuel
cells.
5. To impart sufficient knowledge to students about the working of fuel cell industry or R&D
organization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FUEL CELLS 9
Introduction – working and types of fuel cell – low, medium and high temperature fuel cell, liquid
and methanol types, proton exchange membrane fuel cell solid oxide, hydrogen fuel cells –
thermodynamics and electrochemical kinetics of fuel cells.
UNIT II FUEL CELLS FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS 9
Fuel cells for automotive applications – technology advances in fuel cell vehicle systems –
onboard hydrogen storage – liquid hydrogen and compressed hydrogen – metal hydrides, fuel
cell control system – alkaline fuel cell – road map to market.
UNIT III FUEL CELL COMPONENTS AND THEIR IMPACT ON 9
PERFORMANCE
Fuel cell performance characteristics – current/voltage, voltage efficiency and power density,
ohmic resistance, kinetic performance, mass transfer effects – membrane electrode assembly
components, fuel cell stack, bi-polar plate, humidifiers and cooling plates
UNIT IV FUELING 9
Hydrogen storage technology – pressure cylinders, liquid hydrogen, metal hydrides, carbon fibers
– reformer technology – steam reforming, partial oxidation, auto thermal reforming – CO
removal, fuel cell technology based on removal like bio-mass.
UNIT V FUEL CYCLE ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to fuel cycle analysis – application to fuel cell and other competing technologies like
battery powered vehicles, SI engine fueled by natural gas and hydrogen and hybrid electric
vehicle.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 -10 Marks 1. ASSIGNMENT 1. DESCRIPTIVE
CAT 2 -10 Marks 2. ONLINE QUIZZES QUESTIONS
[Link]-SOLVING
ACTIVITIES

271
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Describe the fundamentals of fuel cell (Understand)
CO2. Describe the performance of fuel cell systems (Understand)
CO3. Illustrate the construction and operation of fuel cell stack and fuel cell system (Apply)
CO4. Illustrate the modelling techniques for fuel cell systems (Apply)
CO5. Classify the different methods of fuel processing for fuel cells (Understand)
Text Books
1. Andrew L. Dicks and David A. J. Rand, “Fuel Cell Explained”, John Wiley & Sons. Inc., (2018)
2. Revankar shrip, “Fuel Cells: Principles, Design and Analysis”, Auerbach publications,
(2014).
3. Dushyant Shekhawat, “Fuel Cells: Technologies for fuel processing”, North Holland
Publishing Co., 2011.
Reference Books
1. Ohayre, “Fuel Cell Fundamentals”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2016.
2. F. Barbir, PEM Fuel Cells: Theory and Practice (2nd Ed.) Elsevier/Academic Press, 2013.
3. Dushyant Shekhawat, “Fuel Cells: Technologies for fuel processing”, North Holland
Publishing Co., (2011)
4. Kevin Huang, “Solid Oxide Fuel Cell Technology: Principles, Performance and Operations”,
Woodhead Publishing Ltd., 2009.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO 1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3
CO5 2 2 2 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Describe the fundamentals of fuel cell (Understand)
1. Describe the types of fuel cell – low, medium and high temperature fuel cell? (U)
2. Compare between the low, medium and high temperature fuel cells? (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Describe the performance of fuel cell systems (Understand)
1. Differentiate between the liquid hydrogen and compressed hydrogen? (U)
2. Explain briefly about the alkaline fuel with neat sketch? (U)

272
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Illustrate the construction and operation of fuel cell stack and
fuel cell system (Apply)
1. Illustrate suitable sketch for the Fuel cell performance characteristics with
respective to current/voltage & voltage efficiency? (A)
2. What are the main components of membrane electrode assembly components?
(U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Illustrate the modelling techniques for fuel cell systems (Apply)
1. A company is developing a new car powered by a fuel cell system that runs on
H2. You have been asked to consider generating the H2 by electrolysis with a fuel
cell. The H2 tank to be used is 10 liters in volume and a fill‐up requires a
pressure of 34 atm. a) Calculate the current required to operate at a voltage of
1.8V. b) Calculate the rate of hydrogen production per membrane area and the
total membrane area required to fill the tank in 2 minutes. Consider the
following specifications of the system. 60% conversion of H2O Eo = 1.172 V The
cathode pressure is maintained at 1 atm. The anode pressure is maintained at 1
atm Membrane thickness = 100 μm Membrane conductivity (σ) = 0.1 S/cm (S =
1/Ω) Electrolysis T = 373 K (assume water is in the gas phase). H2 storage tank T
= 298 K (A)
2. Explain the different states of Hydrogen storage technology? (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Classify the different methods of fuel processing for fuel cells
(Understand)
1. Explain different methods of production of hydrogen and catalytic steam
reforming in details. (U)
2. Discuss the technologies for hydrogen production? (U)
3. Explain a lay out of a fuel cell in automobile. (U)

273
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6705 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING & MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• To provide student with knowledge and skill sets required in the industrial
management and engineering profession.
• To apply productivity techniques for achieving continuous improvement.
• To impart in the students, the ability to adopt a system approach to design, develop,
implement, and innovate integrated systems.
• To enable the students to understand the interactions between engineering, society,
and environment.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Industrial Engineering–definition, history, primitive activities Applications in manufacturing and
service sectors–functions of an Industrial Engineer Management approaches–FW Taylors
scientific approach– Modern approach– Systems approach
UNIT II PRODUCTIVITY 6
Definition – Factors affecting- Increasing productivity of resources - Kinds of productivity
measures - Case study.
UNIT III PLANT LAYOUT 12
Factors governing plant location, types of production layouts, advantages and disadvantages of
process and product layouts, applications, quantitative techniques for optimal layout design,
Introduction to software for plant layout design, Tools and techniques including computer-based
layout design – CRAFT, ALDEP, CORELAP.
UNIT IV RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9
Concept of human resource management, personnel management and industrial relations,
functions of personal management – Job evaluation, its importance and types, merit rating,
quantitative methods, MTM, wage incentive plan, types
UNIT V DECISION MAKING AND PROJECT MANGEMENT 9
Types of decisions – theories of decision making – steps involved in decision making –
Quantitative methods in decision making PERT, CPM – differences and applications, critical path,
determination of floats, project crashing, smoothing – simple numerical
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
2 Test EACH 10marks MCQ/Descriptive Questions Descriptive Questions
MCQ/Descriptive Questions

274
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Summarize the basics of industrial engineering and its applications in production and
service sector (Understand)
CO2: Apply productivity techniques for continuous improvement in different
functionalities of an industry. (Apply)
CO3: Interpret the optimal layout design using software (Understand)
CO4: Demonstrate the resource and personnel management requirements for an
organization. (Apply)
CO5: Prepare a decision-making plan on project management (Apply)
Text Books
1. Mart and Telsang,“Industrial Engineering and Management”,[Link] & Compagny
Limited,(2006)
2. [Link],“Industrial Engineering and Management”, Khanna publishers,(2017)
3. MIKhan, “Industrial Engineering”,New age international(P)publishers ltd. (2007)

Reference Books
1. [Link], Anthony Lal, “Introduction to industrial engineering and
management science”, McGraw Hill, (2001)
2. G,Nadhamuni Reddy, “Industrial Engineering and Management”, New age
international(P)publishers ltd., (2002).
3. [Link],“IndustrialEngineering andManagement”,PHILearningPvtLtd.,(2015)
Web Resources
1. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 1 1 2 3
2 2 1 2 1 1 2 3
3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3
4 2 1 2 1 1 2 3
5 2 1 2 1 1 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Summarize the basics of industrial engineering and its
applications in production and service sector (Understand)
1. Explain any four fields of application of Industrial Engineering (U).
2. Write the role of an Industrial Engineer with respect to Management approaches
(R).
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply productivity techniques for continuous improvement in
different functionalities of an industry. (Apply)

275
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

1. Importance of Vision, mission and objectives statements for an organization (A)

2. How to formulate the management structure for a company (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Interpret the optimal layout design using software (Understand)
1. Write down the types of production layouts (U)
2. Describe the importance of quantitative techniques for optimal layout design (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Demonstrate the resource and personnel management requirements
for an organization. (Apply)

1. Differentiate between personnel management and industrial relations (A)

2. Write notes on wage incentive plan. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Prepare a decision-making plan on project management (Apply)
1. Apply the theories of decision making differ from other methods (A)
2. Describe about project crashing, smoothing (A)

276
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6706 LEAN SIX SIGMA L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology, Probability and Statistical Analysis
Objectives
To gain insights about the importance of lean manufacturing and six sigma practices

UNIT I LEAN & SIX SIGMA BACKGROUND AND FUNDAMENTALS 9

Historical Overview – Definition of quality – What is six sigma – TQM and Six sigma – lean
manufacturing and six sigma – six sigma and process tolerance – Six sigma and cultural changes –
six sigma capability – six sigma need assessments – implications of quality levels, Cost of Poor
Quality (COPQ), Cost of Doing Nothing – assessment questions
UNIT II THE SCOPE OF TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9
Tools for definition – IPO diagram, SIPOC diagram, Flow diagram, CTQ Tree, Project Charter –
Tools for measurement – Check sheets, Histograms, Run Charts, Scatter Diagrams, Cause and
effect diagram, Pareto charts, Control charts, Flow process charts, Process Capability
Measurement, Tools for analysis – Process Mapping, Regression analysis, RU/CS analysis, SWOT,
PESTLE, Five Whys, interrelationship diagram, overall equipment effectiveness, TRIZ innovative
problem solving – Tools for improvement – Affinity diagram, Normal group technique, SMED, 5S,
mistake proofing.
UNIT III SIX SIGMA METHODOLOGIES 9
Design For Six Sigma (DFSS), Design For Six Sigma Method – Failure Mode Effect Analysis
(FMEA), FMEA process – Risk Priority Number (RPN) – Six Sigma and Leadership, committed
leadership – Change Acceleration Process (CAP) – Developing communication plan – Stakeholder.

UNIT IV SIX SIGMA IMPLEMENTATION AND CHALLENGES 9

Tools for implementation – Supplier Input Process Output Customer (SIPOC) – Quality Function
Deployment or House of Quality (QFD) – alternative approach –implementation – leadership
training, close communication system, project selection – project management and team –
champion training – customer quality index – challenges – program failure, CPQ vs six sigma,
structure the deployment of six sigma – cultural challenge – customer/internal metrics.
UNIT V EVALUATION AND CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT 9
METHODS
Evaluation strategy – the economics of six sigma quality, Return on six Sigma (ROSS), ROI, poor
project estimates – continuous improvement – lean manufacturing – value, customer focus,
Perfection, focus on waste, overproduction – waiting, inventory in process (IIP), processing
waste, transportation, motion, making defective products, underutilizing people – Kaizen
Total Periods 45

277
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
2 Test EACH 10marks MCQ/Descriptive Questions Descriptive Questions
MCQ/Descriptive Questions

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Describe the importance of Lean and six sigma (Understand)
CO2: Demonstrate the scope of tools and techniques. (Understand)
CO3: Illustrate Plan the resources using six sigma methodologies (Apply)
CO4: Apply QFD to face the implementation and challenges. (Apply)
CO5: Apply the process of evaluation and continuous improvement methods. (Apply)
Text Books
1. [Link],DavidRownalds,BillKastle,“WhatisLeanSixSigma”,McGraw Hill(2012).
2. [Link],“LEANManufacturingImplementation”,APICS,(2009)

Reference Books
1. Thomas Pyzdek,“The Six Sigma Hand book”,McGraw-Hill,(2010)
2. Fred Solei mannejed, “SixSigma, Basic Steps and Implementation”,AuthorHouse,(2004)
3. [Link],III,[Link],BeckiMeadows,
“Managing Six Sigma:A PracticalGuide to Understanding, Assessing, and Implementing
the Strategy That YieldsBottom-LineSuccess, John Wiley & Sons,(2010)
4. James [Link], [Link], “Lean Thinking”,Free Press Business,(2013)
Web Resources
[Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 3
2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 3
3 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 3
4 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 3
5 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 3

278
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Describe the importance of Lean and six sigma (Understand)
1. Give a detailed report on how Six Sigma is related to TQM, lean manufacturing,
and process tolerance. (U)
2. Enumerate the importance of cost of quality. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Demonstrate the scope of tools and techniques. (Understand)
1. How a Milestone tracker diagram helps in continuous improvement of a firm. (A)
2. Explain the relationship between lean manufacturing and six sigma (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Illustrate Plan the resources using six sigma methodologies
(Apply)
1. Describe Earned value management in detail (U)
2. Depict the process of FMEA with a sample form (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Apply QFD to face the implementation and challenges. (Apply)
1. Demonstrate important is a customer to the firm and why is a quality index
required? What are the various challenges faced? (A)
2. Enumerate the various principles of CPQ and Six sigma (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply the process of evaluation and continuous improvement

methods. (Apply)
1. How is Kaizen implemented in an organization? (A)
2. Differentiate inventory in progress and work in progress. (U)

279
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6707 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course

Manufacturing Technology, CNC Machines and Automation

Objectives

[Link] understand the application of computers in various aspects of Manufacturing viz., Design,
Proper planning, Manufacturing cost, Layout & Material Handling system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Brief introduction to CAD and CAM – Manufacturing Planning, Manufacturing control –
Introduction to CAD/CAM – Concurrent Engineering – CIM concepts – Computerised elements of
CIM system – Types of production - Manufacturing models and Metrics – Mathematical models of
Production Performance – Simple problems – Manufacturing Control – Simple Problems – Basic
Elements of an Automated system – Levels of Automation – Lean Production and Just-In-Time
Production
UNIT II PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL AND 9
COMPUTERISED PROCESS PLANNING
Process planning – Computer Aided Process Planning (CAPP) – Logical steps in Computer Aided
Process Planning – Aggregate Production Planning and the Master Production Schedule –
Material Requirement planning – Capacity Planning – Control Systems – Shop Floor Control –
Inventory Control – Brief on Manufacturing Resource Planning-II (MRP-II) & Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP)
UNIT III CELLULAR MANUFACTURING 9
Group Technology(GT), Part Families – Parts Classification and coding – Simple Problems in Opitz
Part Coding system – Production flow Analysis – Cellular Manufacturing – Composite part
concept – Machine cell design and layout – Quantitative analysis in Cellular Manufacturing – Rank
Order Clustering Method - Arranging Machines in a GT cell – Hollier Method – Simple Problems.
UNIT IV FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM (FMS) AND 9
AUTOMATED GUIDED VEHICLE SYSTEM (AGVS)
Types of Flexibility - FMS – FMS Components – FMS Application & Benefits – FMS Planning and
Control – Quantitative analysis in FMS – Simple Problems. Automated Guided Vehicle System
(AGVS) – AGVS Application – Vehicle Guidance technology – Vehicle Management & Safety.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 9
Robot Anatomy and Related Attributes – Classification of Robots- Robot Control systems – End
Effectors – Sensors in Robotics – Robot Accuracy and Repeatability – Industrial Robot
Applications – Robot Part Programming – Robot Accuracy and Repeatability
Total Periods 45

280
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Explain the basic concepts of CAD, CAM and computer integrated manufacturing systems
(Understand)
CO2: Demonstrate the production planning and control and computerized process planning
(Apply)
CO3: Differentiate the different coding systems used in group technology (Understand)
CO4: Explain the concepts of flexible manufacturing system (FMS) and automated guided vehicle
(AGV) system. (Understand)
CO5: Determine the Classification of robots used in industrial applications. (Apply)
Text Books
1. [Link] “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated
Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, (2015).
2. Radhakrishnan P, [Link] Raju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 2nd Edition, New Age
International (P) Ltd, New Delhi, (2018)
Reference Books
1. Gideon Halevi and Roland Weill, “Principles of Process Planning – A Logical Approach”
Chapman & Hall, London, (2012)
2. Kant Vajpayee S, “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall India.
3. Rao. P, N Tewari &T.K. Kundra, “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, (2017)
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 2 2 2 1 3 2
2 2 2 2 1 3 2
3 2 2 2 1 3 2
4 2 2 2 1 3 2
5 2 2 2 1 3 2

281
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Explain the basic concepts of CAD, CAM and computer
integrated manufacturing systems. (Understand)
1. Discuss about seven forms of waste in production and methods to eliminate them.
(U)
2. Explain the hierarchical structure of computerized elements of CIM. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Demonstrate the production planning and control and
computerized process planning. (Apply)
1. Define MRP. Explain the inputs to MRP and various MRP outputs. Also list the
various benefits of MRP. (R)
2. Show in detail the phases of shop floor system. (A )
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Differentiate the different coding systems used in group
technology. (Understand)
1. Discuss the production flow analysis in detail. (U )
2. Explain cellular manufacturing in detail. (U )
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Explain the concepts of flexible manufacturing system
(FMS) and automated guided vehicle (AGV) system. (Understand)
1. Define FMS and explain in detail about the FMS components. (R)
2. Explain vehicle guidance technology in AVGs. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Determine the classification of robots used in industrial

applications. (Apply)
1. Demonstrate the basic structure of a robotic system with neat sketch. (A)
2. Summarize what are robot end effectors? How do you classify them? (U)

282
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6708 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology, CNC Machines and Automation
Objectives
To understand the concepts and applications of flexible manufacturing systems.
UNIT I PLANNING, SCHEDULING AND CONTROL OF FMS 9
Introduction to FMS – development of manufacturing systems – benefits – major elements – types
of flexibility – FMS application and flexibility – single product, single batch, n – batch scheduling
problem – knowledge-based scheduling system
UNIT II COMPUTER CONTROL AND SOFTWARE FOR FMS 9
Introduction – composition of FMS – hierarchy of computer control –computer control of work
center and assembly lines – FMS supervisory computer control – types of software specification
and selection – trends.
UNIT III FMS SIMULATION AND DATA BASE 9
Application of simulation – model of FMS – simulation software (Demonstration using Autodesk
360 fusion) – limitation – manufacturing data systems – data flow – FMS database systems –
planning for FMS database
UNIT IV GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND JUSTIFICATION OF FMS 9
Introduction – matrix formulation – mathematical programming formulation – graph formulation
– knowledge-based system for group technology – economic justification of FMS – application of
possibility distributions in FMS systems justification.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF FMS AND FACTORY OF THE FUTURE 9

FMS application in machining, sheet metal fabrication, prismatic component production –

aerospace application – FMS development towards factories of the future – artificial intelligence
and expert systems in FMS – design philosophy and characteristics for future.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Enumerate the principles of flexible manufacturing systems. (Understand)
CO2: Discuss the concepts and applications of computers in flexible manufacturing systems.
(Understand)
CO3: Apply the modern tools in database management of FMS. (Apply)
CO4: Illustrate the performance of group technology in FMS. (Apply)
CO5: Show the application of FMS and understand the future factory of FMS. (Apply)

283
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Text books
1. Groover M.P., “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt., New Delhi, (2015)
2. H K Shivanand, M MBenal, V Koti, “Flexible Manufacturing Systems”, New Age
International publishers (2006)
3. Jha, N.K. “Handbook of flexible manufacturing systems”, Academic Press Inc., (1991)

Reference Books

1. Kalpakjian, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Addison-Wesley Publishsing

Co., (2018)
2. Radhakrishnan P. and Subramanyan S., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Age
International Ltd., (2018)
3. Raouf, A. and Ben-Daya, M., Editors, “Flexible manufacturing systems: Recent
development”, Elsevier Science, (1995)
4. Taiichi Ohno, “Toyota Production System: Beyond large-scale Production”, Productivity
Press (India) Pvt. Ltd. (2001)
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 2 2 2 2 3 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 2 2 3 2
4 2 2 2 2 3 2
5 2 2 2 2 3 2

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Explain the principles of flexible manufacturing systems
(Understand)

1. Discuss the major elements of FMS? State the applications of FMS. (U)
2. Explain different types of flexibility in manufacturing in FMS concept. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Discuss the concepts and applications of computers in
flexible manufacturing systems. (Understand)
1. Explain various functions performed by computer control system in FMS
implementation. (U)
2. Discuss the role of software and considerations for maintenance planning and
reporting. (U)

284
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Apply the modern tools in database management of FMS

(Apply)
1. Show the languages for the simulation of FMS and the selection of simulation
software. (A)
2. Discuss input and output analysis in FMS simulation with a case study. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Illustrate the performance of group technology in FMS.

(Apply)
1. Examine the sorting-based algorithm in grouping parts with an example. (A)
2. Discuss bond energy algorithm in grouping parts with an example. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Show the application of FMS and understand the future
factory of FMS. (Apply)
1. Predict how is FMS applied in prismatic part production? Give a case study. (A)
2. Show the design philosophy for the FMS of the future? Discuss in detail. (A)

285
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6709 HYBRID VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Automobile Engineering
Objectives
• To understand the vehicle architecture, power train modelling and the electrical motor
characteristics in hybrid vehicles.
• To understand the energy storage technology and driving cycle simulation of hybrid vehicles.
• To Explicate the different train topologies and power flow control in hybrid vehicles
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND COMPONENTS OF HYBRID 9
VEHICLES
Introduction: General Architectures- Vehicle System Components and Analysis- Controls of
Hybrid Vehicle Components of Hybrid Vehicles: Prime Mover- Electric Motor with DC/DC
Converter and Inverter- Energy Storage System-Transmission System in Hybrid Vehicle.
UNIT II HYBRID VEHICLES SYSTEM MODELING 9
Internal Combustion Engine- Electric Motor- Battery System- Transmission System- Final Drive
and Wheel- Vehicle Body- PID-Based Driver Model.
UNIT III POWER ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVES 9
Power Electronics: Power Electronic Devices- DC/DC Converter- DC–AC Inverter Electric Motor
Drives: BLDC Motor and Control- AC Induction Motor and Control- Plug-In Battery Charger
Design- Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle Battery System and Charging Characteristics.
UNIT IV ENERGY STORAGES SYSTEM MODELING AND CONTROL 9
Methods of Determining State of Charge- Estimation of Battery Power Availability- Battery Life
Prediction- Cell Balancing- Estimation of Cell Core Temperature- Battery System Efficiency.
UNIT V SIMULATION OF DRIVING CYCLES 9
Simulation System - Typical Test - Driving Cycles - Preliminary Sizing of Main Components of
Hybrid Vehicle- Fuel Economy and Emissions Simulation Calculations - Demonstration using
MATLAB®, Simulink®, and Sim scape™.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
Destructive Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities

286
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Summarize about the layout and sub systems of hybrid vehicles (Understand)
CO2. Interpret the architecture of various models of hybrid Vehicles Systems. (Understand)
CO3. Classify and explain electronic devices and motor drives (Understand)
CO4. Estimate the parameters influencing the energy storage Systems. (Understand)
CO5. Infer the results from simulation of driving cycles (Understand)
Text books
1. Wei Liu, "Introduction to Hybrid Vehicle System Modeling and Control", 1st Edition, John Wiley
& Sons, Inc., New Jersey, (2013).
Reference Books
1. Mehrdad Ehsani, YiminGao,Stefano Longo, Kambiz Ebrahimi, "Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric
and Fuel Cell Vehicles ", 2nd Edition, CRC Press, Boca Raton, (2018)
2. Iqbal Husain, "Electric and Hybrid Vehicles", 3rd Edition, CRC Press, Boca Raton, (2021)
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2

1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
3 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
4 3 1 1 1 1 3
5 3 2 1 1 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Summarize about the layout and sub systems of hybrid
vehicles. (Understand)
1. Draw a general lay out of a EV and discuss the transmission characteristics. (U)
2. With a neat sketch, explain the configuration of Series hybrid electric drive train.
(U)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Explain the architecture of various models of hybrid

Vehicles Systems. (Understand)
1. Explain the configuration of v/f-controlled induction motor drive with field
weakening mode and constant-torque mode' (U)

287
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

2. A vehicle with power plant power output at the drive train considering all losses
is 100kW. The maximum total resistance the vehicle experiences is 3.6 li.
Calculate the velocity the vehicle can achieve in kmlh under this condition?. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Classify and explain electronic devices and motor drives .
(Understand)
1. Draw the typical torque Vs speed envelope curves of drive train motors and
show the continuous, intermittent and peak overload ratings (U)
2. Explain compound wound DC motor with neat circuit diagram and also write the
voltage and circuit Diagram(U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Estimate the parameters influencing the energy storage
Systems. (Understand)

1. Why an energy management control system is required in an HEV? Do you think

an elaborate energy management system similar to that applied to a hybrid vehicle,
is required in an electric vehicle? Explain (U)

2. Draw the block diagram of a general Ftuzy Logic controller (FLC) and show (5)
thecorecomponentsoftheFLCandtheinputsandoutputsrelevanttoahybrid electric
vehicle control'. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Infer the results from simulation of driving cycles.

(Understand)

[Link] the experimental modal analysis and the necessary basic equipments. (U)

2.A hybrid electric vehicle has two sources- an ICE with output power of 80kW and
battery storage. The battery storage is a 150 Ah, Cio battery at 120V. (i) Calculate
the battery energy capacity (ii). Without de-rating the Attr capacity, what is the
maximum power that can be supported by the battery? (iii). What is the electrical
motor power output if the total efficiency of power converter and motor
combination is 98%. (iv). what is the maximum power that can be transmitted to
the wheels if the transmission efficiency is 95%? (U)

288
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6710 ELECTRIC VEHICLE
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Physics, Engineering chemistry and Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics
Engineering
Objectives
1. To understand the concept of electric vehicles.
2. To study about the motors for electric vehicles.
3. To understand the drive train in electric vehicles.
4. To understand the concept of battery technology.
5. To study about sensors for electric vehicles.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9
Electric Vehicle – Need - Types – Cost and Emissions – End of life. Electric Vehicle Technology –
layouts, cables, components, Controls.
UNIT II ELECTRIC VEHICLE MOTORS 9
Motors (DC, Induction, BLDC) – Types, Principle, Construction, Control. Induction motor,
permanent magnet motor, switched reluctance motor.
UNIT III ELECTRIC VEHICLE DRIVE TRAIN 9
Transmission configuration, Components – gears, differential, clutch, brakes regenerative
braking, motor sizing - Electric Drive Trains (EDT) – Series HEDT (Electrical Coupling) – Power
Rating Design, Peak Power Source (PPS); Parallel HEDT (Mechanical Coupling) – Torque Coupling
and Speed Coupling. Switched Reluctance Motors (SRM) Drives – Basic structure, Drive
Convertor, Design.
UNIT IV BATTERY 9
Batteries – overview and its types. Parameters – Capacity, Discharge rate, State of charge, state of
Discharge, Depth of Discharge, Technical characteristics - Battery plug-in and life. Ultra-capacitor,
Charging – Methods and Standards. Alternate charging sources – Wireless & Solar
UNIT V SENORS 9
Sensors - Autonomous EV cars, Self-drive Cars, Hacking; Sensor less – Control methods- Phase
Flux Linkage-Based Method, Phase Inductance Based, Modulated Signal Injection, Mutually
Induced Voltage-Based, Observer-Based.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 -10 Marks 1. ASSIGNMENT 1. DESCRIPTIVE
CAT 2 -10 Marks 2. ONLINE QUIZZES QUESTIONS
[Link]-SOLVING
ACTIVITIES

289
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Describe about working principle of electric vehicles (Understand)
CO2. Apply the working principle and select various motors used in electric vehicles. (Apply)
CO3. Classify the types of drive train in electric vehicles (Understand)
CO4. Differentiate the types and working principle of battery (Understand)
CO5. Identify the various types and working principle of sensors (Understand)
Text Books
1. Jack Erjavec and Jeff Arias, “Hybrid, Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, Cengage Learning,
2012.
2. Jack Erjavec and Jeff Arias, “Alternative Fuel Technology – Electric, Hybrid and Fuel Cell
Vehicles”, Cengage Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.
3. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimin Gao, sebastien E. Gay and Ali Emadi, “Modern Electric, Hybrid
Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and Design”, CRC Press, 2009.
Reference Books
1. Electric and Hybrid Vehicles, Tom Denton, Taylor & Francis, 2018.
2. Electric and Hybrid Vehicles Power Sources, Models, Sustainability, Infrastructure and the
Market Gianfranco Pistoia Consultant, Rome, Italy, Elsevier Publications, 2017.
3. Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control - Wei Liu, General Motors, USA, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2017.
4. Hybrid Electric Vehicles – Teresa Donateo, Published by ExLi4EvA, 2017.
5. Hybrid, Electric & Fuel-Cell Vehicles Jack Erjavec, Delmar, Cengage Learning, 2018.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 3 2 2 3
2 2 3 2 2 3
3 2 2 2 2 3
4 2 2 2 2 3
5 2 2 2 2 3

290
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Describe about working principle of electric vehicles
(Understand)
1. Describe the historical background of electrical vehicle in India? (U)
2. Discuss the components of the current electrical vehicles? (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply the working principle and select various motors used in
electric vehicles (Apply)
1. A vehicle powered by PM-DC motor is cruising at 36 kmph, the applied voltage is
25V, the BEMF is 24V and the winding resistance is 20 mΩ. How much current is
the motor drawing? (A)
2. Comparison between the DC and BLDC motor? (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Classify the types of drive train in electric vehicles (Understand)
1. Describe the working principle of brakes regenerative braking system? (U)
2. Comparison between series and parallel HEDT? (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Differentiate the types and working principle of battery
(Understand)
1. Describe briefly about the Battery technology in India with standard
specification? (U)
2. State the working principle of the Lithium batteries for electric vehicle? (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Identify the various types and working principle of sensors
(Understand)
1. Describe the Autonomous EV cars? (U)
2. List of the latest sensors used in electric vehicles? (U)

291
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE III

292
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6711 PRODUCT DESIGN FOR SUSTAINABILITY
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Materials & Metallurgy, Strength of Materials and Design of Machine Elements &
Joints
Objectives
1. To understand the basic concepts of sustainability.
2. To gain knowledge about the tools and techniques for sustainable design.
3. To improve the design by assessing the customer needs.
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS IN SUSTAINABILITY 9
Understanding the language of sustainable engineering design, construction and operation.
Natural resources terminology. Carrying capacity. Sustainable development, corporate
responsibility, biophysical constraints, environmental management.

UNIT II TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Sustainable Engineering Design Tools – Life cycle analysis, carbon footprinting. Life cycle
assessment (LCA), Types of LCA’s: baseline, comparative, streamlined. LCA inventory analysis:
process or input‐output. Hybrid inventory analysis. Sustainable Product Design. Whole systems
design. Lightweighting and materials reduction. Designing for a lifetime. Design for durability,
repair and up-grade, disassembly and recycling. Energy use in design. Reducing energy losses in
design.
UNIT III PRINCIPLES FOR SUSTAINABLE BREAKTHROUGH DESIGN 9
Infrastructure for managing flows of materials, energy and activities; sustainable value creation
approaches for all stakeholders, environmental design characteristics; design changes &
continual improvement; inclusive sustainable design principles, crowd sourcing, multiple-
objective designs; infrastructures that support system thinking; knowledge management for
sustainable design, learning systems and experimentation; smart data systems, understanding
variation.
UNIT IV SUSTAINABLE DESIGN 9
Industrial ecology, multiple life cycle design, principles of design, green engineering, cradle to
cradle design, The Natural Step, biomimicry, design for reuse, dematerialization, modularization,
design for flexibility, design for disassembly, design for inverse manufacturing, design for the
environment, etc.
UNIT V CUSTOMER AND USER NEEDS ASSESSMENT 9
Identification & breakdown structures that describe customers & stakeholders, green marketing,
socially conscious consumerism, sources of customer information, collecting information,
analyzing customer behavior, translating the voice of the customer, use analysis, structuring
customer needs, service gap analysis, prioritizing customer needs, strategic design, Kano
technique.
Total Periods 45

293
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
2 Test EACH 10marks MCQ/Descriptive Questions Descriptive Questions
Descriptive Questions
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Examine the concept of sustainability in terms of design, construction and development.
(Apply)
CO2: Discover knowledge in engineering design tools and life cycle assessment. (Apply)
CO3: Apply sustainable value creation approaches, design changes & continual improvement.
(Apply)
CO4: Predict the sustainable design, green engineering, flexible design etc. (Apply)
CO5: Design according to the customer needs. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Finster, Mark P., 2013. Sustainable Perspectives to Design and Innovation.
Reference Books
1. Clarke, Abigail & John K. Gershenson 2006. Design for the Life Cycle. Life-cycle Engineering
Laboratory, Department of Mechanical Engineering-Engineering Mechanics, Michigan
Technological University.
2. Ramaswamy, Rohit, 1996. Design and Management of Service Processes: Keeping
Customers for Life, Prentice Hall.
3. Schmitt, Brent, 2003. Customer Experience Management, Wiley and Sons.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 1 2 2 2 1
2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
3 2 1 2 2 2 1
4 2 1 2 2 2 1
5 2 1 2 1 2 2 1

294
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to understand the concept of
sustainability in terms of design, construction and development. (Remember,
Understand and Apply)
1. What do you mean by sustainable engineering design (R)
2. Differentiate renewable and non-renewable resources (U)
3. “Sustainable development is the only way left for human survival” - Give your
comments (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to gain knowledge in engineering
design tools and life cycle assessment. (Remember, Understand and Apply)
1. Explain Life cycle assessment with different types (R)
2. Discuss the hybrid inventory analysis (U)
3. Write down the design procedure for repair and up-grade, disassembly and
recycling (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to apply sustainable value creation
approaches, design changes & continual improvement. (Remember, Understand
and Apply)
1. State and explain environmental design characteristics (R)
2. Explain the smart data systems for sustainable development design (U)
3. Write the procedure of breakthrough design concepts for sustainability (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to carry out sustainable design, green
engineering, flexible design etc. (Remember, Understand and Apply)
1. Write short notes on ecological succession (R)
2. State and explain green engineering (U)
3. Derive a design process for inverse manufacturing (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able Design according to the customer
needs. (Remember, Understand and Apply)
1. Differentiate customers and stakeholders (R)
2. How to analyze the behavior of customer (U)
3. Discuss the Kano model for understanding customer needs (A)

295
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6712 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Mechanics,
Theory of Machines,
Design of Machine elements and joints
Metrology and Instrumentation
Objectives
• To introduce and expose students to the field and fundamentals in tribology and its applications.
• To understand the importance of friction and wear while designing components for functional
applications

• To recognize the importance of lubrication in machine components and in the design of various types
of bearings

UNIT I SURFACES AND FRICTION 9

Topography of Engineering surfaces – Contact between surfaces – Sources of sliding Friction –
Adhesion Ploughing – Energy dissipation mechanisms Friction Characteristics of metals – Friction of
non-metals. Friction of lamellar solids – friction of Ceramic materials and polymers – Rolling Friction –
Source of Rolling Friction – Stick slip motion – Measurement of Friction.
UNIT II WEAR 9
Types of wear – Simple theory of Sliding Wear Mechanism of sliding wear of metals – Abrasive wear
– Materials for Adhesive and Abrasive wear situations – Corrosive wear – Surface Fatigue wear
situations – Brittle Fracture wear – Wear of Ceramics and Polymers – Wear Measurements.
UNIT III LUBRICATION TYPES AND NANOSCALE 9
TRIBOLOGY
Types and properties of Lubricants – Testing methods – Hydrodynamic Lubrication –Elasto
hydrodynamic lubrication – Boundary Lubrication – Solid Lubrication Hydrostatic Lubrication –
Interatomic Interactions, Atomic Force Microscope (AFM), Challenges of Tribological Testing at
Small Scales
UNIT IV FILM LUBRICATION THEORY 9
Fluid film in simple shear – Viscous flow between very close parallel plates – Shear stress variation
Reynolds Equation for film Lubrication – High speed unloaded journal bearings – Loaded journal
bearings – Reaction torque on the bearings – Virtual Co-efficient of friction – The Somerfield diagram.
UNIT V SURFACE ENGINEERING AND MATERIALS FOR 9
BEARINGS
Surface modifications – Transformation Hardening, surface fusion –Thermo chemical processes –
Surface coatings – Plating and anodizing – Fusion Processes –Vapour Phase processes – Materials for
rolling Element bearings – Materials for fluid film bearings – Materials for marginally lubricated and
dry bearings.
Total Periods 45

296
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Design according to different types of friction. (Apply)
CO2. Demonstrate various wearing mechanisms and measurements. (Understand)
CO3. Enumerate the properties and testing methods of various lubricants. (Understand)
CO4. Calculate shear stress, torque and co efficient of friction. (Apply)
CO5. Explain surface process and bearing materials. (Understand)
Text Books
1. A. Harnoy. “Bearing Design in Machinery”, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York, (2003)

Reference Books
1. Cameron, “Basic Lubrication theory”, Longman, U.K.., (2008)
2. [Link] and Tabor.D., “Friction and Lubrication”, Heinemann Educational Books Ltd.,
(2001)
3. [Link] and [Link], “Applied Tribology”, John Willey & Sons, New York, (2001)
4. [Link] (Editor), “Tribology Handbook”, Newnes Butter worth, Heinemann, U.K., (1995)
Web Resources
[Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 3 2 1 3
2 2 1 1 2 1 1 3
3 2 1 1 2 1 1 3
4 3 2 2 1 3
5 3 2 1 2 1 2 1

297
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Design according to different types of friction. (Apply)

1. A 7.00kg block of wood is almost about to slide down a wooden wedge that has
angle 30∘ with respect to the floor. The coefficient of static friction is 0.6910.691.
What is the force of static friction? (A)
2. Explain the mechanism of rolling friction and compare it with sliding friction. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Demonstrate various wearing mechanisms and

measurements. (Understand)

1. What are the classification of wear processes? Explain with example (U)
2. Explain the mechanism of sliding wear. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: CO3. Enumerate the properties and testing methods of

various lubricants. (Understand)

1. State various types of lubricants and their industrial applications (U)

2. Discuss the role of eccentricity in hydrodynamic lubrication of journal bearing.(U)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Calculate shear stress, torque and co efficient of friction.

(Apply)

1.A 360° hydrodynamic short journal bearing of is to be designed to support a radial load of
5.5 KN. The rotation of journal is 5000rpm. The eccentricity ratio is 0.6. If the viscosity of
lubricating oil is 45×10 -9 Ns/mm2 and supplied at a rate of 0.5 l/min to the bearing,
Determine the dimensions of the journal, bearings and minimum oil film thickness. Take l/d
ratio as 0.4. (A)
2. Derive the equation of pressure distribution for hydrostatic step bearing. State the
assumptions. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Explain surface process and bearing materials. (Understand)

[Link] the experimental modal analysis and the necessary basic equipments. (U)
[Link] machine condition monitoring techniques. (U)

298
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6713 Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Thermodynamics, and Thermal Engineering

Objectives
1. To understand the basic difference between incompressible and compressible flow.
2. To understand the phenomenon of shock waves and its effect on flow.
3. To gain some basic knowledge about jet propulsion and Rocket Propulsion.

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND ISENTROPIC FLOWS 9

Energy and momentum equations of compressible fluid flows – Stagnation states, Mach waves
and Mach cone – Effect of Mach number on compressibility – Isentropic flow through variable
ducts – Nozzle and Diffusers
UNIT II FLOW THROUGH CONSTANT AREA DUCTS 9
Flows through constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow) and Friction (Fanno flow) –
variation of flow properties
UNIT III NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCK 9
Governing equations – Variation of flow parameters across the normal and oblique shocks –
Prandtl– Meyer relations – Applications
UNIT IV JET PROPULSION 9
Theory of jet propulsion – Thrust equation – Thrust power and propulsive efficiency – Operation
principle, cycle analysis and use of stagnation state performance of ram jet, turbojet, turbofan and
turbo prop engines – Scramjet engines
UNIT V SPACE PROPULSION 9
Types of rocket engines – Propellants – feeding systems – Ignition and combustion – Theory of
rocketpropulsion – Performance study – Staging – Terminal and characteristic velocity –
Applications –space flights
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 10 Marks MCQ Descriptive Type
CAT 2 10 Marks Seminar
Descriptive type Questions Air crash investigation – case
study

299
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Apply the basic concept of isentropic flow through variable area ducts (Apply)
CO2: Interpret the variation of flow properties through constant area ducts with heat transfer
and Friction (Apply)
CO3: Enumerate the variation of flow parameters across the normal and oblique shocks (Apply)
CO4: Apply the principle of different jet engine and numerical analysis of jet engine (Apply)
CO5: Apply the principle of different rocket engine and numerical analysis of rocket engine
(Apply)
Text Books
1. Anderson J.D., “Modern Compressible Flow”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, (2018)
2. Yahya S.M., “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow”, New Age International (P) Limited, New
Delhi, (2016)
Reference Books
1. Hill P., Peterson C., “Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion”, Addison – Wesley
Publishing company, (2012)
2. Zucrow N.J., “Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbines”, John Wiley, New York, (2016)
3. Sutton G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley, (2012)
4. Ganesan V., “Gas Turbines”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, (2018)
5. Cohen. H., G.E.C. Rogers and Saravanamutto, “Gas Turbine Theory”, Longman Group Ltd.,(2016)
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 3 3 3 3 1 3
2 3 3 3 3 1 3
3 3 3 3 3 1 3
4 3 3 3 3 1 3
5 3 3 3 3 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Apply the basic concept of isentropic flowthrough variable area ducts
(Apply)
1. The Pressure, temperature and velocity of air at the entry of a diffuser are 0.7 bar, 345 K
and 190 m/s respectively. The entry diameter of a diffuser is 15 cm and exit diameter is 35
cm. Determine the following. (1) Exit pressure (2) Exit velocity (3) Force exerted on the
diffuser walls. Assuming isentropic flow and take γ = 1.4, Cp = 1005 J/kg K

300
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

2. An aircraft flies at a velocity of 700 kmph in an atmosphere where thepressure is 75 kPa

and temperature is 5ºC. Calculate the Mach number andstagnation properties

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Interpret the variation of flow properties through constant area ducts
with heat transfer and Friction (Apply)
1. Air at P1 = 3.4 bar, T1= 35 o C enters a circular duct a mach number of [Link] exit mach
number is 0.6 and co-efficient of friction is [Link] the mass flow rate is 8.2 kg/s. Determine
1. Pressure temperature at the exit. 2. Diameter of the duct. 3. Length of the duct. 4.
Stagnation pressure loss. 5. Verify the exit Mach number through exit velocity and
temperature.
2. . Air enters a constant area duct at M1 = 3 ; P1 = 1atm and T1= 300K .Inside the heatadded
per unit mass is Q = 3 x 105J/Kg . Calculate the flow properties M2, P2, T2, To2and Po2 at exit.
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Enumerate the variation of flow parameters across the normal and
oblique shocks (Apply)
1. When a converging diverging nozzle is operated at off-design condition a normal shock
occurs at a section where the cross sectional area is 18.75 cmin the diverging portion at inlet
the nozzle the stagnation state is given as 0.21 MPa and 360C. The throat area is 12.5cmand
exit area is 25cm. Estimate the exit Mach number, exit pressure loss in stagnation pressure
for flow through nozzle.
2. Air flows adiabatically in a pipe. A normal shock wave is formed. The pressure
andtemperature of air before the shock are 150 KN/m2and 25c respectively. Thepressure
just after the shock is 350 KN/m2. Find, (i) Mach number before shock(ii) Mach number,
static temperature and velocity of air after the shock wave.(iii) Increase in density of air(iv)
Loss of stagnation pressure
(v) Change in entropy

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Apply the principle of different jet engine and numerical analysis of jet
engine (Apply)

1. Explain in the construction and working details about Ramjet engine

2. An aircraft flies at 960kmph. One of its turbojet engines takes in 40kg/s of air and
expandsthe gases to the ambient pressure. The air-fuel ratio is 50 and the lower calorific
value of thefuel is 43MJ/kg. For maximum thrust power determine a) Jet velocity b)Thrust c)
Specificthrust d)Thrust power e) Propulsive, thermal and overall efficiency f) TSFC

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply the principle of different rocket engine and numerical analysis
of rocket engine (Apply)

1. Explain with a help of neat sketch the working of solid and liquid propellant rocket engine.
2. A rocket nozzle has a throat area of 18cm2and combustor pressure of 25bar. If the specific
impulse is 127.42sec and the rate of flow of propellant is 44.145N/s, determine the
thrustcoefficient, propellant weight flow coefficient, specific propellant consumption and
characteristic velocity.

301
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6714 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Thermal Engineering
Objectives
1. To understand the underlying principles of operations in different Refrigeration
& Air conditioning systems and components.
2. To provide knowledge on design aspects of Refrigeration & Air conditioningsystems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO REFRIGERATION 9
Basic Definitions, Heat pump and Refrigerating Machine, Best Refrigeration Cycle: The Carnot
Principle, Gas as a Refrigerant in Reversed Carnot Cycle, Limitations of Reversed Carnot Cycle,
Reversed Brayton or Bell Coleman Cycle, Application to Aircraft Refrigeration, Simple Numerical
problems
UNIT II VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 9
Vapour compression cycle: p-h and T-s diagrams – deviations from theoretical cycle – subcooling
and super heating – effects of condenser and evaporator pressure on COP – multipressure system
–low temperature refrigeration – Cascade systems – problems. Equipments: Type of
Compressors,
Condensers, Expansion devices, Evaporators
UNIT III OTHER REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 9
Working principles of Vapour absorption systems and adsorption cooling systems – Steam jet
refrigeration – Ejector refrigeration systems – Thermoelectric refrigeration- Air refrigeration –
Magnetic – Vortex and Pulse tube refrigeration systems.
UNIT IV REFRIGERANTS AND SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9
Refrigerants: Primary and Secondary refrigerants, Designation of Refrigerants, Desirable
propertiesof refrigerants, Selection of a Refrigerant, Ozone Depletion Potential and Global
Warming Potentialof CFC Refrigerants. Thermodynamic requirements, Comparison between
different refrigerants,Substitutes for CFC refrigerants, Secondary Refrigerants.
Refrigeration systems Equipment: Compressors, Condensers, Expansion Devices and
Evaporators,A brief look at other components of the system.
UNIT V AIR-CONDITIONING 9
Basic Processes in Conditioning of Air, Psychrometric Processes in Air-Conditioning Equipment,
Simple Air-Conditioning/system and State and Mass Rate of Supply Air, Summer Air
Conditioning,
Winter Air Conditioning. Loading Calculation and Applied Psychometrics:
PreliminaryConsiderations, Internal Hear Gains, System Heat Gains, Break-up of Ventilation Load
and Effective
Sensible Heat Factor, Cooling Load Estimate. Psychrometric Calculations for Cooling, Selection of
Air-Conditioning Apparatus for Cooling and Dehumidification, Building Requirements and Energy
Conservation in Air Conditioned Buildings
Total Periods 45

302
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ Descriptive
CAT 1 10 AND CAT2 10 MARKS Seminar
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Illustrate the principles, nomenclature and applications of refrigeration systems including
air refrigeration system (Apply)
CO2: Enumerate vapour compression refrigeration system and identify methods for performance
Improvement (Apply)
CO3: Describe the working principles of air, vapour absorption, thermoelectric and steam-jet and
thermo-acoustic refrigeration systems (Apply)
CO4: Identify suitable refrigerant and equipment’s for various refrigerating systems (Apply)
CO5: Compute and Interpret cooling and heating loads in an air-conditioning system (Apply)
Text Books
1. Arora, C.P., “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, 3rdedition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, (2010)

Reference Books
1. Roy J. Dossat, “Principles of Refrigeration”, 4th edition, Pearson Education Asia, (2009)
2. Stoecker, W.F. and Jones J.W., “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
(1986)
3. ASHRAE Hand book, Fundamentals, (2010) 4. Jones W.P., “Air conditioning engineering”, 5th
edition, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, (2001)
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 3 3 1 1 1 3
2 3 3 1 1 1 3
3 3 3 1 1 1 3
4 3 3 1 1 1 3
5 3 3 1 1 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Illustrate the principles, nomenclature and applications of
refrigeration systems including air refrigeration system (Apply)

303
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

1. An air refrigerator used for food storage provides 50 tons of [Link] temperature
of air entering the compressor is 7 ◦ C and thetemperature before entering into expander is 27
◦ C .Assuming 30 % morepower is required than theoretical, find (a).Actual C.O.P of the
cycle(b).KW capacity required to run the compressor
2. In a refrigeration plant working on Bell Coleman cycle, air is compressedto 5 bar from 1
bar. Its initial temperature is 10 ◦ C. After compression,the air is cooled up to 20 ◦ C in a
cooler before expanding to a pressure of1 bar. Determine the theoretical C.O.P of the plant
and net refrigeratingeffect. Take Cp = 1.005 KJ/Kg K and Cv = 0718 KJ/Kg K.

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Enumerate vapor compression refrigeration system and identify

methods for performance Improvement (Apply)
A refrigeration machine using R-12 as refrigerant operates between thepressures 2.5 bar and
9 bar. The compression is isentropic and there is noundercooling in the condenser. The
vapour is in dry saturated condition atthe beginning of the compression. Estimate theoretical
C.O.P. If the actual C.O.P is 0.65 of theoretical valve, calculate the net cooling produced
perhour. The refrigerant flow is 5 kg/min. The properties table for the refrigerants need to be
added
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Describe the working principles of air, vapour absorption,
thermoelectric and steam-jet and thermo-acoustic refrigeration systems (Apply)
1. Explain with a neat sketch the working of lithium-bromide vapour absorption system
2. Explain thermo-electric refrigeration system with sketch

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Identify suitable refrigerant and equipment’s for various refrigerating
systems (Apply)
1. What is an azetrope? Give some examples to indicate its importance
2. Name the different refrigerants generally used. State the desirable properties of
refrigerants.

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Compute and Interpret cooling and heating loads in an air-
conditioning system (Apply)

1. A room 7m × 4m× 4m is occupied by an air-water vapour mixture at380C. The atmospheric

pressure is 1 bar and the relative humidity is70%. Determine the humidity ratio, dew point,
mass of dry air and massof water vapour. If the mixture of air-water vapour is further cooled
atconstant pressure until the temperature is 100C. Find the amount of watervapour
condensed

2. A room has a sensible heat gain of 24 KW and a latent heat gain of 5.2KW and it has to be
maintained at 26 ◦ C DBT and 50 % RH.180 m3/min of air is delivered to the room. Determine
the state of supply of air.

304
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6715 INDUSTRY 4.0
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives: The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for
1. An introduction to Industry 4.0, its building blocks, its applicationsand advantages
compared to conventional production techniques
2. Getting deep insight intohow intelligent processes, big data, and artificial
intelligence can be used to build up the productionof the future.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRY 4.0 8
Definition, developments in USA, Europe and China, comparison of industry 4.O factory and today’s
factory, basic principles and technologies of a smart factory including IoT, IIoT, and IoS.

UNIT II CYBER PHYSICAL PRODUCTION SYSTEM 10

Cyber physical systems – definition, demarcation to embedded systems and ubiquitous computing,
core elements of cyber physical production system, control theory and real – time requirements,
self organization principles, communication in cyber physical systems. Design methods for this
system including modelling, programming, model – integrated development and applications.
UNIT III DIGITAL TWINS AND AUGMENTED REALITY 9
Basic concepts of digital twins, benefits, impact and challenges. Features and implementation of
digital twins, types and case studies of usage of digital twins. Augmented Reality an overview, its
application in integrated design and manufacturing, training shop floor workers, supporting
complex assembly operations, service and maintenance.
UNIT IV ROLE OF DATA, INFORMATION, KNOWLEDGE AND 9
COLLABORATION IN FUTURE ORGANIZATIONS
Resource-based view of a firm, Data as a new resource for organizations, Harnessing and sharing
knowledge in organizations, Cloud Computing Basics, Cloud Computing and Industry 4.0.

UNIT V BUSINESS ISSUES IN INDUSTRY 4.0 9

Opportunities and Challenges, Future of Works and Skills for Workers in the Industry 4.0 Era,
Strategies for competing in an Industry 4.0 world.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 10 Marks 1. Assignment Descriptive type
CAT 2 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive type Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities

305
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Illustrate the drivers and enablers of Industry 4.0 (Apply)
CO2 Demonstrate the smartness in Smart Factories, Smart cities, smart products and smart
services. (Apply)
CO3 Show the various systems used in a manufacturing plant and their role in an
Industry 4.0 world. (Apply)
CO4 Demonstrate the power of Cloud Computing in a networked economy. (Apply)
CO5 Illustrate the opportunities, challenges brought about by Industry 4.0 and how
organisations and individuals should prepare to reap the benefits. (Apply)
Textbooks
1. Alasdair Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”, Apress, 2016.
2. Jesús Hamilton Ortiz, William Gutierrez Marroquin and Leonardo Zambrano Cifuentes .P,
“Industry 4.0: Current Status and Future Trends”, Open Access Peer-Reviewed Chapter,
2020.
Reference Books
1. Alp Ustundag, Emre Cevikcan, “Industry 4.0: Managing The Digital Transformation”,
Springer, 2018.
2. Diego Galar Pascual, Pasquale Daponte, Uday Kumar, “Handbook of Industry 4.0 and SMART
Systems”, 1st Edition, CRC Press. 2020.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]
5. [Link]

CO Vs PO and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO 1 1 3 2 3
CO 2 1 3 2 3
CO 3 1 3 2 3
CO 4 1 3 2 3
CO 5 1 3 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1
1. Illustrate the developments of Industry 4.O in USA. (Understand)
2. Compare and contrast the industry 4.O factory and today’s factory. (Understand)
3. Identify the technology applied in a smart factory like General Motors, USA. (Apply)

306
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 2
1. Explain briefly the demarcation of embedded system with ubiquitous computing
system.(Understand)
2. Sketch the core elements of cyber physical production system and control theory
applicable to that and explain in detail.(Apply)
3. Draft a program to integrate the machine and computer for shop floor activity in a
production centre.(Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 3
1. Explain in detail the digital twins with an example. (Understand)
2. Sketch the basic configuration of augmented reality in manufacturing environment.
(Apply)
3. Illustrate the application of AR in supporting assembly operation in an industry.
(Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 4
1. Explain how data is considered to be a new resource for organization.
(Understand)

2. Describe the role of cloud computing in Industry 4.O with an example. (Understand)

3. Review the resource based development in various world renowned firms like
Toyota in adapting Industry 4.O. (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5
1. Enumerate the various opportunities and challenges in running an organization currently.
(Understand)
2. Identify the skills to be acquired by the man power to get encapsulated in present
industrial scenario.(Apply)
3. Develop a strategy for competing in an industry 4.O world. (Apply)

307
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6716 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Basic Mathematics: Matrices, and Differential equations
Theory of Machines,
Mechatronics,
Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics
Objectives: The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for
1. Explaining the concepts of industrial robots with respect to its classification,
specifications and coordinate systems. Reviewing the need and application of robots in
different engineering fields.
2. Exemplifying the different types of robot drive systems as well as robot end effectors.
3. Applying the different sensors and image processing techniques in robotics toimprove the
ability of robots.
4. Developing robotic programs for different tasks and analyzing the kinematics motions of
robot.
5. Implementing robots in various industrial sectors and interpolating the economic analysis
of robots.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 8

Robot - Definition - Robot Anatomy – Co-ordinate Systems, Work Envelope Types and
Classification- Specifications-Pitch, Yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load- Robot
Parts and their Functions-Need for Robots-Different Applications.

UNIT II ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 10

Pneumatic Drives-Hydraulic Drives-Mechanical Drives-Electrical Drives-D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper
Motors, A.C. Servo Motors-Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of all these Drives, End
Effectors-Grippers-Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic- Grippers, Magnetic Grippers,
Vacuum Grippers; Two Fingered and Three Fingered Grippers; Internal Grippers and External
Grippers; Selection and Design Considerations.
UNIT III MACHINE VISION 9
Camera, Frame Grabber, Sensing and Digitizing Image Data Signal Conversion, Image Storage,
Lighting Techniques, Image Processing and Analysis-Data Reduction, Segmentation, Feature
Extraction, Object Recognition, Other Algorithms, Applications, Inspection, Identification, Visual
Serving and Navigation.
UNIT IV ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING 9
Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Difference; Forward Kinematics and Reverse
Kinematics of manipulators with Two, Three Degrees of Freedom (in 2 Dimension), Four Degrees of
freedom (in 3 Dimension) Jacobians, Velocity and Forces-Manipulator Dynamics, Trajectory
Generator, Expert system, Manipulator Mechanism Design-Derivations and problems. Lead through
Programming, Robot programming Languages-VAL Programming-Motion Commands, Sensor
Commands, End Effector commands and simple Programs.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION AND ROBOT ECONOMICS 9
RGV, AGV; Implementation of Robots in Industries-Various Steps; Safety Considerations for Robot
Operations - Economic Analysis of Robots.
Total Periods 45

308
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 10 Marks 1. Assignment Descriptive type
CAT 2 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive type Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Illustrate the need and application of robots in different engineering fields. (Apply)
CO2 Show the different types of robot drive systems as well as robot end effectors. (Apply)
CO3 Apply the different image processing techniques in robotics to improve the ability of robots.
(Apply)
CO4 Prepare robotic programs for different tasks and analyze the kinematics motions of robot.
(Apply)
CO5 Demonstrate robots in various industrial sectors and interpolate the economic analysis of
robots. (Apply)
Textbooks
1. Fu. K.S, Gonzalez. R.C, Lee. C.S.G “Robotics – Control, Sensing, Vision, and Intelligence”,
McGraw Hill, 2015.
2. GrooverMikell .P, “Industrial Robotics -Technology Programming and Applications”, McGraw
Hill, 2014.
Reference Books
1. Deb S.R., “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation” Tata McGraw Hill Book Co., 2013.
2. Maja J Mataric, “The Robotics Primer “Universities Press. 2013.
3. Craig J.J., “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education, 2009.

Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 2 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 3

309
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1

1. With a neat sketch explain the anatomy of robot. (Understand)

2. Enumerate the future applications of robotics. (Understand)
3. Sketch and explain the four basic robot configurations classified according to the
coordinate system. (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 2

1. Differentiate pneumatic drive system with hydraulic drive system.(Understand)

2. Compare and contrast the various electrical drives especially Stepper motor and A.C.
Servo motors.(Understand)
3. Discuss in detail about Vacuum grippers along with their advantages and
disadvantages.(Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 3

1. Explain in detail the triangulation method of range sensing with a neat sketch.
(Understand)
2. Sketch the four different approaches adopted for construction of artificial skins and
explain them in detail. (Understand)
3. Apply the first principles of engineering specialization in resolving forces and
moments between the end effectors. (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 4

1. For the vector v = 25i + 10j + 20 k, perform a translation by a z distance of 8 in the x

direction, 5 in the y direction, and Ɵ in the z direction. The translation transformation
would be (Apply)
1 0 0 8
0 
H=Trans (a, b, c)  1 0 5
0 0 1 0
 
0 0 0 1 
2. It is desired to determine the values to which the angles Ɵ1 and Ɵ2 must be set in order to
achieve a certain point in space for the manipulator shown in Fig. 4.1. The length of joint
1, L1 = 30.48 cm, the length of joint L2 = 25.4 cm. The point Pw which the robot must
achieve is defined by the coordinates x = 15.7 and y = 12.6. Using the reverse
transformation methods, determine the angles. (Apply)

310
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Fig. 1 – A two dimensional 2 – degree of freedom manipulator

3. A jointed – arm robot of configuration VVR is to move all three axes so that the first
joint is rotated through 50⁰, the second joint is rotated through 90⁰ and the third
joint is rotated through 25⁰. Maximum speed of any of these rotational joints is
10⁰/s. Ignore the effects of acceleration and deceleration. (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5
1. Elucidate the different levels of safety sensor systems in robotics as prescribed by the
National Bureau of Standards. (Understand)
2. Data have been collected for a certain robot model on times between breakdowns and it
has been determined that the mean time between failures is 324 hours. Repairing the
robot has required an average of 6.5 hours, according to the records of the maintenance
department. Calculate the robot’s availability.(Apply)
3. Suppose the present MTBF of a particular robot is 200 hours and the MTTR when
breakdowns occur is 8 hrs. A preventive maintenance program is to be initiated in
the plant which is expected to increase the MTBF to 300 hrs and reduce the MTTR to
6 hrs. Determine the effect of the PM program on the availability of the robot.
(Apply)

311
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6717 MODERN MACHINING PROCESSESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology, Engineering Physics & Engineering Chemistry
Objectives
To learn about various modern machining processes, the various process parameters and
their influence on performance and their applications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED 9
PROCESSES
Unconventional machining Process – Need – classification – merits, demerits and applications.
Abrasive Jet Machining – Water Jet Machining – Abrasive Water Jet Machining – Ultrasonic
Machining. (AJM, WJM, AWJM and USM). Working Principles – equipment used – Process
parameters – MRR – Applications
UNIT II THERMAL AND ELECTRICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9
Electric Discharge Machining (EDM) – Wire cut EDM – Working Principle-equipments-Process
Parameters-Surface Finish and MRR – electrode / Tool – Power and control Circuits-Tool Wear –
Dielectric – Flushing –– Applications. Laser Beam machining and drilling, (LBM), Plasma Arc
Machining (PAM) and Electron Beam Machining (EBM). Principles – Equipment –Types – Beam
control techniques – Applications - Ion Beam Machining - Plasma Assisted Polishing
UNIT III CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO-CHEMICAL ENERGY BASED 9
PROCESSES
Chemical machining and Electro-Chemical machining (CHM and ECM)- Etchants – Maskant –
techniques of applying maskants – Process Parameters – Surface finish and MRR – Applications.
Principles of ECM – equipments-Surface Roughness and MRR Electrical circuit – Process
Parameters – ECG and ECH – Applications - Electrochemical arc machining
UNIT IV ADVANCED NANO FINISHING PROCESSES 9
Abrasive flow machining, chemo-mechanical polishing, magnetic abrasive finishing, magneto
rheological finishing, magneto rheological abrasive flow finishing their working principles,
equipment’s, effect of process parameters, applications, advantages and limitations
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING 9
PROCESSES
Recent developments in non-traditional machining processes, their working principles,
equipments, effect of process parameters, applications, advantages and limitations. Comparison
of non-traditional machining processes
Total Periods 45

312
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 10 Marks 1. Assignment Descriptive type
CAT 2 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive type Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Enumerate the need for unconventional machining processes and its classification and
summarize the various mechanical energy based processes (Understand)
CO2: Discover various thermal energy and electrical energy based unconventional machining
processes (Apply)
CO3: Summarize various chemical and electro-chemical energy based unconventional machining
processes (Understand)
CO4: Summarize the various nano abrasives based unconventional machining processes
(Understand)
CO5: Enumerate various recent trends based unconventional machining processes (Remember)
Text Books
1. Vijay.K. Jain ‘Advanced Machining Processes’ Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010
2. Pandey P.C. and Shan H.S. “Modern Machining Processes” Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2013.
3. Bijoy Bhattacharyya and BiswanthDoloi “Modern Machining Technology” Tata McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 2019.
Reference Books
1. Benedict. G.F. “Non-traditional Manufacturing Processes”, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York,
2017
2. Paul De Garmo, [Link], and Ronald. [Link], “Material and Processes in Manufacturing”
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 8th Edition, New Delhi , 2001.

Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 2 2 3
CO2 2 1 2 2 3
CO3 2 1 2 2 3
CO4 2 1 2 2 3
CO5 2 1 2 2 3

313
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Enumerate the need for unconventional machining processes
and its classification (Understand)
1. Identify the principle of AJM. Mention some of the applications and limitations
(Remember)
2. Discuss in detail about the arrangement of USM process and its process
parameters (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Discover various thermal energy and electrical energy based
unconventional machining processes (Apply)
1. Describe the mechanism of material removal in EDM. (Apply)
2. List out the process capabilities, advantages and limitations of LBM process
(Remember)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Summarize various chemical and electro-chemical energy based
unconventional machining processes (Understand)
1. Discuss various parameters that influence the performance of CH process
(Remember)
2. Sketch the schematic arrangement of ECH process and its working (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Summarize various nano abrasives based unconventional
machining processes (Understand)
1. Discuss about the process capabilities of AFM and the process parameters of
AFM in improving machining quality (Understand)
2. List out the important process parameters that control the material removal rate
in micro-LBM? Explain any four factors (Remember)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Enumerate recent trends based unconventional machining
processes (Remember)
1. Describe the comparison of non-traditional machining process (Remember)
2. List out the process parameters that influence the micro-USM process
(Remember)

314
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6718 SOLID STATE JOINING PROCESSES L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology
Objectives
To learn about various solid state joining process, tool materials & industrial applications.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF JOINING PROCESSES 8
Fundamental principles and classifications of fusion and solid-state joining processes, ultrasonic
welding, ultrasonic spot welding, explosion welding process, Magnetically Impelled Arc Butt
(MIAB) welding; Resistance welding processes: Spot welding, seam welding, projection welding,
high-frequency resistance welding, resistance butt welding, flash butt welding; Brazing, adhesive
bonding, clinching, self-pierce riveting.
UNIT II DIFFUSION JOINING PROCESSES 7
Principles and applications; Diffusion brazing, braze welding, diffusion welding; Diffusion
bonding of metals to ceramics; Solid-state deposition welding processes; Pressure non-fusion
welding processes: Cold welding, electromagnetic pulse welding, pressure gas welding, hot
pressure welding, forge welding; Roll bonding.

UNIT III FRICTION WELDING (FW) PROCESS 10

Process parameters, applications, metallurgical, mechanical and tribological characterizations;
Spin welding, rotary drive FW , inertia welding, friction taper stitch welding, radial FW, friction
plunge welding, third-body FW; Friction seam welding, linear and angular FW, orbital FW,
friction brazing, friction stud welding; Study of friction welds and joint quality of FW.
UNIT IV FRICTION STIR WELDING 10
Fundamentals and taxonomy, materials; Heat generation, metallurgical and mechanical
characterizations, inspection; Material flow, material change during solid-state joining and its
impact, environmental and energy benefits, micro FSW and its applications; Friction stir riveting,
friction stir spot welding (FSSW) – process parameters, hybrid FSW, underwater FSW, ultrasonic
assisted FSW, and electrically assisted FSW; Friction stir diffusion welding, thermal stir welding;
Weld defects; Friction stir processing and friction surfacing.
UNIT V TOOL MATERIALS AND INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 10
FSW tools: Material selection, tool geometry, pin geometry, load bearing ability, tool wear,
deformation and failure, tool cost; FSW of aluminum alloys, magnesium alloys, titanium, steels;
Dissimilar metal FSW; Welding of plastics and welding of non-metals; Industrial applications:
Shipbuilding, automotive, aerospace, railways and other industry sectors.
Total Periods 45

315
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 10 Marks 1. Assignment Descriptive type
CAT 2 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive type Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Classify various joining processes and identify welding symbols, joints and edge preparation
(Understand)
CO2: Identify various solid state joining methods and its equipment’s (Understand)
CO3: Illustrate friction welding, process parameters and its types (Apply)
CO4: Identify welding defects and their causes, destructive and non-destructive testing of welds
(Understand)
CO5: Discuss various tool materials in solid state joining process and industrial applications
(Understand)
Text Books
1. [Link] , "Welding Processes and Technology", 3rd Edition, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi, 2010.
2. Daniela Lohwasser, Zhan Chen , "Friction Stir Welding From Basics To Applications",
Woodhead Publishing, 2010.
Reference Books

1. Rajiv Sharan Mishra, ParthaSarathi De, Nilesh Kumar , "Friction Stir Welding and
Processing: Science and Engineering", 1st Edition, Springer International Publishing, 2014.
2. Bekir Sami Yilbas, Ahmet Z. Sahin , "Friction Welding: Thermal and Metallurgical
Characteristics", Springer Science, 2014.
3. [Link], M.K. Besharati-Givi , "Advances in Friction-Stir Welding and Processing",
Woodhead Publishing, 2014.
4. Nilesh Kumar, Rajiv S. Mishra, Wei Yuan , "Friction Stir Welding of Dissimilar Alloys and
Materials", Elsevier, 2015.

Web Resources
1. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 2 1 1 3
CO2 2 2 2 1 3
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 2 1 1 3 1 3
CO5 2 3 1 1 1 3

316
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Classify various joining processes and identify welding symbols,
joints and edge preparation (Understand)
1. Discuss the principle of MIAB. Mention some of the applications and limitations
(Understand)
2. Explain the arrangement of USW process and its limitations (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Identify various solid state joining methods and its equipment’s
(Understand)
1. List out the applications of diffusion welding process. (Remember)
2. Discuss the process capabilities, advantages and limitations of pressure non-
fusion welding process (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Illustrate friction welding, process parameters and its types
(Apply)
1. Differentiate between linear and angular FW (Understand)
2. Demonstrate the schematic arrangement of friction taper stitch welding and its
working (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Identify welding defects and their causes, destructive and non-
destructive testing of welds (Understand)
1. List out the defects involved in welding process (Understand)
2. Discuss about the material changes during solid state joining process and its
impacts (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Discuss various tool materials in solid state joining process and
industrial applications (Understand)
1. Enumerate the tools involved in FSW (Remember)
2. Discover the industrial applications related to solid state joining process
(Understand)

317
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6719 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
NIL
Objectives
To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial quality and motivation in students and to
impart basic entrepreneurial skills and understanding to run a business efficiently and
effectively
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP & SKILLS FOR SUCCESSFUL 9
ENTREPRENEURS
Entrepreneur – Types of Entrepreneurs – Difference between Entrepreneur and Intrapreneur
Entrepreneurship in Economic Growth, Factors Affecting Entrepreneurial Growth -
Communication Skills - Creativity and Problem solving – Innovation - Negotiation Skills - Risk
management
UNIT II MOTIVATION & CONCEPTS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
FAILURE
Major Motives Influencing an Entrepreneur – Achievement Motivation Training, Self-rating,
Business Games, Thematic Apperception Test – Stress Management, Entrepreneurship
Development Programs – Need, Objectives – Issues & Reasons of Entrepreneurship Failure –
Issues & Reasons of Entrepreneurship Failure – Essentials to avoid failure
UNIT III BUSINESS 9
Small Enterprises – Definition, Classification – Characteristics, Ownership Structures – Project
Formulation – Steps involved in setting up a Business – identifying, selecting a Good Business
opportunity, Market Survey and Research, Techno Economic Feasibility Assessment –
Preparation of Preliminary Project Reports – Project Appraisal – Sources of Information –
Classification of Needs and Agencies
UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9
Need – Sources of Finance, Term Loans, Capital Structure, Financial Institution, Management of
working Capital, Costing, Break Even Analysis, Taxation – Income Tax, Excise Duty – Sales Tax

UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9

Sickness in small Business – Concept, Magnitude, Causes and Consequences, Corrective Measures
–Business Incubators – Government Policy for Small Scale Enterprises – Growth Strategies in
small industry – Expansion, Diversification, Joint Venture, Merger and Sub Contracting
Total Periods 45

318
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 10 Marks 1. Assignment Descriptive type
CAT 2 10 Marks 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive type Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Illustrate the skills for successful entrepreneurs (Apply)
CO2: Explain the concepts of entrepreneurship failure (Understand)
CO3: Discover market survey and techno economic feasibility assessment (Apply)
CO4: Identify the funds from financial source (Understand)
CO5: Identify and correct sickness in business (Understand)
Text Books
1. Khanka. S.S., “Entrepreneurial Development” [Link]& Co. Ltd., Ram Nagar, New Delhi,
(2020)
2. Donald F Kuratko, “Entreprenuership – Theory, Process and Practice”, 9th Edition,
Cengage Learning, (2014)
Reference Books
1. Hisrich R D, Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, (2016)
2. Mathew J Manimala, "Enterprenuership theory at cross roads: paradigms and praxis” 2nd
Edition Dream tech, (2005)
3. Rajeev Roy, “Entrepreneurship” 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, (2011)

Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 1 1 1 2 2 2

..

319
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Illustrate the skills for successful entrepreneurs (Apply)

1. Discover the main functions performed by the entrepreneurs (Apply)

2. Explain the factors affecting growth of entrepreneurship (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Explain the concepts of entrepreneurship failure (Understand)

1. Describe achievement motivation? Do you consider it an essential ingredient of

entrepreneurship? (Remember)
2. Define the term stress? It is always bond for people? Explain. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Discover market survey and techno economic feasibility

assessment (Apply)
1. List out the factors to be considered while preparing a feasibility report
(Remember)
2. Illustrate the major steps in detailed project report? What are the precautions
than an entrepreneur should take at the time of preparation of detailed project
report? (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Identify the funds from financial source (Understand)
1. Define the term Sales Tax? Elaborate the types of sales taxation in India
(Understand)
2. Discuss the various causes and consequences of industrial sickness in India
(Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Identify and correct sickness in business (Understand)
1. Discuss the need for policy support to small scale enterprises (Understand)
2. Describe Joint Venture. State the reasons behind creation of joint venture
(Understand)

320
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

21ME6720 CORROSION AND SURFACE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Chemistry, Engineering Materials and Metallurgy.
Objectives
• To impart knowledge on corrosion.
• To understand the corrosion control methods.
• To know the importance of surface modification and special modification techniques.
UNIT I BASIC ASPECTS OF CORROSION 9
Introduction, classification, economics, emf series, Galvanic series. Corrosion. Theories :
Derivation of potential – current relationships of activation controlled and diffusion controlled
corrosion processes; Potential – pH diagrams Fe-H2O system, application and limitations;
Passivation
UNIT II FORMS OF CORROSION 9
Definition, factors and control methods of various forms of corrosion - Uniform, galvanic, pitting,
inter granular, crevice, dezincification, stress corrosion, corrosion fatigue, hydrogen
embrittlement.
UNIT III CORROSION CONTROL METHODS 9
Atmospheric corrosion – classification, factors influencing atmospheric corrosion, temporary
corrosion preventive methods; organic coating, corrosion inhibitors, cathodic protection, anodic
protection
UNIT IV SURFACE MODIFICATION AND SURFACE COATING TECHNIQUES 9
Conventional surface modification methods: shot peening, flame and induction hardening,
carburizing, nitriding, diffusion aided surface alloying Surface coating techniques by
chemical/electro-chemical routes: electro/electroless deposition, anodizing, galvanizing, etc.
Surface coating by physical routes: thermal/plasma spray, physical/chemical vapor deposition,
sputtering, etc.
UNIT V ADVANCED SURFACE MODIFICATION TECHNIQUES 9
Advanced surface modification methods: laser, plasma, ion and electron beam assisted surface
Engineering
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
2 Test Each 10 Marks Multiple Choice Questions Descriptive Questions
Descriptive Questions (MCQ)

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Remember various basic aspects of corrosion. (Remember)
CO2. Enumerate the various forms of corrosion. (Understand)
CO3. Apply the corrosion control methods in the manufacturing of components (Apply)
CO4. Apply the surface modification and surface coating techniques in production of components
(Apply)
CO5. Apply the advanced surface modification techniques in production of components (Apply)

321
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Text Books
1. Surface Engineering for Wear Resistances (Introduction and classification of Wear), By: K.G.
Budinski, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1988.
2. Corrosion Engineering (classification of Corrosion), By: M.G. Fontana, M.C. Graw Hill, [Link],
1987.
Reference Books
1. E.E. Stansbury, R.A. Buchanan , "Fundamentals of electrochemical corrosion",
ASMInternational, 2000.
2. [Link], N.D. Greene , "Corrosion Engineering", 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, New York, 2005.
3. [Link] , "An Introduction to Science of Corrosion and its Inhibition", Oxonian Press, New
Delhi, 1985.
4. Zaki Ahmad , "Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control", Butterworth
Heinemann, London, 2006.
5. Materials Science and Engineering by W. D. Callister
6.. Introduction to Surface Engineering and Functionally Engineered Materials, by Peter Martin,
WILEY, 2011
7. Surface Engineering of Metals: Principles, Equipment, Technologies, by: Tadeusz Burakowski,
Tadeusz Wierzchon, CRC Press, 1988
8. Surface Engineering for Corrosion and Wear Resistance, by JR Davis, ASM International, 2001
Web Resources
[Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2

1 3 2
2 2 1 1 1 1

2 3 2
3 2 2

3 2 3
2 1 1 2 2 1

4 2 3
3 1 2 2
2 3
5 2 1 1 2 2

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Remember various basic aspects of corrosion (Remember)
1. Explain the chemical treatment for stainless steel and other alloys that enhances
the ability of the treated surfaces to resist corrosion. (Remember)
2. Draw the Pourbaix diagram for iron–water system and
interpret. Bring out its advantage and limitations (Remember)

322
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Enumerate the various forms of corrosion. (Understand)

1. Deduce the construction and working of the autocatalytic mechanism of pitting
corrosion. Mention the means of combating pitting corrosion (Understand)
2. Identify and explain which material can dezincification take place in and label its
consequences. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Apply the corrosion control methods in the manufacturing of
components (Apply)
4. Apply the suitable protection method to mitigate corrosion damage to active
metal surfaces (Apply)
1. Select the widely used temporary corrosion preventive methods to avoid rusting
and justify. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Apply the surface modification and surface coating techniques in
the production of components (Apply)
1. Apply the best coating method of nickel also label its advantages and limitations
compared to the PVD methods. (Apply)
2. Name the surface modification technique and illustrate the process based on the
given applications like sand removal in foundries, decoding, descaling, and surface
finishing for castings used in engine blocks and cylinder heads (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply the advanced surface modification techniques in production

of components (Apply)
1. Identify and illustrate the advanced surface modification technique which can able
to heat treat localized areas without affecting the entire work piece. (Apply)
2. Apply the thermal high speed heat treatment processes in solid and or liquid state
(Apply)

323
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE - IV

324
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21ME7701 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
• Manufacturing Technology
• Engineering Materials and Metallurgy
Objectives
• This course provides the essential concepts behind manufacturing and assembly orient
design.
• It also provides design guidelines for machining, casting and injection molding to achieve
cost effective design.
UNIT I TOLERANCE ANALYSIS 9
Geometric Tolerances – Tolerance Analysis – Worst Case Method – Assembly Limits – Design and
Manufacturing Datum – Conversion of Design Datum into Manufacturing Datum – Tolerance
Stacks – True Position Theory – Zero True Position Tolerance – Process Capability.

UNIT II MATERIALS SELECTION AND DESIGN FOR ASSEMBLY 9

Principal Materials – Selection of Materials and Processes –Design – Possible Solutions –
Evaluation Method. General Design Principles for Manufacturability – General Design Guidelines
for Manual Assembly – Assembly Efficiency – Effects of Part Symmetry – Part Thickness and
Weight on Handling Time – Types of Manual Assembly Methods – Design for High Speed
Automatic Assembly And Robot Assembly.
UNIT III DESIGN FOR MACHINING 9
Design Features to Facilities Machining – Single Point and Multipoint Cutting Tools – Choice and
Shape of Work Material – Accuracy and Surface Finish – Design Recommendations for Turning and
Milling Operations: Process Description – Suitable Materials. Guidelines for Machining of
Rotational and Non-Rotational Components – Reduction of Machined Area – Design for
Clampability – Design for Accessibility.

UNIT IV DESIGN FOR INJECTION MOLDING AND POWDER METAL 9

PROCESSING
Injection Molding Materials – The Molding Cycle – Molding Systems and Molds – Cycle Time and
Mold Cost Estimation – Estimation of Optimum Number of Cavities – Design Guidelines for
Injection Molding. Design for Powder Metal Processing: Introduction to Powder Metal Processing
– Materials and Manufacturing Cost – Design Guidelines for Powder Metal Parts.
UNIT V DESIGN FOR SAND AND DIE CASTING 9
Sand Casting Alloys – Sand Cores – Design Rules for Sand Castings – Identification of
Uneconomical Design – Modifying The Design. Die Casting Alloys – The Die Casting Cycle –
Determination of Number of Cavities and Appropriate Machine Size in Die Casting – Design
Principles for Die Casting.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive exam
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
325
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO1: Show the dimensions of components and identify the suitable geometrical tolerances for
manufacturing-oriented design (Apply)
CO2: Determine the suitable materials for components and demonstrate the design considerations
for assembly in different applications (Apply)
CO3: Illustrate suitable design recommendations for various machining operations (Apply)
CO4: Demonstrate the design for injection molded components and apply the design
recommendations for powder metal processing. (Apply)
CO5: Determine the uneconomical design for sand and die castings (Apply)
Text Books
1. Boothroyd G, Dewhurst P & Knight W. A., "Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly",
3rd Edition, CRC Press, USA, 2011.
Reference Books
1. Bralla J.G., "Design for Manufacturability Handbook", 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Education,
New York, 1999.
2. Design for Manufacturing and Assembly: Concepts, architectures and implementation
1998th Edition
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Design for Manufacturing and
Assembly)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 3 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 3 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 3 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 3 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 3 1 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Show the dimensions of components and identify the suitable geometrical
tolerances for manufacturing-oriented design (Apply)
1. Illustrate about the assembly limits, Datum features and tolerance stack
2. explain about design principle which used in manufacturability
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Determine the suitable materials for components and demonstrate the
design considerations for assembly in different applications (Apply)
1. Discuss in detail about the design for assembly
2. Show the steps involved in minimizing the material usage
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Illustrate suitable design recommendations for various machining
operations. (Apply)

326
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

1. Write down difference between clamp ability and accessibility.

2. Explain in detail about reduction of machine area by simplification by separation with suitable
sketch.
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Demonstrate the design for injection molded components and apply the
design recommendations for powder metal processing. (Apply)
1. Briefly discuss the factors to be considered while selecting the injection molding
2. Describe in detail on design guidelines for Powder Metal Parts
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Determine the uneconomical design for sand and die castings. (Apply)
1. Show the factors involved in uneconomical design.
2. Discuss in detail about casting requiring special sand cores.

327
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7702 INDUSTRIAL ERGONOMICS IN DESIGN
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• Introduce to industrial design based on ergonomics.
• Consider ergonomics concept in manufacturing.
• Apply ergonomics in design of controls and display.
• Apply environmental factors in ergonomics design.
• Develop aesthetics applicable to manufacturing and product.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
An approach to industrial design, Elements of design structure for industrial design in engineering
application in modern manufacturing systems- Ergonomics and Industrial Design: Introduction to
Ergonomics, Communication system, general approach to the man-machine relationship, Human
component of work system, Machine component of work system, Local environment-light, Heat,
Sound.
UNIT II ERGONOMICS AND PRODUCTION 9
Introduction, Anthropometric data and its applications in ergonomic, working postures, Body
Movements, Work Station Design, Chair Design. Visual Effects of Line and Form: The mechanics of
seeing, Psychology of seeing, Figure on ground effect, Gestalt’s perceptions - Simplicity, Regularity,
Proximity, Wholeness. Optical illusions, Influences of line and form.
UNIT III DESIGN PRINCIPLES FOR DISPLAY AND CONTROLS 9
Displays: Design Principles of visual Displays, Classification, Quantitative displays, Qualitative
displays, check readings, Situational awareness, Representative displays, Design of pointers, Signal
and warning lights, colour coding of displays, Design of multiple displays Controls: Design
considerations, Controls with little efforts – Push button, Switches, rotating Knobs. Controls with
muscular effort – Hand wheel, Crank, Heavy lever, Pedals. Design of controls in automobiles,
Machine Tools.
UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS 9
Colour: Colour and light, Colour and objects, Colour and the eye – after Image, Colour blindness,
Colour constancy, Colour terms – Colour circles, Munsel colour notation, reactions to colour and
colour combination – colour on engineering equipments, Colour coding, Psychological effects,
colour and machine form, colour and style
UNIT V AESTHETIC CONCEPTS 9
Concept of unity, Concept of order with variety, Concept of purpose, Style and environment,
Aesthetic expressions - Symmetry, Balance, Contrast, Continuity, Proportion. Style - The
components of style, House style, Style in capital good. Introduction to Ergonomic and plant layout
software’s, total layout design.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive exam
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY/

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
328
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO1: Interpret ergonomics need in the industrial design. (Understand)
CO2: Apply ergonomics in creation of manufacturing system. (Apply)
CO3: Discuss on design of controls and display. (Apply)
CO4: Interpret environmental factors in ergonomics design. (Apply)
CO5: Discuss the importance of aesthetics to manufacturing system and product. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Ergonomics in Design: Methods and Techniques (Human Factors and Ergonomics) by
Marcelo M. Soares , Francisco Rebelo, (2017)
2. Ergonomics in Product Design by Sendpoints Publishing Co. Ltd (2018)
Reference Books
1. Benjamin [Link], Motion and Time Study, Richard, D. Irwin Inc., 7thEdition, 2012
2. Brain Shakel,“Applied Ergonomics Hand Book”, Butterworth Scientific London, 2020.
3. Bridger, R.C., Introduction to Ergonomics, 2ndEdition (reprinted), 2013, McGraw Hill
Publications.
4. Martin Helander, A Guide to human factors and Ergonomics, Taylor and Francis, 2016
Web Resources
[Link] (Industrial
Ergonomics in Design)
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1
1
3 1 1 3

CO2 1 1 1
1
3 1 1 3

CO3 1 1 3
1
3 1 1 3

CO4 1 1 1
1
3 1 1 3

CO5 1 1 1
1
3 1 1 3

329
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Interpret ergonomics need in the industrial design (Remember,
Understand)
1. What are the objectives in industrial ergonomics (Remember)
2. Draw the human – machine systems and its components (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply ergonomics in creation of manufacturing system (Understand,

Apply)
1. Explain Anthropometric data and its application in ergonomics. (Understand)
2. Describe about simplicity, regularity and proximity (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Discuss on design of controls and display (Remember, Apply)

1. Name five types of display and one example each? (Remember)
2. Write the design controls in automobiles and machine tools with examples (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Consider environmental factors in ergonomics design. (Understand,

Apply)
1. Explain munsell colour system. (Apply)
2. What is colour circle? And its application (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Report on importance of aesthetics to manufacturing system and

product (Understand, Apply)
1. Describe aesthetic expressions in industrial ergonomics (Apply)
2. What are the ways of using industrial designers?(Understand).

330
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7703 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Partial Differential Equations and application of Fourier series, Fluid Mechanics and Machinery, Heat
and Mass Transfer
Objectives
• To understand the basic flow equations, characteristics of mathematical models for a given
flow.
• To gain knowledge on the important aspects of grid generation for practical problems
• To Familiarize with Finite Volume techniques in Computational fluid analysis.
• To learn the concepts of time dependent and panel methods
• To acquire the knowledge in both structures and unstructured grid generation.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS 9
Introduction – Basic Equations of Fluid Dynamics – Mathematical properties of Fluid Dynamics
Equations – Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations – Well posed problems – discretization of
partial Differential Equations – Transformations and grids – Explicit finite difference methods of
subsonic, supersonic and viscous flows..
UNIT II GRID GENERATION 9
Need for grid generation – Various grid generation techniques – Algebraic, conformal and numerical
grid generation – importance of grid control functions – boundary point control – orthogonality of
grid lines at boundaries – Elliptic grid generation using Laplace’s equations for geometries like
aerofoil and CD nozzle
UNIT III PANEL METHODS 9
Elements of two and three-dimensional panels, panel singularities – Application of panel methods to
incompressible, compressible, subsonic and supersonic flows – Numerical solution of flow over a
cylinder using 2D panel methods using both vertex and source panel methods for lifting and nonlifting
cases respectively.
UNIT IV TIME DEPENDENT METHODS 9
Stability of solution – Explicit methods – Time split methods – Approximate factorization scheme –
Unsteady transonic flow around aerofoils – Sometime dependent solutions of gas dynamic problems –
Numerical solution of unsteady 2D heat conduction problems using SLOR methods.
UNIT V FINITE VOLUME TECHNIQUES 9
Finite Volume Techniques – Cell Centred Formulation – Lax-Vendoroff Time Stepping – RungeKutta
Time Stepping – Multi-stage Time Stepping – Accuracy – Cell Vertex Formulation – Multistage Time
Stepping – FDM-like Finite Volume Techniques – Central and Up-wind Type Discretization –
Treatment of Derivatives
Total Periods 45

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10MARKS [Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS [Link]-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

331
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO 1 Explain and calculate the governing equations for fluid flow. (Understand)
CO 2 Explain how grids are generated. (Understand)
CO 3 Describe the issues about two-phase flow modelling. (Apply)
CO 4 Apply the concept of discretization, upwind differencing and implicit, explicit solutions. (Apply)
CO 5 Apply finite difference and finite volume methods to fluid flow problems. (Apply)

Text Books
1. Blazek, J., “Computational Fluid Dynamics: Principles and Applications”, 2nd Ed., Elsevier,
2006.
2. Chung. TJ, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
Reference Books
1. John D. Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
2. John F. Wendt (Editor), "Computational Fluid Dynamics - An Introduction", Springer - Verlag,
Berlin, 2009
3. Klaus A Hoffmann and Steve T. Chiang. "Computational Fluid Dynamics for Engineers", Vols. I &
II Engineering Education System, P.O. Box 20078, W. Wichita, K.S., 67208 - 1078 USA, 2000
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Computational Fluid Dynamics)
2. [Link] (Computational Fluid Dynamics)
3. [Link] (Computational Fluid Dynamics)
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 3 1 1 3 3
CO2 1 3 1 1 3 3
CO3 1 3 1 1 3 3
CO4 1 3 1 1 3 3
CO5 1 3 1 1 3 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Explain and calculate the governing equations for fluid flow.
(Remember, Understand)

1. How is Partial Differential Equation Classified? (Remember)

2. Derive an expression for the explicit method for supersonic flow . (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Explain how grids are generated. (Remember, Understand)

1. Write an application of C-grid(Remember)
2. Explain the concept of grid generation using laplace’s equation with examples. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Describe the issues about two-phase flow modelling. (Remember,
Understand, Apply)
1. Write the types of Algorithms. (Remember)
2. Write down the application of panel methods to subsonic and supersonic flows (Understand)
3. Interpret the results of flow over a cylinder for lifting cases using Numerical simulation
techniques. (Apply)

332
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Apply the concept of discretization, upwind differencing and
implicit, explicit solutions. (Remember, Understand, Apply)

1. Compare the stability aspect of explicit and implicit equation solving approaches. (Remember)
2. Derive an expression for solving 2D unsteady heat transfer problem using implicit scheme and
finite volume method. (Understand)
3. Demonstrate the concept of explicit methods in Unsteady transonic flow around aerofoils.
(Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply finite difference and finite volume methods to fluid flow
problems. (Remember, Understand, Apply)

1. State the cell vertex formulation.(Remember)

2. Explain the Runge-Kutta Time stepping method in detail with emphasis on stability and accuracy
of the method. (Understand)
3. Illustrate with suitable example for the conservative upwind discretization of hyperbolic system.
(Apply)

333
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7704 HVAC SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Thermal Engineering, Heat and Mass Transfer

Objectives
• To calculate direct, diffuse and reflected radiation as well as to understand clearly about
various
incident radiation related parameters
• To calculate angle of incidence for horizontal, vertical and tilted surfaces such as walls
• To compare and contrast the conventional cooling and heating load calculations
• To understand the concept and application of various air heating systems as well as to make
aware the various trouble shooting measures for common arising problems
• To classify and contrast the various water heating systems based on piping arrangement and
water circulation
UNIT I HEAT TRANSFER THROUGH BUILDING STRUCTURES 9
Building Survey, Periodic heat transfer through walls and roofs. Empirical methods to calculate heat
transfer through walls and roofs; Heat gain through glass, calculation of solar heat gain through
ordinary glass tables, shading devices, effect of shading devices. Equivalent temperature difference
method, Thermal resistance of various building materials, Infiltration, stack effect, wind effect.

UNIT II HEAT LOAD DESIGNS 9

Winter heating load calculation, heat losses through structure, heat losses due to infiltration, Effects of
solar radiation and internal heat sources on heating loads. Methods for estimating energy
requirements for heating.
UNIT III HVAC SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Principles of HVAC system design and analysis; component and system selection criteria including
room air distribution, fans and air circulation, humidifying and dehumidifying processes, piping and
ducting design. Air quality standards. Control systems and techniques; operational economics. The
engineering principles and key factors influencing the thermal environments and quantification of
these factors, functional requirements of utilities, and the design of systems to local codes.
UNIT IV AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 9
Ventilation Systems; Space Heating Systems; Automatic control; Commissioning, operation and
maintenance; Introduction to HVAC & R analysis. Thermal equipment performance; Direct contact
heat and mass transfer; Component modelling and simulation; Performance analysis and optimization
of environmental plant systems. Part-load and year-round operation, system performance and
operational problems; Ventilation systems: outdoor air control, ventilation effectiveness, ADPI, fan-
duct network; filtration systems
UNIT V AIR HEATING SYSTEMS 9
Primary and secondary water loops, constant and variable flow; System control: air side control,
water side control; Energy requirement: cooling load profile, fan and pump power, system operation
for energy effectiveness and heat recovery, chiller optimization. Thermal environment; Air quality;
Energy
conservation measures; Energy codes; Noise and vibration control
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) 20 Marks) (50 Marks)

334
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CAT 1 – 10MARKS [Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS [Link]-Solving Activities

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. List the factors that impact the heating & cooling loads in buildings (Remember)
CO2. Discuss the internal and external cooling loads on a building by separating sensible and latent
Parts (Apply)
CO3. Analyze the heating & cooling loads and Design an HVAC system for a residential or commercial
building (Analyze)
CO4. Analyze the various HVAC systems available and selecting the most appropriate one (Analyze)
CO5. Select appropriate air heating system for a particular location and application (Analyze)
Text Books
1. HVAC Fundamentals Volume-l / James E. Brumbou / Audel / 4th Edition
Reference Books
1. Fundamentals of HVAC Systems / Robert Mcdowall / Academic Press / 2007
2. Home Heating & Air Conditioning systems / James Kittle / MGH
3. HVAC Fundamentals / Samuel C. Sugarman / Fairmont Press / 2005.
4. Principles of Refrigeration – Dossat, Pearson
5. R&AC Hand Book by ISHRAE
Web Resources
1. [Link] (HVAC Systems)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 3 1 1 3
CO2 1 1 3 1 1 3
CO3 1 1 3 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 1 3 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 1 3 1 1 3
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1 List the factors that impact the heating & cooling loads in buildings
(Remember)

1. Apply insulation considerations: If there is insulation present in the walls or roofs, consider its
thermal resistance (R-value) and its impact on reducing heat transfer. The R-value represents the
resistance to heat flow and should be included in the calculations. (Remember)
2. Understand the heat transfer mechanisms: Heat transfer can occur through conduction,
convection, and radiation. It's important to consider these mechanisms while calculating the heat
transfer. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Discuss the internal and external cooling loads on a building by separating
sensible and latent Parts (Apply)

335
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

1. Solar radiation impact: How does solar radiation affect heating loads? (Remember)
2. Internal heat sources: What role do internal heat sources play in heating loads? (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Analyze the heating & cooling loads and Design an HVAC system for a
residential or commercial building (Analyze)

1. Components and layout: What components are involved in HVAC system design, and how should
they be laid out? (Understand)
2. Load calculations: How are load calculations performed in HVAC system design? (Analyze)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Analyze the various HVAC systems available and selecting the most
appropriate one (Analyze)

1. Types of air conditioning systems: What are the different types of air conditioning systems
available? (Understand)
2. Cooling capacity: How is the cooling capacity of an air conditioning system determined? (Analyze)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Select appropriate air heating system for a particular location and
application (Analyze)

1. Cooling load profile: How is the cooling load profile determined in a building? (Understand)
2. Fan and pump power: Specify the factors affect the power consumption of fans and pumps in HVAC
systems? (Apply)

336
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7705 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology
Objectives
• To introduce the process planning concepts
• To make cost estimation for various products after process planning
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS PLANNING 9
Introduction- methods of process planning-Drawing interpretation-Material evaluation – steps in
process selection-. Production equipment and tooling selection
UNIT II PROCESS PLANNING ACTIVITIES 9
Process parameters calculation for various production processes-Selection jigs and fixtures election of
quality assurance methods - Set of documents for process planning-Economics of process planning-
case studies
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 9
Importance of costing and estimation –methods of costing-elements of cost estimation –Types of
estimates – Estimating procedure- Estimation labor cost, material cost- allocation of over head
charges- Calculation of depreciation cost
UNIT IV PRODUCTION COST ESTIMATION 9
Estimation of Different Types of Jobs - Estimation of Forging Shop, Estimation of Welding Shop,
Estimation of Foundry Shop
UNIT V MACHINING TIME CALCULATION 9
Estimation of Machining Time - Importance of Machine Time Calculation- Calculation of Machining
Time for Different Lathe Operations ,Drilling and Boring - Machining Time Calculation for Milling,
Shaping and Planning -Machining Time Calculation for Grinding.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS [Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS [Link]-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Select the process, equipment and tools for various industrial products (Understand)
CO2 Prepare process planning activity chart. (Understand)
CO3 Explain the concept of cost estimation. (Apply)
CO4 Compute the job order cost for different type of shop floor. (Apply)
CO5 Calculate the machining time for various machining operations. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Peter scalon, “Process planning, Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier science technology
Books, Dec 2002.
2. Sinha B.P, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing co, 1995.

Reference Books

337
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
1. Chitale A.V. and Gupta R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2002
2. Ostwalal P.F. and Munez J., “Manufacturing Processes and systems”, 9 th Edition, John Wiley,
1998.
3. Russell R.S and Tailor B.W, “Operations Management”, 4th Edition, PHI, 2003
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Process Planning and Cost Estimation)
2. [Link] (Process Planning and Cost Estimation)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 1 2 3
CO3 2 2 1 3 3
CO4 2 2 1 3 3
CO5 2 2 1 3 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Select the process, equipment and tools for various industrial products
(Remember, Understand)

1. What are parameters to determine the tool performance? (Remember)

2. Explain basic steps involve in process planning. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Prepare process planning activity chart. (Remember, Understand)

1. What are the functions of jig and fixture? (Remember)
2. Explain the various quality assurance methods in detail. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Explain the concept of cost estimation (Remember, Understand, Apply)
1. Distinguish cost estimation and cost accounting. (Remember)
2. From the following data provided by a mask machine manufacturer, find prime cost, factory cost,
production cost, total coat and profit
Items INR
Value of stock material as on 1-07-2021 52,000
Material purchased 5,48,000
Wages to workers 2,40,000
Depreciation of plant and machinery 16,000
Depreciation of office equipment 4,000
Rent, taxes and insurance 32,000
General administrative expenses 6,800
Water, power and telephone bill of factory 19,200
Water, power and telephone bill of office 5,000
Transportation in factory 4,000
Insurance and rent of office building 4,000
Direct expenses 1,00,000
Commission and pay of salesman 21,000
338
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Repair and maintenance 2,000
Production Managers salary 60,000
Salary of office staff 1,20,000
Value of stock of material on 30-06-2021 72,000
Sale of products 12,72,000. (Understand)
3. Find out the production cost per gear for a transmission unit in automobile from the following
data.
Charges for forging per kg Rs. 22.5
Wrought iron used per month @ Rs. 90 per Kg 27 tonnes
Wages of operator Rs. 450/day
No of operator employed 36
Cartage/day Rs. 2,250
Deprecation of machines and tools Rs. 4500 per month
Wages of helpers Rs. 270 per day each
No of helpers employed 8
Salary of supervisor Rs. 45,000 per month
Packing charges for 108 gears Rs. 360
Electric charges Rs. 11700 Per month
Salary of manager and maintenance staff Rs. 1,26,000 per month
If 13,500 gears are to be produced per month and factory runs 26 days a month at 8 hour shift
then what should be the selling price of each gears so as to earn profit of 20 percentage of factory
cost? (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Compute the job order cost for different type of shop floor (Remember,
Understand, Apply)

1. What is shrinkage allowance? (Remember)

2. Calculate the cost of forging a crank shaft as show in figure 1 below using the following data
available. The forging is to be made out of 50 mm dia.

(Understand)

339
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

3. Calculate the cost of welding two pieces of mild steel sheets each 2 meters long and 7 mm thick. A
60° V is prepared by means of gas cutting before welding is to be commenced. The cost of oxygen
is Rs. 7/cumeter and acetylene is Rs. 4/cu meter. The filler metal costs Rs. 20 per kg.
The following data is also available :
For gas cutting (10 mm thick plate)
Cutting speed 20 m/hr
Consumption of oxygen 2 cu m/hr
Consumption of acetylene 0.2 cu m/hr
Data for rightward welding
Consumption of oxygen 0.8 cu m/hr
Consumption of acetylene 0.8 cu m/hr
Dia of filler rod used 3.5 mm
Filler rod used per meter of weld 3.4 m
Rate of welding 3 m/hr
Density of filler metal 8 g/cc (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Calculate the machining time for various machining operations.
(Remember, Understand, Apply)

1. What is tear down time? (Remember)

2. A 400 mm 60 mm rectangular cast iron piece is to be face milled with a carbide cutter. The
cutting speed and feed are 60 m/min and 60 m/mm. If the cutter diais 80 mm with 12 cutting
teeth. Find cutter r.p.m. feed per tooth, milling time. (Understand)
3. Calculate the machining time to drill eight 8 mm dia holes and one 40 mm dia central hole in the
flange shown below (Figure 2). With cutting speed 10 m/min, feed for 8 mm drill 0.1 mm/rev, 40
mm drill is 0.4 mm/rev, 20 mm dia drill 0.2 mm/rev.

(Apply)

340
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7706 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• This course aims to focus on basics of industrial internet, get an idea about IIOT
architectures and acquire the knowledge about various network protocols
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL INTERNET 9
Innovation and IIoT – Intelligent Devices – Industrial Internet – Health care – Oil and Gas Industry –
Smart Office – Logistics – IoT Innovations in Retail.
UNIT II TECHNICAL AND BUSINESS INNOVATORS OF INDUSTRIAL 9
INTERNET
Miniaturization – Cyber Physical Systems – Wireless technology – IP Mobility – Network Functionality
Virtualization – Cloud and Fog - Big Data and Analytics – M2M Learning and Artificial Intelligence.

UNIT III IIOT REFERENCE ARCHITECTURE 9

Industrial Internet Architecture Framework – Functional Viewpoint –Operational Domain,
Information Domain, Application Domain, Business Domain – Implementation View point –
Architectural Topology – Three Tier Topology – Data Management.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL INTERNET SYSTEMS 9
Introduction-Proximity Network Protocols – WSN Edge Node – Legacy Industrial Protocols –RS232
Serial Communications, 40-20ma Current Loop, Field Bus Technologies – Modern Communication
Protocols – Industrial Ethernet – Industrial Gateways.
UNIT V MIIDDLEWARE TRANSPORT PROTOCOL 9
TCP/IP, UDP, RTP, CoAP –Middleware Software patterns –Software Design patterns – Application
Programming Interface (API) – CAN Protocol-Web Services – Middleware IIoT – Securing the IIoT-
Identity Access Management.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS [Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS [Link]-Solving Activities

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the company’s performance using IoT (Understand)
CO2: Discuss the different styles of technical and business innovators (Understand)
CO3: Identify various IIoT Architectures related to data management system (Apply)
CO4: Organize the design of Industrial Internet Systems (Apply)
CO5: Construct a Middleware software system related to proximity edge networks (Apply)
Text Books
1. S. Misra, C. Roy, and A. Mukherjee, Introduction to Industrial Internet of Things and Industry
4.0. CRC Press, 2020.
2. S. Misra, A. Mukherjee, and A. Roy, Introduction to IoT. Cambridge University Press, 2020

341
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Reference Books
1. Dr. Guillaume Girardin , Antoine Bonnabel, Dr. Eric Mounier, 'Technologies Sensors for the
Internet of Things Businesses & Market Trends 2014 -2024',Yole Development Copyrights,
2014.
2. Peter Waher, 'Learning Internet of Things', Packt Publishing, 2015.
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Industrial Internet of things)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 1 3 3
CO2 1 2 2 1 3 2
CO3 2 2 3 1 3 3
CO4 2 2 3 1 3 2
CO5 2 2 3 1 3 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Interpret the company’s performance using IoT (Understand)

1. How IOT is working in oil & gas industry. Explain in detail (Remember)
2. Compare IOT and IIOT in terms of functionality, connectivity and usage (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Discuss the different styles of technical and business innovators
(Understand)
1. Compare artificial intelligence & machine learning (Understand)
2. Outline the domains where fog computing is used (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Identify various IIoT Architectures related to data management system
(Apply)
1. List out the viewpoints in industrial internet (Remember)
2. Build the framework of industrial internet architecture (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Organize the design of Industrial Internet Systems (Apply)
1. Outline RS232 Serial Communication Protocol working and specifications (Understand)
2. Identify the modes of data transfer in serial communication (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Construct a Middleware software system related to proximity edge
networks (Apply)
1. Classify the seven software design patterns and explain with an example (Understand)
2. Construct the architecture of TCP/IP Protocol in IIOT (Apply)

342
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7707 MANUFACTURING AND INSPECTION OF GEARS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology
Objectives
• This course aims to focus the inspection process that led to better design of gears.
• Develop a broad understanding of the methods used to manufacture and inspect gears.
UNIT I PRODUCTION OF CYLINDERICAL GEARS 9
Types of cylindrical gears - Gear production methods - Procedure for cutting gears - Cutter selection -
Work holding methods - Rack type gear shaping machine - Internal gear cutting methods - CNC gear
hobbing - Gear shaping machines - Gear skiving.
UNIT II PRODUCTION OF CONICAL GEARS 9
Types of conical gears - Production methods for straight bevel gears - Bevel gear generator - Duplex
rotary cutter method - Production methods for spiral bevel and hypoid bevel gears - Gleason spiral
bevel generator.
UNIT III GEAR MATERIALS SELECTION AND HARDENEING METHODS 9
Properties of gear materials - Non-metallic, non-ferrous and plastic gears - Selection of material for
power transmission - Selection of materials for worm and wheel - Hardening methods - Case
hardening – Carburizing - Induction hardening - Flame hardening.
UNIT IV GEAR FINISHING AND INSPECTIONS 9
Gear finishing – Grinding – Shaving - Lapping - Honing - Gear inspection - Types of error in gears -
Gear quality standards and allowable limits - Composite error measurement - Computerized gear
inspection - Gear failure reasons and remedies.
UNIT V MASS PRODUCTION METHODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS 9
Mass production methods - Stamping - Die casting - Powder metallurgy process - Injection moulding -
Compression moulding of plastic gears - Cold and hot rolling - Gear broaching - Gear production
systems - Batch production - Gear production cells - Automobile gear and gear boxes -Production of
heavy engineering gears.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS [Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS [Link]-Solving Activities

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the methods of manufacturing cylindrical gears (Understand)
CO2: Discuss the manufacturing methods of conical gears (Understand)
CO3: Illustrate the gear materials and hardening methods (Apply)
CO4: Examine the gear quality and standards (Apply)
CO5: Describe the mass production methods and systems of gears (Apply)
Text Books
1. H. J. Watson, “Modern Gear Production”, 1st edition, Pergamon, 2013.
2. Sreeramulu Moinikunta, “Production Technology” Wiley, 2018.
Reference Books
343
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
1. Thomas Bergs and Christian Brecher, “Aachen Forum on Gear Production: Gear Finishing
Technology and Quality Inspection” 9th edition, 2021,
2. Stephen and Radzevich, “Dudley's Handbook of Practical Gear Design and Manufacture”, 4th
edition, CRC Press, 2021.
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Manufacturing and Inspection of Gears)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 1 2 1 1 3
CO2 1 2 1 1 3
CO3 1 2 1 1 3
CO4 1 2 1 1 3
CO5 1 2 1 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Interpret the methods of manufacturing cylindrical gears (Understand)
1. List out the different types of cylindrical gears. Explain in detail (Remember)
2. Describe the rack type gear shaping machine (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Discuss the manufacturing methods of conical gears (Understand)
1. Describe the straight bevel gear & spiral bevel gear (Understand)
2. Outline the duplex rotary cutter method where it is used (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Illustrate the gear materials and hardening methods (Apply)
1. List out the viewpoints in hardening process (Remember)
2. Illustrate the selection of gear materials for transmission system (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Examine the gear quality and standards (Apply)
1. Discuss the various gear inspection methods (Understand)
2. Identify the gear failures and remedies (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Describe the mass production methods and systems of gears (Apply)
1. Classify the mass production methods of gears (Understand)
2. Illustrate the die casting and powder metallurgy process (Apply)

344
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7708 PRECISION MANUFACTURING
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• This course deals with precision manufacturing, micro machining and fundamental design
requirements of precision machine tools. It also provides insights on machine surface
characteristics and error detection methods.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for Precision Manufacturing - Taniguchi Diagram - Four Classes of Achievable Machining
Accuracy – Normal Precision - High-Precision - Ultra-Precision Processes and Nanotechnology.
UNIT II PRECISION MACHINING AND UNCONVENTIONAL 9
MICROMACHINING TECHNIQUES
Overview of Micro and Nano Machining - Conventional Micro Machining Techniques - Ultrasonic
Micromachining - Photochemical Machining - Electro Chemical Micromachining - Laser Beam
Micromachining - Electron Beam Micromachining
UNIT III MACHINE DESIGN FOR PRECISION MANUFACTURING 9
Philosophy of Precision Machine Design - Ultra-Precision Machine Elements: Guide Ways - Drive
Systems - Friction Drive - Linear Motor Drive - Spindle Drive. Bearings: Principle - Construction and
Application of Rolling - Hydrodynamic and Hydrostatic Bearings
UNIT IV MECHANICAL AND THERMAL ERRORS 9
Sources of Error - Principles of Measurement - Errors Due to Machine Elements – Bearings – Spindles
- Kinematic Design - Structural Compliance – Vibration - Thermal Effects - Environmental Control of
Precision Machinery. Error Mapping and Error Budgets.
UNIT V DIMENSIONAL METROLOGY FOR MICRO MACHINING 9
Laser Tracking Systems - Laser Scanners, White Light Interference 3D Microscopes - Metrology: 3D
Surface Topography – Non-Optical Scanning Microscopy – Scanning Electron Microscopes - Scanning
Probe Microscopes - Parameters for Characterizing 3D Surface Topography.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS [Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS [Link]-Solving Activities

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Illustrate the precision engineering and machining accuracy. (Understand)
CO2: Explain the working principle of different precision machining process. (Understand)
CO3: Choose the basic design requirements for the construction of precision machine tools. (Apply)
CO4: Identify various errors affecting the accuracy of precision manufacturing (Apply)
CO5: Apply a suitable measurement technique to measure and characterize the features of precision
machined components. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Richard Leach, Stuart T. Smith, “Basics of Precision Engineering”, CRC Press, 2018.
2. Wei Gao, “Metrology (Precision Manufacturing)” Springer, 2019.

345
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Reference Books
1. Giovanni Lucchetta, “Advances in Micro and Nano Manufacturing: Process Modeling and
Applications”, Mdpi AG, 2022,
2. Jain V.K., "Introduction to Micromachining", 2nd Edition, Narosa Publishers, New Delhi, 2018.

Web Resources
1. [Link] (Precision Manufacturing)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 1 2 3 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3
CO3 2 2 3 1 3
CO4 2 2 3 1 3
CO5 2 2 3 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Illustrate the concepts of precision engineering and machining accuracy
(Understand)
1. List out the various types of precision process. Explain in detail (Remember)
2. Describe the ultra-precision process and nanotechnology (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Explain the working principle of different precision machining process.
(Understand)
1. Describe the working of electro chemical micro machining process (Understand)
2. Discuss the laser beam machining. where it is used (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Choose the basic design requirements for the construction of precision
machine tools. (Apply)
1. Describe the Construction and Application of Rolling (Remember)
2. Illustrate the working of hydrostatic and hydrodynamic bearings (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Identify various errors affecting the accuracy of precision manufacturing
(Apply)
1. Discuss the error mapping and error budgets (Understand)
2. Identify the various error affecting the precision manufacturing (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply a suitable measurement technique to measure and characterize the
features of precision machined components. (Apply)
1. Differentiate the scanning electron microscope and scanning probe microscope (Understand)
2. Illustrate the white Light Interference 3D Microscopes (Apply)

346
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
TRADITIONAL AND NON-TRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION L T P C
21ME7709
TOOLS 3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• To know the introduction and classical optimization techniques.
• To understand the linear programming techniques to solve problems
• To understand the non-linear programming: one dimensional minimization method.
• To understand the non-linear programming: Unconstrained and Constrained Optimization
Techniques
• To understand the evolutionary algorithms in optimization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND CLASSICAL OPTIMIZATION 9
TECHNIQUES
Historical Development, Engineering applications of Optimization, Design vector and constraints,
Constraint surface, Objective function, Classification of Optimization Problems. Single variable
optimization, Constrained and unconstrained multi-variable optimization, Direct substitution method,
Lagrange’s method of multipliers, Karush-Kuhn-Tucker conditions
UNIT II LINEAR AND NON LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9
Statement of an LP problem, Graphical Solution of an LP problem, Simplex method, Dual simplex
method, Unimodal function, Unrestricted search, Exhaustive search, Dichotomous search, Interval
halving method, Fibonacci method, Golden section method, Direct root methods
UNIT III NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING: UNCONSTRAINED AND 9
CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
UNCONSTRAINED: Types of Direct Search Methods - Random search methods, Grid search method,
Univariate method. Types of Indirect Search Methods: Steepest descent method, Fletcher-Reeves
method CONSTRAINED: Types of Direct Search Methods: Random search method, Sequential linear
programming. Indirect methods: Transformation techniques, Exterior penalty function method,
Interior penalty function method
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO NON-TRADITIONAL TOOLS 9
Introduction - Genetic Algorithms: Representation of Design Variables - Representation of Objective
Function and Constraints - Genetic Operators – Algorithm - Numerical Results. Simulated Annealing:
Procedure – Algorithm - Features of the Method - Numerical Results. Particle Swarm Optimization:
Computational Implementation of PSO - Improvement to the Particle Swarm Optimization Method -
Solution of the Constrained Optimization Problem

UNIT V ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION AND OPTIMIZATION OF FUZZY 9

SYSTEMS
Ant Colony Optimization: Ant Searching Behavior - Path Retracing and Pheromone Updating -
Pheromone Trail Evaporation – Algorithm - Optimization of Fuzzy Systems: Fuzzy Set Theory -
Optimization of Fuzzy Systems - Computational Procedure - Numerical Results – Neural Network
Based Optimization
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS [Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS [Link]-Solving Activities

Outcomes
347
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Apply the classical optimization techniques to solve the problems. (Apply)
CO2: Solve problems using linear and nonlinear programming techniques (Apply)
CO3: Apply the constrained and unconstrained optimization techniques to solve problems (Apply)
CO4: Use the evolutionary algorithms for the multivariable problems. (Apply)
CO5: Solve multivariable problems using Ant colony and fuzzy system optimization methods (Apply)
Text Books
1. Singiresu [Link], “Engineering Optimization”, Vth Edition, John Wiley&Sons, 2020.
Reference Books
1. David G Luenberger, Yinyu Ye, “Linear and Non-linear Programming”, Springer 2015
2. Kalyanmoy Deb,” Optimization for Engineering Design”, PHI Publications 2012

Web Resources
1. [Link] (Traditional and Non-Traditional Optimization Tools)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 2 2 3
3
CO2 1 1 2 2 3
3
CO3 1 1 2 2 3
3
CO4 1 1 2 2 3
3
CO5 1 1 2 2 3
3
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to Apply the classical optimization techniques to
solve the problems. (Apply)
1. Ten jobs are to be performed in an automobile assembly line as noted in the following table:

348
 Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

It is required to set up a suitable number of workstations, with one worker assigned to each
workstation, to perform certain jobs. Formulate the problem of determining the number of
workstations and the particular jobs to be assigned to each workstation to minimize the idle time
of the workers as an integer programming problem.
Hint: Define variables xij such that xij = 1 if job i is assigned to station j, and xij = 0 otherwise.
2. A pipe of length l and diameter D has at one end a nozzle of diameter d through which water is
discharged from a reservoir. The level of water in the reservoir is maintained at a constant value h
above the center of nozzle. Find the diameter of the nozzle so that the kinetic energy of the jet is a
maximum. The kinetic energy of the jet can be expressed as

Where ρ is the density of water, f the friction coefficient and g the gravitational constant.
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Solve problems using linear and nonlinear programming techniques
(Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Apply the constrained and unconstrained optimization techniques to

solve problems (Apply)
1. Find the minimum of the function f = λ5 - 5 λ3 – 20 λ + 5 by the following methods:
(Apply) Unrestricted search with a fixed step size of 0.1 starting from λ = 0.0
(b) Unrestricted search with accelerated step size from the initial point 0.0 with a starting step
length of 0.1
(c) Exhaustive search in the interval (0,5)
(d) Dichotomous search in the interval (0,5) with δ = 0.0001
(e) Interval halving method in the interval (0,5)
(f) Fibonacci search in the interval (0,5)
(g) Golden section method in the interval (0,5)

349
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
2.

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Use the evolutionary algorithms for the multivariable problems (Apply)
1.

2.

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Solve multivariable problems using Ant colony and fuzzy system
optimization methods. (Apply)
1. Find the minimum of the function f (x) = x2 − 2x − 11 in the range (0, 3) using the ant colony
optimization method. (Apply)
2. Two discrete fuzzy sets, A and B are defined as follows:

Determine the union and intersection of these sets. (Apply)

350
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21ME7710 VEHICLE STYLING AND DESIGN
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• This course deals with vehicle styling, vehicle interior and exterior design of automotive parts.
It also provides standards, tests and norms for an automotive parts/system.
UNIT I VEHICLE STYLING 9
Vehicle styling process - Exterior sketching - Two-wheeler and Four-wheeler sketching - Exterior clay
modelling - Interior sketching - Two-wheeler and Four-wheeler sketching - Interior clay modelling
UNIT II SELECTION OF ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION FOR AN 9
AUTOMOBILE
Vehicle layouts - Chassis frame design - Engine selection criteria - Transmission selection - over
gearing and under gearing - Fuel economy - Engine life and pollution - Comparison of manual and
automatic transmission characteristics - Power limited acceleration - Effect of inertia and equivalent
vehicle weight.
UNIT III FORCES ACTING IN CRANK MECHANISM 9
Instantaneous piston velocity and acceleration - Instantaneous connecting rod velocity and
acceleration - Side thrust - Resultant force - Turning moment of single cylinder and multi-cylinder
engines - Various forces acting in crank mechanism.
UNIT IV ENGINE BALANCING 9
Balancing of single cylinder, two-cylinder, four cylinder and six-cylinder in- line engines. Comparison
of balancing inline and v-type engines.
UNIT V STANDARDS, TESTS AND NORMS FOR AN AUTOMOTIVE 9
PART/SYSTEM
Materials & automotive standards for automobile industry - Working environment of vehicle in usage
& handling by various stake holder tests - Test conditions to verify part against all failure modes -
Emission norms.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS [Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS [Link]-Solving Activities

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Illustrate the concepts of vehicle interior and exterior parts design. (Understand)
CO2: Select engine and transmission of a vehicle for a particular application. (Understand)
CO3: Determine forces in engine crank mechanism. (Apply)
CO4: Suggest suitable firing order for engines by balancing forces and moments. (Apply)
CO5: Describe the test procedures, standards and norms for an automobile/sub system.
(Understand)
Text Books

351
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
1. A.K. Babu, S.C. Sharma, T.R. Banga, "Automobile Mechanics” 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers,
2018.
2. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering” Volume-1&2, 13thEdition, Standard Publishers
Distributers, Delhi, 2017.
Reference Books
1. Harald Naunheimer, Bernd Bertsche, Joachim Ryborz, “Automotive Transmissions:
Fundamentals, Selection, Design and Application”, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2014.
2. Thomas D. Gillespie, "Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics", 2021.
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Vehicle Styling And Design)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 2 1 3 3
CO2 1 2 3 3
CO3 2 1 3 1 3
CO4 2 1 3 2 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Illustrate the concepts of vehicle interior and exterior parts design
(Understand)
1. Discuss the interior and exterior design for two-wheeler vehicle. (Understand)
2. Enlist various types of sketches used for four-wheeler vehicle (Remember)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Select engine and transmission of a vehicle for a particular application.
(Understand)
1. How to design a transmission system for a passenger car? (Remember)
2. Discuss on the factors considered in selecting orientation of engine, fuel, method of cooling for
given vehicle layout and requirement. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Determine forces in engine crank mechanism. (Apply)
1. Describe the expressions for instantaneous piston velocity, piston acceleration, connecting rod
angular velocity and angular acceleration at any crank angle? (Remember)
2. Design a detailed procedure of engine crank mechanism (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Suggest suitable firing order for engines by balancing forces and
moments. (Apply)
1. Prove that 4-stroke, 6-cylinder engine with firing order of 1-5-3-6-2-4 is completely balanced.
(Apply)
2. Choose a firing order for 4-stroke, 4 - cylinder engine, based on engine balancing. (Understand)

352
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Describe the test procedures, standards and norms for an automobile/sub
system. (Understand)
1. Write down BS-IV norms for 2&3 wheelers powered by petrol. (Understand)
2. Discuss how rotation bending fatigue test and radial load durability test are done on alloy wheel
rims of 2-wheelers. (Understand)

353
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE - V

354
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21ME7711 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
• To provide the basic concepts of product design, product features and its architecture
• To incorporate them suitably in product.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for IPPD – Strategic importance of Product development – integration of customer, designer,
material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer – Behaviour analysis. Understanding
customer – prompting customer understanding – involve customer in development and managing
requirements – Organization – process management and improvement – Plan and establish product
specifications
UNIT II CONCEPT GENERATION AND SELECTION 9
Task – Structured approaches – clarification – search – externally and internally – explore
systematically – reflect on the solutions and processes – concept selection – methodology – benefits.

UNIT III PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE 9

Implications – Product change – variety – component standardization – product performance –
manufacturability – product development management – establishing the architecture – creation –
clustering – geometric layout development – fundamental and incidental interactions – related system
level design issues – secondary systems – architecture of the chunks – creating detailed interface
specifications.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9
Integrate process design – Managing costs – Robust design – Integrating CAE, CAD, CAM tools –
Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically – Need for industrial
design – impact – design process – investigation for industrial design – impact – design process –
investigation of customer needs – conceptualization – refinement – management of the industrial
design process – technology driven products – user – driven products – assessing the quality of
industrial design.
UNIT V DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND PRODUCT 9
DEVELOPMENT
Definition – Estimation of Manufacturing cost – reducing the component costs and assembly costs –
Minimize system complexity – Prototype basics – principles of prototyping – planning for prototypes
– Economic Analysis – Understanding and representing tasks – baseline project planning –
accelerating the project – project execution.
Total Periods 45

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive exam
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
355
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO1: Outline the need for Integrated Product and Process Design. (Understand)
CO2: Illustrate the structured approaches in concept generation. (Apply)
CO3: Apply the principles of product architecture in component standardization. (Apply)
CO4: Develop integrated environment for industrial design. (Apply)
CO5: Examine the economic aspects of product development. (Apply)
Text Books
3. Karl T., Ulrich and D. Steven, and Eppinger, Product Design and Development, McGraw Hill,
(2011)
4. Dieter G. E., Engineering Design, McGraw – Hill International, (2019)
Reference Books
5. Chitale A. K., Gupta R. C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, 6th Edition, PHI Publication,
(2014).
6. Stephen R. Rosenthal, “Effective Product Design and Development”, Business & Economics
(2002).
7. Kemnneth Crow, “Concurrent Engg./Integrated Product Development”, DRM Associates,
26/3,Via Olivera, Palos Verdes, CA 90274(310) 377-569, Workshop Book.
8. Stephen Rosenthal, “Effective Product Design and Development”, Business One Orwin,
Homewood, 2012.
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Product Design and Development)
2. [Link] Product Design and Development)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 3

356
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Outline the need for Integrated Product and Process Design (Understand)
1. Explain the phases of generic product development process and point out the tasks and
responsibilities of the organization (Remember)
2. Briefly explain the organizational policies for product planning, process management and
improvement of product (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Illustrate the structured approaches in concept generation. (Apply)

1. How can the concept selection methods be used to benchmark existing products. Perform such an
evaluation for five automobile you might consider purchasing (Understand)
2. Prepare an external - search plan for the problem of permanently applying serial numbers to
plastic products (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Apply the principles of product architecture in component

standardization (Apply)
1. Summarize the design issues that make an impact in related system of product architecture
(Remember)
2. Describe the four-step method to structure the decision process, using the desk jet printer, with a
geometric layout (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Develop integrated environment for industrial design. (Apply)

1. Is Industrial Design Worth the Investment? Explain with respect to, singular architecture and
integral architecture (Apply)
2. Explain the need for CAE/CAD/CAM in Industrial design, using suitable illustrations (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Examine the economic aspects of product development (Apply)

1. Summarize the reasons why reducing the number of parts in a product might reduce production
costs. Also explain some reasons why costs might increase (Apply)
2. What would you expect to be some of the characteristics of individuals who successfully lead
project teams? Explain them in detail (Apply).

357
 Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7712 PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
The objectives of product life cycle management (PLM) are to;
• Improve product quality and reduce time to market, prototyping costs reduce
environmental impacts.
• Identify potential sales opportunities and revenue contributions
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PLM 9
Introduction to PLM, Need for PLM, Product information, Product lifecycle management concept,
Information models and product structures-Information model, The product information (data)
model, The product model, Reasons for the deployment of PLM systems.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES 9
User Functions: Data Vault and Document Management, Workflow and Process Management,
Product Structure Management, Product Classification and Programme Management. Utility
Functions: Communication and Notification, data transport, data translation, image services,
system administration and application integration
UNIT III DIGITAL MANUFACTURING AND INTEGRATION OF PLM 9
Digital manufacturing, benefits manufacturing, manufacturing the first-one, Ramp up, virtual
learning curve, manufacturing the rest, production planning. Different ways to integrate PLM
systems, Transfer file, Database integration, System roles, ERP, Optimization of ERP for PLM and
CAD.
UNIT IV COLLABORATIVE PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Engineering vaulting, product reuse, smart parts, engineering change management, Bill of
materials and process consistency, Digital mock-up and prototype development, design for
environment, virtual testing and validation, marketing collateral.
UNIT V PLM IN INDUSTRIES 9
Case studies on PLM selection and implementation (like auto, aero, electronic) and other possible
sectors, PLM visioning, PLM strategy, PLM feasibility study, change management for PLM,
financial justification of PLM, barriers to PLM implementation, ten step approach to PLM, benefits
of PLM for–business, organization, users, product or service, process performance- process
compliance and process automation.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Identify product data, information, structures and PLM concepts. (Understand)
CO2: Develop the functions and features of PLM/PDM (Apply)
CO3: Recognize tools and standards for digital manufacturing and integration of PLM
(Understand)
CO4: Apply PLM concepts through collaborative product development (Apply)
CO5: Interpret the implement PLM approaches for industrial applications. (Understand)
358
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Text Books
1. Product Lifecycle Management for a Global Market, Springer; 29th September 2016, ISBN-
10 : 3662516330
2. Jaya Krishna S, Product Lifecycle Management: Concepts and cases, ICFAI Publications
2011.
Reference Books
1. AnttiSaaksvuori and AnselmiImmonen, “Product Lifecycle Management”, Springer
Publisher, 2008 (3rd Edition)
2. IvicaCrnkovic, Ulf Asklund and AnnitaPerssonDahlqvist, “Implementing and Integrating
Product Data Management and Software Configuration Management”, Artech House
Publishers, 2003.
3. John Stark, “Product Lifecycle Management: 21st Century Paradigm for Product
Realisation”, Springer Publisher, 2011 (2nd Edition).
4. Michael Grieves, “Product Life Cycle Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006
5. SOA approach to Enterprise Integration for Product Lifecycle, IBM Red books, 2011.
Web Resources
4. [Link] (Product Life Cycle Management)
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 3 1 3
CO2 2 1 1 3 1 3
CO3 2 1 1 1 3 1 3
CO4 2 1 1 1 3 1 3
CO5 2 1 1 3 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to Identify product data, information, structures and
PLM concepts. (Understand)
1. Mention the need for PLM (Remember)
2. List the reasons for the deployment of PLM systems (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to develop the functions and features of PLM/PDM
(Apply)
1. Discuss the relationship between version and revision with an illustration (Apply)
2. Elaborate the technologies related to document management with suitable illustration (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to Recognize tools and standards for digital
manufacturing and integration of PLM (Understand)
1. Explain in detail digital manufacturing (Understand)
2. Explain the process of creation of 3DXML and CAD software tools (Understand)

359
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to apply PLM concepts through collaborative
product development (Apply)
1. Sketch the architecture of collaborative product commerce and explain its challenges (Apply)
2. Explain the steps involved in the prototype development through collaborative approach (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to Interpret the implement PLM approaches for
industrial applications (Understand)
1. Explain the consequences of the ten step approach (Understand)
2. Develop a suitable case study for the selection of PLM (Apply)

360
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7713 CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course:
Engineering Thermodynamics, Thermal Engineering
Objectives
• To provide the knowledge of evolution of low temperature science.
• To provide knowledge on the properties of materials at low temperature
• To familiarize with various gas liquefaction and refrigeration systems and to provide
design aspects of cryogenic storageand transfer lines.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CRYOGENIC SYSTEMS 9
Historical development - Applications of Cryogenics: Space, Food Processing, Super conductivity,
Electrical Power, Biology, Medicine, Electronics and Cutting Tool Industry - Low Temperature
Properties - Properties of Engineering Materials: Mechanical properties, Thermal properties, Electric
and Magnetic properties, Properties of Cryogenic fluids.
UNIT II LIQUEFACTION & CRYOGENIC REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to liquefaction Systems: Ideal system, Joule Thomson expansion, Adiabatic expansion,
Linde Hampson Cycle, Claude & Cascaded System - Introduction to Cryogenic Refrigeration Systems:
Magnetic Cooling, Stirling Cycle Cryo Coolers.
UNIT III CRYOGENIC REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 9
Ideal refrigeration systems - Refrigeration using liquids and gases as refrigerant - Refrigerators using
solids as working media
UNIT IV CRYOGENIC FLUID STORAGE AND TRANSFER SYSTEMS 9
Cryogenic storage vessels and transportation - thermal insulation and their performance at
cryogenic temperatures - Super insulations, Vacuum insulation, Powder insulation - Cryogenic
fluid transfer systems.
UNIT V CRYOGENIC INSTRUMENTATION 9
Pressure - flow-rate - liquid-level and temperature measurements - types of Heat Exchangers used
in cryogenic systems (only description with figure) - Cryo Pumping Applications.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive Exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive Exam
CAT 1 - 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 - 10 MARKS STUDY

361
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Outline the scope and history of cryogenics and to understand the properties of materials
at low temperature applying fundamental knowledge. (Understand)
CO2: Apply the knowledge of low temperature production methods to understand and analyze
different liquefaction systems. (Apply)
CO3: Apply the knowledge of ideal refrigeration techniques, to understand and analyse
common cryogenic refrigeration systems. (Apply)
CO4: Summarize various cryogenic fluid storage and transport systems and to evaluate
their performance applying fundamental concepts (Understand)
CO5: Discuss cryo pumping and cryogenic instrumentation. (Understand)
Text Books
1. J. H. Boll Jr, Cryogenic Engineering, 2019
2. Randal [Link], Cryogenic systems, McGraw Hill, 2017
Reference Books
4. Klaus [Link] and Thomas [Link], CryogenicProcess Engineering, Plenum Press,
New York, 2021
5. R. B. Scott, Cryogenic Engineering, Van Nostrand Co., 2013
Web Resources
1. NPTEL (CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 1 1 1 1 3

362
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to outline the scope and history of cryogenics and to
understand the properties of materials at low temperature applying fundamental knowledge.
(Understand)
1. Explain the historical development of cryogenics. (Remember)
2. Explain how the ultimate and yield strengths of engineering materials change with cryogenic
temperature? (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able Apply the knowledge of low temperature
production methods to understand and analyze different liquefaction systems. (Apply)
1. With a neat sketch, explain any one system for the liquefaction of Hydrogen. Derive expressions for
liquid yield and work of liquefaction. (Understand)
2. Prove that COP of an ideal Stirling cycle refrigerator is same as that of Carnot refrigerator. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: : Students will be able to apply the knowledge of ideal refrigeration
techniques, to understand and analyse common cryogenic refrigeration systems. (Apply)
1. Illustrate the working of a simple cascade gas liquefaction system (Apply)
2. Explain the working of cryogenic refrigeration system with suitable example. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to summarize various cryogenic fluid storage
and transport systems and to evaluate their performance applying fundamental concepts
(Understand)
1. Discuss the principles of storage and handling cryogenic fluid. (Understand)
2. Write short notes on insulations used in cryogenic applications. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to discuss cryo pumping and cryogenic
instrumentation. (Understand)
1. With neat sketch explain any three types of heat exchangers used in cryogenic systems.
(Understand)
2. Explain any one pressure measurement system used in cryogenic applications. (Understand)

363
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7714 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Thermodynamics, Thermal Engineering
Objectives
• Providing an overview of Power Plants and detailing the role of Mechanical Engineers in
their operation and maintenance
UNIT I COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS 9
Rankine cycle - improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers, FBC
Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants – Fuel and ash
handling, Draught system, Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration systems.
UNIT II DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS 9
Otto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle - Analysis & Optimisation. Components of Diesel and Gas Turbine
power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated Gasifier based Combined Cycle systems.
UNIT III NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 9
Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of Nuclear
Reactors : Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR), CANada Deuterium-
Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors. Safety measures
for Nuclear Power plants.
UNIT IV POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY 9
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and associated components including
Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic (SPV), Solar
Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell power systems.
UNIT V ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF POWER 9
PLANTS
Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection criteria,
relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants. Pollution control
technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power Plants.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS [Link] 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS [Link]-Solving Activities
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO.1 Illustrate the layout, construction and working of the components inside a thermal power plant.
CO.2 Illustrate the layout, construction and working of the components inside a Diesel, Gas and
Combined cycle power plants.
CO.3 Illustrate the layout, construction and working of the components inside nuclear power plants.
CO.4 Illustrate the layout, construction and working of the components inside Renewable energy
power plants.
CO.5 Estimate the costs of electrical energy production in different power plants and evaluate
different pollution control measures in coal and nuclear power plants.

Text Books
1. Nag. P.K., "Power Plant Engineering", Third Edition, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company
Ltd., 2008 364
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Reference Books
1. El-Wakil. M.M., "Power Plant Technology", Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2010.
2. Thomas C. Elliott, Kao Chen and Robert C. Swanekamp, "Power Plant Engineering", Second
Edition, Standard Handbook of McGraw – Hill, 1998.

Web Resources
1. [Link] (POWER PLANT ENGINEERING)
2. [Link] (POWER PLANT ENGINEERING)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 3 1 3
CO2 1 2 2 3 1 3
CO3 1 2 2 3 1 3
CO4 1 2 2 3 1 3
CO5 1 2 2 3 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a
thermal power plant. (Understand)

1. Mention any four-equipment used for ash collection. (Remember)

2. Explain briefly on draught and its types and also discuss the different types of draught systems.
(Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Illustrate the layout, construction and working of the components inside a
Diesel, Gas and Combined cycle power plants. (Understand)

1. Define regenerator efficiency. (Remember)

2. Discuss briefly on integrated gasification combined cycle and its benefits. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Illustrate the layout, construction and working of the components inside
nuclear power plants. (Understand)

1. Mention any four ways of Nuclear Power plant safety. (Remember)

2. Discuss the working principle and construction of Pressurized Water Reactor and Boiling Water
Reactor. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Illustrate the layout, construction and working of the components inside
Renewable energy power plants. (Understand)

1. Enlist the classification of fuel cell. (Remember)

2. Explain the principle of working and construction of solar power plant using suitable sketches.
State their advantages, disadvantages and applications. (Understand)

365
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Estimate the costs of electrical energy production in different power
plants and evaluate different pollution control measures in coal and nuclear power plants.
(Apply)

1. A new factory having a minimum demand of 100 kW and a load factor of 25% is comparing two
power supply agencies. i) Public supply tariff is Rs. 40 per kW of maximum demand plus 2 paise
per kWh. Capital cost = Rs. 70,000; Interest and depreciation = 10% (Understand)
2. A hydro power plant is to be used as peak load plant at an annual load factor of 30%. The electrical
energy obtained during the year is 750 × 105 kWh. Determine the maximum demand. If the plant
capacity factor is 24% find reserve capacity of the plant. (Apply)

366
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7715 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology
Objectives
• To understand the various components and functions of production planning and control such
as work study, product planning, process planning, production scheduling, Inventory Control.
• To know the recent trends like manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP).

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Objectives and benefits of planning and control -Functions of production control-Types of production-
job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect - Functional aspects-
Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect. Profit consideration-
Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis -Economics of a new design.

UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data -
Predetermined motion time standards.
UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9
Product planning– Extending the original product information– Value analysis– Problems in lack of
product planning– Process planning and routing– Pre requisite information needed for process
planning– Steps in process planning– Quantity determination in batch production– Machine capacity,
balancing– Analysis of process capabilities in a multiproduct system.

UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9

Production Control Systems– Loading and scheduling– Master Scheduling– Scheduling rules–Gantt
charts– Perpetual loading– Basic scheduling problems – Line of balance – Flow production
scheduling– Batch production scheduling– Product sequencing – Production Control systems –
Periodic batch control– Material requirement planning kanban – Dispatching– Progress reporting and
expediting– Manufacturing lead time– Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.

UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9

Inventory control -Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures.
Two bin system - Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantity and economic lot
size- ABC analysis - Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production planning
systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP II.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive Exam
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

Course Outcomes
367
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Outline production planning and Control objectives, functions types and Economic analysis
(Understand)
CO2: Conduct production planning and Control activities such as work study, Time study, Production
study & Work sampling in industries. (Apply)
CO3: Summarize product planning and process planning concepts. (Apply)
CO4: Plan manufacturing requirements and scheduling in Production Control systems. (Apply)
CO5: Discuss about inventory control and the recent trends in PPC (Understand)
Text Books
1. James [Link], “Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for manufacturing
and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition, 2019
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edition, [Link]
and Company, 2000.
Reference Books
1. Jawad Akhtar , “Production Planning and Control with SAP Erp Hardcover”, SAP Press; Second
edition, 2016.
2. Ramachandran S, Devaraj R, Rasidhar L, “Production Planning And Control [Print Replica]
Kindle Edition”, AIRWALK PUBICATIONS; 1st edition, 2017.
3. Dr.V. Jayakumar, “Production Planning & Control”, Lakshmi Publications 7th Edition 2016.
4. Mukhopadhyay, “Production Planning and Control: Text and Cases Paperback – 1”, Prentice
Hall India Learning Private Limited; 2nd edition, 2007.
Web Resources
1. [Link] (PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL)

368
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 3 3
CO2 2 2 1 3 3
CO3 2 2 1 1 3 3
CO4 2 1 2 3 3
CO5 2 2 1 2 3 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Outline production planning and Control objectives, functions types and
Economic analysis (Understand)
1. Discuss in detail about the various functions of production planning and control. (Understand)
2. Enumerate the various aspects of Product design and development or Product analysis?
(Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Conduct production planning and Control activities such as work study,
Time study, Production study & Work sampling in industries. (Apply)
1. A work study was conducted in a machine shop. The data has been recorded as follows:
Total number of observations = 160
Hand controlled work = 14
Machine controlled work = 106
Machine idle time = 40
Average performance rating = 80%
No of parts produced = 36
Allowance for personal needs and fatigue = 10%
Duration of study = 3 days
Available working hours/day =8 hrs
Determine the standard time per piece (Apply)
2. Enumerate in detail the various charts in method study with illustration and neat sketch
(Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Summarize product planning and process planning concepts. (Apply)
1. Enumerate various phases in the development of a new product (Understand)
2. As a product planning engineer, how do you analyze the process capacities in a multi-product
system and how do you document the results. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Plan manufacturing requirements and scheduling in Production Control
systems. (Apply)

369
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
1. The processing times (including setup time) and due dates for six jobs waiting to be processed at a
work centre are given in the following table. Determine the sequence of jobs, the average flow
time, average tardiness, and average number of jobs at work centre for each of these rules:
(Apply)
I. SPT
II. EDD
Job Processing Due date (days
time (days) from present
time
A 2 7
B 8 16
C 4 4
D 10 17
E 5 15
F 12 18
2. Explain Gantt chart and Line of Balance. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Discuss about inventory control and the recent trends in PPC
(Understand)
1. Explain with a block diagram, the basic elements of JIT manufacturing system (Understand)
2. What are the components of Material Requirement Planning (MRP)? (Understand)

370
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7716 LOW-COST AUTOMATION
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
CNC Machines and Automation

Objectives
• To give basic knowledge about automation
• To understand the basic hydraulics and pneumatics systems for automation
• To understand the assembly automation

UNIT I AUTOMATION OF ASSEMBLY LINES 9

Concept of automation - mechanization and automation - Concept of automation in industry -
mechanization and automation - classification, balancing of assembly line using available algorithms -
Transfer line-monitoring system (TLMS) using Line Status - Line efficiency - Buffer stock Simulation in
assembly line.
UNIT II AUTOMATION USING HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 9
Design aspects of various elements of hydraulic systems such as pumps, valves, filters, reservoirs,
accumulators, actuators, intensifiers etc. - Selection of hydraulic fluid, practical case studied on
hydraulic circuit design and performance analysis - Servo valves, electrohydraulic valves, proportional
valves, and their applications.
UNIT III AUTOMATION USING PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9
Pneumatic fundamentals - control elements, position and pressure sensing -logic circuits – switching
circuits - fringe conditions modules and these integration - sequential circuits - cascade methods -
mapping methods – step counter method. Pneumatic equipments - selection of components - design
calculations -application - fault finding – hydro pneumatic circuits.
UNIT IV AUTOMATION USING ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS 9
Introduction - various sensors – transducers - signal processing - servo systems - programming of
microprocessors using 8085 instruction - programmable logic controllers.
UNIT V ASSEMBLY AUTOMATION 9
Types and configurations - Parts delivery at workstations - Various vibratory and non-vibratory
devices for feeding - hopper feeders, rotary disc feeder, centrifugal and orientation - Product design for
automated assembly, Low-cost automation - Robotic circuits.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Formative Assessment End Semester Exams
Test Test (60 Marks)
(20 Marks) (20 Marks)
CAT 1 – [Link] 1. Descriptive
10 2. Online Quizzes Questions
MARKS [Link]-Solving
CAT 2 – Activities
10
MARKS

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

371
 Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO.1 Summarize the concepts of automated assembly line in industries. (Apply)
CO.2 Design and performance analysis of low-cost automation using hydraulics system. (Analyze)
CO.3 Design and performance analysis of low-cost automation using pneumatic system. (Analyze)
CO.4 Design and performance analysis of low-cost automation using PLC system. (Analyze)
CO.5 Design and construct the Assembly system and part feeders. (Analyze)

Textbooks
1. Mikell P Groover, “Automation, Production System and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Prentice Hall Publications, 4 th edition, 2016.
2. Kuo .B.C, “Automatic control systems”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2016.
Reference Books
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with applications”, Prentice Hall international, 2013.
2. Peter Rohner, “Industrial hydraulic control”, Wiley Edition, 2012.
3. Mujumdar.S.R, “Pneumatic System”, Tata McGraw Hill 201.

Web Resources
1. [Link] (Low-Cost Automation)
2. [Link] (Low-Cost Automation)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 Summarize the concepts of automated assembly line in industries
(Apply)
1. As the number of workstations on an automated production line increase, does line Efficiency (a)
decrease, (b) increase, or (c) remain unaffected? (Understand)
2. An automated production line operates with an ideal cycle time of 35 sec. Line stops are
characterized by a mean time between failures of 70 min and a mean time to repair of 8.0 min. What
is the average hourly production rate? (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 2 Design and performance analysis of low-cost automation using

hydraulics system. (Analyze)
1. Develop a hydraulic system to control the speed of speed of a hydraulic motor using flow control
valve (Apply)
2. Compare the various performance factors of a gear, vane and piston pumps (Analyze)

COURSE OUTCOME 3 Design and performance analysis of low-cost automation using

pneumatic system. (Analyze)
1. Consider the circuit, what happens to the cylinder when valve v4 is depressed. (Analyze)

372
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

2. What undesirable consequence occurs when components of a pneumatics system such as pipes, and
vales are undersized? (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4 Design and performance analysis of low-cost automation using PLC
system (Analyze)
1. Develop an electro pneumatic system for Opening/closing the flow in a pipeline. (Analyze)

2. Develop PLC programming for sequencing of cylinders to follow A+B+B-A- (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5 Design and construct the Assembly system and part feeders. (Analyze)

1. Differentiate the part design features of automated assembly over manual assembly (Analyze)
2. Design a part feeder orientation system for Orienting a Cylindrical Parts whose Length is Greater
than its Diameter. (Apply)

373
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
SUSTAINABILITY THROUGH GREEN MANUFACTURING
21ME7717
SYSTEM
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course:
Nil
Objectives
• To provide an overview of the Sustainability through Green Manufacturing Systems; various
methodologies and its application in improving the eco-efficiency.
• To learn about the commonly used Sustainable manufacturing tools such as Environmentally
Conscious Quality Function Deployment (ECQFD) and Life Cycle Assessment (LCA).
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
Concept of sustainability –– Definitions of sustainable - Environmental effects of design –
Environmental damage – In efficient energy use – Design for recycling.
UNIT II QUALITY FUNCTION DEPLOYMENT 11
Environmentally Conscious Quality Function Deployment (ECQFD), ECQFD Phase-I, ECQFD Phase-II,
ECQFD Phase-III, ECQFD Phase-IV, Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) policy
UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT 9
Fundamentals of Life Cycle Assessment (LCA), LCA Phase-I, LCA Phase-II, LCA Phase-III, LCA Phase-IV,
Life Cycle Cost Analysis- Material flow and cycles – Material recycling – Emission less manufacturing

UNIT IV GREEN DESIGN METHOD 9

Environmental, Economic, Societal and Business indicators - Mass balance analysis – Green indicate –
Design for disassembly design for recycle – Risk analysis – Material selection
UNIT V SUSTAINABLE ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT 9
Solar energy devices – wind energy resources – Full cost accounting methodology – Selection of
natural friendly materials.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 10 MARKS Descriptive type questions. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 10 MARKS Assignment
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the basic Concepts & knowledge about sustainable manufacturing (Understand)
CO2: Identify and apply the QFD tools required for implementing sustainable manufacturing (Apply)
CO3: Conduct Life Cycle Assessment and cost analysis required for Green manufacturing (Apply)
CO4: Apply the design factors and considerations for sustainable manufacturing (Apply)
CO5: Conduct economic and environment analysis for sustainable green manufacturing systems
(Apply)
Text Books
1. Rogers, P.P., Jalal, K.F. and Boyd, J.A., "An Introduction to Sustainable Development", Earth
scan, London, 2018.

374
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Reference Books
1. P. Lawn, "Sustainable Development Indicators in Ecological Economics", Edward Elgar
Publishing Limited 2017.
2. S. Asefa, "The Economics of Sustainable Development", W.E. Upjohn Institute.2017.
3. G. Atkinson, S. Dietz, E. Neumayer, "Handbook of Sustainable Manufacturing". Edward Elgar
Publishing Limited, 2017.
Web Resources
1. [Link] (SUSTAINABILITY THROUGH
GREEN MANUFACTURING SYSTEM)
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 1 3 3
CO2 2 1 3 3
CO3 2 2 1 3 3
CO4 2 2 1 1 3 3
CO5 2 1 3 3
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Interpret the basic Concepts & knowledge about sustainable
manufacturing (Understand)
1. Illustrate the sustainability in manufacturing system through green systems. (Understand)
2. Explain green manufacturing concepts in detail. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Identify and apply the QFD tools required for implementing sustainable
manufacturing (Apply)
1. Explain the Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) policy. (Remember)
2. Demonstrate the environmental impact of current manufacturing systems in detail with a case
study. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Conduct Life Cycle Assessment and cost analysis required for Green
manufacturing (Apply)
1. Examine how the life cycle assessment system should be in green manufacturing assessment.
(Apply)
2. Enumerate the factors affecting the selection of material handling equipment in a production shop
(Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Apply the design factors and considerations for sustainable
manufacturing (Apply)
1. State the role of government, employer and workers for productivity improvement (Understand)
2. Apply the design factors in green manufacturing systems in detail with a case study. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Conduct economic and environment analysis for sustainable green
manufacturing systems (Apply)
1. State the recycling techniques for different natural friendly materials (Understand)
2. Identify the practices, challenges and solutions of Full cost accounting methodology in developed
countries. (Apply)

375
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7718 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING SYSTEM FOR MICROSYSTEM
FABRICATION
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology, Engineering Materials and Metallurgy

Objectives
• Learn about the precision machine tools
• Learn about the macro and micro components.
• Understand handling and operating of the precision machine tools.
• Learn to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other instruments.
• Learn metrology for micro system
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEMS 9
Design, and material selection, micro-actuators: hydraulic, pneumatic, electrostatic/ magnetic etc. for
medical to general purpose applications. Micro-sensors based on Thermal, mechanical, electrical
properties; micro-sensorsfor measurement of pressure, flow, temperature, inertia, force, acceleration,
torque, vibration, and monitoring of manufacturing systems
UNIT II FABRICATION PROCESSES FOR MICRO-SYSTEMS 9
Additive, subtractive, forming process, microsystems-Micro-pumps, micro- turbines, micro engines,
micro-robot,and miniature biomedical devices.
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO PRECISION ENGINEERING 9
Machine tools, holding and handling devices, positioning fixtures for fabrication/ assembly of
microsystems. Precision drives: inch worm motors, ultrasonic motors, stick- slip mechanism and
other piezo-based devices.
UNIT IV PRECISION MACHINING PROCESSES 9
Precision machining processes for macro components - Diamond turning, fixed and free abrasive
processes, finishing processes.
UNIT V METROLOGY FOR MICRO SYSTEMS 9
Metrology for micro systems - Surface integrity and its characterization.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Formative Assessment Test End Semester
Assessment Test (20 Marks) Exams
(20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive Exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE Descriptive
CAT 1 10 AND STUDY Exam
CAT2 10 MARKS
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Outline the concepts and applications of micro systems for advanced manufacturing
(Understand)
CO2: Interpret the various fabrication processes of micro systems. (Understand)
CO3: Enumerate the machines, handling tools and fixtures for the assembly of microsystems.
(Understand)
CO4: Summarize the precision manufacturing processes for macro components. (Understand)
CO5: Apply metrology for micro system (Apply)

376
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Text Books
1. Davim, J. Paulo, ed. Micro fabrication and Precision Engineering: Research and Development.
Woodhead Publishing, 2017
2. Gupta K, editor. Micro and Precision Manufacturing. Springer; 2017
Reference Books
1. Dornfeld, D., and Lee, D. E., Precision Manufacturing, 2008, Springer.
2. H. Nakazawa, Principles of Precision Engineering, 1994, Oxford University Press.
3. Whitehouse, D. J., Handbook of Surface Metrology, Institute of Physics Publishing, Philadelphia
PA, 1994.
4. Murthy.R.L, ―Precision Engineering in Manufacturing‖, New Age International, New
Delhi, 2005
Web Resources
5. [Link] (Advanced Manufacturing System for
Microsystem fabrication)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 1 1 1 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to outline the concepts and applications of micro
systems for advanced manufacturing (Understand)
1. List out the application of MEMS in industries. (Remember)
2. Design a pressure sensor with a mems microsensors suitable for an engineering application.
(Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to Interpret the various fabrication processes of
micro systems. (Understand)
1. Why electrostatic forces used to run micro motors rather than conventional electromagnetic
forces. (Understand)
2. Explain the concept miniaturization of MEMS. Distinguish between micro actuator and micro
accelerometer. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to enumerate the machines, handling tools and
fixtures for the assembly of microsystems. (Understand)
1. Interpret suitable MEMS fixtures for handling and assembly of microparts. (Understand)
2. Compare piezo motors and ultrasonic motors (Understand)

377
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to summarize the precision manufacturing
processes for macro components. (Understand)
1. What is the most accurate machining process? Why? (Understand)
2. Explain the working of diamond turning process? (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to apply metrology for micro system (Apply)
1. Select the gauge which is used to check the perfect threading in hole and explain the process and
machine tool with neat sketch. (Apply)
2. Which parameter influence the surface integrity during rolling process and explain with neat
sketch. (Understand)

378
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7719 ELECTRO AND ELECTROLESS PLATING
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Chemistry

Objectives
• To give an overview of various methods of electro and electroless plating
• To study the various inspection methods in Coating process
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTROPLATING AND ELECTROLESS 9
PLATING
Fundamental Principles – Electro Deposition of Copper, Nickel, Chromium, Zinc, T in and precious
metals such as Gold and Silver – Surface Preparation for Electro Deposition – Electrolytic cleaning.
Measurement of pH, Surface Tension, Conductivity, Throwing Power and Current Efficiency of Electro
plating electrolytes.
UNIT II TYPES OF PLATING 9
Brush Plating – Barrel Plating – Pulse Plating – Electro Forming – Electro Winning – Electro Refining
and their applications.
UNIT III COMPOSITE COATING 9
Need for composite coating – Principles of Alloy Deposition – Mechanism of Co-Deposition –
Composite coating by Electrode position and Electroless Deposition for Nickel – Chromium, Nickel –
Silicon Carbide, Nickel – PTFE – Alloys. Engineering applications of composite coating for Wear
resistance and Tribological applications.
UNIT IV INSPECTION AND TESTING OF ELECTRO/ELECTROLESS 9
DEPOSITION
Testing of Electrodeposit for Thickness, Adhesion, Stress, Porosity, Hardness, Ductility and
Solderability – Use of Hull Cell in Plating – Determination of Corrosion Rate by Polarization method.

UNIT V EFFECT OF VARIOUS PARAMETERS AND DEFECTS IN 9

ELECTRO /ELECTROLESS PLATING
Effect of current density, Particle size, Volume Fraction of Particle in the bath, Agitation, temperature,
PH on deposition rate and volume fraction of Co-deposited particles. Defects in electro plating and
electroless plating – Porosity, Poor adhesion, Hydrogen embrittlement etc –Causes and Remedies.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive exam
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Summarize the fundamentals of Electro and Electroless plating (Understand)
CO2: Categorize different types of plating process (Apply)
CO3: Familiarize composite coating and its application in various fields (Understand)
CO4: Conduct different testing and inspection methods for electro and electroless deposition. (Apply)
CO5: Interpret the effects of various parameters and defects in electro and electroless plating
(Understand)

379
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Text Books
1. Lowenkeeim, F A – Model Electroplating – John Wiley & Sons, Inc., USA
2. [Link], Electroplating and Electroless plating of copper and its alloys, ASM International,
2003
Reference Books
1. Metal Finishing Guide Book and Directory, USA
2. Electro Platers Process control Hand Book, Foulke and Grane
3. Glenn O. Mallory, Juan B. Hajdu, Electroless Plating, Fundamentals and Applications, American
Electroplaters and Surface Finishers Society, 2010
Web Resources
1. NPTEL :: Mechanical Engineering - Technology of Surface Coating (Electro and Electroless plating)
2. [Link] (Electro and Electroless plating)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 2 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to Understand the fundamentals of Electro and
Electroless plating (Understand)
1. Explain briefly the principle and process of electrodeposition in Silver. (Understand)
2. Discuss in detail the electrolytic cleaning process. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to Categorize different types of plating process.
(Apply)

1. Distinguish between Barrel plating and blush plating. (Understand)

2. Demonstrate the application of electroforming in electroplating process with suitable example?
(Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to Familiarize composite coating and its application
in various fields (Understand)

1. Explain the process of Electrodeposition of Nickel and Chromium by composite coating.

(Understand)
2. Briefly explain the applications of composite coating in wear and tribological applications.
(Understand)
380
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to Utilize different testing and inspection methods
for predicting various parameters of electrodeposit (Apply)

1. Determine the corrosion rate of pure aluminium metal by polarization method. (Apply)
2. Write a note on the testing of mechanical properties of electrodeposit. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to Interpret the effects of various parameters in
electro and electroless plating (Understand)

1. Explain the defects in electroplating and electroless plating along with its causes and remedies
(Understand)

2. Write a short note on Hydrogen Embrittlement. (Understand)

381
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7720 ENERGY CONVERSION IN INDUSTRIES
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course:
Nil
Objectives
• Comprehend the techniques available for energy conservation in Industries utilities
• Know the techniques adopted for performance evaluation of thermal utilities
• Learn and appreciate the working principle employed in VCRS and VAM systems
• List the parameters considered in electricity billing and the losses associated with a motor
UNIT I BOILERS 11
Types-Performances evaluation via direct and indirect method–energy conservation avenues.
Properties of steam – Assessment of steam distribution losses – Steam trapping –Condensate and
flash steam recovery system – Opportunities for energy saving in steam consumption systems
UNIT II FURNACES AND THERMIC FLUID HEATERS 7

Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters: method-Energy conservation avenues-Refractory & insulation-
Types & its application

UNIT III HVAC AND WASTE HEAT RECOVERY 9

VCRS – performance assessment – energy savings opportunities – VAM: working, types, benefits,
comparison with vapor compression system. WHR systems: Classification–Benefits- Commercial
waste heat recovery devices: recuperator, regenerator, heat pipe, heat exchangers (Plate, Shell &
Tube), heat pumps, thermo compressor. CHP– Poly generation
UNIT IV ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INDUCTION MOTORS 9
Electricity billing – Demand side management – Power factor improvement transformer losses –
Harmonics induction Motors: Types – Losses – performance assessment adopting direct and indirect
method-Factors affecting motor performance-energy efficient motors

UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES 9

Performance assessment and energy conservation avenues in: fans-blowers–pumps–air
compressors-illumination systems –cooling towers
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive exam
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the methods for energy saving in steam consumption systems. (Understand)
CO2: Discuss about furnaces and Thermal fluid heaters, its type and application. (Understand)
CO3: Enumerate the working principle employed in VCRS and VAM systems (Understand)
CO4: Identify the parameters considered in electricity billing and the losses associated with a motor
(Apply)
CO5: Comprehend the techniques available for energy conservation in electrical utilities (Apply)

382
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Text Books
1. [Link], [Link], [Link], “Industrial Energy Management and Utilisation” Hemisphere
Publication, Washington, 2016

Reference Books
1. S.C . Bhattia “Industrial energy conservation” Woodhead publishing India 2018.
2. W.R. Murphy and G. McKay “Energy Management” Butter worths, London 2017
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Energy Conversion in Industries)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 2 3
CO3 3 3 1 2 3
CO4 3 1 2 1 2 3
CO5 3 1 3 1 3 3
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Interpret the methods for energy saving in steam consumption systems.
(Understand)

1. Explain the Assessment of steam distribution losses (Understand)

2. Enumerate Types & Performances evaluation via direct and indirect method energy conservation
(Remember)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Discuss about furnaces and Thermal fluid heaters, its type and
application. (Understand)

1. Explain the Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters. (Remember)

2. Describe the Insulation and Refractory method with its types and application to new module of
industries (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Enumerate the working principle employed in VCRS and VAM systems
(Understand)
1. Explain the Commercial waste heat recovery devices to process in industries (Understand)
2. Outline the classifications of WHR systems with suitable diagrams (Understand)

383
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Identify the parameters considered in electricity billing and the losses
associated with a motor (Apply)

1. Obtain the Factors affecting motor performance & energy efficient motors (Understand)
2. Identify the Harmonics induction Motors with its Types, Losses, & performance assessment
adopting direct and indirect method (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Comprehend the techniques available for energy conservation in

electrical utilities (Apply)

1. Case study the cooling towers in industries which can be alternate to use in any other places
(Apply)
2. Identify the practices, challenges and solutions of performance assessment Industries
methodology in developed countries. (Apply)

384
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE - VI

385
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21ME7721 Design of Jigs and Fixtures
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology, Design of Machine Elements, Design of Transmission Systems
Objectives
• Understand the importance of tool design for productive manufacturing and the
basic procedure of tool design, drafting of tool drawing etc.,
• Bring in the required properties in the tool material by proper selection and heat
treatment appropriate to the cutting process adopted
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF JIGS AND FIXTURES 9
Introduction – Difference between Jigs and Fixtures – Advantages of jigs and Fixtures – Economy
and cost - Elements of Jigs and Fixtures – Fool Proofing – Materials used in Jigs and Fixtures -
Degrees of Freedom – 12 degrees of freedom – 6 point location principle – 3-2-1 principle of
location – Essential features of Jigs and Fixtures – General Design Principles – Design steps –
Common defects in Jigs design.
UNIT II PRINCIPLES OF LOCATION AND CLAMPING 9
Principles of location – location point – types of locators – pins and studs – V block – cup and cone
location points – adjustable locating points – special adjustable stops – location from finished
holes in the work – Diamond pin locator – Cam operated ‘V’ locator – Quick action ‘V ’ locator - Six
point location of a three legged object – Location of a cylinder on a v-block.
Principles of clamping – types of clamping – lever clamp – hinged clamp – two way clamp –
swinging clamp – wedge clamp – eccentric clamping arrangement – quick action clamp – Cam
operated clamp – quarter turn screw – Toggle clamp – Pneumatic and hydraulic clamps –
Washers - ‘C’ washer – spherical and flat washers.
UNIT III JIGS BUSHINGS 9
Materials for jig bushing - press fit bushing – Fixed renewable bushing – slip renewable bushing –
liner bushing – screw bushing – miscellaneous type of drill bushings – bushing specifications.
UNIT IV DRILL JIGS 9
Open drill jig – plate drill jig – template drill jig – channel drill jig – turn over drill jig – angle plate
drill jig – closed box drill jig – leaf drill jig – post jig – indexing drill jig – universal drill jig - design
of template and leaf jig.
UNIT V PRINCIPLE OF FIXTURE DESIGN 9
Introduction - principles of fixture design – element of fixtures – design consideration of locators
and clamps for fixtures – types of fixtures – design of turning fixtures – mandrels – type of
mandrels – boring fixtures – milling fixtures – essentials of milling fixtures – method of locating
milling fixtures with respect to cutter position – grinding fixtures – surface grinding and
cylindrical grinding fixtures – broaching fixtures – internal and external broaching fixtures –
welding fixtures.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ 1.
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE Descripti
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY ve
Question
s

Course Outcomes
386
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the fundamentals of Jigs and fixtures (Understand)
CO2: Discuss the locating and clamping of Jigs and fixtures (Understand)
CO3: Recognize the mounting of Jigs and Fixtures on machine tool through Jigs Bushings
(Understand)
CO4: Recognize the mounting of Jigs and Fixtures on machine tool through drill jigs
(Understand)
CO5: Apply the design procedure for fixtures. (Apply)
Text Books
5. P. H Josh, Jigs and Fixtures, 3rd edition, TMH, Newdelhi, July 2017
6. Kempster M. H. A. - ‘An Introduction to Jig and Tool Design’ - Viva Books Pvt. Ltd. – 2002
Reference Books
6. John G. Nee - ‘Fundamentals of Tool Design’ - Society of Manufacturing - 1998 - 4th Edition
7. Production Techno1ogy Hand Book’ - HMT - Tata McGraw Hill
8. E. K. Henriksen – ‘Jig and Fixture Design Manual’ - Industrial Press, New York - 1973
9. Donaldson, Lecain and Goold – ‘Tool Design’ - McGraw Hill, New York - 1976
Web Resources
1. [Link] /Design of Jigs and Fixtures
2. [Link]
m / Design of Jigs and Fixtures
3. [Link] / Design of Jigs and Fixtures

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 2 1 3

CO2 3 1 2 1 3

CO3 3 1 2 1 3

CO4 3 1 2 1 3

CO5 3 1 2 1 3

387
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to interpret the fundamentals of Jigs and fixtures
(Understand)
1. Identify the differences between jig and fixtures (Understand)
2. Explain possible freedom of movement o job in a jig, fixture (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to discuss locating and clamping of Jigs and fixtures
(Understand)
1. Identify locating of work piece in a jig, fixture (Understand)
2. list the different types of fixtures (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to recognize the mounting of Jigs and Fixtures on
machine tool through Jigs Bushings (Understand)
1. Explain mounting of jig on a machine tool (Understand)
2. Describe the specifications of bushing (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to recognize the mounting of Jigs and Fixtures on
machine tool through drill jigs (Understand)
1. Explain the indexing of drill jigs (Understand)
2. Describe the mounting of fixtures on the machine tool (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to apply the design procedure for fixtures (Apply)
1. Develop the milling, welding, fixtures and grinding fixtures (Apply)
2. Design procedure of jigs and fixtures (Apply)

388
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7722 FAILURE ANALYSIS AND NDT TECHNIQUES
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology, Engineering materials and Metallurgy

Objectives
• To introduce need and scope of failure analysis and fundamental sources of failures.
• To learn about non-destructive testing and basic principles of visual inspection.
• To study about magnetic testing and principles, techniques.
• To learn the principle of radiography testing and its inspection techniques and methods.
• To study the acoustic testing principle and technique and instrumentation

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction and need and scope of failure analysis. Engineering Disasters and understanding failure
analysis. Fundamental sources of failures. Deficient design. Improper Manufacturing & Assembly. Tree
diagram and FMEA.
UNIT II VISUAL INSPECTION 9
Introduction to Non-Destructive Testing: An Introduction, Visual examination, Basic Principle, The
Eye, Optical aids used for visual inspection, Applications. Liquid Penetrant Testing: Physical
principles, Procedure for penetrant testing, Penetrant testing materials, Penetrant testing methods,
Sensitivity, Applications, Limitations and Standards
UNIT III MAGNETIC TESTING 9
Magnetic Particle Testing, Eddy Current Testing: Magnetism-basic definitions and principle of.
magnetic particle testing, Magnetizing techniques, induced current flow, Procedure used for testing a
component, Equipment Used for magnetic particle testing, Sensitivity, Limitations. Eddy Current
Testing: Principles, Instrumentation for eddy current testing Techniques. Sensitivity Advanced Eddy
Current Test Methods, Applications, Limitations.
UNIT IV RADIOGRAPHY TESTING 9
Radiography, Ultrasonic Testing: Basic principle, Electromagnetic radiation, Sources, Radiation
attenuation in the specimen. Effect of radiation in film, Radiographic imaging, Inspection techniques,
Applications of radiographic inspection, Limitations, Safety in Industrial Radiography, Standards,
Neutron radiography. Ultrasonic Testing: Basic properties of sound beam, Ultrasonic transducers,
Inspection methods, Techniques for Normal Beam Inspection, Techniques for Angle Beam Inspection,
Flaw characterization techniques, Ultrasonic flaw detection equipment, Modes of Display, Immersion
Testing, Applications of Ultrasonic Testing, Advantages, Limitations
UNIT V ACOUSTIC TESTING 9
Acoustic Emission Testing: Principle of Acoustic Emission Testing, Technique, Instrumentation,
Sensitivity, Applications, Standards. Thermograph: Basic Principles, Detectors and Equipment,
Techniques, Applications, Codes and Standards. In Situ Metallographic Examination: Approach to the
Selection of Site for Metallographic examination, Replication process, Significance of Microstructure
observation, Decision making, Applications, Codes and Standards.(digital signal process)
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ 1.
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE Descriptive
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY Questions

389
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Discuss the need and scope of failure analysis and fundamental sources of failures.
(Understand)
CO2: Interpret about non-destructive testing and basic principles of visual inspection. (Understand)
CO3: Conduct magnetic particle testing and eddy current testing with different procedures. (Apply)
CO4: Conduct radiography testing and ultrasonic testing with different procedures. (Apply)
CO5: Characterize the acoustic testing, techniques and instrumentation. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Baldev Raj, [Link], [Link] Practical Non-Destructive Testing, Narosa
Publishing House, 2014
2. Ravi Prakash, Non-Destructive Testing Techniques, 1st revised edition, New Age
InternationalPublishers, 2012
Reference Books
1. ASM Metals Handbook,Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control, American Society of
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 2021, Volume-17.
2. Paul E Mix, Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide, Wiley, 2nd Edition
NewJersey, 2005
3. 5. [Link] and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata McGraw-
HillEducation, 2nd edition (2011).
Web Resources
1. [Link] FAILURE ANALYSIS AND NDT
TECHNIQUES
2. [Link] / FAILURE ANALYSIS AND NDT
TECHNIQUES

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 3

390
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to discuss the need and scope of failure analysis and
fundamental sources of failures (Understand)
1. Illustrate about discontinuities. Explain various types of discontinuities with examples
(Understand)
2. Compare and contrast the fundamental sources of failures with examples (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to interpret about non-destructive testing and basic
principles of visual inspection. (Understand)
1. Illustrate the methodologies used to inspect the gear tooth profile and explain details of visual or
optical inspection procedure. (Understand)
2. Compare and contrast the principles, characteristics detected, advantages, limitations and
applications of visual inspection, liquid penetrant testing methods. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to conduct magnetic particle testing and eddy
current testing with different procedures (Apply)
1. Elucidate the procedure used for testing a component through Magnetic Particle Testing method
and briefly explain its applications. (Understand)
2. Construct the block diagram of Eddy current testing method and explain its working principle.
(Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to conduct radiography testing and ultrasonic
testing with different procedures. (Apply)
1. Construct the black diagram of X-ray Radiography with a neat sketch and state its advantages,
limitations and applications. (Apply)
2. Describe in details about the working principle of Pulse echo, Transmission and Phased Array
techniques with a neat sketch. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to characterize the acoustic testing, techniques and
instrumentation. (Apply)
1. Illustrate the working principle of Acoustic Emission testing method with a neat sketch.
(Understand)
2. Demonstrate and explain the simple experimental test setup for Acoustic Emission testing.
(Apply)

391
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21ME7723 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND WASTE HEAT RECOVERY
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Thermal Engineering, Heat and Mass Transfer

Objectives
• To impart knowledge on the various methods of Energy Conservation, Energy policies and
Waste heat recovery from thermal systems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Energy Scenario – world and India. Energy Resources availability in India. Energy consumption pattern.
Energy conservation potential in various Industries and commercial establishments. Energy intensive
industries – an overview. Energy conservation and energy efficiency – needs and advantages, Energy
strategy for the future, Energy Conservation Act.

UNIT II ENERGY POLICIES 9

National energy policy in the last plan periods, Energy use and Energy supply, Overview of renewable
energy policy and the Five Year Plan programs, Basic concept of Input – Output analysis, Concept of
energy multiplier and implication of energy multiplier for analysis of regional and national energy
policy – Carbon Trading – Renewable Energy Certification – CDM

UNIT III WASTE HEAT RECOVERY IN THERMAL UTILITIES AND 9

SYSTEMS
Election criteria for waste heat recovery technologies – recuperators – Regenerators – Economizers –
plate heat exchangers – thermic fluid heaters – Waste heat boilers classification, location, service
conditions, design Considerations – fluidized bed heat exchangers – heat pipe exchangers – heat pumps
– sorption systems, identifying opportunities for energy savings – steam systems, Cogeneration and
HVAC systems.
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION AND AUDITING 9
Definition, need, and types of energy audit; Energy management (audit) approach: Understanding
energy costs, bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing
system efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements; Fuel & energy substitution. Energy
auditing – types, methodologies, barriers. Energy audit instruments; Duties and responsibilities of
energy managers and auditors – Energy audit questionnaire.
UNIT V ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9
Organizational background desired for energy management persuasion, motivation, publicity role,
industrial energy management systems. Energy monitoring and targeting – Elements, data, information
analysis and techniques – Energy consumption, production, cumulative sum of differences (CUSUM).
Energy Management Information Systems (EMIS). Economics of various energy conservation schemes
– Energy policy and energy labeling
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ 1.
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE Descriptive
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY Questions

392
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1. Summarize the present energy scenario and interpret the need for energy conservation
measures. (Understand)
CO2. Familiarize with various energy policies (National and International) & standards. (Understand)
CO3. Comprehend the concepts of waste heat recovery system and perform energy analysis. (Apply)
CO4. Conduct energy audit and optimize energy requirements. (Apply)
CO5. Interpret the economics of energy conservation schemes in industrial energy management
systems. (Understand)
Text Books
1. Chirla Chandra Sekhara Reddy, Gade Pandu Rangaiah, Waste Heat Recovery: Principles and
Industrial Applications, World Scientific Publishing Co Pte Ltd, 2022.
2. Energy Conservation Guidebook, Dale R Patrick, Stephen W Fardo, 2nd Edition, CRC Press
Reference Books
1. Steve Doty, Wayne C. Turner “Energy Management Handbook”, 7th Edition, the Fairmont Press, Inc.,
(2013)
2. F Kreith, [Link], “Energy management and conservation handbook”, CRC Press, (2017)
3. Industrial Energy Conservation Manuals, MIT Press, Mass, (2007)
4. YP Abbi and Shashank Jain. “Handbook on Energy Audit and Environment Management”, TERI
Publications, (2006)
5. Handbook of Energy Audits, Albert Thumann, 6th Edition, The Fairmont Press
Web Resources
1. [Link]/ ENERGY CONSERVATION AND WASTE HEAT RECOVERY
2. [Link]/ ENERGY CONSERVATION AND WASTE HEAT RECOVERY
3. [Link] ENERGY CONSERVATION AND WASTE HEAT RECOVERY

393
 Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 1 2 3 1 3
CO2 1 1 2 3 1 3
CO3 2 1 2 3 1 3
CO4 1 2 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 2 1 2 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to summarize the present energy scenario and
interpret the need for energy conservation measures (Understand)
1. What are the energy-saving options available for office buildings? (Understand)
2. How can the construction industry promote energy conservation? (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to familiarize with various energy policies
(National and International) & standards. (Understand)
1. How are thermic fluid heaters utilized in waste heat recovery? (Understand)
2. How can opportunities for energy savings be identified in waste heat recovery systems?
(Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to comprehend the concepts of waste heat
recovery system and perform energy analysis (Apply)
1. Develop the design considerations which are important for waste heat recovery systems? (Apply)
2. How do fluidized bed heat exchangers contribute to waste heat recovery? (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to conduct energy audit and optimize energy
requirements. (Apply)

1. What is the importance of matching energy use to requirement in energy audits? (Understand)
2. Optimize input energy requirements in energy audits? (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to interpret the economics of energy

conservation schemes in industrial energy management systems. (Understand)
1. What organizational background is desirable for energy management persuasion and motivation?
(Understand)
2. What techniques are used in analyzing energy consumption, production, and cumulative sum of
differences (CUSUM)? (Understand)

394
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7724 SIMULATION OF IC ENGINES
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Thermodynamics, Thermal Engineering
Objectives
• The basic engine parameters of significance for the operation of an engine and the effect of
varying them on performance and fuel economy.
• Simulate engine operation through the use of ideal air cycle models, ideal air exchange models,
fuel air processes with chemical equilibrium and time dependent models that include heat
transfer and time dependent combustion.
• Use simple models to describe the combustion processes in spark ignition and diesel engines
UNIT I First and second laws of thermodynamics 9
First and second laws of thermodynamics – Estimation of properties of gas mixtures - Structure of
engine models – Open and closed cycle models - Cycle studies

UNIT II Chemical Reactions and Heat Transfer in IC Engine 9

Chemical Reactions, First law application to combustion, Heat of combustion – Adiabatic flame
temperature, Chemical Equilibrium and calculation of equilibrium composition - Heat transfer in
engines – Heat transfer models for engines.

UNIT III Combustion in SI engines 9

Combustion in SI engines, Flame propagation and velocity, Single zone models – Multi zone models –
Mass burning rate, Turbulence models – One dimensional models – Chemical kinetics modeling –
Multidimensional models.
UNIT IV Combustion in CI engines 9
Combustion in CI engines Single zone models – Premixed-Diffusive models – Wiebe’ model –
Whitehouse way model, Two zone models - Multizone models- Meguerdichian and Watson’s model,
Hiroyasu’s model, Lyn’s model – Introduction to Multidimensional and spray modelling
UNIT V Thermodynamics of the gas exchange process 9
Thermodynamics of the gas exchange process - Flows in engine manifolds – One dimensional and
multidimensional models, Flow around valves and through ports Models for scavenging in two stroke
engines – Isothermal and non-isothermal models.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive Exam
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret about the first and second law of thermodynamics and properties of gas mixtures.
(Understand)
CO2: Summarize the chemical reactions and heat transfer in IC Engine. (Understand)
CO3: Demonstrate the models to describe the combustion of SI Engine. (Apply)
CO4: Demonstrate the models to describe the combustion of CI Engine. (Apply)
CO5: Discuss about the thermodynamics of gas exchange process (Understand)

395
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Text Books
1. Simulation and Optimization of Internal Combustion Engines”, SAE International, 2021
2. 1D and Multi-D Modeling Techniques for IC Engine Simulation”, SAE International, 2020
Reference Books
1. Ashley S. Campbell, Thermodynamic Analysis of Combustion Engines, John Wiley and Sons,
1980.
2. [Link], Computer Simulation of Spark Ignition Engine Processes, Universities Press, 1995.
3. [Link], Computer Simulation of Compression Ignition Engine Processes, Universities Press,
2002.
4. [Link], Internal Combustion Engine Modeling, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1989.
5. [Link] and [Link], Combustion Modeling in Reciprocating Engines, Plenum Press,
1980.
Web Resources
1. [Link] SIMULATION OF IC ENGINE

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 1 3 1 2
CO3 2 1 1 1 3 1 3
CO4 2 1 1 1 3 1 3
CO5 2 1 1 1 3 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to interpret about the first and second law of
thermodynamics and properties of gas mixtures. (Understand)
1. Sate first and second law of thermodynamics (Understand)
2. Difference between open loop and closed loop systems (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to summarize the chemical reactions and heat
transfer in IC Engine. (Understand)
1. Describe how equilibrium constant can be used to calculate the composition of an equilibrium
mixture. (Understand)
2. What are the different types of heat transfer in an engine? (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to demonstrate the models to describe the
combustion of SI Engine. (Apply)
1. Develop the practice turbulence model for SI engine (Apply)
2. Interpret the chemical kinetics modelling and its principles (Understand)

396
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to demonstrate the models to describe the
combustion of CI Engine (Apply)
1. Discuss the single zone and multizone model of combustion in SI engine (Understand)
2. Develop the practice model for Watson's theory of caring (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to discuss about the thermodynamics of gas
exchange process (Understand)
1. Distinguish between isothermal and non-isothermal models (Understand)
2. Interpret the process of gas exchange in IC engine (Understand)

397
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21ME7725 Supply chain Management and Logistics
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
NIL

Objectives
The course provides insight on the fundamentals, tools and techniques of supply chain and logistic
networks
UNIT I Introduction 9
Role of Logistics and Supply Chain Management: Scope and Importance- Evolution of Supply Chain -
Decision Phases in Supply Chain - Competitive and Supply Chain Strategies – Drivers of Supply Chain
Performance and Obstacles.
UNIT II Supply Chain Network Design 9
Role of Distribution in Supply Chain – Factors Influencing Distribution Network Design – Design
Options for Distribution Network Distribution Network in Practice-Role of Network Design in Supply
Chain – Framework for Network Decisions.
UNIT III Logistics In Supply Chain 9
Role of transportation in supply chain – factors affecting transportations decision – Design option for
transportation network – Tailored transportation – Routing and scheduling in transportation.

UNIT IV Sourcing and Coordination In Supply Chain 9

Role of sourcing supply chain supplier selection assessment and contracts- Design collaboration -
sourcing planning and analysis - supply chain co-ordination - Bull whip effect – Effect of lack of co-
ordination in supply chain and obstacles – Building strategic partnerships and trust within a supply
chain.
UNIT V Supply chain and Information Technology (IT) 9
The role IT in supply chain- The supply chain IT frame work - Customer Relationship Management –
Internal supply chain management – supplier relationship management – future of IT in supply chain –
E-Business in supply chain.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive Questions
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Discuss the building blocks, functions and drivers of supply chain management (Understand)
CO2: Summarize the factors involved in network design (Understand)
CO3: Illustrate the role of logistics in industrial supply chain (Apply)
CO4: Interpret the role of coordination in supply chain (Understand)
CO5: Discuss the necessity of IT in different cases of supply chain (Understand)

398
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Text Books
1. Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindl and Kalra, “Supply Chain Management, Strategy, Planning, and
Operation”, Pearson Education, 7 th edition 2018.

Reference Books
1. Simchi – Levi Davi, “Designing and Managing the Supply Chain”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, New Delhi, 3rd edition 2019.
2. Srinivasan, G, “Quantitative Models in Operations and Supply Chain Management”, Prentice Hall
India Pvt Limited, India, 2018.
Web Resources
1. [Link] Supply chain management and logistics
2. [Link] Supply chain management and logistics
3. [Link] Supply chain management and logistics
4. [Link] Supply chain management and logistics
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 3 2 1 1 3
CO2 1 3 2 1 1 3
CO3 1 3 2 1 1 3
CO4 1 3 2 1 1 3
CO5 1 3 2 1 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Discuss the building blocks, functions and drivers of supply chain
management (Understand)
1. Discuss in detail about decision phases in supply chain. (Understand)
2. Interpret the drivers of supply chain performance. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Summarize the factors involved in network design (Understand)

1. Summarize the framework of structuring drivers. (Understand)

2. Discuss in detail about factors influencing distribution network design (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Illustrate the role of logistics in industrial supply chain (Apply)
1. Show in detail about factors affecting transportations decision. (Understand)
2. Determine in detail about tailored transportation. (Apply)

399
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Interpret the role of coordination in supply chain. (Understand)

1. Show in detail about supplier selection assessment and contracts. (Understand)

2. Discuss in detail about sourcing planning and analysis (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Discuss the necessity of IT in different cases of supply chain.

(Understand)

1. Summarize the supply chain IT frame work. (Understand)

2. Discuss in detail about E-Business in supply chain. (Understand)

400
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7726 OPERATIONS RESEARCH
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Matrices and Advanced Calculus, Partial Differential Equation and Application of Fourier Series,
Probability and Statistical Analysis
Objectives
• To learn Selecting the constraints on the availability of resources and developing a model and
rendering an optimal solution for the given circumstances.
• To study Appraising the challenges in the transportation and production problems and
furnishing a rational solution to maximize the benefits.
• To learn the network models and project management problems and rendering an optimal
solution for the given circumstances.
• To learn Planning the purchase/ manufacturing policies, managing the spares/ stocks and
meeting the customer demands.
• To Analysing the queue discipline and exploring the avenues for better customer service.
UNIT I Linear Models 9
Introduction - Phases of OR Study – Formation of Linear Programming Problem (LPP) - Canonical form
of LPP - Solutions to LPP - Graphical Solution - Simplex Algorithm - Artificial Variables Technique - Big
M Method.
UNIT II Transportation Problems, Assignment Problems and 9
Sequencing Problems
Transportation Problems: Mathematical Formulation-Basic Feasible Solutions – North-West Corner
(NWC) – Least Cost Method (LCM) – Vogels Approximation Method (VAM). Assignment Problems:
Mathematical Formulation –Hungarian Algorithm. Sequencing Problems:1 Jobs N Machine, N Jobs 1
Machine, N Jobs 2 Machine, N Jobs 3 Machine, N Jobs M Machine and 2 Jobs N Machine Problems.
UNIT III Network Models and Project Management 9
Network Models: Shortest Route - Minimal Spanning Tree - Maximum Flow Models. Project
Management: Construction of Networks-Activity and Event Based Diagrams –Program Evaluation and
Review Technique (PERT) & Critical Path Method (CPM) Problems – Cost Analysis.
UNIT IV Inventory Models 9
Types of Inventory – Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) - Deterministic Inventory Models - Price Break
Problems - Stochastic Inventory Models - Multi Item Deterministic Models - Selective Inventory Control
Techniques.
UNIT V Queuing Models and Replacement Models 9
Queuing Models: Queuing Systems and Structures - Notations - Parameter - Single Server and
Multiserver Models. Replacement Models: Replacement of Items Due to Deterioration with and Without
Time Value of Money - Individual and Group Replacement Policy
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
Test (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
(20 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 [Link] 1. Descriptive
MARKS 2. Online Quizzes Questions
CAT 2 – 10 [Link]-Solving Activities
MARKS

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
401
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
CO.1 Formulate and solve linear programming problems. (Apply)
CO.2 Develop solutions to transportation, assignment, and sequencing problems. (Apply)
CO.3 Construct networks and analyse optimality for various applications. (Analyse)
CO.4 Identify inventory models and solve for optimality. (Apply)
CO.5 Analyse queuing characteristics and compute the optimum replacement period for capital
equipment and items that fail suddenly (Analyse)
Text Books
1. Gupta P.K. & Hira D.S., "Operations Research", 7th Edition, S. Chand Publishing, New Delhi, 2014.

Reference Books
1. Taha & Hamdy A., "Operation Research: An Introduction", 10th Edition, Pearson Education,
Chennai, 2017.
2. Hiller Frederick S. , Lieberman Gerald J., Bodhibrata Nag & Preetam Basu, "Introduction to
Operations Research", 10th Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, Bengaluru, 2017.
3. Vohra N.D., "Quantitative Techniques in Management", 5th Edition, McGraw Hill Education,
Noida, 2017.
Web Resources
1. [Link] /Operations Research
2. [Link] / Operations Research
3. [Link] / Operations Research

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO 1 3 2 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3
CO 3 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO 4 1 1 3 1 3
CO 5 1 1 3 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Formulate and solve linear programming problems. (Apply)
1. How does the formation of a Linear Programming Problem (LPP) differ from other
optimization problems? (Understand)
2. Minimize Z=3x1+2x2 solve by graphically.
Subject to 5x1+x2≥10
x1+x2≥6
x1+4x2≥12
X1,X2,≥0 (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Develop solutions to transportation, assignment, and sequencing problems.

(Apply)
1. Obtain an initial basic feasible solution to the following transportation problem using the North-
West Corner Rule. (Apply)

402
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

2. Use the Hungarian method to solve the following assignment problem: (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Construct networks and analyse optimality for various applications.
(Analyze)
1. Draw the A project consists of seven activities for which the relevant data are given below:

i. Draw the network. ii. Identify the critical path and find the project completion time. (Analyze)

2. Construct the project network for project summarized in Table Q12b. Calculate the expected
duration and variance of each activity and determine the critical path and expected project
completion time. (Analyze)

403
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Identify inventory models and solve for optimality. (Apply)

1. An industry produces a particular product with a demand rate r =14000 units/year, Production
rate k = 35,000 units/year, set up cost Co = Rs. 500 per setup and carrying cost Cc = Rs.
15/unit/year. Determine the EBQ ad cycle time. (Apply)

2. A newspaper boy buys papers for 30 paise each and sells them for 70 paise. He cannot return
unsold newspapers. Daily demand has the following distribution. (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Analyse queuing characteristics and compute the optimum replacement
period for capital equipment and items that fail suddenly. (Analyze)

1. A machine owner finds from his past records that the costs per year of maintaining a machine,
whose purchase price is Rs.6000, are as given below, Determine at what age a replacement is
due. (Analyze)

2. The following mortality rates have been observed for a certain type of light bulbs.

There are 1000 bulbs in use and it costs Rs.2 to replace an individual bulb, which has burnt out. If all
the bulbs were replaced simultaneously, it would cost 50 paise per bulb. Find the average cost of
group replacement policy. (Analyze)

404
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7727 Introduction to NANO Technology
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• Make the students to understand about the nanomaterials, synthesis and its characterization.

UNIT I BASICS AND SCALE OF NANOTECHNOLOGY 9

Introduction –Scientific revolutions –Time and length scale in structures –Definition of a nanosystem
–Dimensionality and size dependent phenomena –Surface to volume ratio – Fraction of surface atoms
–Surface energy and surface stress – surface defects – Properties at nanoscale (optical, mechanical,
electronic and magnetic).

UNIT II DIFFERENT CLASSES OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Classification based on dimensionality – Quantum Dots, Wells and Wires – Carbon – based nano
materials (buckyballs, nanotubes, graphene)–Metal based nano materials (nanogold, nanosilver and
metal oxides) – Nanocomposites – Nanopolymers –Nanoglasses –Nano ceramics – Biological
nanomaterials.

UNIT III SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Classification of synthesis: Top down and bottom up nanofabrication. Chemical Methods: Metal
Nanocrystals by Reduction – Solvothermal Synthesis – Photochemical Synthesis – Sonochemical
Routes – Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) –Metal Oxide – Chemical Vapor Deposition
(MOCVD).Physical Methods:Ball Milling –Electro deposition – Spray Pyrolysis – Flame Pyrolysis –
DC/RF Magnetron Sputtering – Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE)
UNIT IV FABRICATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF 9
NANOSTRUCTURES
Nanofabrication: Photolithography and its limitation – Electron-beam lithography (EBL) –
Nanoimprint –Softlithography patterning. Characterization: Field Emission Scanning Electron
Microscopy (FESEM) –Environmental Scanning Electron Microscopy (ESEM) High Resolution
Transmission Electron Microscope (HRTEM) –Scanning Tunneling Microscope (STM) – Surface
enhanced Raman spectroscopy (SERS) – X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) – Auger electron
spectroscopy (AES) –Rutherford backscattering spectroscopy (RBS).
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANO TECHNOLOGY 9
Solar energy conversion and catalysis – Molecular electronics and printed electronics –
Nanoelectronics – Polymers with aspecial architecture – Liquid crystalline systems – Linear and
nonlinear optical and electro-optical properties, Applications in displays and other devices –
Nanomaterials for data storage – Photonics, Plasmonics – Chemical and biosensors – Nanomedicine
and Nanobiotechnology –Nanotoxicology challenges.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive type
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

405
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the basics in nano sciences and scales using in this technology. (Understand)
CO2: Summarize the classification of nano materials. (Understand)
CO3: Outline the various synthesizing methods for nanomaterials. (Understand)
CO4: Discuss the fabricating methodologies and characterization techniques for nano materials.
(Understand)
CO5: Demonstrate the applications of nanotechnologies in various fields. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Hari Singh Nalwa, “Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology”, Academic Press, (2012)
2. Pradeep T., “A Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
Ltd., (2016)
Reference Books
1. Charles P. Poole Jr., Frank J. Ownes, ‘Introduction to Nanotechnology”, Wiley Interscience,
(2003)
2. Dupas C., Houdy P., Lahmani M., “Nanoscience: Nanotechnologies and Nanophysics”, Springer-
Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, (2007)
3. Mark Ratner and Daniel Ratner, “Nano Technology”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, (2003)
4. Nabok A., “Organic and Inorganic Nanostructures”, Artech House, (2005)
5. Bhusan, Bharat (Ed), “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, 2ndEdition, (2007)
Web Resources
1. [Link] Introduction to NANO technology

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 3 3
CO2 2 1 1 3 3
CO3 2 1 1 3 3
CO4 2 1 1 3 3
CO5 2 1 1 3 3
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to interpret the basics in nano sciences and
scales using in this technology. (Understand)
1. Discuss about the implications of Nano Technology. (Understand)
2. Write a technical note on “Time and length scale in structures ". (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to summarize the classification of nano
materials. (Understand)
1. Make short note on Metal based Nano materials. (Understand)
2. Explain Synthesis of Nanoparticles through Homogenous and Heterogeneous Nucleation.
(Understand)

406
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to outline the various synthesizing methods for
nanomaterials. (Understand)
1. Discuss in detail different types of ball-milling and their advantages. (Understand)
2. Write in detail the special magnetic properties of nanomaterials with special reference to Super
para magnetism. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to discuss the fabricating methodologies and
characterization techniques for nano materials. (Understand)
1. Explain in detail how XRD analysis is important in nanomaterial characterization. (Understand)
2. Explain in detail size and surface, morphological analysis of nanostructures using SEM.
(Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to demonstrate the applications of
nanotechnologies in various fields. (Apply)
1. Discuss the advantages and basic principles of Nano sensors. (Understand)
2. Explain in detail about the case study using Plasmonics. (Apply)

407
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

L T P C
21ME7728 Smart and New Materials
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• To provide Knowledge of smart materials and structures in designing mechanical systems
for advanced engineering applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE 9
Classes of materials and their usage – Intelligent /Smart materials – Evaluation of materials Science –
Structural material – Functional materials – Poly functional materials – Generation of smart materials –
Diverse areas of intelligent materials –Primitive functions of intelligent materials – Intelligent inherent
in materials –Examples of intelligent materials, structural materials, Electrical materials, biocompatibl
e materials etc. – Intelligent biological materials – Biomimetics – Wolff’s law– Technological
applications of Intelligent materials.
UNIT II SMART MATERIALS AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS 9
The principal ingredients of smart materials – Thermal materials – Sensing technologies – Micro
sensors – Intelligent systems – Hybrid smart materials – An algorithm for synthesizing a smart material
– Passive sensory smart structures–Reactive actuator based smart structures – Active sensing and
reactive smart structures – Smart skins – Aero elastic tailoring of airfoils – Synthesis of future smart
systems.
UNIT III ELECTRO-RHEOLOGICAL (FLUIDS) SMART MATERIALS 9
Mechanisms and properties, Fluid Composition and behavior, The Bingham Plastic and Related Models,
Pre-Yield Response Post-Yield flow applications in Clatches, Dampers and Others.
UNIT IV PIEZOELECTRIC SMART MATERIALS 9
Background – Electrostriction – Pyroelectricity – Piezoelectricity – Industrial piezoelectric materials –
PZT – PVDF – PVDF film – Properties of commercial piezoelectric materials – Properties of Piezoelectric
film (explanation) – Smart materials featuring piezoelectric elements.
UNIT V SHAPE – MEMORY (ALLOYS) SMART MATERIALS 9
Background on shape – memory alloys (SMA) Nickel – Titanium alloy (Nitinol) –Materials
characteristics of Nitinol – Martensitic transformations – Austenitictrans formations – Thermoelastic
martensitic transformations – Cu based SMA, chiral materials – Applications of SMA – Continuum
applications of SMA.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive type
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Outline the behaviour and applicability of various smart materials. (Understand)
CO2: Discuss the behavior of smart materials and structural systems. (Understand)
CO3: Summarize the properties and behavior of Electro-Rheological material. (Understand)
CO4: Interpret the properties and applications of Piezoelectric smart materials. (Understand)
CO5: Infer knowledge on the characteristics and applications of SMA material. (Understand)
408
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Text Books
1. [Link] and B.S. Thompson, Smart Materials and Structures Chapman and Hall, London, First
Edition, 2013
2. T.W. Deurig, [Link], [Link] and [Link], Engineering aspects of Shape Memory
alloys, Butterworth –Heinemann, 2015
Reference Books
1. Martin, J.W., Engineering Materials, Their properties and Applications, Wykedham Publications
(London) Ltd., 1987.
2. [Link], Smart Materials, Structures and Mathematical issues, Technomic Publising Co., USA,
2017.
3. Van Vlack.L.H., Elements of Materials Science and Engineering Prentice Hall; Publishers, Sixth
edition, 1989.
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Smart and New Materials)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 2 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 2 3 1 1 1 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to outline the behavior and applicability of various
smart materials. (Understand)
1. Explain the diverse areas of intelligent materials. (Understand)
2. Write short notes on Biomimetics. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to discuss the behavior of smart materials and
structural systems. (Understand)
1. List the properties of Micro sensors and its applications. (Understand)
2. Explain in detail about the Reactive actuator based smart structures (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to summarize the properties and behavior of
Electro-Rheological material. (Understand)
1. Explain the Working Principle and application of ER Fluids. (Remember)
2. Compare ER Fluids with Other Smart Materials. (Understand)

409
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to interpret the properties and applications of
Piezoelectric smart materials. (Understand)
1. List and explain the Industrial piezoelectric materials. (Understand)
2. Distinguish the difference between Pyroelectricity and Piezoelectricity. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to infer knowledge on the characteristics and
applications of SMA material. (Understand)
1. Explain in detail about characteristics of Nitinol. (Understand)
2. Describe the application of SMA in nuclear reactors. (Understand)

410
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7729 DRONE TECHNOLOGIES
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• To understand the basics of drone concepts
• To learn and understand the fundaments of design, fabrication and programming of drone
• To impart the knowledge of drone flying and operation
• To know about the various applications of drone
• To understand the safety risks and guidelines of fly safely
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DRONE TECHNOLOGY 9
Drone Concept - Vocabulary Terminology- History of drone - Types of current generation of drones
based on their method of propulsion- Drone technology impact on the businesses- Drone business
through entrepreneurship- Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and employability
UNIT II DRONE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND PROGRAMMING 9
Classifications of the UAV -Overview of the main drone parts- Technical characteristics of the parts -
Function of the component parts -Assembling a drone- The energy sources- Level of autonomy- Drones
configurations -The methods of programming drone- Download program - Install program on
computer- Running Programs- Multi rotor stabilization- Flight modes -Wi-Fi connection.
UNIT III DRONE FLYING AND OPERATION 9
Concept of operation for drone -Flight modes- Operate a small drone in a controlled environment
Drone controls Flight operations –management tool –Sensors-Onboard storage capacity - Removable
storage devices- Linked mobile devices and applications
UNIT IV DRONE COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS 9
Choosing a drone based on the application -Drones in the insurance sector- Drones in delivering mail,
parcels and other cargo- Drones in agriculture- Drones in inspection of transmission lines and power
distribution -Drones in filming and panoramic picturing
UNIT V FUTURE DRONES AND SAFETY 9
The safety risks- Guidelines to fly safely -Specific aviation regulation and standardization- Drone
license- Miniaturization of drones- Increasing autonomy of drones -The use of drones in swarms
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ 1.
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE Descriptive
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY Questions

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Discuss the various types and concepts of drone technology. (Understand)
CO2: Summarize the fundamentals of drone fabrication and programming. (Understand)
CO3: Interpret the knowledge of drone flying and operations. (Understand)
CO4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications. (Apply)
CO5: Discuss the guidelines for safety flying of a drone. (Understand)

411
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Text Books
1. Daniel Tal and John Altschuld, “Drone Technology in Architecture, Engineering and
Construction: A Strategic Guide to Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Operation and Implementation”,
2021 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc, 2016
Reference Books
1. John Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and ROVs”, Que
Publishing, 2016
2 . Zavrsnik, “Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for Security and
Surveillance”, Springer, 2018.
Web Resources
1. [Link] /Drone Technologies
2. [Link] / Drone Technologies
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 1 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 1 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 1 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 1 2 1 1 1 3 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Discuss the various types and concepts of drone technology (Understand)
1. Describe in details about types of current generation of drones based on their method of
propulsion (Understand)
2. Explain briefly about the Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and employability
(Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Summarize the fundamentals of drone fabrication and programming.
(Understand)
1 Explain the technical characteristics of the parts of Drone and Functions of the component parts of
drone. (Understand)
2 Describe the methods of programming which are stored inside the drone. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Interpret the knowledge of drone flying and operations (Understand)
1. Describe the operations of a small drone in a controlled environment (Understand)

2. Interpret the classifications of Removable storage devices and linked mobile devices and briefly
explain the applications of this storage devices (Understand)

412
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications. (Apply)

1 Demonstrate the applications of drones in agriculture. (Apply)

2 Illustrate the applications of drones in inspection of transmission lines and power distribution and
also Drones in filming and panoramic picturing. (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Discuss the guidelines for safety flying of a drone. (Understand)
1. Explain the guidelines to fly safely and Specific aviation regulation and standardization and in
Drone license. (Understand)
2. Describe the methods of miniaturization of drones for Increasing autonomy of drones and also
describe the use of drones in swarms. (Understand)

413
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7730 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• This course aims to acquaint with the idea of Safety Rules followed in Industries and recognize
the safety legislation, OHS, safety management and Human factors Issues
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Evolution of modern safety concepts – Fire prevention – Mechanical hazards – Boilers, Pressure
vessels, Electrical Exposure – First Aid.
UNIT II CHEMICAL HAZARDS 9
Chemical exposure – Toxic materials – Radiation Ionizing and Non-ionizing Radiation – Industrial
Hygiene – Industrial Toxicology – Toxic Chemicals and its harmful effects on humans - Factors
influencing the effects of toxic materials
UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL 9
Industrial Health Hazards – Environmental Control – Environmental Protection Act – Industrial Noise
– Noise measuring instruments, Control of Noise, Vibration – Personal Protection
UNIT IV HAZARD ANALYSIS 9
System Safety Analysis –Techniques – Fault Tree Analysis (FTA), Failure Modes and Effects Analysis
(FMEA), HAZOP analysis and Risk Assessment.
UNIT V SAFETY REGULATIONS 9
Explosions – Disaster management – catastrophe control, hazard control, Factories Act, Safety
regulations Product safety – case studies.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Illustrate the representation of various safety concepts and principles followed in real time
Industries (Understand)
CO2: Outline the chemical exposures in industries and industrial toxicology (Understand)
CO3: Classify the various types of environmental hazards in workplace, effects and its control
measures (Understand)
CO4: Apply various hazard analysis and risk assessment techniques in industries (Apply)
CO5: Demonstrate the various safety standards in industries with the help of case studies (Apply)

414
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
Text Books
1. R.K. Jain & Sunil S. Rao, "Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management Systems", 3 rd
Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2022.
2. C. Ray Asfahl & David [Link] "Industrial Safety & Health Management", Prentice Hall
Publishers, 2018.
Reference Books
1. David [Link], “Occupational Safety and Health for Technologists”, Engineers and Managers,
Pearson Education Ltd. 8th Edition, (2014)
2. Basudev Panda, "Industrial Safety, Health Environment and Security", 2013.
3. Yang Miang Goh , "Introduction To Workplace Safety And Health Management", World
Scientific Publishing Company, 2020
Web Resources
1. [Link] /Industrial Safety Engineering

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 3 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Illustrate the representation of various safety concepts and principles
followed in Real Time Industries (Understand)
1. Illustrate the various media available and used for extinguishing fire. (Understand)
2. Enlist various safety measures while working on plants (Remember)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Outline the chemical exposures in industries and industrial toxicology
(Understand)
1. How hazards are monitored and can be controlled at the workplace in chemical industry?
(Remember)
2. Discuss Industrial Toxicology and how toxic chemicals will effect on humans? (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Classify the various types of environmental hazards in workplace, effects
and its control measures (Understand)
1. List out the various kinds of PPE and how it will protect against humans? (Remember)
2. Discuss in detailed procedure to eliminate noise in working environment using hierarchy of
controls technique (Understand)

415
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Apply various hazard analysis and risk assessment techniques in
industries (Apply)
1. Construct fault tree for cotton disease involved in textile industry and evaluate using gate by gate
method (Apply)
2. Outline the FMEA Procedures and develop the FMEA check sheet with suitable example.
(Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Demonstrate the various safety standards in industries with the help of
case studies (Apply)
1. Illustrate the Bhopal Gas Tragedy Disaster 1984 (Apply)
2. Outline the Chapter III under Factories Act 1948 (Understand)

416
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

OPEN ELECTIVE - I

417
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

21ME5801 NUCLEAR ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course:
Engineering Physics
Objectives
To gain some fundamental knowledge about nuclear physics, nuclear reactor, nuclear fuels,
reactors and safe disposal of nuclear wastes

UNIT I NUCLEAR PHYSICS 7

Nuclear model of an atom–Equivalence of mass and energy–binding–radioactivity–half life–
neutron interactions–cross sections
UNIT II NUCLEAR REACTIONS AND REACTION MATERIALS 9

Mechanism of nuclear fission and fusion – radio activity – chain reactions – critical mass and
composition – nuclear fuel cycles and its characteristics – uranium production and purification
–Zirconium ,thorium,beryllium.
UNIT III NUCLEAR SAFETY SYSTEMS 11
Safety objectives, Shutdown systems in PWR,BWR,PHWR, Reactivity Worth of shutdown
system, Operating Environment, Grouping of safety systems, Heat Removal systems, Emergency
Core Cooling, Containment and subsystem, Site selection and Rejection criterion.
UNIT IV NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 9
Introduction, Fermi pile Experiment, Major Components of nuclear power plants. Classifications
of Nuclear reactors, Nuclear Breeding, Breeder reactors, Nuclear Materials.
UNIT V SAFETY AND DISPOSAL 9
Safety and disposal: Nuclear plant safety–safety systems–changes and consequences of
accident–criteria for safety – nuclear waste – types of waste and its disposal – radiation hazards
and their prevention–weapons proliferation
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 & CAT 2 EACH 10 MARKS DESCRIPTIVE TYPE DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS.
ASSIGNMENT

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: List the basic concepts of atoms, equivalence mass and energy (Understand)
CO2: Interpret the nuclear reactions and reaction materials (Apply)
CO3: Describe the nuclear fuel cycle and its characteristics (Understand)
CO4: Demonstrate about the functions of different nuclear reactor (Apply)
CO5: Discuss about the safety and disposal methods of nuclear waste (Understand)

418
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

Text Books
1. Nuclear reactor Safety- principles and concept by G. Vaidyanathan, Yes Dee Publishing,
(2017).
2. Power Plant Engineering: by Arora&Domkundwar, Dhanpatrai Publication (2016).
3. Power Plant Engineering by [Link], Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd. (2017).

Reference Books
1. Nuclear Reactor Engineering by Samuel Glass tone, CBS Publishers & Distributors (2016).
2. Introduction to Nuclear Engineering by John R. Lamarsh, Pearson Education India (2017).
Web Resources
1. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 3 1 3 3
2 3 1 3 3
3 3 2 3 3
4 3 3 1 2 3 2 1 3
5 3 1 2 3 2 1 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: List the basic concepts of atoms ,equivalence mass and
energy (Understand)
1. Derive mass energy equivalence equation and explain the term mass defect and its
significance. (U)
2. Write short notes on Ruther ford model of an atom .(U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Interpret the nuclear reactions and reaction materials
(Apply)
1. Explain the nuclear fuel. What is chain reaction? How it is measured? What is the
difference between controlled and uncontrolled chain reaction? (U)
2. Draw and explain the solvent extraction equipment in following cases. (A)
(i) Explain in brief how uranium material is produced and purified.
(ii) Write short notes on the purification of thorium and beryllium materials
3. Explain the process of uranium production and purification. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Describe the nuclear fuel cycle and its characteristics
(Understand)
1. Explain about the nuclear safety inspections. (U)

419
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

2. How the nuclear plant safety system works in Shutdown to cooling the fuel. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Demonstrate about the functions of different nuclear

reactor (Apply)
1. Describe the boiling water reactor with the help of neat sketch and explain its chief
characteristics(U)
2. Illustarte the boiling water reactor power plant. (A)

3. Write short notes on the following(U)

[i] Boiling water reactor
[ii] Fast breeder reactor.

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Discuss about the safety and disposal methods of nuclear
waste (Understand)
1. Explain about the nature of wastes generated from each stage of nuclear fuel cycle.
(A)
2. Explain about the disposal of gaseous nuclear wastes with a diagram. (U)

420
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

21ME5802 RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
NIL
Objectives
• To identify the new methodologies /technologies for effective utilization of renewable
energy sources
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
World Energy Use – Reserves of Energy Resources – Environmental Aspects of Energy Utilisation
– Renewable Energy Scenario in Tamil Nadu, India and around the World – Potentials –
Achievements / Applications – Economics of renewable energy systems.
UNIT II SOLAR ENERGY 9
Solar Radiation – Measurements of Solar Radiation – Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors –
Solar direct Thermal Applications – Solar thermal Power Generation – Fundamentals of Solar
Photo Voltaic Conversion – Solar Cells – Solar PV Power Generation – Solar PV Applications.
UNIT III WIND ENERGY 9
Wind Data and Energy Estimation – Types of Wind Energy Systems – Performance – Site
Selection – Details of Wind Turbine Generator – Safety and Environmental Aspects
UNIT IV BIO - ENERGY 9
Biomass direct combustion – Biomass gasifiers – Biogas plants – Digesters – Ethanol production –
Bio diesel – Cogeneration – Biomass Applications
UNIT V OTHER RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Tidal energy – Wave Energy – Open and Closed OTEC Cycles – Small Hydro-Geothermal Energy –
Hydrogen and Storage – Fuel Cell Systems – Hybrid Systems

Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
Descriptive Questions 3. Problem-Solving Activities

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Describe the renewable energy scenario all over the world. (Understand)
CO2: Interpret the basics of solar energy and its applications. (Understand)
CO3: Apply the principles of energy estimation in wind energy. (Apply)
CO4: Explain about biogas digesters and cogeneration plant. (Understand)
CO5: Compare different renewable energy sources and construct a hybrid system. (Understand)

421
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

Text Books

1. Rai G.D., “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publisher, New Delhi, (2011)
2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A, “ Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd. UK, (2022)
Reference Books
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University
Press, U.K., (2012)
2. Chetan Singh Solanki, Solar Photovoltaics, “Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications”,
PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, (2015)
3. David M. Mousdale “Introduction to Biofuels”, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group, USA
(2017)
4. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, (2002)
5. Freris L.L., “Wind Energy Conversion systems”, Prentice Hall, UK, (2002)
Web Resources
1. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 2 2 2 2 3
2 2 2 2 2 3
3 2 2 2 2 3
4 2 2 2 2 3
5 2 2 2 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Describe the renewable energy scenario all over the world
(Understand)
1. Describe the types of Solar power plant. What are the limitations of solar power
plant? (U)
2. Illustrate the conventional and unconventional energy sources. Describe briefly.
(U)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Explain the basics of solar energy and its applications.
(Understand)

1. Classify the methods of solar energy storage. Describe thermal energy storage
system. (U)
2. Discuss the main components of a flat-plate collector. Explain the functions of
each and write its advantage and disadvantage of flat plate collector. (U)

422
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Apply the principles of energy estimation in wind energy.

(Apply)

1. Determine the operation and control of wind turbine. (A)

2. Describe the main applications of wind energy. Giving neat sketches. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Explain about biogas digesters and cogeneration plant.
(Understand)
1. Explain the process of photo synthesis. What are the necessary conditions of it?
(U)
2. Discuss the factors affecting Bio digestion (U).

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Compare different renewable energy sources and construct

a hybrid system. (Understand)
1. Differentiate open cycle OTEC system and Closed OTEC cycle. (U)
2. Explain briefly how prime movers for geothermal energy conversion are
classified and elaborate it. (U).

423
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

21ME5803 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Manufacturing Technology
Objectives
1. To know the principal methods, areas of usage, possibilities and limitations as well as
environmental effects of the Additive Manufacturing technologies
2. To be familiar with the characteristics of the different materials those are used in
Additive Manufacturing.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10
Overview – History – Need– Classification – Additive Manufacturing Technology in
productdevelopment– Materials for Additive Manufacturing Technology – Tooling – Applications
UNIT II CAD & REVERSE ENGINEERING 10
Basic Concept – Digitization techniques – Model Reconstruction – Data Processing for
AdditiveManufacturing Technology: CAD model preparation – Part Orientation and support
generation –Model Slicing –Tool path Generation – Softwares for Additive Manufacturing
Technology: MIMICS, MAGICS.
UNIT III LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED ADDITIVE 10
MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
Classification – Liquid based system – Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA) – Principle,
process,advantages and applications – Solid based system –Fused Deposition Modeling –
Principle, process,advantages and applications, Laminated Object Manufacturing
UNIT IV POWDER BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 10
Selective Laser Sintering – Principles of SLS process – Process, advantages and applications,
ThreeDimensional Printing – Principle, process, advantages and applications– Laser Engineered
NetShaping (LENS), Electron Beam Melting.
UNIT V MEDICAL AND BIO-ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 5
Customized implants and prosthesis: Design and production. Bio-Additive Manufacturing-
Computer Aided Tissue Engineering (CATE) – Case studies
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS MCQ Descriptive type
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS Assignment
Descriptive Questions Slip Test

424
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Distinguish the basic concepts of additive manufacturing and its applications.
(Understand)
CO2: Demonstrate the software’s for additive manufacturing technology. (Apply)
CO3: Construct liquid and solid based additive manufacturing and its applications. (Apply)
CO4: Illustrate power based additive manufacturing and its applications. (Apply)
CO5: Apply the possibilities and limitations in medical and bio additive manufacturing.
(Apply)
Text Books
1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, World
Scientific Publishers, (2010)
2. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, (2003)
Reference Books
1. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press, (2007)
2. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, (2006)
3. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”, CRC
press, (2000)
4. Ian Gibson, David Rosen and Brent Stucker, “Additive Manufacturing Technologies: 3D
printing, Rapid prototyping and Direct Digital Manufacturing”, Springer, (2014)
5. Andreas Gebhardt “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing”Hanser Gardner Publication (2011)
6. Tom Page “Design for Additive Manufacturing”LAP Lambert Academic Publishing, (2012)
Web Resources
1. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
1 3 2 3 3
2 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 2 3 2 1
4 3 3 2 3 2 1
5 3 2 3 2 1

425
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Distinguish the basic concepts of additive manufacturing and its
applications (Understand)
1. Write a note on the impact of AM on product development. (U)
2. Describe a) Virtual prototyping b) Rapid Tooling. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Demonstrate the software’s for additive manufacturing
technology. (Apply)
1. Explain the geometric modeling techniques? (U)
2. Demonstrate the techniques used in Tool path generation? (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Construct liquid and solid based additive manufacturing and its
applications.(Apply)
1. Illustrate about strength, Weakness and applications of SGC? (A)
2. What are the steps in pre build and post-build process for LOM? (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Illustrate power based additive manufacturing and its
applications. (Apply)
1. Discover the effect of surface deviation in LENS? (A)
2. What is indirect SLS and direct SLS. Explain the same. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Apply the possibilities and limitations in medical and bio
additive manufacturing. (Apply)
1. Prepare the design and production of customized implants and prosthesis. (A)
2. Discuss in detail about Computer Aided Tissue Engineering. (U)

426
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

21ME5804 FUNDAMENTALS OF RESEARCH L T P C

3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
This course aims to introduce students to the important aspects of research. The intent of the
course is to make students aware of the details associated with formal research and to help
students overcome common mis conceptions that may be present in their minds. By going
through this course, students are likely to be ableto take up research activities in a more
systematic and
formal manner right from the beginning
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH 9
Types and Process of Research - Outcome of Research - Sources of Research Problem -
Characteristics of a Good Research Problem - Errors in Selecting a Research Problem -
Importance of Keywords – Ethics in Research
UNIT II LITERATURE REVIEW 9
Literature Collection – Methods – Analysis – Citation Study – Gap Analysis – Problem Formulation
Techniques.
UNIT III RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 9
Appropriate Choice of Algorithms/Methodologies/Methods – Measurement and Result Analysis –
Investigation of Solutions for Research Problem – Interpretation – Research Limitations. Data
analysis, Design of Experiments, Experimental skills,Safety in Laboratory
UNIT IV JOURANALS AND PAPERS 9
Journals in Science/Engineering - Indexing and Impact factor of Journals. Plagiarism and
Research Ethics. Intellectual property. Types of Research Papers - Original Article/Review
Paper/Short Communication/Case Study – Systematic Approach to Prepare Review / Research
papers.
UNIT V REPORTS AND PRESENTATIONS 9
How to Write a Report - Language and Style - Format of Project Report - Title Page - Abstract -
Table of Contents - Headings and Sub-Headings - Footnotes - Tables and Figures - Appendix -
Bibliography etc. - Different Reference Formats. Presentation using PPTs. Research Tools.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 and CAT 2 Each 10 Marks MCQ, CASE STUDY, DESCRIPTIVE TYPE
DESCRIPTIVE TYPE OF PRESENATIONS
QUESTIONS
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

427
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

CO1: List the various stages in research and categorize the quality of research problem. (Apply)
CO2: Formulate a research problem from published literature/journal papers. (Apply)
CO3: Select appropriate research method for a defined problem (Apply)
CO4: Prepare review/ research paper, select suitable journal and submit a paper (Apply)
CO5: Prepare research report and presentation (Apply)
Text Books
[Link], Nicholas. “Research Methods: The basics”. 3rd Edition Routledge, 2021.
[Link] [Link],” Research Methods For Engineers”, Cambridge University Press 2014
[Link] Adewale Ajimotokan, “Research Techniques Qualitative, Quantitative and Mixed
Methods Approaches for Engineers” Springer 2022
Reference Books
1. Melville S, Goddard W. “ Research Methodology: An Introduction For Science and
Engineering Students”. Kenwyn Co Ltd. 1996
2. Kumar, Ranjit. “ Research Methodology: A step-by-step guide for beginners”. SAGE
Publications Limited, 2019
Web Resources
1.[Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 2
2 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 2
3 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 2
4 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 2
5 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 2

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: List the various stages in research and categorize the quality of
research problem. (Apply)
1. Discuss the applications of research from the view point of
(i) The service provider
(ii) The administrator, manager and/or planer
(iii) The Consumer
(iv) The Professional (Apply)
2. Discuss the types of research on different perspectives say application
perspective, objective perspective and mode of enquiry perspective. (Apply)
3. Identify two research questions, related to your professional area, that could be
answered by undertaking each of the following types of research.

428
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and
Syllabi

a. Descriptive Research b. Correlational research

c. Explanatory Research d. Exploratory research (Analyze)
4. Draw the research process “onion’ (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Formulate a research problem from published literature/journal

papers. (Apply)
1. Undertake a keyword search for a theme or issue that interests you using (a) an
Internet search engine, such as Google Scholar, and (b) a library search facility.
Compare the results (analyze)
2. Discuss about the source of information for literature review. (Understanding)
[Link] a short notes on “Note Taking” (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Select appropriate research method for a defined problem (Apply)
1. List the sources of research problems (Understand)
2. Elaborate the considerations in selecting a research problem (Understand)

[Link] in details about steps in formulating a research problem (Understand)

[Link] a broad subject area of interest to you and ‘dissect’ it. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Prepare review/ research paper, select suitable journal and submit a
paper (Apply)
1. What is meant by indexing? Why it is needed? (Understand)

2. Discuss in detail about the “Intellectual Property Rights” (Understand)

3. Explain the systematic approach to prepare and review papers. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Prepare research report and presentation (Apply)
1. Discuss any two software tools in preparing thesis in required format. (Apply)
2. Design two-minute paper presentations. Prepare one slide showing a plot of the
major results from a research project. Deliver two-minute presentations on the
topic showing only one slide of results. (Analyze)

429
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

OPEN ELECTIVE - II

430
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6801 SOLAR CELLS AND FUNDAMENTALS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
NIL
Objectives
• To identify the new methodologies /technologies for effective utilization of solar cells.

UNIT I SOLAR SYSTEM 8

Solar system: Energy from the sun, solar window, atmospheric effects, diffused radiations, Air mass,
effect of Air Mass, seasonal effects, environmental effects on standard test conditions
UNIT II SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS 10
solar power generation systems a) off-grid systems b) grid connected systems c) power control and
management systems, economics of solar photovoltaic systems, World Energy Requirement, Energy
and Role of Photovoltaic, Types of PV Installation, Common Systems type, GRID-TIED System, Hybrid
Systems, Photovoltaic in Energy Supply.
UNIT III DESIGN OF SOLAR CELL 11
Solar Cell technologies Crystalline Cells: Mono- crystalline and poly – crystalline cells- Commercial Si
solar cells, process flow of commercial Si cell technology, process in solar cell technologies, Sawing
and surface texturing, diffusion process, thin film layers, Metal contact- Semiconductors as basic
solar cell material, materials and properties, P – N junction and solar cell.
UNIT IV SELECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF SOLAR PLANT 9
Introduction, Solar energy system site considerations, components of typical SPV system, Types of
Roof, overview of the planning stage, Selection of systems design and objective for grid connected
system.
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF PV CELLS 7
– Fundamentals of Solar Photo Voltaic Conversion – Solar PV Power Generation – Solar PV
Applications.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Enumerate the fundamentals of solar system in atmospheric and environment effects. (Understand)
CO2 Describe the solar photovoltaic system in a various field in world energy requirement. (Understand)
CO3 Design solar cell in various techniques for suitable infrastructure with required enhanced Properties.
(Apply)
CO4 Demonstrate the site area of selection using the fundamentals of roof, grid with the components of
solar PV system. (Apply)
CO5 Examine the fundamentals of PV cells in an energy conversion with the help of PV applications.
(Apply)
Textbooks

431
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

1. Solar Power Hand Book, Dr. H. Naganagouda(2017).

2. Solar Photovoltaic; Chetansinghsolanki; PHI, Learning private ltd., New dehli- 2018.

Reference Books
1. Solar Electricity Handbook; MichaleBoxwell; 2017 edition.
2. Renewable energy systems; Devid M, Buchla, Thomas E kissell, Thomas, L Floyd; Pearson
India Education Services Pvt. Ltd. 2017

Web Resources
https:[Link]/courses/1211060114/

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 2 3
CO2 2 2 2 2 3
CO3 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 2 2 2 2 3
CO5 2 2 2 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 Enumerate the fundamentals of solar system in atmospheric and
environment effects. (Understand)
1. How Do We Generate Electricity From The Sun?(U)
2. What Happens With A Solar Pv System At Night And On Cloudy Days? (U)
3. How Do I Get Started With Solar? (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 2 Describe the solar photovoltaic system in a various field in world
energy requirement. (Understand)
1. Explain the Stand alone PV system. (U)
2. Explain the Grid connected PV system (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 3 Design solar cell in various techniques for suitable infrastructure with
required enhanced Properties. (Apply)
1. Explain the Working principle of solar cell. (U)
2. Demonstrate about solar cell technologies in crystalline & poly crystalline cells.(A)
COURSE OUTCOME 4 Demonstrate the site area of selection using the fundamentals of
roof, grid with the components of solar PV system. (Apply)
1. Predict the criteria level for site selection of solar photovoltaic (PV)(A)
2. Examine the Site Selection for a Solar Power Plant in SPV System.(A)
COURSE OUTCOME 5 Examine the fundamentals of PV cells in an energy conversion
with the help of PV applications. (Apply)
[Link] about the solar PV generation (U)
2. Interpret the energy conversion in solar photovoltaic cell & its applications (A)

432
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6802 ENERGY ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• To create awareness on the energy scenario of India with respect to world

• To Comprehend the impact of energy on environment

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Comparison of energy scenario – India and World (energy sources, generation mix, consumption
pattern, T&D losses, energy demand, per capita energy consumption) – energy pricing –energy
security-energy conservation and its importance –EnergyConservationAct2001
UNIT II ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9
HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors, Power Factor
Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency Computation, Energy Efficient
Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Efficacy, LED Lighting and scope of Encon
in Illumination.
UNIT III THERMAL SYSTEMS 9
Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation and encon
measures. Steam: Distribution & Usage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam
Utilization, Insulators & Refractories
UNIT IV ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9
Greenhouse effect and the carbon cycle - current evidence and future effects of climate change -
Global Environmental Concerns-United Nations Frame work Convention on Climate
Change(UNFCC), Kyoto Protocol, Conference of Parties(COP), Emissions trading(ET), Joint
implementation(JI), Clean Development Mechanism (CDM), Proto type Carbon Fund(PCF),
Sustainable Development
UNIT V ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9
Energy audit - need – types – methodology – barriers - analysis on energy costing and sharing -
bench marking - fuel and energy substitution – billing parameters in TANGEDCO – demand side
management - instruments for energy audit – energy monitoring and targeting – CUSUM – energy
labeling
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

433
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

CO1 Recognize the importance of energy engineering and suggest measures for improving per
capita energy consumption (Understand)
CO2 Identify theworking of electrical systems (Understand)
CO3 Predict the methodologies for energy recovery using boilers. (Apply)
CO4 Apply the sources of additional revenue generation for energy conservation projects
Adopting UNFCC (Apply)
CO5 Examine the energy sharing and cost sharing pattern of fuels used in industries (Apply)
Text Books
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at [Link]
[Link], a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory
body under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004
Reference Books
1. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and Utilisation”
Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.
2. Callaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon Press,
Oxford, 1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Efficient Use of Energy” Butterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand book”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Butterworths, London 1987.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 2 3
CO2 2 2 1 2 3
CO3 2 2 1 2 3
CO4 2 2 1 2 3
CO5 2 2 1 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Recognize the importance of energy engineering and suggest
measures for improving per capita energy consumption
(Understand)
1. Describe the concept of energy planning. (R)
2. Write short notes on Energy conservation Act. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Identify the working of electrical systems (Understand)

434
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

1. Examine the power loss for motors and improvement of motor efficiency. (R)
2. Explain the electrical load management andmaximum demand control. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Suggest methodologies for energy recovery using boilers

(Apply)

1. Explain the performance evaluation of boilers. (R)

2. Examine the process of condensate recovery and flash steam utilization. (A)
3. An oil-fired boiler is generating 30 T/hr steam andoperates for 8000 hrs/ year.
The TDS in boiler feedwater was reduced from 500 ppm to 200 ppm.
Themaximum permissible limit of TDS in the boiler is3000 ppm and make up
water is 10%. Temperature of the blow down water is 170 C and boiler
feedwater temperature is 40 C .GCV of fuel is 10000kcal/kg and efficiency of the
boiler is 80%.Calculate the saving in fuel oil per annum due toreduction in the
blow down. (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Assess the sources of additional revenue generation for energy
conservation projectsAdopting UNFCC (Apply)
1. Explain Green house concept. (R)
2. Describe the United Nations Frame work Convention on Climate Change (U)
3. Compose the case study of Clean Development Mechanism (CDM) (A)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Analyse the energy sharing and cost sharing pattern of fuels used
in industries (Apply)

1. Integrate the need for energy audit and composethe types of energy audit. (R)
2. Illustrate the various instruments used forenergy auditing. (U)
3. The contract demand of plant is 1000 kVA. The minimum billing demand is 75%
of the contract demand. The basic tariff structure is as follows: Demand charges:
Rs. 180 per kVA / month Unit charges: Rs. 3.75 for the first one lakh units /
month Rs. 3.50 above one lakh units / month Fuel surcharge: Rs. 0.20 per unit /
month Service Tax: Rs. 0.25 per unit / month Meter rent: Rs 500 / month The
energy consumption is 3, 15,000 units and the maximum demand recorded is
600 kVA. Calculate the cost of monthly electricity. (A)

435
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6803 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Probability and Statistics
Objectives
• To impart knowledge on concepts in design and principles of implementing quality in
a product or service through tools such as control charts, statistical process control
method, and various strategies of designing experiments, methods to improve the
reliability of a product.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Strategy of Experimentation, Typical applications of Experimental design, Basic Principles,
Guidelines for Designing [Link] of random variable, probability, density function
cumulative distribution function. Sample and population, Measure of Central tendency; Mean
median and mode, Measures of Variability, Concept of confidence level.
UNIT II METHODS OF DESIGN 9
Classical Experiments: Factorial Experiments: Terminology: factors, levels, interactions,
treatment combination, randomization, Two-level experimental designs for two factors and three
factors. Three-level experimental designs for two factors and three factors, Factor effects, Factor
interactions, Fractional factorial design, Saturated Designs, Central composite designs. –
Demonstration using Minitab/ SPSS software
UNIT III QUALITY BY EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN 9
Quality, Western and Taguchi’s quality philosophy, elements of cost, Noise factors causes of
variation. Quadratic loss function & variations of quadratic loss function. Robust Design: Steps in
Robust Design: Parameter design. Reliability Improvement through experiments, Illustration
through Numerical examples. Demonstration using Minitab/ SPSS software
UNIT IV SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO AND TOLERANCE DESIGN 9
Evaluation of sensitivity to noise. Signal to Noise ratios for static problems: Smaller-the-better
type, Nominal-the –better-type, Larger-the-better type. Signal to Noise ratios for Dynamic
problems. Illustration through Numerical examples. Parameter and tolerance design concepts,
Taguchi’s inner and outer arrays, parameter design strategy, tolerance design strategy. Design
using Orthogonal Array. Demonstration using Minitab/ SPSS software
UNIT V STATISTICAL CONSIDERATION AND RELIABILITY 9
Frequency distributions and Histograms- Run charts –stem and leaf plots- Pareto diagrams-
Cause and Effect diagrams-Box plots- Probability distribution-Statistical Process control–Scatter
diagrams –Multivariable charts –Matrix plots and 3-D plots.-Reliability-Survival and Failure-
Series and parallel systems-Mean time between failure-Weibull distribution. Demonstration
using Minitab/ SPSS software
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)

436
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions

CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 3. Problem-Solving Activities
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Recite the basic concepts of probability distribution (Understand)
CO2 Describe the fundamental principles of Design of Experiment process for optimization
(Understand)
CO3 Examine Taguchi’s approach to experimental design for robust design (Apply)
CO4 Calculate Taguchi’s approach to tolerance design process for S-N ratio (Apply)
CO5 Illustrate the concepts in reliability principles in the design of an engineering product
(Apply)
Text Books
1. Douglas C. Montgomery, Design and Analysis of Experiments, John Wiley and sons, 2012.
2. Box, G. E., Hunter,W.G., Hunter, J.S., Hunter,W.G., Statistics for Experimenters: Design,
Innovation, and Discovery, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2005.
Reference Books
1. Krishnaiah K, and Shahabudeen P, Applied Design of Experiments and Taguchi Methods,
PHI, India, 2011.
2. Phillip [Link], Taguchi techniques for quality engineering, McGraw Hill, 1996.
3. Product Design And Development, Karl t. Ulrich, Steven D. Eppinger,TataMcgraw-Hill- 3
rd Edition, 2003.
4. Product Design Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product Development,
Kevin Otto & Kristin Wood, Pearson Education (LPE), 2001.
Web Resources
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

1 2 2 2 3
2 2 2 2 3
3 2 2 2 3
4 2 2 2 3
5 2 2 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Understand the basic concepts of probability distribution
(Understand)

1. Write down the guidelines for Design of Experiments. (R)

437
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

2. Explain the concept of probability and its functions. (U)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Apply fundamental principles of Design of Experiment process
for Optimization (Understand)

1. Write down the procedure for two-level experimental designs for two factors.
(R)
2. Explain the types of design methods with arrays. (U)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Describe the Taguchi’s approach to experimental design for
robust design (Apply)
1. Write short notes on Quadratic loss function.(R)
2. Explain the concept of Taguchi’s quality philosophy. (U)
3. Illustrate the steps in Robust design process. (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Describe the Taguchi’s approach to tolerance design process for
S-N ratio (Apply)
1. Write short notes on Signal to Noise ratio (S-N).(R)
2. Explain the concepts of design strategy. (U)
3. Examine the procedure for Design using Orthogonal Array with suitable
examples. (A)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Familiarized with concepts in reliability principles in the design
of an engineering product (Apply)
1. Write short notes on Cause and Effect diagrams. (R)
2. Briefly explain the survival and failure.(U)
3. Elaborate the concept of Reliability, MTBF, MTTF in detail. (A)

438
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME6804 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• To enable students to understand the fundamental economic concepts applicable to
engineering and to learn the techniques of incorporating inflation factor in economic
decisionmaking.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 8
Introduction to Economics- Flow in an economy, Law of supply and demand, Concept of
EngineeringEconomics – Engineering efficiency, Economic efficiency, Scope of engineering
economics – Elementof costs, Marginal cost, Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Opportunity cost, Break-
even analysis - V ratio, Elementary economic Analysis – Material selection for product Design
selection for a product, Process planning.
UNIT II VALUE ENGINEERING 10
Make or buy decision, Value engineering – Function, aims, Value engineering procedure. Interest
formulae and their applications –Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor,
Single payment present worth factor, Equal payment series sinking fund factor, Equal payment
seriespayment Present worth factor- equal payment series capital recovery factor - Uniform
gradient seriesannual equivalent factor, Effective interest rate, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT III CASH FLOW 9
Methods of comparison of alternatives – present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow
diagram), Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow
diagram), Annual equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash
flow diagram), rate of return method, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9
Replacement and Maintenance analysis – Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem,
determination of economic life of an asset, Replacement of an asset with a new asset – capital
recovery with return and concept of challenger and defender, Simple probabilistic model for items
which fail completely.
UNIT V DEPRECIATION AND INFLATION 9
Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of
depreciation-Sum of the year’s digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/
Annuity method of depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public
alternatives- introduction, Examples, Inflation adjusted decisions – procedure to adjust inflation,
Examples on comparison of alternatives and determination of economic life of asset.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
CAT 1 – 10 MARKS 1. Assignment 1. Descriptive Questions
CAT 2 – 10 MARKS 2. Online Quizzes
3. Problem-Solving Activities

439
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Apply the principles of engineering economics in estimating the economic efficiency. (Apply)
CO2 Choose either to make or buy a product based on economic specialized concepts. (Apply)
CO3 Compare the various methods in cash flow to find the optimal method. (Analyze)
CO4 Categorize the replacement and maintenance analysis based on economic life of an asset.
(Analyze)
CO5 Apply the concepts of depreciation and inflation in evaluation of public alternatives. (Apply)
Textbooks
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New
Delhi, 2013.
Reference Books
1. Chan [Link], “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
2015.
2. Donald.G. Newman, [Link], “Engineering Economics and analysis” 12th Edition,
Engg. Press,Texas, 2013.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, 10th Edition,
Macmillan, NewYork, 2011.
Web Resources
1. [Link]

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 1 2 3 3
CO2 2 2 3 3
CO3 2 2 3 3
CO4 2 2 3 3
CO5 2 2 3 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1 Apply the principles of engineering economics in estimating the economic
efficiency. (Apply)
1. Trace out the flow of goods, services, resources and money payments in an economy
with suitable sketch. (Understand)
2. Enumerate briefly the various cost concepts. Establish the cost-output relationship in the
short-run with suitable diagram. (Apply)
3. From the following figures extracted from the book of Beta associates, find the
following. i. Break-even sales quantity, ii. Break-even sales, iii. If the actual
production quantity is 60,000, find a. contribution, [Link] of safety. Data:- Fixed cost
= Rs.10,00,000 Variable cost per unit = Rs.50 and Selling price per unit = Rs.100
(Apply)

440
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

COURSE OUTCOME 2 Choose either to make or buy a product based on economic

specialized concepts. (Apply)
1. As an engineer how will you calculate single payment compound amount factor?
Illustrate your answer with examples. (Understand)
2. Explain value engineering procedure. (Understand)
3. A company has extra capacity that can be used to produce a sophisticated fixture which it
has been buying for Rs.900 each. If the company makes the fixtures, it will incur material
cost of Rs 300 per unit, labour cost of Rs.250 per unit and variable overhead cost of
Rs.100 per unit. The annual fixed cost associated with the unused capacity is
Rs.10,00,000. Demand over the next year is estimated at 5,000 units. Would it be
profitable for the company to make the fixtures?(Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 3 Compare the various methods in cash flow to find the optimal
method. (Analyze)
1. Summarize the different types of rate of return methods in engineering decision
making. (Understand)
2. A firm is diversifying into new business. The life of the business is 10 years without
any salvage value at the end of its life. The initial outlay required is Rs.20,00,000/-
and the annual net profit estimated is Rs.3,50,000/- Find rate of return for the new
business. Check whether the business is worth for a cost of capital of 12%.(Apply)
3. Arova industry is planning to expand its production operation. It has identified two
different technologies for meeting the goal. The initial outlay and annual revenues
with respect to each of the technologies are summerised in the below given table.
Suggest the best technology which is to be implemented based on the present worth
method of comparison assuming 20% interest rate compounded annually.
(Analyze)
Initial outlay Annual revenue Life (years)
Technology 1 6,00,000 2,00,000 10
Technology 2 10,00,000 3,00,000 10

COURSE OUTCOME 4 Categorize the replacement and maintenance analysis based on

economic life of an asset. (Analyze)
1. Illustrate annual equivalent total cost with suitable examples and state its limitations
(Understand)
2. Three years earlier Coimbatore corporation purchased a 10HP motor for pumping
drinking water and its useful life was estimated as 10 years. But due to rapid
development, it is unable to meet demand per water. The options available are
either to augment the capacity with an additional 5 HP motor or to replace the
existing 10 HP motor with a new 15HP motor. The data on the two options are
follows. (Apply)
Details of motors Old 10HP motor New 10HP motor New 15HP motor
Purchase cost(P)
25,000 12,000 32,000
in Rs.
Life in years(n) 10 7 7

441
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Salvage value at
the end of the 1,500 800 5,000
machine life(Rs.)
Annual O&M
1,600 1,000 500
cost(Rs.)

3. A firm is considering replacement of an equipment, whose first cost is Rs.1,750

and the scrap value is negligible at any year. Based on experience, it was found
that the maintenance cost is zero during the first year and it increases by Rs.100
every year thereafter.
When should the equipment be replaced if i = 0%
When should the equipment be replaced if i = 12% (Analyze)

COURSE OUTCOME 5 Apply the concepts of depreciation and inflation in

evaluation ofpublic alternatives. (Apply)
1. Elucidate the different methods of calculating depreciation. (Understand)
2. Two equipments are purchased each for Rs.12,000. The estimated useful life is 5 years
for both; the estimated scarp value for each equipment is Rs.2000. For one equipment
the straight line method is used to calculate the annual depreciation and for the other
equipment, the reducing balance method is adopted. Compare the depreciation
charges for both for all the 5 years.(Apply)
3. Two mutually exclusive projects are being considered for investment. Project A1
requires an initial outlay of Rs. 50,00,000 with net receipts estimated to be Rs.
11,00,000 per year for the next eight years. The initial outlay for the project A2 is
Rs. 80,00,000, and net receipts have been estimated at Rs. 20,00,000 per year for
the next eight years. There is no salvage value associated with either of the
projects. Using the BC ratio, which project would you select? Assume an interest
rate of 15%. (Apply)

442
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

OPEN ELECTIVE - III

443
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7801 INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS AND FOREIGN TRADE
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
• To impart the basics concept of economics and factors that influence demand
and supply.
• To familiarize with economies of scale and cost concepts.
• To understand the market competitions and various pricing methods.
• To make the students understand the determination of GDP.
• To introduce the students with international trade and trade policies.
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS & DEMAND AND SUPPLY 9
ANALYSIS
Scarcity and choice - Basic economic problems- Utility — Law of diminishing marginal
utility — Demand and its determinants — law of demand —elasticity of demand —
measurement of elasticity and its applications — Supply, law of supply and
determinants of supply — Equilibrium — Changes in demand and supply and its
effects —Consumer surplus and producer surplus (Concepts).
UNIT II PRODUCTION AND COST 9
Production function — law of variable proportion — economies of scale — internal
and external economies - Cost concepts — Social cost: private cost and external cost
— Explicit and implicit cost — sunk cost - short run cost curves -long run cost curves
— Revenue (concepts) — Shutdown point — Break-even analysis.
UNIT III MARKET STRUCTURE 9
Perfect and imperfect competition — monopoly, regulation of monopoly, monopolistic
completion (features and equilibrium of a firm) — oligopoly — Kinked demand curve
— Collusive oligopoly (meaning) — non-price competition — Product pricing — Cost
plus pricing — Target return pricing—Penetration pricing — Predatory pricing —
Going rate pricing — Price skimming.
UNIT IV MACROECONOMIC CONCEPTS 9
Circular flow of economic activities — Stock and flow — Final goods and intermediate
goods -Gross Domestic Product - National Income — Three sectors of an economy-
Methods of measuring national income — Inflation- causes and effects — Measures to
control inflation-Monetary and fiscal policies — Business financing — Stock market —
Demat account and Trading account - SENSEX and NIFTY.
UNIT V INTERNATIONAL TRADE 9
Advantages and disadvantages of international trade - Absolute and Comparative
advantage theory - Heckscher - Ohlin theory - Balance of payments — Components —
Balance of Payments deficit and devaluation — Trade policy — Free trade versus
protection — Tariff and non-tariff barriers.
Total Periods 45

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
Test (20 Marks) (60Marks)
(20 Marks)
CAT 1 - 10 Marks [Link] type questions, and 1. Descriptive type questions.
CAT 2 - 10 Marks [Link] choice questions,
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

444
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO1: Interpret the impact of government policies on the general economic welfare. (Understand)
CO2: Choose appropriate decisions regarding volume of output and to evaluate the social cost of
production. (Apply)
CO3: Determine the functional requirement of a firm under various competitive conditions. (Apply)
CO4: Identify the overall performance of the economy, and the regulation of economic fluctuations
and its impact on various sections in the society. (Apply)
CO5: Determine the impact of changes in global economic policies on the business opportunities of a
firm. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Gregory N Mankiw, 'Principles of Micro Economics', 8th Edition, 2016, Cengage Publications
Reference Books
1. Gregory N Mankiw, 'Principles of Macro Economics', 2nd Edition, 2017, Cengage
Publications
2. Dwivedi D N, 'Macro Economics', 5th Edition, 2018, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Web Resources
1. [Link] - (Ergonomics Workplace
Analysis.)
2. [Link] - (Lecture Series on Ergonomics by Dr Peter Crane)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO1 1 3 3
CO2 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 2 1 3 3
CO4 2 1 1 3 3
CO5 2 1 3 3

445
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
CO1: Students will be able to Interpret the impact of government policies on the general
economic welfare. (Understand)

1. Why does the problem of choice arise? (Remember)

2. How do we solve the basic economic problems? (Understand)

CO2: Students will be able to Choose appropriate decisions regarding volume of output and to
evaluate the social cost of production. (Apply)

1. Explain the term producer equilibrium. (Understand)

2. Suppose a chemical factory is functioning in a residential area. What are the external costs?
(Apply)

CO3: Students will be able to determine the functional requirement of a firm under various
competitive conditions. (Apply)

1. Explain the equilibrium of a firm under monopolistic competition. (Remember)

2. Apply any one method of non-price competition under oligopoly for retail shop. (Apply)

CO4: Students will be able to Identify the overall performance of the economy, and the
regulation of economic fluctuations and its impact on various sections in the society. (Apply)

1. Enumerate the measures to control inflation. (Remember)

2. Determine the GDP of our country. (Apply)

CO5: Students will be able to Determine the impact of changes in global economic policies on
the business opportunities of a firm. (Apply)

1. Enumerate the arguments in favor of protection. (Understand)

2. Suppose a foreign country imposes a tariff on Indian goods. How does it affect India's exports?
(Apply)

446
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7802 FUNDAMENTALS OF ERGONOMICS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
The fundamentals of ergonomics as well as numerous tools and approaches for creating a comfortable
and secure workplace are covered in this course.
Objectives
• To introduce the principles of Ergonomics and its evaluation procedure.
• To impart basic knowledge on the movements of hand, leg etc. and its measurement techniques.
• To convey the different posture of hand and arm and motion assessment methods.
• To impart the environmental issues and perception on men machine interaction.
• To familiarize with the work system evaluation and safety methods.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ERGONOMICS 9

Fundamentals of Ergonomics / Human Factors - Disciplines - Physical - Cognitive and Organizational -
Needs of Ergonomics in Workplace - Ergonomic Principles - Applications - Ergonomic Evaluation -
Questionnaire Survey.
UNIT II ANTHROPOMETRY 9
Human Body - Structure and Function - Types of Anthropometric Data - Application of Anthropometry
in Design – Anthropometric Measuring Techniques - Statistical Treatment of Data and Percentile
Calculations
UNIT III POSTURE AND MOVEMENT 9
Posture : Biomechanical Background - Physiological Background - Sitting - Standing Change of Posture
- Hand and Arm Postures
Movement: Lifting - Carrying - Pulling - Pushing - Repetitive Motions - Rapid Upper Limb Assessment
(RULA) – Rapid Entire Body Assessment (REBA) and Ovako Working Posture Assessment (OWAS)
Method.
UNIT IV WORK COUNTER BEHAVIOR AND PERCEPTION 9
Work Counter: Environmental Issues - Physical Work Capacity - Factors Affecting work Capacity -
Communication and Cognitive Issues - Information Processing and
Perception: Interaction with Machines - Mental Workload

UNIT V WORK SYSTEM EVALUATION AND SAFETY 9

Work system Evaluation: Contribution of Ergonomics to Workstation Design - Analysis of Workplace
Design - Work Envelopes - Workplace Evaluation Tools - Case Studies
Safety: Occupational / Ergonomic Safety and Stress at Various Workplace - Health Management Rules -
Scope of Ergonomics in India-Case Studies.
Total Periods 45

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Formative Assessment Test (20 End Semester Exams
Test Marks) (60Marks)
(20 Marks)
CAT 1 - 10 Marks [Link] type questions, and 1. Descriptive type questions.
CAT 2 - 10 Marks [Link] choice questions,
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:

447
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO1: Define ergonomics and its components. (Understand)
CO2: Apply statistical treatment of data in anthropometry design. (Apply)
CO3: Identify the various assessment methods for ergonomic improvement. (Apply)
CO4: Utilize the ergonomic principles in assigning task to the workers. (Apply)
CO5: Apply ergonomics to propose an effective work place design with safety. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Bridger, Robert. “Introduction to Human Factors and Ergonomics”, United Kingdom, CRC Press,
2017.
Reference Books
1. Dul, Jan, and Weerdmeester, Bernard. “Ergonomics for Beginners: A Quick Reference Guide”,
3rd Edition. United Kingdom, Taylor & Francis, 2017.
2. Pamela McCauley-Bush, "Ergonomics: Foundational Principles, Applications, and
Technologies", 1st Edition, Taylor & Francis, CRC Press, New York, 2015.
Web Resources
1. [Link] - Ergonomics Workplace
Analysis.
2. [Link] - Lecture Series on Ergonomics by Dr Peter Crane

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10 11 12 1 2
CO1 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 1 2 1 1 3
CO3 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 1 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 1 1 1 2 1 3

448
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
CO1: Students will be able to define ergonomics and its components – (Understand)

1. What are the fundamentals of ergonomics and human factors? (Remember)

2. What is the role of questionnaire surveys in ergonomic evaluation? (Understand)

CO2: Students will be able to apply statistical treatment of data in anthropometry

design. (Apply)

1. How is statistical treatment of data used in anthropometry? (Understand)

2. Apply a suitable anthropometric measuring techniques for generating data for shop floor.
(Apply)

CO3: Students will be able to identify the various assessment methods for ergonomic
improvement. (Apply)

1. Mention the biomechanical and physiological implications of frequently changing posture

from sitting to standing? (Understand)

2. Compare and contrast the Rapid Upper Limb Assessment (RULA) method and Rapid Entire
Body Assessment (REBA) (Apply)

CO4: Students will be able to utilize the ergonomic principles in assigning task to the
workers. – (Apply)

1. What strategies can be employed to enhance an individual's physical work capacity?

(Understand)

2. With a help of any technique assess the mental workload in an automobile assembly section
of an industry. (Apply)

CO5: Students will be able to apply ergonomics to propose an effective work place
design with safety – (Apply)

1. Explain the process of analyzing workplace design from an ergonomics perspective?

(Understand)

2. Apply any one technique in identifying the essential elements available in an oil refinery
industry for an effective ergonomic planning (Apply)

449
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7803 POLLUTION CONTROL AND ITS EQUIPMENTS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
• To study the pollution control regulation and standards, water and wastewater.
• To study the equipment for various water pollution.
• To study the equipment for air pollution control.
• To study the equipment for solid waste processing
• To study the pollution monitoring equipment
UNIT I POLLUTION CONTROL REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS 9
Pollutants in water and wastewater – sources and impacts- Characteristics and impacts of solid and
hazardous wastes - Indian Constitution and Environmental Protection Legislations – Environmental
Standards under different Environmental legislations - Water Act (1974), Air Act (1981),
Environmental Protection Act (1986) and major Notifications, Municipal solid Wastes (Management
and Handling) Rules -Bio Medical Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules - Hazardous Wastes
(Management and Handling Rules),Environment Impact Assessment Notifications - Unit operations
and unit processes in Pollution Control- - Selection criteria for Pollution Control Equipment.
UNIT II EQUIPMENTS FOR WATER POLLUTION CONTROL 9
Operational principles and Design criteria of Flash mixers, Flocculators, Clarifiers, Sand Filters,
Adsorption Columns, Aerators, Air blowers, Distillation units, Centrifugal and Reciprocating Pumps,
Chemical dosing systems, Motors, Pipes, valves and Fittings.
UNIT III EQUIPMENTS FOR AIR POLLUTION CONTROL 9
Operational principles and Design criteria of Cyclone separators, gravity settlers, Wet Scrubbers, Air
strippers, Bag Filters, Electrostatic precipitators, Biofilters

UNIT IV EQUIPMENTS FOR SOLID WASTE PROCESSING 9

Operational principles and Design criteria of Dewatering equipment – centrifuge, Vacuum Filter,
Filter Press- Size Reduction equipment – shredders, grinders – Trommel and Disc Screens – Air
Classifiers - bailing and briquetting – incinerators –Pyrolysis
UNIT V POLLUTIONS MONITORING EQUIPMENT 9
Equipment’s for sampling of water, solids and air- Sample preservation Equipment – incubators –
Cold Storage systems- equipment for analysis of water and air samples- Ambient air and flue gas
sampling and monitoring equipment
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive exam
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY/

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Outline the different types of pollution, their sources and effects. (Understand)
CO2: Interpret the pollution control regulations and standards (Understand)
CO3: Summarize the equipments for air pollution control (Understand)
CO4: Discuss different methods of pollution control from various sources in air, water and soil
(Understand)
450
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO5: Identify and use the suitable pollution monitoring equipments for air and water samples
(Apply)

Text Books
3. George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Theisen and Samuel A, Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste
Management, Mc-Graw Hill India, First edition, 2015.
4. Rao. C.S ., “Environmental Pollution and Control Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Revised, Wiley
Eastern Limited, India, 2006
Reference Books
4. Shyam Diwan and Armin Rosencranz, Enviromental Law and Policy in India, Oxford, 2001
5. Metcalf & Eddy, INC, „Wastewater Engineering – Treatment and Reuse, Fourth Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
6. Noel de Nevers, "Air Pollution Control Engg", Mc Graw Hill, New York, 2016.
7. CPCB (2021), "Pollution Control Acts, Rules and Notifications issued thereunder, PCL Series-
Central Pollution Control Board, Delhi
Web Resources
2. [Link] - Air Pollution and Control

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 2 3 1 3
CO2 1 2 2 3 1 3
CO3 1 2 2 3 1 3
CO4 1 2 2 3 1 3
CO5 1 2 2 3 1 3

451
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to outline the different types of pollution, their
sources and effects. (Understand)
3. Write a brief note on Governmental rules related to bio medical wastes. (Understand)
4. Discuss the criteria followed in selecting the pollution control equipment. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to interpret the pollution control regulations
and standards (Understand)
3. Discuss about the design considerations in selecting flocculators and aerators in water pollution
control. (Understand)
4. What is the role of pumps in water pollution control. Explain the significance of reciprocating
pump in pollution control. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to summarize the equipments for air pollution
control (Understand)
3. Explain the criteria for selection of air pollution control equipment. (Understand)
4. Explain with neat sketch the working principle, advantages and disadvantages of Electrostatic
Precipitator (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to Discuss different methods of pollution control
from various sources in air, water and soil (Understand)
3. Explain the types of vacuum filters used in solid processing. (Understand)
4. Mention the factors considered in selecting dewatering equipment. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to Identify and use the suitable pollution
monitoring equipments for air and water samples (Apply)
3. How water sample can be analysed for pollutants. Briefly discuss its methods (understand)
4. Explain how cold storage systems are predominant in pollution control. Justify your answers
(Apply)

452
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7804 Energy Storage Devices
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
• To study the various types of energy storage devices and technologies and them
comparison.
• To learn the techniques of various energy storage devices and their performances.
• To learn the basics of batteries and hybrid systems for EVs and other mobile applications.
• To learn about the renewable energy storage systems and management systems.
• To have an insight into other energy storage devices, hydrogen, and fuel cells.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENERGY STORAGE 9
Need for Energy Storage – Types of Energy Storage – Various forms of Energy Storage –
Mechanical– Thermal - Chemical– Electrochemical – Electrical - Other alternative energy storage
technologies – Efficiency and Comparison.
UNIT II ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS 9
Pumped Air Energy Storage – Compressed Air Energy Storage – Flywheel – Sensible and Latent
Heat Storage – Storage Materials – Performance Evaluation - Thermochemical systems – Batteries
– Types Charging and Discharging – Battery testing and performance.
UNIT III MOBILE AND HYBRID ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS 9
Batteries for electric vehicles - Battery specifications for cars, heart pacemakers, computer
standby supplies – V2G and G2V technologies – HESS
UNIT IV RENEWABLE ENERGY STORAGE AND ENERGY 9
MANAGEMENT
Storage of Renewable Energy Systems –Solar Energy – Wind Energy – Energy Storage in Micro
grid– Smart Grid – Energy Conversion Efficiency - Battery Management Systems – EVBMS – Energy
Audit and Management
UNIT V OTHER ENERGY DEVICES 9
Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES), Supercapacitors – MHD Power generation –
Hydrogen Storage - Fuel Cells – Basic principle and classifications – PEMFC, AMFC, DMFC, SOFC,
MCFC and Biofuel Cells – Biogas Storage.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive exam
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Discuss the need and identify the suitable energy storage devices for applications.
(Understand)
CO2. Illustrate the working of various energy storage devices and their importance. (Understand)
CO3. Select the specification of batteries for mobile and hybrid storage systems. (Apply)
CO4. Discuss the storage of renewable energies and conduct energy audit. (Apply)
CO5. Outline the need for other energy devices and their scope for applications. (Understand)
Text Books
453
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
1. Rober Huggins, “Energy Storage: Fundamentals, Materials and Applications”, 2 nd Edition,
Springer, 2015.
2. Dell, Ronald M Rand, David A J, “Understanding Batteries”, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001

Reference Books
1. Francisco Díaz-González, Andreas Sumper, Oriol Gomis-Bellmunt,” Energy Storage in
Power Systems” Wiley Publication, 2016.
2. Lindon David, “Handbook of Batteries”, McGraw Hill, 2002.
3. Aulice Scibioh M. and Viswanathan B, “Fuel Cells – principles and applications’, University
Press(India), 2006
4. Ru-Shiliu, Leizhang, Sueliang Sun, “Electrochemical Technologies for Energy Storage and
Conversion”, Wiley Publications, 2012.
Web Resources
1. [Link] - (Electrochemical energy
storage)
2. [Link] - Fundamentals of energy - Energy resources
and technology

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO 1 2 2 3 3
CO 2 2 1 2 3 3
CO 3 2 1 2 3 3
CO 4 2 1 1 2 3 3
CO 5 2 1 2 3 3

454
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to discuss the need and identify the suitable
energy storage devices for applications. (Understand)
1. Outline the various forms of energy storage methodologies (Understand)
2. Compare and contrast thermal and electrochemical methods of energy storage in commercial
applications. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to illustrate the working of various energy
storage devices and their importance. (Understand)
1. Differentiate pumped air storage and compressed air storage. (Understand)
2. Explain the various methods involved in evaluating the performance of storage systems
(Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to select the specification of batteries for mobile
and hybrid storage systems. (Apply)
1. What are the parameters you will consider in selecting the storage device for heart pacemaker.
Justify them (Apply)
2. Identify the factors need to be considered in selecting the storage device for electric vehicles.
(Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to discuss the storage of renewable energies and
conduct energy audit. (Apply)
1. Explain the methods involved in storing energy from wind. (Understand)
2. With a case study, conduct an energy audit in Air Conditioning System and provide a solution for
energy efficiency. (Apply)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to explain the need for other energy devices and
their scope for applications. (Understand)
1. Explain the various methods available for storing biogas at onsite conditions (Understand)
2. What is SMES? Mention its significance (Understand)

455
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

OPEN ELECTIVE - IV

456
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME7805 DIGITAL MANUFACTURING
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
• To study the various aspects of digital manufacturing.
• To inculcate the importance of DM in Product Lifecycle Management and Supply chain
Management.
• To formulate smart manufacturing systems in the digital work environment.
• To interpret IoT to support the digital manufacturing.
• To elaborate the significance of digital twin.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction – Need – Overview of Digital Manufacturing and the Past – Aspects of Digital
Manufacturing: Product life cycle, Smart factory, and value chain management – Practical Benefits of
Digital Manufacturing – The Future of Digital Manufacturing.
UNIT II DIGITAL LIFE CYCLE & SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 9
Collaborative Product Development, Mapping Requirements to specifications – Part Numbering,
Engineering Vaulting, and Product reuse – Engineering Change Management, Bill of Material and
Process Consistency – Digital Mock up and Prototype development – Virtual testing and collateral.
Overview of Digital Supply Chain - Scope& Challenges in Digital SC - Effective Digital Transformation -
Future Practices in SCM
UNIT III SMART FACTORY 9
Smart Factory – Levels of Smart Factories – Benefits – Technologies used in Smart Factory – Smart
Factory in IoT- Key Principles of a Smart Factory – Creating a Smart Factory – Smart Factories and
Cybersecurity
UNIT IV INDUSTRY 4.0 9
Introduction – Industry 4.0 –Internet of Things – Industrial Internet of Things – Framework:
Connectivity devices and services – Intelligent networks of manufacturing – Cloud computing – Data
analytics –Cyber physical systems –Machine to Machine communication – Case Studies.
UNIT V STUDY OF DIGITAL TWIN 9
Basic Concepts – Features and Implementation – Digital Twin: Digital Thread and Digital Shadow-
Building Blocks – Types – Characteristics of a Good Digital Twin Platform – Benefits, Impact &
Challenges – Future of Digital Twins.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive type
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT 2 10 MARKS STUDY

457
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Summarize the various elements in digital manufacturing. (Understand)
CO2: Illustrate the concepts involved in digital product development life cycle process and supply
chain management in digital environment. (Understand)
CO3: Select the proper procedure of validating practical work through digital validation in Factories.
(Apply)
CO4: Interpret the concepts of IoT and its role in digital manufacturing. (Understand)
CO5: Outline various practical manufacturing process through digital twin. (Understand)
Text Books
7. Zude Zhou, Shane (Shengquan) Xie and Dejun Chen, Fundamentals of Digital Manufacturing
Science, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2012.
8. Alasdair Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”, A press, 2016
Reference Books
4. Lihui Wang and Andrew YehChing Nee, Collaborative Design and Planning for Digital
Manufacturing, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2009.
5. Andrew Yeh Chris Nee, Fei Tao, and Meng Zhang, “Digital Twin Driven Smart Manufacturing”,
Elsevier Science., United States, 2019.
6. Alp Ustundag and Emre Cevikcan, “Industry 4.0: Managing The Digital Transformation”,
Springer Series in Advanced Manufacturing., Switzerland, 2017
7. Ronald R. Yager and Jordan Pascual Espada, “New Advances in the Internet of Things”,
Springer., Switzerland, 2018
Web Resources
6. The Future of Manufacturing Business: Role of Digital Technologies - Course ([Link]) - (The Future
of Manufacturing Business: Role of Digital Technology)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO 4 1 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO 5 1 1 1 1 3 2 3

COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to summarize the various elements in digital
manufacturing. (Understand)
1. Discuss the various key aspects of Digital manufacturing. (Understand)
2. List the practical benefits of Digital Manufacturing. (Remember)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to illustrate the concepts involved in digital
product development life cycle process and supply chain management in digital
environment. (Understand)

458
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
1. Briefly discuss the scope and challenges available in digital supply chain management.
(Understand)
2. Write a brief note on Digital mockup and prototype development. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to select the proper procedure of validating
practical work through digital validation in Factories. (Apply)
1. What are the various levels of smart factories. Explain each with its salient features (Understand)
2. How can digital validation be effectively utilized to validate practical work in automotive
industries. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able interpret the concepts of IoT and its role in
digital manufacturing. (Understand)
1. Write short notes on Cloud computing. (Understand)
2. Differentiate IoT and IIoT. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to outline various practical manufacturing
process through digital twin. (Understand)
1. Outline the characteristics of a good digital twin atmosphere. (Understand)
2. With suitable block diagram, explain the various components of digital twin. (Understand)

459
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7806 MARINE VEHICLES
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
• To provide the students a basic knowledge about various types of marine vehicles
• To provide the students basic theory behind the design and development of marine vehicles
UNIT I MARINE VEHICLES 9
Types – general – by function – commercial marine vehicles- passenger ship, cargo ships, oil and
chemical tankers, cattle carriers, harbor crafts, off shore platform, container ships
UNIT II REEFERS AND GAS CARRIERS 9
Introduction – Types, design considerations, safety – operation and controls, precaution during
bunkering
UNIT III REMOTELY OPERABLE VEHICLE (ROV), UMS SHIPS 9
Remotely Operable Vehicles (ROV) – The ROV business – Design theory and standards – control and
simulation – design and stability – components of ROV – applications, UMS operation, and controls
UNIT IV SUBMERSIBLES AND AUTONOMOUS UNDERWATER VEHICLE 9
(AUV)
submersibles types – applications, AUV – Design and construction considerations – components –
sensors – Navigation -control strategies – applications
UNIT V MANNED AND UNMANNED SUBMERSIBLE 9
Introduction – Design and operational consideration – pressure hull exo-structure – ballasting and
trim – maneuvering and control – Life support and habitability – emergency devices and equipment’s
– certification and classification, towed vehicles – gliders – crawler – Design and construction
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive type
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

460
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Classify the types of marine vehicles (Understand)
CO2: Illustrate the design and safety considerations in reefers and gas carriers (Understand)
CO3: Distinguish between Remotely Operable Vehicle (ROV), Unmanned Machinery Space (UMS)
ships (Apply)
CO4: Classify the various submersible vehicles with its applications (Understand)
CO5: Outline the various components of manned and unmanned submersibles. (Understand)
Text Books
1. Jonathan M. Ross, human factors for naval marine vehicle design and operation, CRC press,
2009
2. Sabiha A. Wadoo, Pushkin Kachroo, Autonomous underwater vehicles, modelling control
design and Simulation, CRC press, 2011
Reference Books
1. Ferial L hawry, The ocean engineering handbook, CRC press, 2000
2. Robert D. Christ,Robert L. Wernli, Sr. “The ROV Manual A User Guide for Remotely Operated
Vehicles”, Elsevier, second edition, 2014

Web Resources
1. NPTEL :: Ocean Engineering - Performance of Marine Vehicles at Sea (Marine Vehicles)

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO 2 1 2 1 1 3 3
CO 3 1 2 1 1 3 3
CO 4 1 2 1 1 3 3
CO 5 1 2 1 1 3 3

461
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to understand the types of marine vehicles
(Understand)

1. Explain the general classifications of marine vehicles. (Understand)

2. Write short notes on oil and chemical tankers. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to describe the design and safety considerations
in reefers and gas carriers (Understand)

1. Explain briefly the safety considerations in reefers and gas carriers. (Understand)
2. Describe the precautionary steps involved in bunkering of marine vehicles. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to distinguish between Remotely Operable

Vehicle (ROV), Unmanned Machinery Space (UMS) ships (Apply)

1. With a case study, discuss the components to be employed in ROV for underwater pipeline
applications. (Apply)
2. Discuss the controls and operations of UMS ships (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to classify the various submersible vehicles with
its applications (Understand)

1. Explain the components of AUV with neat sketches. (Understand)

2. Discuss the navigation and control strategies followed in AUV. (Understand)

COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to describe the various components of manned
and unmanned submersibles. (Understand)

1. Distinguish the design consideration to be followed between manned and unmanned vehicles.
(Understand)
2. Discuss in detail the components used in unmanned marine vehicles. (Understand)

462
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7807 SAFETY MEASURES FOR ENGINEERS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
• To provide the students a basic knowledge about safety in different fields
• To provide the students basic knowledge about personnel protection and risk control
techniques
UNIT I SAFETY MANAGEMENT AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION 9
Introduction: Need for Safety - Safety and Productivity - Safety Management Techniques - Job Safety
Analysis - Safety Sampling Technique - Incident Recall Technique - Plant Safety Inspection - Accident:
Nature and Causes of Accidents - Accident Proneness - Cost of Accident - Accident Prevention
Methods - Accident Reporting and Investigation - Safety Education and Training
UNIT II ELECTRICAL SAFETY EQUIPMENTS 9
Voltage Measuring Instruments: Safety Voltage Measurement - Contact and Non-Contact Type Testers.
Rubber Insulating Equipment: Rubber Mats - Rubber Blankets - Rubber Covers - Line Hoses and
Sleeves -Inspection Techniques – Standards. Insulated Tools: Hot Sticks - Cherry Picker - Standards
for Tools - Safety Barriers and Signs - Safety Tags - Lock and Locking devices. Fire Extinguishers: Fire
Safety Against Electrical fire - Types of Extinguishers.
UNIT III SAFETY IN CHEMICAL INDUSTRY 9
Types of Chemical Industry - Statutory Provisions - Indian Standards – Types of Chemical Hazards &
Controls – Material (Property) Hazards and Controls – Storage Hazards & Controls - Process Hazards
& Controls - Utility Hazards & Controls - Pollution Hazards & Controls - Instrumentation for Safe Plant
Operations - Safe Transfer of Chemicals - Inspection, Testing & Maintenance - Work Permits of
Hazardous Work
UNIT IV PERSONNEL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE) 9
Flash and Thermal protection: Glossary of Terminologies - Flame Resistant - Arc Thermal
Performance Value (ATPV) - Energy Breakthrough (EBT) - ASTM Standard for Clothing Materials -
Choice of Clothing - Flame and Non-Flame-Resistant Materials - Guidelines for Selection - Flash Suit
Head Protection: Hard Hats – ANSI Z 89.1 Standard - Eye Protection - Requirements of Safety Glasses -
Goggles - Selection - Face shield. Hearing Protection – Requirement - Ear plugs and Ear muffs - Noise
Reduction Ratio

UNIT V RISK ASSESSMENT AND CONTROL TECHNIQUES: 9

Risk Assessment: Basic Concepts of Risk - Safety Appraisal, Analysis and Control Techniques -
Accident Investigation, Analysis and Reporting - Hazard and Risk Assessment Techniques - Reliability
Engineering - Major Accident Hazard (MAH) Control - Onsite and Off-site Emergency Plans
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive type
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Perceive the safety management concepts and accident prevention methods. (Understand)
CO2: Apply appropriate insulating equipment, use of fire extinguishers (Apply)
CO3: List the hazards in chemical industries during transporting, storing and processing to ensure
safe plant operations (Understand)
463
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
CO4: Infer suitable PPE based on the type of industry and standards. (Understand)
CO5: Implement the techniques like risk assessment disaster management and emergency
preparedness with the proper knowledge on accident prevention. (Apply)

Text Books
1. Mistry K.U., "Fundamentals of Industrial Safety and Health", 2nd Edition, Siddharth Prakashan,
Ahmedabad, 2008.
Reference Books
1. John Cadick, Mary Capelli Schellpfeffer & Dennis Neitzell, "Electrical Safety Handbook", 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2012.
2. Rao S, Jain R.K. & Saluja H.L., "Electrical Safety, Fire Safety Engineering and Safety
Management", 2nd Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2012.
Web Resources
1. [Link] - (Industrial Safety Engineering)
2. [Link] - (Chemical Process Safety)
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO 1 1 1 3 1 1 3
CO 2 1 1 3 1 1 3
CO 3 1 1 3 1 1 3
CO 4 1 1 3 1 1 3
CO 5 1 1 3 1 1 3

464
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to perceive the safety management concepts and
accident prevention methods. (Understand)
1. Discuss about the safety education and training in accident prevention. (Understand)
2. Explain the various accident prevention methods in detail. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to apply appropriate measuring and /or
insulating equipment, use of fire extinguishers and safe earthing practices (Apply)
1. What are the safety considerations to be followed in earthing systems? Brief them. (Understand)
2. How safety can be ensured in fire extinguishers. Explain them with a case study. (Apply)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to list the hazards in chemical industries during
transporting, storing and processing to ensure safe plant operations (Understand)
1. Discuss the various types of chemical hazards and explain its control measures. (Understand)
2. What are the guidelines to be followed in the safe transfer of chemicals? Explain in brief.
(Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Infer suitable PPE based on the type of industry and standards.
(Understand)
1. Types and characteristics of head protectors (Understand)
2. When canister or cartridge type respirator should not be used? Explain your answers with
justification (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Implement the techniques like risk assessment disaster management
and emergency preparedness with the proper knowledge on accident prevention. (Apply)

1. What is Total Loss Control? What are the four steps involved in managing the loss control
(Understand)
2. In a factory rough casting of 15 Kg. are fettled by hand on a pedestal grinder (dia 12"). The castings
are picked up from nearby store, fettled on the grinder and replaced on the floor on the other side
of the machine. Carry out job safety analysis and prepare the job breakdown sheet. (Apply)

465
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21ME7808 INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTICS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
• To understand the functions of the basic components of a Robot.
• To study the use of various types of end Effectors and Sensors
• To impart knowledge in Robot Kinematics and Programming
• To learn Robot safety issues and economics.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 9
Robot - Definition - Robot Anatomy - Coordinate Systems, Work Envelope Types and Classification-
Specifications-Pitch, Yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load-Robot Parts and their
Functions-Need for Robots-Different Applications
UNIT II ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9
Pneumatic Drives-Hydraulic Drives-Mechanical Drives-Electrical Drives-D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper
Motors, A.C. Servo Motors-Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of all these Drives, End
Effectors-Grippers-Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic- Grippers, Magnetic Grippers,
Vacuum Grippers; Two Fingered and Three Fingered Grippers; Internal Grippers and External
Grippers; Selection and Design Considerations.
UNIT III SENSORS 9
Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Applications of the following types of sensors- Position
sensors - Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers, Optical Encoders, pneumatic Position Sensors,
Range Sensors Triangulations Principles, Structured, Lighting Approach, Time of Flight, Range
Finders, Laser Range Meters, Touch Sensors, binary Sensors, Analog Sensors, Wrist Sensors,
Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors,
UNIT IV ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING 9
Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Difference; Forward Kinematics and Reverse
Kinematics of manipulators with Two, Three Degrees of Freedom (in 2 Dimension), Four Degrees of
freedom (in 3 Dimension) Lead through Programming, Robot programming Languages-VAL
Programming-Motion Commands, Sensor Commands, End Effector commands and simple Programs.

UNIT V FIELD APPLICATIONS OF ROBOTICS 9

Material transfer, Machine loading, Assembly, inspection, processing operations and service robots,
Delivery Robots – Intelligent vehicles – Survey and inspection robots – Space Robots – Autonomous
aircrafts – Underwater Inspection – Agriculture and Forestry – Military robots
Total Periods 45

466
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
Descriptive exam MCQ QUIZ / SEMINAR/ Descriptive type
CAT 1 10 AND ASSIGNMENT/SLIPTEST/CASE
CAT2 10 MARKS STUDY

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Express the basic concepts, laws, components and parameters of robots (Understand)
CO2: Discuss about drive system and the types of grippers and its functions. (Understand)
CO3: Summarize the various types of sensors involved in controlling the robots (Understand)
CO4: Interpret the various programming techniques used in industrial robots (Understand)
CO5: Identify the use of robots in various field of applications (Apply)
Text Books
1. [Link], [Link] ,R.N. Nagal, [Link], "Industrial Robotics - Technology, programming
and Applications" Tata , McGraw-Hill Education Pvt Limited 2nd Edition, 2012
2. Roland Seigwart, Illah Reza Nourbakhsh, and Davide Scaramuzza, “Introduction to autonomous
mobile robots”, 2nd edition, MIT Press, 2011.
Reference Books
1. [Link], " Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics & control"Pearson Publication, Fourth
edition, 2018.
2. Klafter R.D., Chmielewski T.A and Negin M., “Robotic Engineering - An Integrated Approach”,
Prentice Hall, 2003.
3. Saeed B Niku, ‘Introduction to Robotics, Analysis, Control, Applications, Wiley India Pvt Ltd
publication, 2nd Edition, 2011.
Web Resources
1. [Link] (Robotics)
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO 1 3 1 2 1 3

CO 2 3 1 2 1 3

CO 3 3 1 2 1 3

CO 4 3 1 1 2 2 1 3

CO 5 3 1 2 2 1 3

467
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
COURSE LEVEL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
COURSE OUTCOME 1: Students will be able to express the basic concepts, laws, components
and parameters of robots (Understand)
1. Sketch and explain the four basic robot configurations classified according to the coordinate system.
(Understand)
2. Write short notes on Joint notation scheme. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 2: Students will be able to Discuss about drive system and the types of
grippers and its functions. (Understand)
1. Explain various types of Gripper mechanisms in robot. (Understand)
2. Explain how grippers are selected for high temperature applications? Justify your answers with
gripper selection factors and considerations. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 3: Students will be able to summarize and determine various types of
sensors involved in controlling the robots (Understand)
1. Briefly explain the working principle of position sensors with neat sketch. (Understand)
2. Explain the working principle of Proximity sensors with neat sketch. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 4: Students will be able to describe the various programming techniques
used in industrial robots (Understand)
1. List the commands used in VAL II programming and describe its functions. (Understand)
2. Write down the capabilities and limitations of Lead through methods. (Understand)
COURSE OUTCOME 5: Students will be able to Identify the use of robots in various field of
applications (Apply)
1. With necessary outline, discuss the application of robots in packaging industries (Apply)
2. With a case study, explain the applications of robot in underwater inspection. (Apply)

468
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

VALUE ADDED COURSES

469
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

L T P C
21ME3V01 DIGITAL PROTOTYPING USING SOLIDWORKS
0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Engineering Graphics, Basics of AutoCAD
Objectives
The objective of this skill training is to teach users the basic commands and tools necessary for
professional 2D drawing, 3D drawing, Assembly of mechanical components design and drafting
using Solidworks.

MODULE 1 Introduction to Solidworks and its User 10

Interface
Introduction-Basic Commands, Interacting with Solidworks UI, Drawing tools, Editing tools,
Drawing setup-Command Manager- Feature manager design tree, Callouts, Handles, Confirmation
corner, mouse buttons, keyboard shortcuts, Command Manager,Hardware and Software
requirements.
MODULE 2 Sketching 10
Sketching: 2D Sketching, Sketch entities, rules that govern sketches, sketch relations,
dimensioning guidelines, – Inference line, Centerline line, Line, Circle, Arc, Ellipse, Rectangle,
Slots, Polygon, Ellipse, Partial Ellipse, Spline, Points, Text, Construction geometry-Practice
drawing
MODULE 3 Basic Part Modeling 10
Basic modeling terminologies, part details – Boss feature – sketching on a planar face - cut
feature – view selector – hole wizard – filleting – editing tools – detailing – drawing views –
changing parameters – dimensioning - Practice drawing
MODULE 4 Part Modeling Features 10
Boss feature with draft, symmetry in sketch, sketching inside the model – view options – model
edges in sketch – trimmed sketch geometry - linear patterns – circular patterns – mirror patterns –
revolved features- shells and ribs – thin features - Practice drawing
MODULE 5 Assembly 10
New assembly – positioning of component – Design tree – adding components – mating
components – sub assemblies – assembly analysis – assembly explode – bill of materials - Practice
drawing
MODULE 6 Generating views 10
Generating Model View, Projected Views, Inserting Standard 3 View - View creation relative to
model, Inserting predefined views, Auxiliary Views, Detailed Views, Crop view, Broken –Out
Section, Broken Views, Section View, Alternate Position View

470
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Total Periods 60
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Online Assessment
4 Online assessment tests each carrying 25 marks (Total 100 marks)
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the basics of Solidworks (Understand)
CO2: Discuss the sketching tools and guidelines in sketching. (Understand)
CO3: Interpret part modeling and its features (Apply)
CO4: Assemble the modeled components using solidworks. (Apply)
CO5: Generate predefined views using various tools using solidworks (Apply)
Text Books
1. Alejandro Reyes 2021 Beginner’s guide to Solidworks 2021
2. David C Planchard, “Engineering Design with solidworks” 2019

Reference Books

1. Gaurav vera, matt weber, “Solidworks flow simulation 2020 Black book” 2019
2. CADArtife, John Willis, Sandeep Dogra”solidworks 2019 A Power guide for beginners and
intermediate User (2019)
3. Arsath Natheem “Solidworks for Beginners” 2018
Web Resources
1. Best SOLIDWORKS Online Courses - Updated [August 2023] ([Link])

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3

471
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi
L T P C
21ME5V03 Numerical Simulation using Ansys Fluent
0 0 4 2
Prerequisites for the course
Basic knowledge in Engineering Drawing, Basic Knowledge in Fluid Mechanics and Heat
Transfer
Objectives
• To acquire knowledge on the basic concepts involved in grid generation in Fluent.
• To gain basic ideas on numerical fluid dynamics.
• To arrive at the solution of fluid flow equations and to apply those concepts for industrial
needs.
MODULE 1 Introduction 10
CFD-Definition, Applications, CFD Methodology, Ansys Fluent, Menu bar & Toolbars, Navigation
pane – Task pages – Boundry conditions – fluent in workbench.
MODULE 2 Solid modeling fundamentals 10
An Overview of Solid Modeling Operations, Working with Boolean operations, Working Plane,
Importing of 3D models – practice problems
MODULE 3 Meshing 10
Free meshing, setting element attributes, selecting element type, defining element types, section
properties, assigning element attributes before meshing, mesh controls, smart sizing, hybrid
meshing, mesh extrusion – practice problems
MODULE 4 Material properties in fluent 10
Material library, specifying properties – boundary conditions – types of loads – types of solvers,
solver setup, load step options, post processing – practice problems
MODULE 5 2D flow analysis 10
Flow inside square cavity & channel – steady flow past a cylinder – compressible flow in a nozzle –
supersonic flow over a wedge – flow over an air foil - 2D Steady State Conduction
MODULE 6 3D analysis using Fluent 10
Flow over a circular pipe, flow over a sphere– flow analysis of Elbow - flow analysis of venturi –
Flow analysis of Spiral Coil Heat Exchanger

472
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Total Periods 60
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Online Assessment
4 Online assessment tests each carrying 25 marks (Total 100 marks)
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Acquire knowledge on the mathematical nature of fluid dynamic equations and to
specify boundary conditions (Understand)
CO2: Generate grid by using numerical methods. (Understand)
CO3: mesh the modelled part using various features (Apply)
CO4: Apply time dependant methods for 2-D flow problems. (Apply)
CO5: Apply time dependant methods for 3-D flow problems. (Apply)
Text Books
1. Divya zindani, Apurba Kumar Roy, “Working with ANSYS: A Tutorial Approach”, 2017

Reference Books

1. John E Matsson “An Introduction to Ansys Fluent 2022”, 2022

2. Huei-Huang Lee “Finite element simulations with Ansys workbench 2023”. 2023

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3

473
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

SWAYAM NPTEL
ONLINE COURSES

474
Francis Xavier Engineering College| Dept of Mechanical Engineering| R2021/Curriculum and Syllabi

Department: Mechanical Engineering

[Link] Course ID Course Name Start Date End Date Duration Recommended Recommended
for open for
elective professional
elective

1 noc23_cs82 Introduction to 24.07.2023 13.10.2023 12 Weeks - PE

Industry 4.0 and
Industrial
Internet of
Things
2 noc23_de12 Introduction to 24.07.2023 13.10.2023 12 Weeks - PE
Robotics

3 noc23_mg74 Entrepreneurship 24.07.2023 13.10.2023 12 Weeks - PE

4 noc23_me105 Automation in 24.07.2023 13.10.2023 12 Weeks - PE

Manufacturing

5 noc23_mg71 Operations and 24.07.2023 13.10.2023 12 Weeks - PE

Supply chain
Management
6 noc23_mg98 Industrial Safety 24.07.2023 13.10.2023 12 Weeks - PE
Engineering

7 noc23_me119 Computational 24.07.2023 13.10.2023 12 Weeks - PE

Fluid Dynamics

475
MINOR/SPECIALIZATION COURSE
ON ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

[Link] Engineering
Regulations 2021

476
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021 2

Department of Mechanical Engineering

B.E. Mechanical Engineering

MINOR/SPECIALIZATION COURSE ON ADDITIVE

MANUFACTURING

REGULATIONS 2021
(CBCS)

477
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021 3

Specialization Course on Additive Manufacturing

CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI

Offered one course per semester starting from 4th semester

Course code Course Category L T P C H

21ME4S01 Additive Manufacturing S 3 0 0 3 3

Technologies and Applications

21ME5S02 CAD for Additive S 3 0 2 4 5

Manufacturing

21ME6S03 Design for Additive S 3 0 0 3 3

Manufacturing

21ME7S04 3D Printing and Prototyping S 3 0 2 4 5

21ME8S05 Prototyping project S 0 0 8 4 8

478
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021 4

ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING
SYLLABI

479
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021 5

L T P C
ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES AND
21ME4S01
APPLICATIONS
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course
Nil

Objectives
Students undergoing this course are expected to
1. Know the principles, methods, areas of usage, possibilities and limitations of the additive
manufacturing technologies
2. Be familiar with the characteristics of various materials that are used in additive manufacturing.

UNIT I ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING FUNDAMENTALS 9

Need for time compression in product development, Need for Additive Manufacturing (AM), Historical
development, Fundamentals of Additive Manufacturing, AM Process Chain, Advantages and Limitations
of AM, Classification of AM process, Comparison of AM with CNC and other technologies.
UNIT II LIQUID-BASED AM SYSTEMS 9
Stereo lithography Apparatus (SLA): Models and specifications, Process, working principle,
photopolymers, photo polymerization, Layering technology, Laser scanning, Applications, Advantages
and Limitations, Case studies. Solid Ground Curing (SGC): Models and specifications, Process, working
principle, Applications, Advantages and Limitations, Case studies. Polyjet: Process, working principle,
Applications, Advantages and Limitations, Case studies. Introduction to microfabrication.
UNIT III SOLID-BASED AM SYSTEMS 9
Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM): Models and specifications, Process, working principle,
Applications, Advantages and Limitations, Case studies. Fused Deposition Modelling (FDM): Models
and specifications, Process, working principle, Applications, Advantages and Limitations, Case studies.
Multi-Jet Modelling (MJM): Models and specifications, Process, working principle, Applications,
Advantages and Limitations, Case studies. Introduction to Direct Metal Deposition (DMD), Electron
Beam Based Metal Deposition and Directed Energy Deposition Processes.
UNIT IV POWDER-BASED AM SYSTEMS 9
Selective laser sintering (SLS): Models and specifications, Process, working principle, Applications,
Advantages and Limitations, Case studies. Three-dimensional Printing (3DP): Models and specifications,
Process, working principle, Applications, Advantages and Limitations, Case studies. Laser Engineered
Net Shaping (LENS): Models and specifications, Process, working principle, Applications, Advantages
and Limitations, Case studies. Electron Beam Melting (EBM): Models and specifications, Process,
working principle, Applications, Advantages and Limitations, Case studies.
UNIT V AM APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of AM- Prototyping- Tooling- Production- Customization and Personalization- Spare Parts,
Maintenance and Repair- Art, Design, and Architecture- Evaluating the Adoption of AM- Applications
in Aerospace Industry, Automotive Industry, Jewellery Industryapplication. AM inMedical and

480
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021 6

Bioengineering Applications: Planning and simulation of complex surgery, Customised Implants &
Prosthesis, Design and Production of Medical Devices.
Total Periods 45
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Formative Assessment Test End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (60 Marks)
2 Test EACH 10 marks MCQ,ASSIGNMENT Descriptive Questions
MCQ/Descriptive Questions
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO.1Explain the fundamentals of various Additive Manufacturing (AM)techniques.
CO.2Describe the working principle, capability, limitation and applications of liquid, solid and powder
based additive manufacturing techniques.
CO.3Choose a suitable AM technique for the specified application.
CO.4Compare different AM process and materials based on application.
CO.5Explore the range of 3D printing and Prototyping technologies and their application for industrial,
design, and creative field.
CO.6 Explain current and emerging 3D printing applications for various industrial environment.
Text Books
1. Olaf Diegel, “A Practical Guide to Design for Additive Manufacturing”, Springer, 2019
2. Martin Leary, “Design for Additive Manufacturing”, Elsevier, 2019.

Reference Books
1. Ben Redwood, “The 3D Printing Handbook: Technologies, Design and Applications”,3D Hubs,
2017.
2. Rapid prototyping: Principles and Applications - Chua C.K., Leong K.F. and LIM C.S, World
Scientific publications, Third Edition, 2010.
3. Rapid Manufacturing – D.T. Pham and S.S. Dimov, Springer , 2001
4. Wholers Report 2000 – Terry Wohlers, Wohlers Associates, 2000
5. Rapid Prototyping & Engineering Applications – Frank [Link], CRC Press, Taylor & Francis
Group, 2011.
6. Ian Gibson, David W Rosen, Brent Stucker., “Additive Manufacturing Technologies: 3D
Printing,Rapid Prototyping, and Direct Digital Manufacturing”, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2015
Web Resources
Nil

481
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021 7

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 3 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 2 1

3 3 2 3 2 2

4 3 2 2 2 2

5 3 2 2 2 2
6 3 3 3 2 2 2 3

482
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

21ME5S02 L T P C
CAD FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING
3 0 2 4
Prerequisites for the course
Nil
Objectives
The course is aimed at giving exposure to and enhancing the knowledge and skills of fresh graduate
engineers and engineers involved in the operation use of 3D Scanners and 3D printing / additive
manufacturing with the aid of CAD packages and for those who want to provide training to others in this
area. It gives exposure and on hand experience in the field of CAD packages, 3D Scanner and AM
format.
UNIT-I DESIGN OF SOLIDS 6
Introduction to modelling, Types of modelling, 3D modelling: Solid entities, Boolean operations, Types
of solid model – Boundary representation (B-rep) technique and Construction Solid Modelling (CSG)
approach, Advanced modelling methods-CAD Data exchange formats. AMF files, 3MF, XML, Meta
Data, PLY, STEP for AM Application Protocols (AP).
UNIT-II 3D DATA CAPTURE AND SCANNING TECHNOLOGIES 6
Introduction to imaging, Portable CMM - Structured light, portable arm-based laser scanning - time-of-
flight and phase shift (long range) scanners-X-Ray technology, -3D CT (X-Ray) scanners- Computed
Tomography (CT), Basic Components of CT, Different Types of CT Scanners, Magnetic Resonance
Imaging (MRI), Ultrasound imaging, 3-D laser scanners, Industrial CT Scanners.
UNIT-III REVERSE ENGINEERING AND OBJECT DIGITIZATION 6
Reverse Engineering Methodology – Reverse Engineering Steps - The generic process-Three phases of
reverse engineering-Phase I: Scanning, Phase II: Point processing, Phase III: Geometric model
development, Case studies. Applications and selection of reverse engineering systems. Hardware and
software involved. Point clouds, meshes (.stl), NURBS surface models and parametric CAD models.
UNIT-IV 3D RECONSTRUCTION 6
3D reconstruction, Image Reconstruction Procedure, Digital Communication Post processing the
Captured Data - Handling Data Points - Curve and Surface and solid Creation. Layer-based Model
Generation – Adaptive Slicing Approach for Cloud Data Modelling – Planar Polygon Curve
Construction – Determination of Adaptive Layer Thickness – Application [Link] Model
Construction from Point Clouds, Data handling & Reduction Methods, AM Software (Magics, Mimics,
3Matic, Rhino)
UNIT-V AM DATA FORMATS AND MESHING 6
Tessellated Models, STL Format, STL File Problems, Consequence of Building Valid and Invalid
Tessellated Models, STL file Repairs: Generic Solution, Other Translators, and Newly Proposed
Formats. STL File Manipulation and Repair Algorithms - Mesh Refining by Sub division Techniques.

483
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 2D sketching of product design ideas. CO1

2 3D modelling and assembling. CO1
3 Use of 3D digitalization scanners. CO2
4 Use of point clouds/meshes editing software. CO2

5 Preparation of 3D CAD models and stl file generation CO3

6 File manipulations and repair using AMsoftware CO5

Total Periods 30 Theory +30
Lab
Laboratory Requirements
Stratasys FDM Machine
3-D Scanner
Reverse Engineering Software
Suggestive Assessment Methods
Continuous Assessment Test Lab Components Assessments End Semester Exams
(30Marks)
(20 Marks) (50 Marks)
2 Test EACH 15marks Experiments and record of work Descriptive Questions
(10) & Model practical (10)
MCQ/Descriptive Questions
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Develop 3D solid model using B-rep and CSG techniques.
CO2 Explain the different CAD data exchange formats.
CO3 Describe the working principle of different solid component scanning techniques
CO4 Explain the different stages of reverse engineering and object digitization
C05Construct curve, surface and solid models using AM editing software (Practical)
CO6 Convert the different AM data formats (Practical)
Text Books
1. Michael E. Mortenson, “Geometric Modeling”, Wiley, NY, 1997.
2. Anupam Saxena, Birendra Sahay, “Computer Aided Engineering Design”, Springer, 2005.
3. Ian Gibson, “Software Solutions for Rapid Prototyping”, Professional Engineering Publishing
Limited, UK, 2002.
4. Ali K. Kamrani and Emad Abouel Nasr, “Engineering Design and Rapid Prototyping”,
Springer, 2010.
5. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM: Theory and Practice” TMH, 2009.

484
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

Reference Books
Nil

Web Resources
Nil
CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 3 2 3 1 3
2 3 1 1 1 3
3 3 1 1 1 3
4 3 2 1 1 3
5 3 3 3 3 3
6 3 3 3 3 3

485
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

L T P C
21ME6S03 DESIGN FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING
3 0 0 3
Prerequisites for the course

• Additive Manufacturing Technologies and Applications

• CAD for Additive manufacturing
• 3D Printing and Prototyping
Objectives

Students undergoing this course are expected to

• To impart knowledge on
• To introduce the basics of design for additive manufacturing.
• To demonstrate comprehensive knowledge of part consolidation and tooling design
• To know the design requirements for Metal AM and Polymer AM technique.
• To illustrate the implication of part design on build time and material strength
• To realize the concept of the post processing treatments in AM

UNIT I STRATEGIC DESIGN IN ADDITVE MANUFACTURING 9

Design for additive manufacturing (DfAM) – Value addition with AM – General Guidelines for
Designing AM parts – Design to Avoid Anisotropy – Design to Minimize Print Time – Design to
Minimize Post–processing – Topology Optimisation. Design Analysis for AM – Considerations for
Analysis of AM Parts – role of mesh, topology and size optimization – Build process simulation -
Comparing Process and Material Performance.
UNIT II PART CONSOLIDATION AND TOOLING DESIGN 9
Part Consolidation – Design for Function – Material Considerations – Number of Fasteners -
Conventional DFM/DFA principles to DfAM – Assembly Considerations – Design of Moving Parts, AM
Tooling Design – Mounting Fixtures and Guides – Conformal Cooling – Coolant Flow Strategies –
Coolant Channel Shape and Spacing – Steps to minimise Print Time in Tooling.
UNIT III DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR METAL AM 9
Designing for Metal Powder Bed Fusion – Metal Powder Production – Powder Morphology – Powder
Size Distribution – Other Powder Considerations – Potential Defects in AM Materials – Topology
Optimisation – Lattice Structures – Overhangs and Support Material Designing to Reduce Residual stress
and Stress Concentrations – General Part Positioning Guidelines - Design for Laser Powder Bed Fusion,
Electron Beam Melting and Metal Binder Jetting.
UNIT IV DESIGN FOR POLYMER AM PROCESS AND OTHER AM 9
CONSIDERATIONS
Design considerations due to Anisotropy, Wall Thickness, Overhangs and Support Material, Holes, Ribs,
fonts and intricate details – Design guidelines for Material Extrusion, Vat Photopolymerisation and
Polymer Powder Bed Fusion. Designer Machine Operator Cooperation – Health and Safety – prevention
of explosion – AM Part Certification

486
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

UNIT V COST &VALUE OF AMAND FUTURE OF AM 9

A Cost Model of Conventional Manufacturing- Modelling the Cost of AM- Assessing the Value of AM-
Cost and Value Scenarios. Future of AM: Functionally Graded Materials – Bio printing - Printed
Electronics - Nano Printing - Food Printers.
Total Periods 45

Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test LAB COMPONENT End Semester Exams
(20 Marks) (30 Marks) (60 Marks)
2 Test EACH 10 marks Experiment – 20 Marks Descriptive Questions
Model lab with project – 10
MCQ/Descriptive Questions Marks
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO.1Describe the design aspects for additive manufacturing.
CO.2 Convert the DFM/DFA into Design for Additive Manufacturing.
CO.3 Explain the design consideration of metal powder for AM process.
CO.4 Perform design of AM to reduce residual stresses.
CO.5 Describe the design aspects for polymer AM process.
CO.6 Compute the costing for AM products.
Text Books
1. Olaf Diegel, “A Practical Guide to Design for Additive Manufacturing”, Springer, 2019.
2. Martin Leary, “Design for Additive Manufacturing”, Elsevier, 2019.

Reference Books
1. Ben Redwood, “The 3D Printing Handbook: Technologies, Design and Applications”, 3D Hubs,
2017.
Web Resourses
Nil

487
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 1 1 1
2 3 3 3 3 1
3 2 2 3 2 1
4 3 3 3 3 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
6 2 2 2 2 2 2

488
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

L T P C
21ME7S04 3D PRINTING AND PROTOTYPING
3 0 2 4
Prerequisites for the course

• Additive Manufacturing Technologies and Applications

• CAD for Additive manufacturing

Objectives
Students undergoing this course are expected to

• To explain pre-processing and model preparation in AM

• To Understand and operate on tessellated/meshed model
• To import knowledge on slicing process and software
• To explain AM data process like support generation
• To explain post processing techniques of AM
UNIT-I PREPROCESSING IN ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 6
Preparation of 3D-CAD model, Reverse engineering and Reconstruction of 3D-CAD model, Part
orientation and support generation, STL Conversion, STL error diagnostics, Slicing and Generation
of codes for tool path, Surface preparation of materials. Introduction, Process, CAD Data formats,
Data translation, Data loss, STL format. Pre-Processing -Preparation of 3D-CAD model, Part
orientation and support generation, STL Conversion, STL error diagnostics, Slicing and Generation
of codes for tool path, Surface preparation of materials - post processing.
UNIT II AM SOFTWARE 6
Need for AM software, Build Preparation-Features of various AM software’s like Magics, Mimics,
Solid View, View Expert, 3 D View, Velocity 2, Rhino, STL View 3 Data Expert and 3 D doctor,
SurgiGuide, 3-matic, Simplant, MeshLab.

UNIT III AM Data Processing 6

AM Data Processing: Part Orientation and Support Structure Generation, Model Slicing and Contour
Data Organization, Direct and Adaptive Slicing, Hatching Strategies and Tool Path
[Link] of AM Process: Surface Roughness due to Staircase Effect, Part Build-time,
Fabrication Cost, Optimal Orientation, Quantification of Building Inaccuracy and Part Stability.
UNIT IV POST PROCESSING OF AM PARTS 6

Support Material Removal, Surface Texture Improvement- Polymer Surface Treatments - Accuracy
Improvement, Aesthetic Improvement, Preparation for use as a Pattern, Property Enhancements
using Non-thermal and Thermal Techniques- Gluing and Welding AM Parts – Heat Treatment and
Aging. Product Quality - sanding, Acetone treatment, polishing- -Inspection and testing - Defects
and their causes.
UNIT V PROCESS SELECTION AND MATERIAL SCIENCE 6

Guidelines for Process Selection: Introduction, Selection Methods for a Part, Challenges of
Selection, Example System for Preliminary Selection, Process Planning and [Link]

489
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

science for AM - Multifunctional and graded materials in AM, Role of solidification rate, Evolution
of non-equilibrium structure, microstructural studies, Structure property relationship.

[Link] List of Experiments CO

1 Slicing of an engineering component CO1

2 Fabrication of the component through 3D printer and
CO2
dimensional analysis
3 Use of FDM, SLA, DLP and SLS machines to produce 3D physical
CO2
models.
4 Simulation of additive manufacturing CO2
Total Periods 30 Theory +30 Lab
Laboratory Requirements:
Suggestive Assessment Methods

Continuous Assessment Test LAB COMPONENT (30 End Semester Exams

(20 Marks) Marks) (60 Marks)

2 Test EACH 10 marks Experiment – 20 Marks Descriptive Questions

Model lab with project – 10 Marks
MCQ/Descriptive Questions
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Explain the concept of preprocessing and slicing for additive manufacturing.
CO2: Compare the different features of AM packages
CO3: Explain the data processing techniques for additive manufacturing
CO4: Discuss the different post processing methods
CO5: Select a process parameter for different AM techniques
CO6: Perform AM simulation and fabricate 3D physical product using appropriate RP machines
(Practical)
Text Books
1. Gibson, I, Rosen, D W., and Stucker, B., Additive Manufacturing Methodologies: Rapid
Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing, Springer, 2015
Reference Books
1. Chee Kai Chua, Kah Fai Leong, 3D Printing and Additive Manufacturing: Principles and
Applications: Fourth Edition of Rapid Prototyping, World Scientific Publishers, 2014.
2. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, Third
Edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010.

490
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

3. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003.

4. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press, 2007.
5. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006 6.
Mahamood R.M., Laser Metal Deposition Process of Metals, Alloys, and Composite Materials,
Engineering Materials and Processes, Springer International Publishing AG 2018.
6. Ehsan Toyserkani, Amir Khajepour, Stephen F. Corbin, “Laser Cladding”, CRC Press, 2004.
V. Raja and K. Fernandes, Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective, Springer- Verlag,
2008.

Web Resources
Nil

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 3 2 2 1 3
2 3 2 2 1 3
3 3 2 3 1 3
4 3 2 3 1 3
5 3 3 3 1 3
6 3 3 3 3 3 2

491
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

L T P C
21ME8S05 PROTOTYPING PROJECT
0 0 8 4
Prerequisites for the course

• Additive Manufacturing Technologies and Applications

• CAD for Additive manufacturing
• 3D Printing and Prototyping
• Design for additive Manufacturing
Objectives

• To prepare students to work in teams to solve open-end designing and manufacturing

problemsand to develop the necessary skills for using modern AM technology.
• To make the students work in small groups following the typical stages of product
development -designing, prototyping and manufacturing - in one continuous project.
• To teach use of new tools and techniques required to carry out the projects.
• To give guidance on the various procedures for validation of the product and analyze the
costeffectiveness.
• To provide guidelines to prepare technical report of the project.
SUGGESTED PROBLEM APPROACH

• Analyze the situation and come up with more than one possible technical solution. Choose one
andjustify why it is the best.
• For the selected design, produce complete technical documentation going from the hand
sketchesto the fully dimensioned CAD files.
• Make physical, fully functioning prototypes to verify form, fit, and function. - Analyze
the
prototype for design and functional flaws. Prepare the final model and report to turn in, and
give apublic presentation.
PROJECT ASSUMPTIONS

• Designing, prototyping and manufacturing facilities are at different locations and a system of
communication has to be used to set up the working links between these locations.
• Work-in-progress should be accessible by all the participating team members. A proper file
management system has to be developed and used.
• Project evaluation is based on quality and completion of listed “things to do”. Students’
statementsare required to say what the involvement of each member of the group was.
• Each project should begin with work scheduling; Microsoft Project software is recommended
to accomplish this. Meetings with faculty are scheduled bi-weekly (or by appointment) to
analyze work-in-progress.

PROJECT ASSESSMENT

The project is structured to ensure that each team makes steady progress on the project throughout the
semester, with adequate time at the end of the semester to allow for a variety of printing methods.
1 Team Project Idea Submission 5
2 First Project Part file 5

492
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

3 First Project Printed Part 10

4 Final Project CAD files 15
5 Final Project Printed Parts 10
6 Final product assembly – functional test and quality 25
7 Final Printed Project & Presentation 30

The project is structured to ensure that each team makes steady progress on the project throughout the
semester, with adequate time at the end of the semester to allow for a variety of printing methods,

SAMPLE PROJECT DETAILS

The team started the project with a hand sketch to show the idea of the mechanism and its
location in the machinery. An Internet search of results for similar objects was required for this part
ofthe project. Documentation - project documentation required use of a CAD package. The required
documentation format was an assembly drawing as a solid model, and a detailed 3-D drawing file as
the necessary technical documentation for prototyping, manufacturing, inspection, and production
preparation.
Prototyping - the next step was prototyping, or making physical models. Using additive method
plastic objects were built on the FDM. This machine builds precision objects layer by layer. This
method is useful for shape and fit evaluation. There were two important issues in this stage of the
project. AutoCAD (Mechanical Desktop) and Reverse engineering, AM software from the courses.
A third file format, stereolithography (STL files), was created for use by the 3D printer. When
conversions were done, the new formats were inspected for possible errors before proceeding with
prototyping. Analysis at this stage of the project concentrated on two elements: design flaws: fitting
parts together and possibilities of design improvements by reducing the weight and material
selection, as well as developing a concept of manufacturing and adapting the design to the process
requirements.
Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO.1 Apply tools and techniques acquired in AM courses for development of new product.
CO.2 Adapt an efficient problem-solving method in analysing industrial product needs.
CO.3 Formulate a real world problem, identify the requirement and develop the design solutions.
CO.4 Identify technical ideas, strategies and methodologies for prototyping
CO.5 Test and validate through conformance of the developed prototype and analysis the cost
effectiveness.
CO.6 Prepare technical report and oral presentations.

493
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Francis Xavier Engineering College | Regulation 2021

CO Vs PO Mapping and CO Vs PSO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

1 3 3 3 2 2
2 3 3 3 2 2
3 3 3 3 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 3 2 2
6 3 3 2

494